i: 



,'iS 









A' i 



•M^ 




Classed: 



Book^J-Oi- 

I? +4 



Jcr 


. ji\M>VO^ 


%tyi>^r^^^f 




A 
/ 


7Zn 


GREEK 


GRAMMAR, 

A ^ A. 










FOR THE 





USE OF LE ARNERS. 



By E. a. SOPH0CLES, A. M. 



NINTH EDITION. 



HARTFORD. 

H. HUNTINGTON, 180 MAIN STREET, 
1844 



1. J y 






^♦^•A 






Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1838, by 

H. Huntington, Jan., 

in the Clerk's office of the District Court of the District of Connecticut. 



T 

.4 






PREFACE 



The materials, of which this compendious 
Grammar is composed, have been drawn from 
the best sources. 

The examples given in the Syntax are taken 
from the following classic authors : — Homer, 
Hesiod, Pindar, iEschjlus, Sophocles, Euripides, 
Aristophanes, Theocritus; Herodotus, Thucydides, 
Xenophon, Lysias, Isocrates, iEschines, Demos- 
thenes, Plato, Aristotle. 

Those rules, which should be first read and 
which should be committed to memory, are print- 
ed in the largest type (as ^ 136. 1). 

E. A. S. 

New Haven, 

October 20t/f, 1839. 



CONTENTS 



Part 1. LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. 



The Greek Alphabet - 

Vowels 

Diphthongs 

Breathings 

Consonants - 

Euphonic Changes 
Movable Consonants 

Syllables 

(Quantity of Syllables 



Accent - . . . 

Enclitics 
Contraction ... 

Crisis ... 
Elision 

Syncope, Metathesis, and Aphsresis 
Punctuation ... 

Pronunciatiim 



-^'f4 
16 

. 17 
18 

• 19 
19 



Part II. INFLECTION OF WORDS. 



Parts of Speech ... 

Noun ..... 
Pii-st Declension . . - 

Second Declension ... 

Third Declension 

Syncopated Nouns of ihfi Third Declension 

Contracts of the Third Declension 
Indeclinable Nouns ... 
Anomalous Nouns ... 

Defective Nouns ... 

Adjectives .... 

Adjectives in 05 - 

Adjectives in m? _ - - 

Adjectives in u? - - 

Adjectives in )is and «f 

Adjectives in ag, £i?, ))i', eu?, uj, wv, cfj 

Adjectives of one ending - 

Compound Adjectives 

Anomalous and Defective Adjectives 
Degrees of Comparison • • 

Comparison byT£fo;,Tc<T05- 

Comparison by jjoi/^ tcrrog 

Anomalous and Defective Comparison 
Numerals .... 

Cardinal Numbers ... 

Ordinal Numbers 

Numeral Substantives, Adjeclives, and Ad- 
verbs ... 
Article - . - . 
Pronoun .... 

Personal Pronoun ... 

Reflexive Pronoun 

Possessive Pronoun ... 

Interrogative Pronoun 

Indefinite Pronoun ... 

Demonstrative Pronoun 

Relative Pronoun . . - 

Reciprocal Pronoun 

Pronominal Adjectives - • 

Verb .... 



Substantive 

Adjective - 

Article 

Pronoun 

Personal Pronoun 
Reflexive Pronoun 
Pg^sessive Pronoun » 
Interrogative Pronotjn 
Indefinite Pronoun - 
Demonstrative Pronoun 
Relative Pronoun 
Reciprocal Fronoun 

Subject and Predicate 

Object 

Accusative 

Genitive 

Dative 

Vocative 

Voices 
Active 



Part III. 

179 

180 
181 

185 



Augment ... 

Syllabic Augment 

Temporal Augment • 

Augment of Compound Verbs 
Verbal Roots and Terminations 

Indicative Mood - 

Subjunctive Mood 

Optative Mood - . ■ 

Imperative Mood 

Infinitive MooJ - 

I'articiple ... 

Perfect and Pluperfect Passive and Middle 

Aorist Passive 

Accent of Verbs - 
Formation of the Tenses 

Present Active . . - 

Imperfect Active 

First and Second Perfect Active 

First and Second Pluperfect Active 

First and Second Future Active 

First and Second Aorist Active 

Present and Imperfect Pasaive 

Perfect Passive - - 

Pluperfect Passive 

First and Second Aorist Passive 

First, Second, and Third Future Passive 

Present, Imperfect, Perfect, and Pluperfect, 
Middle 

First and Second Future Middle 

First and Second Aorist Middle 
Contract Verbs ... 
Verbs in y.t 
Anomalous Verbs 
Adverb . . . • 

Comparison of Adverbs 
Derivation of Words 

Derivation of Substantives 

Derivation of Adjectives - 

Derivation of Verbs . 
Composition of Words 



SYNTAX. 

Passive .... 

Middle - - - ■ 

Deponent Verbs ... 

Tenses - • ' - 

Present, Perfect, Pluperfect, and Future 
Imperfect ... 

Third Future ... 

Aorist . . - 

Moods .... 

Indicative • • - 

Subjunctive • • - 

0|)tative . . - 

Imperative ... 

Infinitive . . • 

Participle . . - • 

Adverb - 

Preposition .... 

Conjunction ... 

Interjection . - • - 

Irregular Construction 



229 
230 



232 
234 
234 
234 
£35 
235 
237 



Feet 

Trochaic Verse 
Iambic Verse - 

GREEK INDEX 
ENGLISH INDEX 



Part IV. VERSIFICATION. 

- '/ . . 259 I Dactylic Verse 

261 I Anapestic Verse 



264 
268 



267 ABBREVIATIONS 

276 



PART I. 

LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. 



THE GREEK ALPHABET. 

^1. 1. The Greek alphabet consists of the 
following twenty-four letters : 



Figure. 




Representative. 


Name. 


A a 




J 


a 


"AX(pa Alpha 


B /3 


6 


B 


b 


BjJTcc Beta 


r 7 


r 


G 


g 


rdfifia Gamma 


J d 




D 


d 


AsXxa Delta 


E s 




E 


€ 


"^Expllov Epsilon 


Z f 




Z 


Z 


Zrjia Zela 


H n 




E 


e 


^Hra Eta 


e & 





TH 


tk 


e^ia Theta 


I I 




I 


i 


'Iwxa Iota 


K yc 




K 


k 


KoLTtTra Kappa 


A I 




L 


I 


Adp(3Sa Lambda 


M fi 




M 


m 


Mv MuovMy 


N V 




JV 


n 


Nv JTu or J\y 


S 1 




X 


X 


Si Xi 


O 










*'0 f^uxgov Omic7'on 


n n 


sr 


p 


p 


m Pi 


^ 9 




n 


r 


'PS Rho 


Z a 


e final 


s 


s 


2^iyp.a Sigma 


T X 


7 


T 


t 


Tad Tau 


Y V 




Uor Y u or 


y ^Txpikov Upsilon 


(p 




PH 


ph 


01 Phi 


X X 




CH 


ch 


Xi Chi 


^ xp 




PS 


ps 


^'Z Psi 


SI CO 










^Sl ^Lsya Omeg% 



2 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [§ !• 

2. These letters are divided into vowels and 
consonants. The vowels are a, s, 7^, i, o, v, ca ' 
the consonants are /3, /, 8, ^, i9', x, A, ^, 1/, |, tt, p, 
<^, T, 9^, jT' ^- 

Note 1. E was originally used both as a vowel and as a breathing. It 
was qualified by the adjective -^tXev, smooth {not aspirated), only when it was 
used as a vowel. Anciently this vowel stood also for n and the diphthong ei. 
E. g. ul^Yio was written A10EP. 

H was originally equivalent to the rough breathing. E. g. ^■^ttxo was writ- 
ten HEHAP, TJ^o';, HE0MO2. 

O stood also for u and the diphthong ov. E. g. -Traff^u was written IIA- 
2X0, ix,ouin, EX02I. It seems, that there was a time when O and H were 
distinguished from each other only by their size : hence the epithets ^/xgov, 
small, and fiiyec, large. 

T also was originally used both as a vowel and as a breathing. It was 
called \l/iXov only when it was used as a vowel. As a breathing, or rather as 
a consonant, it was probably equivalent to the obsolete letter digamma. The 
modern Greeks still pronounce it like v or J", in the diphthongs tv and eco. 

Note 2. Before the introduction of <P and X, the Greeks wrote IIH for 
<I), and KH for X. E. g. they wrote EKHHANTOI 'EK(pdvr^, EnET- 
KH0MEN02 i'priu;^cif^ivo;. Here H is equivalent to the rough breathing. 

TH was probably never used for 0. 

They wrote also K2 or X2 for S, and *2 for T. E. g. AEK2AI for 
I'i^a,, rnEAEX2AT0 for i5«5^|«ra, cD2TXA2 for ^u^^iis. 

Note 3. The most ancient Greek alphabet had three other letters, which 
disappeared from it in later times, and ttien were called £5r<Vj5^a, numeral marks. 
These are F or g, O o*" A/> ^"d 7^^ . 

F or g", Basw, Vau, or i:^'iya.(jt.f/.a., Digamma, (that is, double gamma, so 
called on account of fts form F, corresponds to the Latin F or V. It is still 
to be seen in some ancient inscriptions. 

T or *7. Ko'.^r^ra, Koppa, corresponds to the Latin Q. It was probably 
a deep guttural. 

'y^'\ , liv or 2a/Acrr, San or Sampi, was perhaps sounded like the Eng- 
lish s/i. 

Remark. The mark c representing c-r must not be confounded with the 
digamma. 

Note 4. We observe, that a is used only at the begmning 
or middle, and g at the end of a word. E. g. ofoojaixsrog, not 
cfcoicixkvoa. 

Some editors unnecessarily put g at the end of a word coni- 
pounded with another. E. g. i]gtoxo^ai for das^xoixai, 8vgivxrig 
for dvaiv/riq, ogtig for oaxLQ. 

Note 5. The letters of the Greek alphabet are employed 
also as numeral f gar es. The first eight letters denote units. 



^1] 



THE GRliEK ALPHABET. 



the next eight, tens, and the last eight, hundreds. The obso- 
lete letters «-, /^, "T?^, denote 6, 90, 900, respectively. 

Observe, that the letters denoting units, tens, or hundreds, 
have an accent above. 

Thousands commence the alphabet again, with a stroke 
underneath. 

Here follows a table of numerals. 



a 


1 


Kt 


11 


A' 


30 


v' 400 


/5; 


2 


^/5; 


12 


// 


40 


^ 500 


/ 


3 


ly 


13 


V 


50 


/ 600 


8' 


4 


id' 


14 




GO 


y.' 700 


£ 


5 


u 


15 





70 


a>' 890 


r 


6 


I? 


J6 


n 


80 


1)-^' 900 


?; 


7 


tr 


17 


//' 


90 


a 1000 


V 


8 


ir] 


18 


q\ 


100 


V 2000 


y 


9 


u&' 


19 


a 


200 


,;r 3000 


I 


10 


K 


20 


x 


300 


&c. 



Examples, «wA7j'==^838, //j/zo^-' = 1776, ^o;(yx«' = 1821. 

Note 6. There is another method of writing numerals, in 
which J, 77, ^j^, ^^, 77, ]h[ , X, Jx£, M, respectively denote, 
%c, one, nivTB, Jive, /Jexa, ten, TlEvrdxig zlixa, jive times ten, or 
Jifty, ^Eacinov (anciently HEKATON), hundred, nfVTaxig ^Ena- 
ror, Jive hundred, Xlhoi, thousand, Tlsviaxig XUioi,Jive thousand, 
MvQLoi, ten thousand. {% 60.) 

Here follows a table. 



/ 


1 


Ann 


17 


Mh 


600 


11 


2 


A mil 


18 


W nil 


700 


III * 


3 


A mil I 


19 


tlL HUH 


800 


nil 


4 


AA 


20 


M iiiiiin 


900 


77 


5 


AAA 


30 


X 


1000 


ni 


6 


AAAA 


40 


XX 


2000 


nil 


7 


j?r 


50 


XXX 


3000 


mil 


8 


BIa 


60 


xxxx 


4000 


nun 


9 


K^j 


70 


M 


5000 


^ 


10 


1^1 AAA 


80 


Mx 


6000 


AI 


11 


M. AAAA 90 


Mxx 


7000 


All 


12 


77 


100 


JKxxx 


8000 


A I IT 


13 


IJU 


200 


W xxxx 


9000 


Aim 


14 


nun 


300 


M 


10000 


An 


15 


nil nil 


400 


MX 


11000 


dm 


16 


M 


500 


&c. 





4 LETTERS AND BILLABLES. [^2. 

VOWELS. 

^ 2, There are five short vowels, and five cor- 
responding long ones. The short vowels are a, s, 
^, o, i> • the long vowels are d, -q, C, a, i), 

T'fie mark (-) is placed over a short vowel, and the mark 
(-), over a long one. These marks, however, are necessary 
only in the case of «, i, and i>, since the letters ij and w repre- 
sent long ii and O respectively. 

Note 1. The vowels s and o are often called the short voW' 
els, rj and w, the long voioels, and «, t, v, the doubtful vowels. 

Remark. By the term, doubtful^ we are not to understand 
that the quantity of «, (, v, is uncertain in any given syllable, 
but that in some syllables these vowels are always long, and 
in others always short. E. g. v in the words -i^v^oq, nvooq wheat, 
is always long; in the words nvXri, vno, always short. 

There are, indeed, instances where tlf^ quantity of these let- 
ters is variable, as « in "Aqt.q, l in fiVfjlxTj, and v in koqvvti' 
but we should recollect, that the sounds JE and also are, 
in certain instances, variable, as ^r^Qog and ^sgog, I'wfjisv and 

lofitV. 

Note 2. In strictness, the Greek alphabet has but five 
vowels. A, E, I, O, T. The long vowels differ from the short 
ones in quantity, but not in quality. 

Note 3. Commutation of Vowels. (1) When from any 
cause the vowels « and o are to be lengthened, they are gen- 
erally changed into the diphthongs fi and ov, rather than into 
their corresponding long ones ij and w. E. g. ^uvog for Uvog, 
fiovvog for ^oioc. 

(2) In some instances o is lengthened into oi. E. g. nola 
for Tioa. 

(3) The vowel a often passes into at or rj. E. g. aid from 
asi, Ts&rtla from -daXkM. 

(4) The vowels w and ? are frequently interchanged. E. g. 
Ionic TtcfofQsg for rsoa(>!Qfg, Doric mui^M for nie^M. 

(5) The syllables «o and «&> are often changed into «w. 
E. g. Attic Xewg for laog, Ionic fopsTusav for tcpnixuMV. 

(6) The vowels J and t; are interchanged. E. g. Doric 
a for 71, Ionic ngrjy^a for nqity^a. 



^ 3.] VOWELS. 6 

The use of « for tj is one of tlie leading peculiarities of the 
Doric dialect. The use of 7^ for d is peculiar to the Ionic. 

(7) The vowels « and w are sometimes interchanged. E. g. 
ygd^o) and x^w^w. 

(8) The vowels s and o are often interchanged. E. g. 
xixQOifa from rfjencj. 

(9) The vowels rj and w are, in some instances, inter- 
changed. E. g. nTt]oo(o and TTTwaaw. 

DIPHTHONGS. 

^3. 1. There are fourteen diphthongs, of which 
seven, ai^ dv, £l, sv, 01, ov, and vi, begin with a 
short vowel, and seven, a, ccf, ??, r^v, cp, cov, and 
m^ with a long one. The former are called proper 
diphthongs, and the latter, improper diphthongs. 

The L is written under the long vowel, and is called iota 
subscript. In capitals it is written as a regular letter. E. g. 
Till "AFIAI, TJ] ayln' TfLI ZOflJfLl, tw aocpoi ' ^'Aidai, ad(o. 

2. The diphthongs are represented in English as follows : 

Proper diphthongs. Improper diphthongs, 

au by ai ol by oi a by d w by o 

du 

yi 



av 


<( 


au 


ov 


(( 


ou 


u 


a 


ei 


VI 


(( 


yi 


IV 


it 


€U 









a by 


a 


0) 


av " 


du 


(OV 


V " 


e 


VL 


nv " 


eu 





Note 1. Th0 diphthong wu belongs to the Ionic dialect. 
It may be doubled whether the diphthong vl was ever used. 

Note 2. In the improper diphthongs, the second vowel was 
nearly swallowed up by the preceding long one, which long 
vowel constituted the leading element of these diphthongs. 

Note 3. Commutation of Diphthongs. (1) The lonians 
often use tav for av. E. g. -dwviia for d^av^a. (§ 3. N. 1.) 

(2) The lonians use Tjt for ft. E. g. a/yrfiov for ayyuov, 
^aoiXifi'rj for ^aaiXfia. 

(3) They use j] for ai. E. g. xi^jjai, for Tificuoi. 

'' (4) The Dorians use g) for ov. E. g. ^waw for [iovaa. 
For ov before a they often use 01, E. g. fiolaa for ^ovau 
1* 



6 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [§§4,5. 

BREATHINGS. 

^4. 1. Every Greek word beginning with a 
vowel must have either the rough breathing ( ' ), or 
the smooth breathing ('), over that vowel. E. g. 

axovM, enofxevog. 

Note 1. The vowel v at the beginning of a word takes the 
rough breathing. E. g. vixtlg, vno. Except the Epic pro- 
nouns il^^i, v^^Lv, and v^^iB. (§ 64. N. 2.) 

2. The rough breathing is placed also over q at the begin- 
ning of a word. E. g. 

Qsv^a, ^(xdiog. 

3. When q is doubled in the middle of a word, the first one 
takes the smooth breathing, and the other, the rough breathing. 
E. g. aggrjTog. 

4. The breathing, as also the accent (§ 19. 5), is placed 
over the second vowel of the diphthong. E. g. amog, ai'got), 
vlog, ovTog 

Except the improper diphthongs «, ??, &>. E. g. «5w, ]]dov, 
«(5;j. So in capitals, "Aidw, ^mdov, 'Jlidi]. 

5. The rough breathing corresponds to the English /*. 
E. g. iTTTTog, ovtog, Qsvfia, aQQTiTog, in E;«glish letters hippos j 
houtos, rheuma, arrhetos. 

Note 2. The smooth breathing represents the effort, with 
which a vowel, not depending on a preceding letter, is pro- 
nounced. Let, for example, the learner pronounce first the 
word, act, and then, enact, and mark the difference between 
the a in the first, and the a in the second word. He will per- 
ceive, that the utterance of a in act, requires more effort than 
that of a in enact. 

CONSONANTS. 

^5. 1. The consonants A, ^, v, g, are, on ac- 
count of their gliding pronunciation, called liquids, 

2. The consonants T, I, t/^, are called double 
consonants ; because ^ stands for da, | for yea, and 
ip for 710, 



^§ 6, 7.J CONSONANTS, 7 

Note 1. The preposition ix in composition never coalesces 
with the following a. E. g. iy.ay.0Qni'^(i}, not f^xo^Tr/^'w. 

Note 2. It is not exactly correct to say that ^ stands for ^(t, since, ac- 
cording to the Greek notions of euphony, a lingual is always dropped before f 
(§ 10. 2). In strictness ? is a mixture of 5 and <r, just as e is compounded 
of a and i, o of a and u, and 6 of m and ;>. 

With respect to its making position (§ 17. 2), this was probably owing to 
its strong vocal hissing. 

3. The consonants 7t^ ^, 9, x, y, x-) ^5 ^9 ^j ai'G 
called mutes. They are divided into 

smooth mutes n, x, t, 
middle mutes /3, 7, ^, 
rough mutes 9?, ;^, 1^. 

These letters correspond to each other in the perpendicular 
direction. E. g. cp is the corresponding rough of n: 

4. The letter a, on account of its hissing sound, 
is called the sibilant letter. 

Note 3. The consonants v, q, g, ^, «//, are the only ones that 
can stand at the end of a genuine Greek word. 
Except X in the preposition fx and the adverb ova. 

^ 6. According to the organs with which they 
are pronounced, the consonants are divided into 
labials n, ^, cp, ^, 
Unguals f, 8, &, ^, a, A, v, g, 
palatals x, y, /, 

The labials are pronounced chieHy with the lips; the Un- 
guals, with the tongue; and the palatals, with the palate. 

Note. Commutation of Consonants. (1) The Dorians 
generally use ad for ^. E. g. xoifiuodco for xw^a'^w. This takes 
place in the middle of a word. 

(2) The Attics use tt for aa. E. g. ngoiTKo for ngdooo}. 

(3) In some instances q^ is used for qo. E. g. uqqriv for 
SgarjV. 

EUPHONIC CHANGES. 

§ T. When a labial (tt, /5, qt), or a palatal (x, /, ;f), happens to 
stand before a lingual (t, d, -&) ; the former is changed into its 



8 LETTERS ANT) SYLLABLES. [§§8-10. 

corresponding smooth, middle, or rough, according as the 
latter is smooth, middle, or rough, (§ 5. 3.) - E. g. 

rsTQiTT-Tai for rhQi^-Tau eTQLip-&rjv for 6Tgi,^-&T}V 

yiyQan-iai *' yiyqacp-Tav hixp-d^riv " iiV7t-&rjV 

ThsvK-Tai " jixivx-Tav iUx-S^rjv " iXey-^tjV. y 

So f'^do(xog from stttoc, oydoog from oxtw, iniyga^driv for stt*- 

So in Latin, nuptum for nubtum, actus for ogtus, vectum for 
vehtum. 

Note. Except k in the preposition f j{. E, g. iadeQio, ix~ 
S^QMaxo), not eydsQca, i^^Q^^^^^- 

§ 8. 1. A labial (tt, /5, go) before ^ is always changed into [i. 

XtXsLfi-fiaL for XeXsLTr-fxat ysygafz-fxai, for yiyqacp-^ai. 

lexgLfz-fiaL " Tf.TQii3-^aL XE&Qafi-fiai " tsd^gacp-f^ai. 

2. A labial (/5, cp) before a is changed into n. According to 
§ 5. 2, the combination yra is represented by yj. E. g. 
tqlipM for TQi^-aw yQaipco for ygdcp-oco. 

So in Latin, nupsi for nubsi, lapsus for lahsus. 

§ ®» 1- ^ palatal (jc,;^) before ^ is generally changed into 

y. E. g. 

nsnXsy-f^aL for ninXsH-fiaL xhwy-ixaL for Tsxevx-f^oci. 

Note. The preposition g;{ remains unaltered before ^. E. g. 
sHfial-vo), ix^txqita, not iyfAahb), £y(j.sxgs(o. 

2. A palatal (/,/) before a is changed into x. According 
to § 5. 2, the combination k a is represented by |. E. g. 
As'lco for Xiy-ota xev^m for T£t;;^-ffw. 

So in Latin, texi for tegsi, traxi for tralisi. 

§ 10, L A lingual (t, 8, &, C) before /^ is often changed into 
(T. E. g. 

Tjo-^ai for fj8-(iaL ninua-nai for 7ii7isi&-^cev 

nXda-fia " nXd&-^a (pgovxia-fia " (pgovxi^-fia. * 

2. A lingual (t, 5, i5^, ^) is always dropped before a. E. g. 
ns-Gb) for Tisx-oo) nXd-aa for nldd^-aoa 

a-att) " ad-aot) (pQ0vxl-G(a " cpgovxl^-am. 

So in Latin, amans for amants, monens for monents, lusi for 



^§11, 12. J CONSONANTS. 9 

3. A lingual (t, <5, &, ?) before another lingual is often 
changed into a. E. g. 

TJa-TdL for i]d~Tfn ninlao-rnv for ninXad-xai. 

4. A lingualji, (5, ^, C) before a palatal {yt,y,x) is always 
dropped. E. g. rj-xw for i^d-xcc, ninei-xa for nsnti&-y.a, mcpoov- 
zL-y.ii for Trfqr^o'yTi^-xa. 

Note 1. The omission of a lingual before <r or « does not aflect the quantity 
of the preceding vowel. 

Note 2. In the Epic language the r of the preposition xeera is changed 
into the following consonant. E. g. xayyivu for xxryovv for xara, yivv, 
xaWiTot for xarXi^av for xarsX/^av. 

Before two consonants the t of this preposition is dropped. E. g. x«<r;^t9^i 
for xtirff^i^i for xetriff^^iB-t. 

<5 11, The letter cr cannot stand between two consonants. 
E. g. yeygdq)-&aL for ytyQucp-ad^ai, fipul-&cct for iifdl-a&ai. 

5 12. I. Before a labial (tt, /5, g;), v is changed into fi. E. g. 
f/z-TTtTTTW for iv-nluTCO iu-(fnvrig for iv-cpavrtg 

avu-^oclvbj " avv-fialybi i\u-ipv/og " tv-yaxog. 

So in Latin, imbellis for inhellis, impius for inpius. 

2. Before a palatal (><, ;',;^), v is changed into ;/. E. g. 

avy-xatw for avv-xalb} ovy-y^vr^g for avy-^sj'Tj? 

iy-^ioa *' h-^ita ovy-x^oj " avv-xio). 

Remark. The combinations //, / x, ^/l, ;/;/, are repre- 
sented in English by r?^, nc or /?/:, wz, wc//, respectively. E. g. 
«//o? angos, dyycov ancon or ankon, uy^co anxo, dy/ca ancho. 

3. Before a liquid {).,^,q), v is changed into that liquid. 
E.g. , 

GvX-Xiyta for avv-Xsyco tjU-t/sjo) for ir-fxivm 

iX-}.oyog *' I'v-Xoyog avg-osoj " ovv-QtU). 

So in Latin, colligo for conligo, commotus for comnotus, cor- 
ruptus for conruptus. 

4. Before a or ^, y is dropped. E. g. dalfw-oi for daluov-ai, 
av-^vyog for atV-^t'^o?. 

5. In many instances, after j/ has been dropped before a, the 
preceding short vowel is lengthened. E and o are changed 
into u and ok respectively (§ 2. N. 3). E. g. 

uUtt-g for usXnv-g ti&n-ai for ri&iv-ai 



10 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [§<J 13, 14. 

This lengthening almost always takes place when vt, vd, v&, 
are dropped before a (§§ 10. 2 : 12. 4). E. g. 

ygdipd-g for yqaipavx-g kiov-OL for Xsovt-ol 

rv(p&d-g " rvcp&svx-g ond-aca *' onhd-aco 

dnxvv-g *' dsixvvfT-g nd-ao ftat " nivd^-ao^ai 

Note 1. We must not suppose that the omission of the lingual has any 
thing to do with the lengthening of the vowel before tr (§ 10. 2, N. 1). 

Note 2. In some instances, v before c; is changed into a. 
E. g. ovaoomoq for ovrowfiog. 

Note 3. The preposition iv remains unaltered before g, a, 
^. E. g. ergumoj, ivauTxw, iv/^ivyrv^i. 

Note 4. In the following words v is not dropped before a • 
yJvoaL (from xsvTSb)^, ninavaig, niqjavoat (from cpalvta). Also in 
the ending vg of the third declension (§ 36. 1), as I'kfiivg. Also 
in the word ndXiv, in composition, as nuhvaxo^iM. 

§ IS. At the beginning of a word g is generally doubled, 
when, in the formation of a word, it happens to stand between 
two vowels. E. g. 

nsgiggeoj from nsgl and gs(o I'gQSVxa for i'gevyta. 

§ 14:. 1. When, in the formation of a compound word, a 

smooth consonant (tt, a, t) happens to stand before a vowel hav 

ing the rough breathing, that smooth consonant and the rough 

breathing form a corresponding rough consonant (9,/, ^). E. g. 

acf)-Lr]^L for an-iri^i xa&-aLgeoig for y.uT-aXgsaig 

8ex-i]fxsgog " 8ix-TJ/j.sgog avd--7]fi6gog " avT-i\^^gog. 

Note 1. In the words rid^gmnov {rixTag^g, mTiog), q)gov8og 
{Tigo, odog), d-oiixaxLOV (to I^octlov), -^axsgov {tov hcgov), the 
rough breathing affects the smooth mute, although it does not 
immediately come in contact with it. 

2. When, of two successive words, the first ends in a 
smooth consonant, and the next begins with a vowel having 
the rough breathing, that smooth consonant is changed into its 
corresponding rough. E. g. 

a(p' ov for an^ ov fiE^' ri^wv for ^fr* rjfiwv 

xa&^ savxov '' xax' eavxov ovx v^Sv " ovk Vfxuv. 

Note 2. The Ionic dialect violates these rules. E. g. dw^ixtTB^at for iftKi- 
^B'Xi, xariviu for Ka^iuhu, avK elos for »l^ o'lof. 

3. If two successive syllables would each have a rough con- 



<J 15.] CONSONANTS. 11 

sonant (9,^, ,9^), the first rough consonant is often clianged into 
its corresponding smooth (tt, x, t). E. g. 

7ieq>ipu for (pi(i7]va Tbx^i]la for &e&Tjla 

This change takes place in almost all reduplications. 

Note 3. The Jii'st aorist passive deviates from this rule. 
E. g. a(ps&7]v, fxv&riv, not uns&rjv, e'y.v&rjv. 

Except iied^riv from xl&ii^i, and iiv&rjv from i9yw. 

Note 4. The termination -d-i of the imperative active 
(§ 88. 1) is changed into rt, if the preceding syllable has a 
rough consonant, E. g. Tvcp9^r]TL for jvcp&ri&i, tI&stl for jl&td^L. 

Except the imperatives cpa&L from cfri^iy and ri&vad^L from 
-^"yjjaxw. 

Note 5. In the verb "exP^, of which the future is t'lw, the 
rough breathing is changed into the smooth breathing, £^w, on 
account of x ^^ the following syllable. 

4. A rough consonant {(p,x, ^) is never doubled ; but instead 
of this, its corresponding smooth {n,y.,x) is placed before it. 
E. g. an(pvgy "laxxog, "Ard^lg, not dqxpvg/'laxxog, ''A&^lg. 

MOVABLE CONSONANTS. 

<^ 15. 1. All datives plural in i, and all third persons in i 
and £, are written both with and without a final v. They are 
generally written with it when the next word begins with a 
vowel. E. g. 

■dTjQOiv ayqloLg S-rjoa} yMxdig 

(ptjolv ovTog (frjOi ^(i)X(jarr]g 

rvjiTovGLV avTovg tvtitovgi tovrovg 

iOTfQ^sv fxsya tarsa^E fxiya. 

2. Also, all adverbs of place in ol (§ 121. 1). E. g. nla- 
Taiaai. 

Also, the particles vv and yj, the adverbs nsgvai and voacpiy 
and the numeral d'/.oai. 

Note. In some Grammars, v movable is written parentheti- 
cally. E. g. d-riQGl (v). 

3. The words ovTcog, axQig, //f^o/c, and i'^ (that is, f>^c), and a 
few others, drop the g before a consonant. E. g. ovjw (pr/al, ix 

^'JXQig and [xexQi? often drop the g even before a vowel. 

4. The adverb ov becomes ovy or ovx before a vowel. E. g, 
ov cprioi, ovx n:i£, ovx f'^rfTO (^ 14. 2), 



12 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [<^ 16. 

SYLLABLES. 

§ 16. 1. There are as many syllables in a Greek 
word as there are vowels and diphthongs in it. 

2. Words of one syllable are called 7?ionosi/IlabIes ; of two, 
dissyllables ; and of more than two, poly syllables. 

3. The last syllable except one is called the penult ; the last 
except two, the antepenult. E. g. in Ev-anlay-xvocy x^'og is the 
last syllable, aulay, the penult, and tv, the antepenult. 

Note 1. (1) Any single consonant may commence a Greek 
word. 

(2) The following combinations of consonants may com- 
mence a Greek word or a syllable : ^8, /5A, §q, yX, yv, yg, d/u, dv, 
dg, &X, ■&!>, S^Q, al, yjj, itv, XQ, xt, pv, nl, nv, ng, tit, a/?, a&y ox, 
ayiX, op, on, onX, ox, oil, otq, ocp, ox, tX, rp, tq, cpd-, cpX, cpQ, x^> 
X^> XV > XQ- 

(3) The following combinations also may commence a syl- 
lable : yd, yp, &p, XV, cpv, yji. 

(4) Further, any three consonants may begin a syllable, 
provided the first and the last pair may each begin a syllable. 
E. g. nxQ, x9Q' 

Note 2. Greek words are divided into syllables in the fol- 
lowing manner : 

(1) A single consonant standing between two vowels, or a 
combination of consonants capable of commencing a syllable 
(^ 16. N. 1), is placed at the beginning of the syllable. E. g. 
di-a-Xs-yo-i^iai, v-anXrjy^, y.u-xo-nxgov. 

(2) When the combination cannot commence a syllable, its 
first consonant belongs to the preceding syllable. E. g. U-&(a, 
vly-xM, yjuX-Xb). 

(3) A compoujid word is resolved into its component parts, 
if tne first part ends with a consonant. 'E. g. na-Xlv-og-oog. 

But if the first part ends with a vowel, the compound is 
divided like a simple word, even when that vowel has been cut 
oflt (§ 135. 3). E. g. 7ia-gi-Xa-^ov. 

4. A syllable is called pure, when its vowel or diphthong is 
immediately preceded by the vowel of the preceding .syllable. 
E. g. the following words end in or, m, ag, og, pure : oi]nl-a, 
ai]nl~ni, ovjTii-ag, aygi-og- 



^ 17.] QUANTITY OF SYLLABLES. 13 

QUANTITY OF SYLLABLES. 

^17, In any Greek word, every syllable is 
either long or short. 

L A syllable is long hij nature when it has a 
long vowel or diphthong. E. g. in the following 
words the penult is long by nature : 

2. A syllable is said to be long by position, when 
its vowel, being short by nature, is followed by two 
or more consonants, or by a double consonant 
(t,i,ip). E. g. in the following words the penult is 
long by position: 

ioTs, ogyog, lionXctyx'Oc, cpgct'CM- 

3. When a short vow^el is followed by a mute 
and a liquid, the syllable is common. E. g. in the 
following words the penult is either long or short : 

rey.vov, i\jQig. 

4. But the syllable is almost always long, when its vowel, 
being short by nature, is followed by the following combina- 
tions : ,^A, yX, yu, yv, dfj, dif. E. g. the antepenult of i.^ltnov. 

Note 1. In the Epic language the syllable is generally long 
when its vowel, being short by nature, is followed by a mule 
and a liquid. 

Note 2. In Homer and Hesiod, a-/, and '!i, at the beginning 
of a word, do not always affect the preceding short vowel. 
E. g. (II. G, 402 : 2, 634.) 

5. 'Every syllable, which cannot be proved to be 
long, must be assumed to be short. 

Note 3. The quantity of «, i, v, must be learned by obser- 
vation. The following remarks, however, may be of some use 
to the learner : 

2 



14 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [§§ 18, 19. 

(1) Every circumflexed «, t, v, is long by nature. (§ 21.) 
E. g. Tiav, vfuv, dgvg. 

(2) Every «, i, v, arising from contraction is long by nature. 
(§ 23.) E. g. jl^u, nolxg, ^oxQvc, from j/^as, tio'/L/s?, porgvsg. 

(3) Every «o-, t/cr, arising from avza, vyra, is long by nature. 
(^ 12. 5.) E. g. jxupaoL, ^svyvvg, for TVipavTOi, 'Qsvyvvvjg. 

(4) Derivative words generally retain the quantity of their 
primitives. 

§ 18. 1. The epic and the lyric poets often shorten a long 
vowel or diphthong at the end of a word when the next word 
begins with a vowel. E. g. (Od. 5, 28G) '1/2 nojioi, ^ p.ala dr) 
^iTi^ovXtvaav ^sol alXwg, where w nonoi, -aav d-so}, are dactyles. 

Note 1. This kind of shortening occurs also in the middle 
of a word. E. g. difioio ( ^ ^-w), toluvtI (- — ). 

2. A short syllable is often made long by the epic poets. 
E. g. ensidi] ( ), AloXuv ( ), (piXs envQE {^-^^—). 

Note 2. It is supposed that the ancients generally doubled 
in pronunciation the consonant following the short vowel. 
E. g. they read innHdi], Alollov. 

There are instances, however, where the short vowel was 
lengthened without reference to the following letter. E. g. 
did for 81^(x. 



ACCENT. 

^ 19. 1. The Greek has three accents, viz. the 
acute ('), the grave ( ' ), and the circumflex C). 

The acute can stand only on one of the last 
three syllables of a word ; the circumflex, only on 
one of the last two, and the grave only on the last. 

Remark 1. The place of the accent in every word must be 
learned by observation. 

Note 1. The following monosyllables (called atona) gen- 
erally appear unaccented : 

u, slg or eg, ip or bIv, t| or ex, ov or ova or ov;^, wg, and the 
articles 6, ^, ol, al. 



§ 20.] ACCENT. 15 

Resiark 2. When the articles o, v, el, al, stand for demonstrative pronouns 
(§ 142. 1), they should be read as if they were accented. 

Remark 3. 'O takes the acute when it is equivalent to the relative pronoun 
(§ 142. 2}- For u;, see below § 123. N. 1;. 

Note 2. According to the old grammarians, the grave accent is understood 
on every syllable whidi appears unaccented. Thus ecvS^^wroKrevoi, ruTrcoy are, 
according to them, ay9-^uToxro*o;, ru-rru. It seems, then, that the grave 
accent is no accent at all. 

2. A word is called oiytone, when it has the acute accent 
on the last syllable. E. g. nunog, elns, aya&ol. 

Paroxj/tone, when it has the acute accent on the penult. 
E. g. ^iXb), (xffjtQia&ai. 

Prnparoxytone^ when it has the acute on the antepenult. 
E. g. av&Q(OTiog, a^ioi, nolECog. 

3. A word is called perispomenon, when it has the circum- 
flex on the last syllable. E. g. inid^w, dianegav, noboli'. 

Properisyomenon, when it has the circumflex on the penult. 
E. g. roviov, fisfivrjad^ai, ^ccXXov, 

4. A word is called barytone, when its last syllable has no 
accent at all. (^ 19. N. 2.) E. g. Tvmoi, tovtov, negugj^ofxsvog. 

5. When the accented syllable has a diphthong, the accent 
is placed over the second vowel of that diphthong. E. g. 
aifiaicc, -dojiJixa. Except the improper diphthongs w, r/, a. 
(See also § 4. 4.) 

§ SO. 1. If the last syllable is long either by nature or by 
position (§ 17. ], 2), no accent can be placed on the ante- 
penult. 

2. The ACUTE can stand on the antepenult only when th6 
last syllable is short. E. g. ur&gconog, dLicp&ogiv, neXsxvg* 

Note 1. The endings ai and ot are, with respect to accent, 
short. E. g, Xiyovxut, av^Qoonot. 

Except the third person singular of the optative active. 
E. g. Tifir^aai, Tifx^aoi. 

Except also the adverb oVxoi, at home, which in reality is an 
old dative. 

Note 2. The endings w, w, we, (og, wv, tov, of the second de- 
clcnsion, and cog, mv, of the genitive of nouns in ig, vg, of the 
thi?'d declension, permit the accent to be on the antepenult. 
('^^ 33 : 43. 3.) E. g. urcoysoj, noXscog, noXsuv. 



16 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [§§21,22. 

Note 3. Also the Ionic termination w of the genitive sin- 
gular of the first declension permits the accent to stand on the 
antepenult. E. g. Tvdddsoj. (^ 31. N. 3.) 

3. The penult, if accented, takes the acute when it is short 
by nature, or when the last syllable is long by nature. E. g. 

koyog, fioiKjrjg. 

4. "When a word, which has the acute on the last syllable, 
stands before other words belonging to the same sentence, this 
acute becomes grave ('). E. g. tovq novTjgovg xat rovg aya&ovg 
avdQunovg, not jovg novrjgovg aal jovg ayad^ovg av&Qwnovg. 

§ 91. 1. The CIRCUMFLEX can be placed only on a syl- 
lable long hy nature. E. g. xiig tifxrjg, diansQMv. 

2. A penult long by nature, if accented, takes the circum- 
flex only when the vowel of the last syllable is short by nature. 
E. g. ^alXov, TtUvs, xazcurv^. So sivaL, oixoi, (§ 20. JN. 1.) 

ENCLITICS. 

§ 39. 1. Enclitics are words which throw their accent 
back upon the last syllable of the preceding word. The fol- 
lowing words are enclitics : 

(1) The personal pronouns f.iov, [lot, y,s, gov, ool, as, ov, o!, 
f, oq)b)s, Gcpbuv, aq)SMV, o<f)eag, acpm, 0(plai, ocplr, acps, ocpag. We 
must observe, thatjof those beginning with a(p, only the oblique 
cases are enclitic. 

(2) The indefinite pronoun rig, rl, through all the cases, as 
also the words xotj, tw, for nvog, tlvI. 

(3) The present indicative of eI^iL, am^ and cprjiil, say. 
Except the monosyllabic 2 pers. sing, si or sJg, and q)T^g. 

(4) The particles iro&h', nod^l, not, ni], nov, ttojc, noxs, ys, 
^i]v, as or yiiv, vv or vm, nig, tim, rs, to/, qk, and the insepar- 
able particle ds, to. 

2. If the word before the enclitic has the acute on the ante- 
penult, or the circumflex on the penult, the enclitic throws 
back an acute on the last syllable of that word. E. g. av&QO)- 

nog Tig, for av&QOjnog rig ' dsl^ov ^oi, for dsl^ov ^61. 

3. When the word before the enclitic has the accent on the 
last syllable, the accent of the enclitic disappears. In this 
case the acute does not become grave (§ 20. 4). E. g. iyoo 
(ftjiii, for iyco cprinl' noXXolg rioi, for noXXo'ig rioh 



^ 23.] CONTRACTION. 17 

Monosyllabic enclitics lose their accent also when the pre- 
ceding word has the acute on the penult. E. g. tovtov ys. 

4. An enclitic of two syllables retains its accent, 

(1) When the preceding word has the acute on the penult. 
E. g. atdgfg tiveg. 

(2) When the syllable upon which its accent would have 
been thrown back has been elided (§ 25). E. g. noXX' cart, 
for nokXd iaxi. 

Note 1. Enclitics, which stand at the beginning of a sen- 
tence, retain their accent. E. g. o ov yccg ngdrog iail ^dyiaxov* 

Remark. The abovementioned personal pronouns retain 
their accent, M'hen they depend upon a preposition. E. g. 
inl aol, not inl aoi. Except (xi in the formula nqog fiE. 

Note 2. When several enclitics succeed each other, the 
preceding takes the accent of the following. E. g. ovdinoii 
iaxi acpiaiv, for ovdsnoxs lail aq)loLV. 

Note 3. Frequently the indefinite pronouns and the par- 
ticles are not separated by a space from the attracting word. 
E. g. ovis, fx^xig, baxig, olaxiaiv, uaxs- 



CONTRACTION. 

^ S3. A pure syllable (§ 16. 4) and the one immediately 
preceding it are often united into one long syllable. This is 
called contraction. It takes places generally as follows : 

aa are contracted into u, as into d, as xqvg^o^ XQ^aa, vyiia 

^irdcc fivd. vyid. 

na — a, 2iS fivda (iva. m — j], ^S ^QVaea XQVori. 

aat — at, as fivdai [xvat. tai — »; or ai, as ximxeai xvjitt], 
«£ — «, as xl(ias xi^ix. ;|f()i;oeat %gvoal. 

aei — a, as xifidei xi^a. ss — ei, as (ftlss cplXsi. Some- 
arj — a, as xi(idr}ts rifiuxs. times into i], as xqh^qee rgn^gr}. 

at] — «, as xi^(X7jg Ti^ag. eel — Ei, as q)iXESig cpiXBlg. 

at — a, as a'i'aao) aaaoj. et] — tj, as cpiXsrjXE q)iX7Jxs* 

ao — (o, as xifidofiEV xifiw^tv. ejj — j], as cptXtrig cpiXfjg. 

aoi — 0), as xijidoi^tv xifiMfxEv. e'v — st, as noXi'l noXtt. 

aov — w, as xL^dovac xt^aat. eo — ov, as cpiXsoinev cpiXovfiEV, 

ata — w, as xtfidco xifxw. eol — oi, as (piXsoifxEv (fiXoXiiEV. 

Eu — Tj, as ysa yrj. Sometimes eov — ov, as (pdsovai cpiXovai. 
2* 



SG) 


— a 


rje 


— 71, 


rin 


— ]h 


rii 


Ih 


IS 


^, 


a 


i> 


oa 


— at 



18 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [§ 24. 

as q)ili(x) (pilw, times into tj, as dntlorj 8i- 

aS Tf|U7J8ff(7« TlfATjOaCC' TlXlj. 

as -ti^n'^Hg ri^fjg. op — ot, as 8i]l6i]g drjldtg. This 
as Og^'iaaa 0Qfjoao(. contraction occurs only in 

as nohsg nolig. verbs in ow. Verbs in (ay,i, 

as nolu noli. (§ 11''') contract otj into w. 

or «, as -^iifooc ^;ifw> oV — oi, as ry/oi ^;^oT. 

anXoa anXa. oo — ov, as driloo^^v 8t]Xovusv. 

Otti — aiy Q.S diTiXoaL diTtXal. oot — ot, B.S drjlooLfxsv drjXolftsv. 

ofc — ov, as drjXoETS drjXovrs. oov — ov, as drjXoovai di^Xovai. 

osi — 01/, as drjXoeiv drjXovv. ooj — co, as 8i]X6(o drjXo). 

Verbs in ow (§ 116) con- ow — o), as ttAo'w ttAo). 

tract the endings osl and vs v, as l;(&veg Ixdvg. 

osig into 01 and o<cr, as dtjXosi v'i — vl, as nXrj&m nXi]d^v1. 

drjXoZ, d7]X6£tg dtjXolg. an — oj, as Xw'i'cav Xmuv. 
or] — (0,0.8 drjXotjTedrjXoJTE. Some- 

NoTE 1. (1) The Doric dialect contracts us and ccsl into 
f) and Tj respectively. E. g. ogas oqt), oQaei oQjj. 

The Attic does the same in the following verbs, 8n}jaw, ^aco, 
y.vu(o, nsivdco, ajxdoj, xqaofiai. 

(2) The Ionic and the Doric contract so into sv. E. g. 
aiscpavioviccL OTScpavEvrTCCL. 

Note 2. The contraction is often left to pronunciation. 

E. g. Jio^rid-sa (^^ ), Aiyvnr-'mv ( ). This kind of 

contraction is called synizesis or synecplionesis. 

Note 3. Accent. (1) If one of the syllables to be con- 
tracted has the accent, the accent generally remains on the 
contracted syllable. And if this syllable be a penult or ante- 
penult, the accent is determined according to ^§ 20: 21 ; if 
it be a final syllable, it takes the circumflex, except when the 
word uncontracted has the acute accent on the last syllable. 
E. g. cpiXsofis&a cpiXov^s&a, nXisTS nXelis ' TificxM rt/xw ' /?f/9acoj 

(2) If neither of the syllables to be contracted has the 
accent, the accent of the word generally retains its place. 
E. g. noXssg noXsig. 

CRASIS. 

§ 94. Two contiguous words are, in many instances, con- 
tracted into one, when the first ends and the next begins with 



§§25,26.] ELISION. 19 

a vowel. This kind of contraction is called crasis. The 
coronis (' ) is generally placed over the contracted syllable. E. g. 

Tolvavriov for to irarilov 

rakrj&f'g '* to aXrj&eg. 

Note 1. The i is subscribed only when it stands at the 
end of the last of the syllables to be contracted. E. g. i/coficxi, 
for fyo) oifxai, but xvc/co for xal eyto. 

Note 2. The crasis is sometimes left to pronunciation. 
E. g. (II. 2, 651) ^Eivallto arSQSiq)6vTr], to be read 'EvvaXiwvdQei- 
qiovTt]. 

ELISION. 

§ 25. When the first of two contiguous words ends with a 
short vowel, and the other begins with a vowel, the former 
often drops its final vowel, and the apostrophe ( ' ) is put over the 
vacant place. This is called elision. E. g. 

5i' Efiov for dice etxov 

£71 avJM ini avTM 

eg)' Vy-t^y (§ 14. 2) for im rj^tv. 

Remark. The prepositions tisqI and tt^o' never lose their 
final vowel. E. g. negl uviov, nQO 'A&rjrm>. 

Note 1. The diphthong ai is sometimes elided by the poets, 
but only in the passive terminations fiai, oai, xai, and o^ai. 
E.g. (SovAofi,' eyoj, ^ox ^ovXo^ai iy(a' naluod^^ aTtay^alprjv, for 
xaXua&ac anay^al^riv. 

Note 2. The epic poets, in some instances, reject the final 
vowel even when the following word begins with a consonant. 
E. g. av vixvag, for avoc vexvag ' nag Zt^vl, for naga Zr^vL 

Note 3. Accent. (1) In prepositions and conjunctions, if 
the elided vowel had the accent, this accent also is cut off with 
the vowel. E. g. u^(p aviM, al)^ elns. 

(2) In all other words the accent is thrown back upon the 
preceding syllable. E. g. cprjix e'yw, for (jpTj^ut iyoj. 

SYNCOPE, METATHESIS, AND APH^RESIS. 

§ 2&, 1. Syncope is an omission of a vowel from the 
middle of a word. E. g. nargog, for naiigog. 

2. Metathesis is an interchange of place between two con- 
tiguous letters in the same word. E. g. xgadla, for xagdia. 



so 



LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. 



m 27, 28. 



3. A-phmrcsis is the taking of a letter from the beginning 
of a word. E. g. nov 'onv, for nov iajiv. 

Note. The combinations ^l, fig, vq, arising from a syncope 
or from a metathesis, are changed into y.^X, ^§q, vdg, respec- 
tively. E. g. yu(j(Sg6g for ya^fgog, avdgog for avBgog. 



PUNCTUATION. 

•J ST. The Greek has the following punctuation marks: 

Comma, .... 

Colon, .... 

Period, .... 

Interrogation, 

Apostrophe (§ 25), 

Coronis (§ 24), . 

Marks of quantity (§ 2), . . [-] and [>^] 

Marks of parenthesis, . . • [( )] 

Mark of diaeresis, . . 

Mark of admiration, 

Note 1. The mark of diccrcsis is placed over t or v to 
prevent its forming a diphthong with the preceding vowel. 
E. g. yrga'i, amriy are trissyllables, but yr\ga.iy avxij, are dissyl- 
lables. 

Note 2. The mark of admiration is not much used. 



PRONUNCIATION 



§ 38. 1. It is supposed by many that the ancient pronun- 
ciation, that is, the pronunciation of the ancient Athenians 
and of the well educated in general, is in a great measure lost. 
The best expedient, according to some, is, to observe how the 
Romans expressed Greek, and the Greeks Roman names. 
This would be a very good expedient, if the ancient pronun- 
ciation of the Latin language was not as uncertain as that of 
the Greek. 

According to others, the best rule is, to observe how the 
ancient Greeks expressed the sounds made by particular ani- 
mals. This rule is, to say the least, very ridiculous, because 
dogs and sheep are hardly teachers of articulate sounds, and 
because there are as many ways of expressing the sound made 



§ 28.] PRONUNCIATION. 21 

by any animal, as there are nations upon the face of the earth. 
The frog, for example, in ancient Greek sings /Sg^yExexe^ xoaf, 
xo«|, in modern Greek, fxnaxa x«x«, in English, croak croak. 

2. Others maintain that the modern Greek language is the 
only source from which any definite notions concerning the 
ancient pronunciation can be derived. First, because this 
language is immediately derived from the ancient; a circum- 
stance of no small importance. Secondly, because its pro- 
nunciation is remarkably uniform ; and uniformity in matters 
of this sort cannot be attributed to mere chance. Further, 
the modern Greek method is founded ort 'tradition, while all 
other methods hang on conjecture. For the benefit of the 
curious we proceed to describe it. 
a and a are pronounced like a in father. After the sound 1 

{i, 7], SI, 01, V, vi) it is pronounced like a m peculiarity . 
ai like s. 
av, iv, 7]v, (ov, before a vowel, a liquid, or a middle mute 

(/?, y, d) are pronounced like av, ev, eev, ov, respectively. 

In all other cases, like af, ef, eef, off. 
/5 like V. 
y before the sounds E and /is pronounced nearly like y in yes, 

York. In all other cases it is guttural, like the German g 

in Tag. 
yy and yx like ng in strongest. 
y$ like nx. 
yx like ng-h, nearly. 
8 like th in that. 
£ like e in fellow, nearly. 
H like I. 
sv, see av. 
^ like z. 

Tj and r; like i. / 

tjv, see av. 
h^ like th in thin. 
L like i in machine. 
X like k. 

X like I. Before the sound 7, like U in William. 
[J, like m. 

fin like mb, as I'fiuQoa&Ev pronounced embrosthen. 
Hip (fina) like mbs. 
V like n. Before the sound /, like n in oNion. 

The words tov, ri]v, iv, ovv, before a word beginning with 

X or I, are pronounced like roy, ri]y, iy, ovy before x or |. 

(See yx, yt) E. g. rbv xaiqov, ev ^vloxco, pronounced to- 



22 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [^ 28. 

/■AaiQov, iy^vloxo). Before n or ip they are pronounced to^u, 
Tijfi, ffi, avix. E. g. Tov novrjQov, ai'v ipvxjj, pronounced 

JOflJlOVTjQOV, OVfHfJV;(jj. 

j'T like nd, as tvxi^og pronounced endimos. 

I like X or ks. 

like in porter. 

oi like f. 

ov like 00 in moow. 

7t, Q, like j9, r. 

o like s in so/if. Before ^, y, d, fi, g, it is sounded like ^. 

E. g. j(oa|Uo?, a^eaai, ^fivgrt], pronounced xo^iiOQ, ^^saat, 

ZfiVQvrj. So also at the end of a word, jovg ^aaiUlg xrjg yn^y 

pronounced TovQ^aoilug TTJ^ytjg, 
T like t in tell. 
V like I. 
VL like I. 
cp like ph orf. 

X like German ch or Spanish J. 
%p like 2?5. 
w and 0) like o. 
wi', see av. 

The rough breathing is silent in modern Greek. 

So far as quantity is concerned, all the short vowels are 
equivalent to the long ones. 

The written accent guides the stress of the voice. 

The accent of the enclitic, however, is disregarded in pro- 
nunciation. But when the attracting word has the accent on 
the antepenult, its last syllable takes the secondary accent. 
E. g. ^flloV ^01, pronounced dfl^ovfioi, but XeXsxial fioi has the 
primary accent on the first syllable Af, and the secondary on 



PART II. 
INFLECTION OF WORDS 



PARTS OF SPEECH. 

^ 90. 1. The declinable parts of speech are 
the noun, the article, the pronoun, the verb, and 
the participle. 

2. The indeclinable parts of speech are the 
adverb, the preposition, the conjunction, and the 
interjection. 

3. The declinable parts of speech have three 
NUMBERS ; the singular, the dual, and the plural. 

The dual may be used when two things are 
spoken of ; but not necessarily. 

NOUN. 

^30. 1. Nouns are grammatically divided into 
substantive and adjective. Substantives are divided 
into proper and common. 

2. The noun has three genders ; the masculine, 
the feminine, and the neuter. The masculine is, in 
grammar, distinguished by the article o, the femin- 
ine, by ?), and the neuter, by to. E. g. 6 dvrjg, the 
man, i) yvvr(, the woman, to avxov, the fig. 

Nouns which are either masculine or feminine are said to 
be of the common gender. Such nouns are, in grammar, 
distinguished by the articles 6, tj. E. g. 6, ^ av&Qwnog^ a liu 
man being. 



24 



INFLECTION OF WORDS. 



[§3L 



3. The noun has three declensions ; the first 
declension, the second declension, and the third 
declension. 

4. The CASES are five ; the nominative, the geni- 
tive, the dative, the accusative, and the vocative. 

Note 1. All neuters have three of the cases alike, viz the 
nominative, accusative, and vocative. In the plural these 
cases end in «• except some neuters of the second declen- 
sion, which end in oj (§ 33). 

Note 2. The nominative, accusative, and vocative dual^ 
are alike. The genitive and dative dual are also alike. 
In the plural, the vocative is always like the nominative. 

FIRST DECLENSION. 



§31. 1. The following table exhibits i\ie endings o^ i\iQ 
first declension. 



s. 


Fan, 




Mas. 




D. 


F. 


^31. 


P. 


F. 


4' M. 


N. 


tj a 


a 


vg 


dg 


N. 




a 


N. 




ai 


G. 


i]g rjg or ag 


ag 


ov 


ov 


G. 




aiv 


G. 




OiV 


D. 


tj J] or (X 


a 


V 


«_ 


D. 




aiv 


D. 




dig 


A. 


r^v uv 


Civ 


ijV ^ 


or 


A. 




u 


A. 




ag 


V. 


n " 


a 


7} or a 


a. 


V. 




a 


V. 




ai 



2. Nouns in ?/ or a or a are feminine. E. g. ^ 
ri//?/, honor, r^ fiovaa, muse, ?} ao(pid^ wisdom. 

Nouns in yji or as are masculine. E. g. 6 JsXavijSy 
publicum, b Tafttas, steioard. 



i 



s. 


ij [honor) 


D. 


[two honors) 


P. 


{lienors) 


N. 


■xT^ij 


N. 


TIfKiC 


N. 


Tifj.al 


G. 


TLfi rig 


G. 


Ttl^Kxlv 


G. 


Tl/JO)V 


D. 


Ti^ufi^ 


D 


rtfuup 


D. 


xiy.a1g 


A. 


ri^i]v 


A. 


TiUU 


A. 


Tifiag 


V. 


Ti^nj 


V. 


Tifid 


V. 


Tl^ul 


S. 


ri (muse) 


D. 


{two muses) 


P. 


[muses) 


N. 


fiovaix 


N. 


^ovoa 


N. 


(.lovaai 


G. 


^ovGi]g 


G. 


fwvaaiv 


G. 


UOVOMV 


D. 


(xo vat] 


D. 


fjovaaiv 


D. 


fj,i,va(y.ig 


A. 


fwvaav 


A. 


(Aovoa 


A. 


jAOvaug 


V. 


novo a 


V 


nova a 


V. 


fAOVaai 



^31.] 



FIRST DECLENSION. 



25 



s. 


(puhlican) 


D 


N. 


TfXwvqg 


N. 


G. 


rsXwvov 


G. 


D. 


jeXwvT] 


D. 


A. 


TiXcovriv 


A. 


V. 


TeXuvi] 


V. 


S. 


6 (steward) 


D. 


N. 


Tccfilag 


N. 


G. 


TCCflloV 


G. 


D. 


ru^la 


D. 


A. 


Tocfilav 


A. 


V. 


rotfxla 


V. 



P. {publicans) 

N. TfAwj'Oft 

G. TfAcorcov 

D. TfAw'yat? 

A. TiXwvaq 

V. reXwvat 



P. [steivards) 

N. T«|UfcOft 
G, TCifilOJV 

D. rafxittig 
A. rafilag 
V. Tuydau 



D. (two publicans) 

TeXoJva 

rsXwvaiv 

riXwvaiv 

TtXoiva 

TtXuva 

D. (two stewards) 
rafila 
jafilttiv 
rayiaiv 
Tayla 
lafxlci 

3. Nouns in a pure (§ 16. 4), ^a, and some 
others, retain the a throughout the singular. E. g. 
aoq)ia, aocpias* cocpia, aocplav • x^9^-> X^Q^'^^ X^Q^t 

D. (two houses) 

N. olnicc 
G. olniaiv 
D, olxlaiv 
A. otx/'a 
V. ol'/.lvi 

4. The following classes of nouns in Tjg have « in the vnca- 
tive singular. 

(1) Nouns in t?j?. E. g. noXhrig, citizen, voc. ttoXItu. 
Hemabk 1. In Homer, aivx^irns, unhappily brave, has voc. ahec^irri. 

(2) Nouns derived from verbs by adding iqc to the last con- 
sonant of the verb. (^ 129. N. 3.) E. g. yiwyhfji];, geometer^ 
voc, yewfisTQu. 

(3) All national appellations. E. g. ^y.vdrjg, Scytliian, voc. 

(4) A few proper names. E. g. Jlvgal/yrig, Pyrcechmes, 
voc. nvgcuxya. 

Note 1. Quantity. (1) ^ of the nominative singular is 
always short when the genitive has rig. E. g. fiovoa, fiovarjg. 

It is very often long when the genitive has ag. E. g. oocfia, 
aocflag. 

All proparoxytones and properispomena have of course the 
a short. E. g. MXii&sia, fioiqa. 



S. ri (house) 
N. otx/a 
G. olnlag 
D. otxm 
A. olat'oiv 
V. oixt« 



P. (houses) 
N. olxlab 
G. olyimv 
D. olxlatg 
A. olyJag 
V. olxlai 



26 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ § ^1. 

Further, oxytones and paroxytones, which have ag in the 
genitive, have a long in the nominative. E. g. x^^Q^* X^^Q^S' 
nitga, ntzqag. Except the numeral ^m, and the proper names 
KvQQa and HvgQa. 

(2) Ag is long. E. g. jafildg, aocplag. 

(3) Av of the accusative singular always follows the quantity 
of the nominative singular. E. g. fiovaa, fiovoav aocpld,ao(piav. 

(4) A of the vocative singular from nouns in ag is always 
long ; from nouns in r^g it is always short. E. g. Tafilag, rauld ' 
noXijrjg, noXLxa, 

(5) A of the nominative, accusative, and vocative, dual, is 
always long. E. g. ^ovad. 

Note 2. Accent. (1) The accent remains on the same 
syllable as in the nominative, if the last syllable permits it : if 
not, it is removed to the next syllable. (<5» 20. 1, 2, 3.) E. g. 
S^dlaaaa, ddlaooav, ■&dXaaaai ' S^aldoarig, ■&<y.XdaoT]. 

Remark 2. zleanotrjg, master, has voc. dsanotci, not dsoTtoroc. 

(2) The endings of the genitive and dative of all the num- 
bers take the circumflex, when the nominative has the accent 
on the last syllable. E. g. zi^Tj, xi^irig, Ti^fi, ji^atg. 

(3) Slv of the genitive plural of barytones also is circum- 
flexed. E. g. fiovocc, fiovooiv. 

Except the feminine of barytone adjectives and participles in 
og. (§ 49. 1.) E. g. a^iog, u^la, d^lcov ' rvmofisvog, Tvmo^ivri, 
xvmoy^ivbiv. 

Except also the following nouns : xg'^aTfjg, xqv^t^^^ ' ol hri- 
alai, eTrjolojv ' acpvr], acpvwv. 

Note 3. Dialects. (1) The following table exhibits the 
dialectic peculiarities of the first declension. 

Sing. N. Old « for i]g, as Imioxa. 

G. Old do, Ionic £w, Doric d, for of, as "ATQsldrf^, "AtqsI- 
ddo, UxQudto), ^AxQeldu. Before a vowel so) drops e, 
as '^Eq^slag, "EqixeIo) for "EgiiuBm. 

The Attics sometimes use the Doric genitive, es- 
pecially in proper names. 
Plur. G. Old dwv, Ionic twv, Doric av, for (av, as fiovaoc, fiov- 
odwv, ^ovasMV, fiovodv. 
D. Old aLGi, Ionic jjol or rjg, for aig, as (xovaa, [lovaociai, 

fiov<ji]ai, fiovaijg. 
A. Doric dg for dg, as tsxpt}, rixvug. 



§§ 32, 33.] 



SECOND DECLENSION. 



27 



JSing and Plur. G. D. Epic tjcpi or r^cpiv for i^g, jf^v, mg, as 

(2) For 7j the Dorians use «, as ji^a, ng, a, civ, «'• 
On the other hand the lonians use rj for «, but only in the 
singular, as aocplr], tjg, ?/, rjv, r}. (§ 2. N. 3.) 

^32. Nouns in aa, £«, sag, and o??, are contracted. {§ 23.) 

/ij'a'a /iVK, mina, G. firuag fivag, D. ^y«a ^ura, A. fivaav fivav, 
V. |uva« |Uy«, Phiral N. ^uyawi /ivat, G. fivaav fivav, D. 



fivotaig ^vaig, 



(Avaag fAtocg, V . ^vaai ^vai. 



aiJxia avy.rj, Jig-tree, G. avxEa^ afxTj?, D. ovxia avy.jj, A. avxiav 
avxijv, V. ovxiu avxrj, Plural N. ovxicn ovxal, G. auxewv, 
avxMv, D. ovxiaig avxvug, A. avxeag avxocg, V. avxiac avxou. 

ag/vgia agyvga, of silver, G. agyvgdag agyvgag, &.C. 

'Egfiiag 'jEgfirjg, Hermes, G/£gfieov "Egfiov, D. 'Mg^eu 'Eg^jj, ^C. 

anXoT] anXrj, simple, G. wttAoij? aTiil^?, &c. 

Note 1. The vowels ?« are contracted into rj. But when 
they are preceded by a vowel or by g, they are contracted into 
a. In the accusative plural they are always contracted into d?. 

Note 2. The contracted forms of ^ogiccg generally double 
the g. Thus, ^ogiag ^oggag. 

SECOND DECLENSION. 



§ 33. 1. The following table exhibits the endings of the 
second declension. 



s. 


M. Sf F. 


Neut. 


D. All genders. 


p. 


31. ^ F. 


Neut. 


N. 


og ojg 


OV (OV 


N. 


N. 


01 0> 


a (o 


G. 


OV (0 


OV (0 


G. OLV OJV 


G. 


(OV 


(OV 


D. 


(O 


V 


D. OIV (x)V 


D. 


oig (og 


Oig (og 


A. 


OV (OV 


OV (xtV 


A. (0 


A. 


ovg (og 


a. (a 


V. 


s tog 


OV (OV 


V. to 


V. 


OV b) 


« £0 



2. Nouns in og or cos are masculine or feminine. 
E. g. 6 Xoyos, word, ^ v^aos, island, 6 vem^ temple. 

Nouns in ov or ov are neuter. E. g. to ov^kov, 
fig, TO dvcoj^ecov, hall. 



28 



INFLECTION OF WORDS. 



I §33. 



s. 


a(^d) 


n. 


(two words) 


P. 


(words) 


N. 


loyog 


N. 


Xoyco 


N. 


XoyoL 


G. 


Xoyov 


G. 


XoyoLV 


G. 


Xoyfov 


D. 


X6y(o 


D. 


loyoiv 


D. 


Xoyoig 


A. 


Xoyov 


A. 


loyoi 


A. 


Xoyovg 


V. 


loys 


V. 


X6y(a 


V. 


Xoyot 


S. 


™ [fis) 


D 


(twofgs) 


P. 


(/f) 


N. 


avHov 


N. 


OVXOl 


N. 


avxa 


G. 


avxov 


G. 


GVaOLV 


G. 


OVHCJV 


D. 


avxco 


D. 


avxoLV 


D. 


avHoig 


A. 


GVHOV 


A. 


OVUbi 


A. 


ovxa 


V. 


avxov 


V. 


avxco 


V. 


avxa 


>S^. 


(temple) 


D. 


(two temples) 


P. 


(temples) 


N. 


Tscog 


N. 


veca 


N. 


VEM 


G. 


VE(a 


G 


VSMV 


G. 


VSMV 


D. 


Vlbi 


D. 


vimv 


D. 


VEwg 


A. 


vscov 


A. 


VS(6 


A. 


vEoog 


V. 


VEcog 


V. 


VECO 


V. 


vs(a 


S.' 


TO [hall) 


D. 


(two halls) 


P. 


(halls) 


N. 


avcoyfwv 


N. 


avwyEca 


N. 


avcoyEco 


G. 


avMysca 


G. 


(XVWyEMV 


G. 


ocvojyEUV 


D. 


arc6ys(a 


D. 


ocvbr/Ebjv 


D. 


cxvcjyscog 


A. 


avwyscav 


A. 


avbjyEco 


A. 


avcoyEbi 


V. 


avaysbjv 


V. 


avuysoj 


V. 


avwyEO) 



Note 1. The following neuters have o instead of ov in the 
nominative, accusative, and vocative, singular : aXXo, amo, 
sxeTvo, o, to, tovto, from aXlog, amog, iaurog, og, o, ovTog, re- 
spectively. 

Remark 1. Further, the termination av of the accusative 
singidar often drops the v. E. g. ^'a&ojq, ace. ^'a&m for "A&av. 

Note 2. Quantity, a of the neuter plural is always short. 

Note 3. Accent. (1) The accent remains on the same 
syllable as in the nominative, if the last syllable permits it : 
if not, it is removed to the next syllable. (§ 20. 1,2,3.) E. g. 
av&Qb)7iog, av&Q(anov, oip&qwtiol ' avSgconb), avdgojTioJV- 

(2) The endings of the genitive and dative of all the num- 
bers take the circumflex, when the nominative has the accent 
on the last syllable. E. g. ■O^Eog, d^Eov, S^eoTv, &Eo7g, 



§34.] 



SECOND DECLENSION. 



29 



Except the genitive singular of nouns in w?. E. g. ycofj, 
gen. vt(o. 

Remark 2. For the accent of pioparoxytones in «?, wv, see above (§ 20. 
N. 2). 

Note 4. Dialects. The following table exhibits the dia- 
lectic peculiarities of the second declension. 

Sing. G. Old oio, Doric w, for ov, as loyog, loyoio, X6/(o. 

Nouns in ag have wo instead of oto, as iZsTfw?* 

Z?STC(WO. 

Dual.G. D. Epic ouv for otv, as I'tttto?, I'TTTrotty. 
Plur, D. Old o^ffi for ot?, as d^giyxog, d^gi/xoTai. 

A. Doric (ag or og for ov?, as XvKog, Ivxag, Xvxog. 
Sing. Sf Plur. G. D. Epic ocpv or ocpiv for ov, m, wvfoig, as 

^£0?, S^EOCpLV. 

§ 34. Nouns in £o?, oog, soy, oov, are contracted. (§ 23.) 
E.g. 



^. 


{min 


*)_ 


D. 


{two minds) 


P. 


{minds) 


N. 


vooq 


vovg 


N. 


VObJ 


V(0 


N. 


voov 


vol 


G. 


voov 


vov 


G. 


VOOLV 


volv 


G. 


v6(av 


vwv 


D. 


VOOJ 


VM^ 


D. 


VOOIV 


volv 


D. 


vooig 


vdlg 


A. 


voov 


VOVV 


A. 


VOO) 


v(a 


A. 


voovg 


vovg 


V. 


vos 


VOX) 


V. 


VOW 


V(x) 


V. 


root 


vol 


S. 


TO {hone) 


D. 


{two bones) 


P. 


{bones) 




N. 


oaxiov 


oarovv 


N. 


oaxeco 


oarca 


N. 


ooTsa 


OGTOC 


G. 


oaTsov 


OGTOV 


G. 


oaiioif 


oaxdlv 


G. 


oaiiav 


OGTCJV 


D. 


OGTSCO 


OOTW 


D. 


oareoiv 


oaxolv 


D. 


oarsoig 


OGTolg 


A. 


OGTSOP 


OffTOt'J' 


A. 


COTSbJ 


oaxbj 


A. 


oarsa 


OGTOC 


V. 


OOTSOV 


OffTOl'*' 


V. 


OOTSM 


OOTcJ 


V. 


oarecc 


oaxoi 



Note 1. The vowels «« in the neuter plural are always con- 
tracted into «. 

Note 2. (1) The contracted nominative, accusative, and 
vocative, dual, take the acute accent, contrary to the rule 
(§ 23. N. 3). 

(2) The contracted genitive and dative of polysyllabic com- 
pounds in oog, oov, are accented contrary to the rule (ibid.). 
E. g. avTtnvoog avtlnvovg, G. avxiuvoov avxlnvov. 

(3) Some of the contracted forms of adjectives in so? take 
the circumflex on the last syllable, contrary to the rule (ibid.). 
E. g. xQvasog xgvaovg, xQi>osa xQ^ooc. 

3* 



30 



INFLECTION OF WORDS. 



[§35 



THIRD DECLENSION. 



§ 35. 1. The following table exhibits the terminations of 
tlie third declension. 



■iv) 



2. I» the third declension the gender must be determined 
by observation. 



S, All genders. 


D. 


All genders. 


P, 


31 


Sc F. 


Net 


N. g 


N. 


£ 


N. 




eg 


oi 


G. og 


G. 


oiv 


G. 




(av 


(av 


D. r 


D. 


oiv 


D. 




a.{v) 


ol( 


A. a, V 


A. 


s 


A. 




ccg 


a 


V. g 


V. 


E 


V. 




sg 


w 



s. 


9 (crow) 


D, 


{tioo crows) 


P. 


{croics) 


N. 


aoQa^ 


N. 


aoQuxs 


N. 


xoQaxEg 


G. 


aoQuxog 


G, 


xoQtixoiv 


G. 


Koqaxcov 


D. 


jio^axi 


D. 


HOQUKOLV 


D. 


x6Qa^i{v) 


A. 


y.OQayia 


A. 


xoQaxs 


A, 


jiOQUxag 


V. 


KOQa^ 


V. 


icoQay.e 


V. 


itoQay.Eg 


S. 


n (Jiope) 


D. 


{two hopes) 


P. 


{hopes) 


N. 


iXnlg 


N. 


elnlds 


N. 


eXnldsg 


G. 


iXmdog 


G. 


elnidoiv 


G. 


iXmdojv 


D. 


elnl8i 


D. 


iknldoiv 


D. 


iXmai{v) 


A. 


eXnlda 


A. 


iXnids 


A. 


iXnldag 


V. 


iXnl 


V. 


iXnlds 


V. 


iXnldsg 


S. 


{giant) 


D, 


{two giants) 


P. 


{giants) 


N. 


ylyag 


N. 


ylyavze 


N. 


ylyavTsg 


G. 


ylyavTog 


G. 


yiyavroiv 


G. 


yiyccvTCOv 


D. 


ylyavxi 


D. 


yiyavjoiv 


D. 


ylyaai(v) 


A. 


ylyavxa 


A. 


ylyavxB 


A. 


ylyavxag 


V. 


ylyav 


V. 


ylyavTS 


V. 


ylyavxsg 


S. 


{weevil) 


D. 


{two weevils) 


P. 


{weevils) 


N. 


^k 


N. 


Tils 


N. 


xUg 


G. 


Kiog 


G. 


mdlv 


G. 


ximv 


D. 


xU 


D. 


xioXv 


D. 


v.Loi{y) 


A. 


hIv 


A. 


xls 


A. 


mag 


V. 


Tilg 


V. 


Tils 


V. 


xleg 



§35.] 



S. 
N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 

S. 
N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 

S, 
N. 
G. 
D 
A. 
V. 



(age) 
aiojv 
aiiorog 

albivci 
albiv 

{god) 
daifxuiv 
dul^uorog 

duifxora 
daifiov 

6 {lion) 
Xecav 
XiovTog 

UOVTL 

Xioria 
Xiov 



THIRD DECLENSION. 

D. {two ages) 

N. albjve 
alcovoiv 
ceicoroLV 
aiMVS 
alwvE 



4i 



G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 



P. {ages) 

N. aiojisg 

G. alojrtov 

D. aib)ai{v) 

A. ulaJrag 

V. almeg 



D. 

N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 



D. 
A. 
V. 



{two gods) 

dalfiovs 

dui^oroLV 

8(iii.i6roiv 

dal^ovB 

dulfiove 

D. {two lions) 

N. XSOTTB 
G. XWVTOIV 

ItOVTOLV 

XioVTS 

XtOVTS 



P. 

N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 



{gods) 
Saiixovsg 
dai^ioi'cjv 
drxlnoai[v) 
daifAorag 
daiiJ,ovsg 

P. {lions) 
N. Xiovxig 
Xeovjoiv 
XiovaL{v) 
Xtoviag 
Xeovisg 



G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 



S. TO {thing) 

N. 

G. 

D. 

A. 

V. 



TiQayfia 
ng(xyjj.(XTog 

TTQoiyua 



TTOU. 



D. 

N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 



{tioo tilings) 

TTQOiyfXaTS 

TTgayfKXTOLP 
ngi/./jucfTOiv 
7iQ(ty(.iurs 
ngdy^ais 



P. 

N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 



{things) 
TiQny^inxa 
TTgayfiditov 
nQ(xyuaai{v) 
ngdyfxaTa 
nguyfiUTa 



Note 1. Quantity. (1) The terminations i, ai, a, ag, are 
short. E. g. aoQaxi, icoga'^i', xogixxa, xogny.ixg. 

(2) Nouns in svg (§ 44) may have «, ug, in the accusative. 
E. g. ^fxoiXtvg, ia, sag. 

Note 2. Accent. (1) \n dissyllables ^nd polysyllables \\\e 
accent generally remains on the same syllable as in the nomi- 
native, if the last syllable permits it : if not, it is removed to 
the next syllable. (^^20. 1,2,3.) E. g. v.oga^, xognxog, y.ogdy.av. 

(2) Monosyllables throw the accent in the genitive and 
dative of all the numbers upon the last syllable. In this case 
the terminations oiv, cov, are circumflexed. E. g. Tclg, xiog, xiuy. 

Except monosyllabic participles. E. g. dovg, dovxog, dovtu 

Except also the dual and plural of nixg' ndvToiv, navKo*, 
nccai, (^ 53.) 



32 



INFLECTION OF WORDS. 



R36. 



Except also the genitive dual and plural of the following 
nouns : 8aq torch, d^wg, &(6g, KPA2 head, ovg, nalg, arjg, Tgojg, 
qxag blister, cfwg light. 

Hemark. For the accent of crar;?^, ftfir^^, S'uyctT'/}^, A«^»5t>!^, yecffTM, 
avn^y Kvuv, and APHN, see below (§ 40. N. 3). 

Note 3. Dialects. The following table exhibits the dia- 
lectic peculiarities of the third declension. 

Dual. G. D. Epic onv for oiv, as Selqtiv, Suqtivouv. 

Plur. G. Ionic iav for iav, as />Jv, //jve'wk 
D. Old taai or tai, as dsnag, dindsaoi. 

Sing, and Plur. G. D. Epic crept (v) or q)i{v) for og, i, (av, at, 

as o/og, 6/£0"qpt ' ravg, vavcpi. 

§ 3€. 1. The following table exhibits the endings of the 
NOMINATIVE and genitive, singular, of the third declension. 



« gen. aTog, amog, neut. 

ttig — auog, ai8og, all genders. 

av — avog, uvtoc, mas. or neut. 

ag — (XQog, uTog, aqrog, gener- 
ally neuter. 

(xg — aog, (XTog, aSog, avog, c.v~ 
TO?, all genders. 

uvg — dog, fem. 

siQ — 8iQog, iQog, mas. or fem. 

eig — fvog, EVTog^ sidog, mas. or 
fem. 

sv — £vog, srxog, neut. 

ivg — eog, mas. 

ri — TjTog, neut. 

9JV — Tjvog, £vog, mas, or fem. 

VQ — VQog, sQog, mas. or fem. 

rjg — TjTog, r}&og, iog, mas. or 
fem. 

I, — log, nog, neut. 

IV — ivog, mas. or fem. 

ig — log, nog, idog, i&og, ivog, 
mas. or fem. 

Xg — log. 



vg — v&og. 

I — xoj, yog, x^g, yitog, mas. 

or fem. 
ov — ovog, ovTog, neut. 
04J — oQog, neut. 
og — oiog, eog, neut. 
ovf — ■ odog, neut. 
ovg — ovTog, oog, odog, mas. or 

fem. 
V — vog, neut. 
vv — vvog, vvTog, mas. or neut. 
vo — vQog, mas. or neut. 
vg — vog, vdog, v&og, vvog, vv~ 

Tog, mas. or fem. 
^J — 7ro?,/?oc,(jpo?,mas. orfem. 
w — oog, fem. 
(av — wvog, ovog, ovjog, mas. or 

fem. 
tag — (aqog, ogog, generally mas. 

or fem. 
(ag — (aog, oog, wrog, oxog, (adog, 

generally mas. or fem. 



2. Most nouns of the third declension form their Nomina- 



^ 36.] THIRD DECLENSION. 33 

TivE SINGULAR by dropping the termination og of the genitive, 
and annexing g. E. g. 

xo()«| gen. xogay.og, (§ 5. 2) 

naoip " IJeXonog, (ibid.) 

iXmg " ilTildog, (§ 10. 2) 

/lyag " yi'yartog, (§ 12. 5.) 

So(^A6> (§8.2), 7);.f,5o?; (i«l (§9. 2),^^a^oV'//j3 (ibid), 
^r^xog' /oiQig (§ 10. 2), x^^Qirog' OQVig (ibid.), o^ia&og' ^Ig 
(§ 12. 4), ^uog- xT£tV (§ 12. 5), xTsro?' ivcpfJsig (ibid.), ti;(jp- 
i^svTog' dovg (ibid.), dopiog. 

(1) Most masculines and feminines lengthen ?? into ry?, and 
Oi; into (og. E. g. TQii^orjg, TQnjgeog ' Tstvifojg, TSivq)6iog. 

(2) Many masculines lengthen eg into cue,-. E, g. ^aadtvg, 
fjuniXsog. 

(3) All neuter substantives change e? into og. E. g. T«7;fOff, 
TElx^og. (§ 2. N. 3.) 

(4) Some neuters change g into q. E. g. axkaqf aiectxog. 

(5) The following nouns lengthen o? into ovg' §ovg, ^oog* 
noiig, nodog' ;foi'?, j^oo?. (§ 2. N. 3.) 

(6) The following change ag into avg ' yqavg, ygaog ' vavg, 
vuog. 

(7) ^MojuTj^, sKog, changes the radical letter £ into tj in the 
nominative. 

Note 1. "Ara^, uvaxrog, and vv^, vvxTog, are the only nouns 
in J that have xtoc in the genitive. Originally they had gen. 
uvaxog, vvxog. (Compare "Aiantg, Dioscuri, and vi'xiog, noctur- 
nal. ) 

"Jig, aXog, is the only noun in A?. 

3, Many form their nominative singular by dropping the 
termination og of the genitive, with such consonants as cannot 
stand at the end of a Greek word (§ 5. N. 3). Masculines 
Rud feminines lengthen e and o, in the final syllable, into tj and 
w respectively. E. g. 

alojv gen. aloiipog 

dal(X(av *' dixl^ovog 

Xib)v *' Xsovzog 

nqayua " nqny^itTog. 
So ;|^7jV, xV^'og' Xifxr^v, h^ivog' &iv, ■^evrng' abnvjO, acoTrjQog' 
VX^) VXOog ' 86v, dovTog ' cpo'ig, cprnqog ' ijroq, TJxoqog ' ^tjtw^, 
q^roqog ' olrrjni, oirriniog ' dhiy.vvr, Suxvvvrog. 



34 INFLECTION OF WORDS. ['J. 37. 

Remark 1. In reality the nominative is formed from the root, which is 
obtained by dropping aj of the genitive. E. g. hb^x^, Ko^cotot, root x.o^a.K. 

Note 2. rula, to, is the only noun in « that has ayaog in 
the genitive. 

JdfxuQ, ri, the only noun in u.q that has a.QTog in the genitive. 

Mih, TO, the only substantive in l that has Lxog in the geni- 
tive. 

Note 3. Neuters in «^ are contracted when this ending is 
preceded by «. E. g. titq 1]^, G. f«^og riQog. 

The neuters dilutQ, oriag, q'QsaQ, have gen. dsXiaTog deXrjTogy 
axEarog artiTog, cpgsajog (fgr^xog, contrary to the rule (§ 23, N. 3). 

Note 4. Nouns in ng, sv, gen. £j'to?, are contracted when 
these endings are preceded by ri or o. E. g. n^i^sig ri/.ujg, 
TilxijBVTog TiiJijVTog ' nlay.oiig nXuKovg, nlayosvxog nXayovvxog. 

Remark 2. Proper names in awv are generally contracted. 
E. g. Jlooscduoov Iloaeidur. 

Note 5. The quantity of the last syllable of the nomina- 
tive, and of the penult of the genitive, must be learned by 
observation. Nevertheless we remark here, that 

(1) Monosyllabic nominatives are long. E. g. nav, Qtg, 
djjvg. Except the pronouns xlg, xl, xlg^ xl. 

(2) The vowels «, i, v, m the penult of the genitive are 
short, when this case ends in og pure. E. g. yrjgag, uog ' noXig, 
XoQ ' daxQV, vog. 

Except ygavg, uog ' vavg, uog. 

(3) The penult of the genitive of substantives is long, when 
this case terminates in avog, ivog, viog. E. g. Tixdv, avog ' ^aXa~ 
H'tg, h'og' (PoQy.vg, vrog. 

§ ST. 1. The ACCUSATIVE SINGULAR of mascuUnc and 
feminine nouns is formed by dropping og of the genitive, and 
annexing «. E. g. 

HOQU^y nogay.og ace. yoqay.a. 

2. Nouns in ig, vg, avg, ovg, of which the genitive is in og 
pure (§ 16. 4), form their accusative by dropping g of the 
nominative and annexing v. E. g. 

noXig, TtoXiog ace. noXiv 



^ 88.] THIRD niXLENSION. 35 

If the genitive is not in og pare, they can have v in the 
accusative only when the last syllable of the nominative is 
not accented. E. g. 

ogvig, ogn&og acc. oQvi&a or oqviv 

xoQvg, noQvO^og *' noQvQa or jioqvv. 

Note I. In the Epic language, the following nouns often 
have a in the accusative singular, contrary to the preceding 
rule: ^ovg, ^6u' tVQvg, evgia' i;(&vg, l;(&iia' vavg, via. 

Remark. The accusative singular of the obsolete AI2 is 
always Alu. 

Note 2. These three nouns, "Anollbn', noau^Cavy xvxsojv, 
have acc. \i7t6lla)vu and ^AnolXo), Jloiisidwva and Jloaudoj, xv- 
icsapa and y.vy.8a). 

§38. 1. In many instances the vocative singular of 
masculine u.nd feminine nouns is like the nominative singular. 

2. Nouns in ug, rjg, (ov, wq, and some others, form their 
vocative singular by dropping og of the genitive, with such 
consonants as cannot stand at the end of a Greek word 
(§5.N. 3). E.g. 

yl/ag, ylyavxog voc. ylyav 
daly.cov, dulfiovog " dal^ov. 

3. Nouns in ig, vg, evg, avg, and ovg gen. oog, and the com- 
pounds of novg, droj) the (j of the nominative. The ending «i; 
is always circumflexed. E. g. 

IXTilg voc. fXnl 
Paailtvg " ^aaiXsv. 

4. Ncds ia rjg gen. sog, shorten r^g into eg. E. g. ^Mxgdirjg, 
voc. 2^(6y.gaTsg. 

5. Feminines in &?, Mg, gen. oog, have 61 in the vocative 
singular. E. g. ^x^) VX^og, voc. rjxol. 

Note 1. A few proper names in ixg gen. aviog, have a in 
the vocative singular. E. g. Aao8d^ag, avxog, voc. AaodocfuJ. 

Note 2. The following nouns shorten the final syllable in 
the vocative singular: 'AjioXXwv, "AttoXXov noasidcov, noaudoV 

aWTTlQ, OWTfQ. 



36 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [<5§ 39, 40. 

Note 3. (1) The following nouns throw the accent back 
on the penult in the vocative : uvr>Qy ursg ' dai^^j, dusQ • nanjg, 

(2) Polysyllabic vocatives, which end in a short syllable, 
often throw the accent back on the antepenult. E. g. ^cox^a- 

Note 4. "Aru^, king, when employed to invoke a god has 
voc. uva. Elsewhere its vocative is like the nominative. 

§ 39. 1. The DATIVE PLURAL is formed by dropping og of 
the genitive singular, and annexing ai. E. g. 

xo'^al, noQaitog dat. plur. yoguh (§ 5. 2) 

eln'g, flnldog " iXniai (§ 10. 2) 

ylyilg, ylyixviog *' ylyaai (^^ 12. 5), 

2. Nouns in tvg, avg, and ovg gen. oog, form their dative 
plural by dropping c: of the nominative singular, and annexing 
OL. E. g. ^tiOLlivg, (3aGiXsvai' ^ovg, (Soval- 

Note. The omission of v before (r/ (§ 12. 4) in this case does not lengthen 
the preceding short vowel. E. g. Ja/^wv, la'ifiovos, ^aiftoffi. 



SYNCOPATED NOUNS OF THE THIRD 
DECLENSION. 

§ 40. 1. The following nouns in tjq generally drop the s in 
the genitive and dative singular. In the dative plural they 
change the s into «, and place it after the q. (§^ 20. 2 : 2. N. 3.) 

rcnairiQ, r], helly, G. yaarsoog yaoigog, D. yaax^Qi yaoTglf 

D. Plur. yuoTQaai and yaaTrJQat. 
/trifjcr^TriQ, rj, Ceres, G. /li]iir]xfQog Ji]!jr}TQog, D. Jr]fi'^TFQi 

zJijfirjTQL. This noun is syncopated also in the accusative 

singular, /^rjfir'jTfQa JijfirjQa. 
Ovydjr,o, rj, daughter, G. ■&vyat£Qog dvyat^og, D. S^vyatigi, 

SnyuTQi, D. Plur. S^vy(xrQaai. 
Mr,TriQ, 7], mother, G. nrjxsgog ^r^xgog, D. ^rixtqi f.i7jxgl, D. Plur. 

fiT/XQaaL. 
IlurijQ, 6, father, G. naxigog nccxgog, D. naxigi naxgl, D. Plur. 

Txargaoi. 

2. '4v^g, o, man, is syncopated in all the cases except the 
nominative and vocative singular, and dative plural: 



<5>§ 41, 42.] THIRD DECLENSION. 37 

l4i'?y(», ait()og citdfjoc, D. uvcql avd(jl, A. artQix uvdQa, V. avt^, 
DualN. A. V. ari^E ui8(je, G. D. avigoiv aydfjolv, Plvr. N. 
itvEQfg avdQsg, G. drsQMV ard^MV, D. uvdQoiai, A. avigag 
avdgccg, V. wvc'^fg uvdgfg. For the insertion of 5, see 
above (^ 26. N.). 

3. APHN, 0, Za7«6, and avuv, 6 tj, dog, are declined as fol- 
lows . 

APJIN, G. uQvog, D, uQvl, A. «^va, I?Ma/ N. A. uqvb, G. D. 

a^vol)', Pill?'. N. llgvfg, G. a^ywy, D. agvaai, A, ccgvccg. 
Kvm', G. xi/j^^o'?, D. xt/y/, A. xtVa, V. xi^ov, Dual N. A. V. 

xvrf, G. D. xvrolv, Plur. N. xvi'f?, G. xvvwv, D. xva/, A. 

xvia?, V. xvrsg. 

Note 1. The poets in some instances drop the « also in the 
accusative singular, and in the nominative and genitive plural. 
E. g. ^vyargix, dvyaxQEg, nargojv. 

Note 2. ^Aaxtig, igog, o, star, imitates narrig only in the 
dative plural, aorgaai. 

Note 3. (I) The accent of the full forms of av^g, APHN, 
yaaxrig, ^rjfi^Ttjg, xvwv, naTtig, is regular (^ 35. N. 2), 

For the accent of the vocative of avrig and nai^g, see above 
(38. N. 3). 

The accent of the full forms of d^vyaxrig and ^utj'ttj^ is ir- 
regular in the cases which end in a short syllable. 

(2) In the syncopated genitive and dative the accent is 
placed on the last syllable. Except /Iri^rijrig. 



CONTRACTS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 

§ 4 1. 1. Many nouns of the third declension, of which the 
genitive ends in og pure (§ 16. 4), are contracted. 

2. The contracted accusative plural is always like the c<^- 
tracted nominative plural. 

§ 49. Nouns in t;?, sg, og, gen. log, nouns in ag gen. aog, 
and nouns in o, b)g, gen. ooc, are contracted in those cases, 
in which the termination (§ 35. 1) begins with a vowel. E. g. 
4 



INFLECTION OF WORDS. 



K42. 



S. ^ {galley) 

N. Tgnjgrjg 

G. Tgn]gsog Tgi^govg 

D. Tgirigu Tgirigu 

A. TgLi^gsa Tgirigi] 

V. Tglrigtg 


S. TO {ivall) 

N. Ti7xog 

G. Tsi-xsog Tslxovg 

D. TCt/sV T£/;f«t 

A. T£T;^o? 
V. Tf7;fo? 


D. {uvo galleys) 
N.A.V. TgirigsB TgtT^gi] 
G. D. TgirjgsoLV TgirigoXv 


N.A.V. Tf/^£s tslxri 
G. D. TSixioiv Tsixoiv 


P. {galleys) 


P. {walls) 


N. Tgi^gssg Tgirigug 
G. igiTjgscov TgLtigtav 
D. TgLrig£aL{v) 
A. Tgi'^geag Tgi'^gsig 
V. T^tT^^sf? Tgirjgsig 


N. Tslxsa Tslxr] 
G. TSixif^v TSIXWV 
D. Tslxsai{v) 
A. Tslxsa rslxV 

V. I£i^£« T£4^^ 


S, TO {prize) 

N. ;^«9«? 

G. yigaog yigwg 

D. ^f'^Mt /i'^w 
A. ;/fpa? 


iS^. ^ (cc7io) 
N. ^>' 
G. ^^oog ^;fot;g 
D. '^xoi VX^^ 
A. -^^o'a '^;)fw 
V. i5;jfot 


D. {two prizes) 
N.A.V. ;/g^«s /£(>« 
G. D. yegaoiv ysgmv 


1>. (^?^o echoes) 

N.A.V. ^;.ft; 
G. D. ^;/otJ' 


P. {prizes) 

N. ;/£^«« ;'«V« 
G. ysgdoiv ysgwv 

A. yigaa yiga 
V. /£^aa /e^M 


p. {echoes) 

N. ^^0/ 
G. -^x^^ 

A. 17^01;? 
V. ^xol 



Note 1. Proper names in alirjg, contracted y,Xijg, undergo a 
double contraction in the dative singular, and sometimes in 
the accusative singular. E. g. 
>S^. 6 {Pericles) 
N. nsgmUrig IlsgiitXrjg 
G. IlsgixXisog UsgixUovg 
D. nsgiv.lis'i UsgixXisi II(gii(Xsl 
A. nsgiv.Xisa JlsgiaXia UsgixXi] 
V. nsglvlssg IlsgUXsig 



^ 43.] THIRD DFXLENSION. 39 

Remark. Sometimes proper names in xAfV^c have y.Xiog in 
the genitive, and xWi in the dative. 

The noun V/^wxAsSyc, Hercules, has voc. also "l/Qaxhg, 

Note 2. The ending sa, when preceded by a vowel, is 
generally contracted into a. E. g. v/i^g, v/iia v/loc ' xUog, 
xXha xXeu, 

Note 3. Ksqccq and rigitg, gen. arog, often drop the t 
and are contracted like yiqag. E. g. yjgag, yJgaTog xeguog xsgcjg. 
Kgiag, in the later Greek, has uTog in the genitive. 

Note 4. The dual and plural of nouns in w, ok, follow the 
analogy of the second declension. 

The uncontracted forms of these nouns are not used. 

Note 5. The Epic language often contracts isog inio rjog 
or slog, in into ifC or sli, and esu into ?]« or sla. E. g. 'HgaytXirig, 
-TiXiiog -xA^oc, -xAs'et -xA^t, -xA££« -xAtjm * aniog, anieog anslog, 
anss'i anrj'i or ansli. 

Note 6. In the Ionic dialect, the accusative singular of 
nouns in w, w?, ends in ovv. E. g. Arjiio, A^tovv. 

Note 7. The accent of the contracted accusative singu- 
lar of nouns in w is contrary to the rule (§ 23. N. 3). 

§ 43. 1. Nouns in ig, vg, gen. log, vog, are contracted in 
the dative singular, and in the nominative, accusative, and 
vocative, plural. E. g. 



s. 


{serpent) 


S. 


oifsh) 


N. 


ocpig 


N. 


tz&vg 


G. 


ocpiog 


G. 


IjC^vog ^ 


D. 


OCpii OCfl 


D. 


IX&v'i Ixd^vt 


A. 


o(piv 


A. 


Ix&vv 


V. 


OCpi 


V. 


Ix&v 


D, 


{two sej'pejits) 


D. 


{twofshes) 


N.A.V. 6V'£ 


N.A.V. ly&vs 


G. 


D. OCpioLV 


G. 


D. ixdvoiv 


P. 


(serpents) 


P. 


{fishes) 


N. 


oq>i£g ocfig 


N. 


Ix&vfg Ix&vg 


G. 


OCplWV 


G. 


ix&voov 


D. 


oq)tai{v) 


D. 


ix&vai{v) 


A. 


ocpiag oqXg 


A. 


iX&v(^g Ix^^'S 


V. 


ccpisg oq)tg 


V. 


Ix&vig ix^vg 



40 



[NFLECTION OF WORDS. 



B43. 



2. The nouns o, ?] ^ov?, ox, ^ yQavg, old woman, ^ vavg, ship, 
and 0, Tj oig, sheep, are declined as follows : 

^ovg, G. ^ooq, D. ^di, A. ^ovv, V. /?ov, 2>Mfl!Z N. A. V. §6f, 
G. D. ^ooIj^ P/wr. N. /5o£? /?oi}?, G. /?owr, D. ^ovoi, A. /5o'«? 
/?oi;?, V. ^6tg ^ovg. 

yQavg, G. /Qi'og, D. /^«'/', A. ^'^wt/y, V. ygav, DualN. A. V. 
ygue, G. D. ygaoHv, Plur. N. ygasg ygatg, G. ^^wwr, D. 
yqaval, A. yqaag yqavg, V. ygaeg ygtxvg. 

yai/? is regularly declined like yqavg. The Attics decline 
it as follows : G. jgw?, D. yr/t, A. vavv, V. j^ofv, Plur. N. 
j'^Jf?, G. j'fwr, D. ravoi, A. j'otv?, V. y^f^. 

The lonians change a into ri, as j'?jir?. They have also 
G. viog, A. y^« and via, Dual D. r«oty, Plur. N. ys'f?, A. 

o'ig oig, G. oto? oto?, D- oa ou', A. oiV oiVf Plur. N. cli-'c? ot€j 
oig, G. otwv otwr, D. oeoif A. omc: ot«? otV* 

3. Most nouns in ig, i, vg, v, change i and v into «, in all the 
cases, except the nominative, accusative, and vocative, singu- 
lar. Substantives in ig and vg generally change og into tag. 
E.g. 



S. ^ (state) 


.s. 


TO {mustard) 


N. noXig 


N. 


atvfjTTl 


G. nuXio)g 


G. 


Givriniog 


D. TioXu noXu 


D. 


aiv^ns'l Givr^nti, 


A. JTo'^i)' 


A. 


a iv 1)711 


V. n6U 


V. 


aivrjTii 


D, (ttvo states) 


D. 




N.A.V. nokss 


N.A.V. tfivijTrss 


G. D. jxoifiot*' 


G. 


D. aivTjTtioiv 


P. {states) 


P. 




N. TTo'Asf? nolsig 


N. 


aiv^nsfn Givi^7i7} 


G. TIo'AfWJ' 


G. 


aiVTjTtSOJV 


D. ^oA£ai(v) 


D. 


aiV7j7lSOL{v) 


A. jToAfOf? noliig 


A. 


OLvrima aivi^nr) 


V. TTOASEJ JTo'Acf? 


V. 


aiv^nsa aivvnrj 



§ 44.} THIKD DECLENSION. 41 



8. 


(aibit). 


s. 


TO {citij) 


N. 


nrjxvg 


N. 


aisTV 


G. 


miXfojg 


G. 


Hoteog 


D. 


nrixn nrjxn 


D. 


otOTei aaiu 


A. 


nrixvv 


A. 


aoTV 


V. 


niixv 


V. 


Saw 


D. 


{two cubits) 


D. 


{tioo cities) 


N.A.V. ni/jx^s 


N.A.V. aWee 


G. 


D. nrjxioiv 


G. 


D. aaiioLV 


p. 


{cubits) 


P. 


(cities) 


N. 


Ttrjxsfg nrixug: 


N, 


aarsa aaxr] 


G. 


n/:Xuov 


G. 


auTStav 


D. 


nvx^ui{v) ^ 


D. 


iiaTeai{v) 


A. 


7ti']xmq nrjxsig 


A. 


uaxea aotr] 


V. 


ni^Xseg n^ixug 


V. 


aaxsoc aart} 



Ni-TE 1. In some instances the genitive of nouns in vg and 
V is contracted. E. g. nrjxvg, nrixsMv nr^xbiv ' rjixiav, rjfilasog 
ri^iiaovg. Snch contractions belong to the later Greek. 

Note 2. The genitive singular of neuters in / and o very seldom ends in uf. 

Note 3. According ta the old grammarians, the Attic genitive and dative, 
dual, of nouns in i; and u; end in mv. E. g. ToXts, 9roXiAiv. Such forms, 
however, are not found in any Greek writer of authority. 

Note 4. IIoX/j, in the Epic language, often changes j into n. E.g. gen. 
voXfius for creXsflj. 

Note 5. For the accent of the genitive of nouns in /f, vf, see above 
(§20. N. 2). 

§ 4:4. Nouns in tvg are contracted in the dative singular, 
and in the nominative, accusative, and vocative, plural. They 
generally have wg in the genitive singular. E. g. 

S. 6 {king) P. (kings) 

N. ^aailivg N. /Saadssg ^aaiXslg 

G. ^(xatXiwg G. ^aodscov 

D. ^aadei ^aaiXtl D. ^aaiXsvai{v) 

A. ^aaiXia A. ^aaiXdag (Saailsig 

V. ^aaiXsv V. ^aaiXisg ^aaiXsig 

D, {two kings) 
N.A.V. ^aadis 
G. D. SaaiXioiv 

4* 



42 INFLECTION OP WORDS. [§§ 45, 46. 

Note 1. The genitive and accusative ^ singular, are some- 
times contracted. E. g. IZsigauvg, lleigaiitog Usigaivug' avy 
/gacpsvg, avy/Qacpia avy/Qacprj. 

Note 2. The vowels m are contracted into «, when they 
are preceded by a vowel. E. g. ;^ofi;?, xoecc xoa. 

Note 3. The ending ssg of the nominative plural is some- 
times contracted into ■^g. E. g. InTisvg, Innisg Inn^g. 

Note 4. The lonians very often change e into t], except 
when it is in the diphthong ev. E. g. §aaihvg, ^aadriog. 



INDECLINABLE NOUNS. 

'5> 45. Indeclinable nouns are those which have only one 
form for all the genders, numbers, and cases. Such are, 

1. The names of the letters of the alphabet. E. g. to, tov, 
T«l aXq)tt, alpha. 

2. The cardinal numbers, from 5 to 100 inclusive. E. g. 
oi, al, T«, T(ov, Tolg, jovg, t«? nivis, Jive. 

3. All foreign names not Grecized. E. g. 6, tov, tw, Toy 
'Addfi, Adam. 

ANOMALOUS NOUNS. 

§ 46. 1. All nouns which have, or are supposed to have, 
more than one nominative, are anomalous. Such are the fol- 
lowing. 

oirjdwv, ovog, rj, nightingale, from rONAS, yovarog, yova- 

regular. From AIIJSl, G. xi. Dual yovaxt, yovmoiv, 

urjdovg, V. atidol. Plur. yovaia, yovdiwv, yo- 

ai:dr]g, ov, 6, the infernal re- vaai. 

gions, regular. From Ais, The poets have G. yowog, 

G. aidog, D. atdi, A. Sidoc. D. yowl, Plur. N. A. V. 

aXxTj, 7]g, Tj, strength, regular. yovva, G. yovvtov. 

From AAS:, D. aXy.L yvvri, ij, woman. The rest is 

avdgano5ov, ov, to, slave, regu- from FTNAIa (oxytone), 

lar. From AN/lPAnOT2, yvvamog, yvvaixi, yvvalyca, 

D. Plur. w^/^^aTTo'^fafft (Epic). yvvai, Dual yvvalxs, yvvai- 

yovv, TO, knee. The rest is Ttolv, Plur. yvvatnig, yvvai- 



§46.] 



ANOMALOUS NOUNS. 



43 



Kotv, yvvat^l, yvrcuxag, yvvaX^ 

The genitive and dative 
of all the numbers take the 
accent on the last syllable, 
contrary to the rule (^ 35. 
N. 2). 

da'lg, -idog, i Jight, regular. 
From JA2:, D. dat 

JIi:, see Zevg. 

dogv, TO, spear. The rest is 
from /iOPA2, doguTog, do- 
Qait, Dual doQUTE, dogdjoiv, 
Plur. dogara, dogutiov, do- 

QttOl. 

The poets have G. Sogog, 

dovgog, D. dogly dovgl, Dual 

dovgs, Plur. N. dovga, G. 

dovgtov, D. dovgsaaL (Epic). 
dogv^oog, ov, 6, sjf ear-polisher^ 

regular. From JOPTSO^, 

V. dogvU' 
dxwv, ovog, Tj, image, regular. 

From EIKIl, G. dxovg, A. 

sixco, A. Plur. Hxovg. 
Zsvg, 0, Jupiter, Y.Zsv. From 

JI2, G. JioQ, D. Jil, A. Jt«. 

(§ 37. R. 1.) 
Zi^v, 6, G. Zrjvog, D. Z?jy/, A. 

Zriva, = preceding. 
^tgantav, ovrog, o, attendant, 

regular. From OEPAW, A. 

&iga7ta, N. Plur. ■&iga7tsg. 
ix(og, bigog, ichor, regular. Ace. 

Sing, also ixm. 
xdXag, w or cjog, o, cable. From 

KAAOi:, Plur. N. adXoL, A. 

xaXovg. 
itdgoi Ionic xa^?;, to, head, G. 

xce^TjTOf, D. xdgrjTi, xaga, N. 

Plur. xa^cF. From KPA^, 

G. xgarog, D. xgaxl, A. to or 

Tov ngdra, Plur. G. x^areaj', 

D. x^aoi. From KPAA2, 

G. y.gdajog, D. xgdati, Plur. 



N. xgdara, A. tov? x^aT«?. 
From KAPHAS, G. x«^^'«- 
to?, D. xa^Tjart, Plur. xag^~ 

WTtt. 

xA«(5o?, ov, o, 6c;?/^A, regular. 
From KAA2, D. xAa^/, D. 
Plur. xAa'^foi (Epic). 

xonmvog, ov, 6, partaker, reg- 
ular. From KOIJysiiy, 
Plur. N. y.oivuvsg, A. xoi- 

KPAA2, KPA2, see x«^a. 

xgirov, ov, to, /^7y, regular. 
From KPIN02, Plur. N. 
xgivia, D. xglvsoi. 

xgoxri, fjg, ^, w^oq/", regular. 
From KPOa, A. x^o'xa. 

/l«a? contracted Ac??, o, s/owe, 
G. Xdaog Xaog, D. Aaai," Aai', 
A. Xdav lav, Dual. A«a« Aces, 
Plur. N. A«ce£? A«e?, G. ladtav 
Xdav, D. A«eofft (Epic). From 
AAAS{--), G. Aaov. 

fidgxvg, o, witness, A. pdgivv, 
D. Plur. i^idgTvai. From 
MAPTTP, fidgxvgog, fxdgxv- 
gi, &C. 

(idaxi^, yog, ^, scourge, regular. 
From MANTIS, D. /z«0Tr 
(contracted from fidaxu), A. 

ovsigov, TO, dream. The rest is 
from ONJEIPAS, ovugaxoc, 
ovdgnxi. Dual ovslgaxs, ovii- 
gdxoLV, Plur. ovslgaxa, oni- 
gdxMv, ovslgaai. 

ovg, TO, ear. The rest is from 
the Doric wc, wto?, cut/. Dual 

WTS, tOTOty, Plur. WTtt, «Tt»>', 

(aai. 
ngsa^vg, o, old man., A. Tigi^ 
a^vv, V. ngia^v. The rest is 
from TXQEa^vxrjg, ov. 

In Hesiod a Norn. Plur. 
ngia/^Tjtg occurs. 



44 



INFLECTION OF WORDS. 



[§ 46. 



ngia/Svg, o, ambassador, Plur. 

N. A. V. nQsa/Sstg, G. ngs~ 

a^ecav, D. nQea^sat. The rest 

is from 7igsof3svT)]g, ov. 
TTQOfjojTiov, OV, To,face, regular. 

From nP02SLnA2, Plur. 

IN. TtgoacoTzara, D. nQoacana- 

ai. 
ngoxoogy ov, tj, ewer, regular. 

From nP0X0T2, D. Plur. 

nQoxovoL (like ^oval from 
Jovg). ^ 
nvQ, nvQog, nvgl, to, fire. From 

nrPON, Plur. N. A. nvga, 

G. nvgav, D, nvQoXg. 
aawQ, TO. The rest is from 

2KA2, axarog, axarl, &LC. 
axaywv, ovog, ri, drop, regular. 

From 2TAa, N. Plur. ard- 

ysg. 
arlxog, ov, o, row, regular. 



From ^ 2TIS, au%6g, axixl, 

&c. 
tamg, w, o, peacock, regular. 

From TA02, N. Plur. tuoL 
vd(og, TO, water. The rest is 

from "rJA^, vdaTog, iidaxh 

&LC. 

From vdog, D. Sing, vdsi 
(Epic). 

vlog, ov, 0, son, regular. From 
"riET2, G. vUog, &LC. like 
^aaiUvg. From "Tiy; come 
the Epic G. vlog, D. i;!/, A. 
via. Dual. i^Is, Plur. N* i/If?, 
D. vlsuL and vlaai, A. vta?. 

vGixlvr], rig, ?/, battle, regular. 
From "r:SMI2, D. ^or^m. 

/fAi^wV, oVo?, ^, swallow, regu- 
lar. From XEAI/JIi, V. 

_ X^liSol- _ 

(ag, see ovj. 



2. Nouns, which have only one nominative, but more than 
one form for any of the other cases, are anomalous. Such 
are the following : 



aXojg, (o or uog, ^, threshing- 
floor. 

yiXoig, (a or (oiog, 6, laughter. 

■&s^ig, tog or iTog or idog or 
larog, t], justice. 

Idgwg, w or mtog, o, sweat. 

Hlug, eidog, ^, Jcey. Also Ace. 
Sing, ulsiv, A. V. Plur. 
nXug, 

^i^TQcog, w or <aog, 6, maternal 
uncle. 



y-VHrjg, ov or rjTog, o, mushroom, 

oQvig, l^og, 6, ^, bird, regular. 
In the Plur. also N. A. og^ 
vVg or oQVSig, G. oQVEtav* 

TiaTQcog, (o or ojog, 6, paternal 
uncle. 

arig, eog or rjTog, 6, moth. 

XHQ, x^^Qog and x^Qog, -^, handy 
D. Plur. always x^Q<jl- The 
forms G. x^Qog, D. x^Qh Dual 
X^iQolv, are poetic. 



Note 1. All proper names in fjg gen. eog (§ 42), have rj or 
rjv in the accusative singular. E. g. 

lAgiaTocpdvrjg, sog ace. 'AgioToqxxvr] and rjv. 

Note 2. Some nouns in ig have t^o? or log in the genitire. 
fxfjvvg, gen. ixr^vidog or (iriyiog, resentment. 



<5§ 47, 48.] ADJECTIVES. ^ 45 

Note 3. In the Ionic dialect, the accusative singular of 
nouns in r^q gen, ov, often ends in ««. E. g. Fvyi^g, ov, ace. 
Fvyta for rvyijv. 

Note 4. A few proper names in rjg, ovg, and vg, are de- 
clined according to the following examples : 

'lavvrjg, G. 'larvrj, D. ^lavrjj, A. ^lavvrjv, V. 'lavvij. 
rkovg^ G. rkov, D. rkov,' A. rlovv, V. rAoi;. • 
Jiovvg, G. /dlOVV, D. JlOVV, A. /jlOVVV, V. Jtovv. 

DEFECTIVE NOUNS. 

§47'. Defective nouns are those of which only some of the 
cases are in use. Such are the following : 

iifjaiai, av, ol, Etesian winds. ^Olvfima, (ov, ra, Olympic 

No singular. games. No singular, 

^^a, an A. Plur. used only in ovaq, to, dream, used only in 

the formula, ^^a (pegstv, to the N. and A. Sing. 

show favor. OS or OSSON, to, eye. Dual 

"la&fiia, wv, ra, Isthmian games. N. A. oaaei Plur. G. oaatov, 

No singular. D. Saaoig, old oaaoiai. 

Xig, o, /ion, A. Xtv. o(pdog, to, advantage, used 

^Z.^", o, J?ne Zinen, D. Xitl, A. only in the N. Sing. 

AtTw. IJv&Lu, wv, Ta, Pythian games. 

fidXr}, 7)g, 71, armpit, used only No singular. 

in the phrase vno (xaXrjg, xdv, used only in the formula 

under the arm, clandestinely. w xdv, O thou. 

ISfi^m, b)v, Ta, Nemean games, vnag, to, waking, as opposed 

No singular. to ovaq, used only in the 

NVPi ^, snow, only A. vlq)a, N. and A. Sing. 

ADJECTIVES. 

^48. 1. In adjectives of three endings, the 
feminine is always of the first declension ; the mas- 
culine and the neuter are either of the second or 
of the third. 

2. Adjectives of two endings are either of the 
second or of the third declension ; the feminine 
is the same with the masculine. 



46 



INFLECTION OF WORDS. 



[§49. 



3. Adjectives of one ending are either of the first 
or of the third declension. Such adjectives are 
either masculine, feminine, or common. 

ADJECTIVES IN o^. 



5 49.' 1. Most adjectives in og have three endings, og, rj, ov. 
E. g. aocpog, aocpiqy aocpov. 

When og is preceded by a vowel or by q, the feminine 
has a instead of ri. E. g. a^iog, a^la, a^iov' fiaxQog., y,anQ(Xf 
/xaxgov. 



is. h {tmse) 


71 {wise) 


TO {wise) 


N. oocpog 
G. aocpov 
D. aocpM 


aocpri 

aocpijg 

aocprj 


aocpov 
aocpov 
aocpM 


A. aocpov 


aocpov 


aocpov 


V. ao(pi 


aocpi] 


aocpov 


D. 






N.A.V. aogjol 


aocpd 


aocpco 


G. D. aocpolv 


aocpatv 


aocpolv 


P. 






N. aocpol 


Gocpal 


aocpoL 


G. aocpwv 
D. aocpolg 


aocpov 
csoq)alg 


aocpov 
aocpolg 


A. aocpovg 


aocpag 


aocpd 


V. aocpol 


aocpal 


aocpd ^ 


So all PARTICIPLES 


in og. E. g. 


TDmSfisyog, rvuTC 


xvnjo^ivov. 






S. {worthy) 


^ {worthy) 


to {worthy) 


N. ^'Itos 


«!/« 


a^Lov 


G. «|/ov 


«|/a? 


dUov 


D. «|/w 


«|/a 


a^lca 


A. w^ioi' 


a^lav 


a^iov 


V. &bB 


a^a 


a^iov 


D. 






N.A.V. wl^ft) 


^|/« 


«|/w 


G. D. S^Uoiv 


af/a/y 


d^loLV 



<5 49.'! ADJECTIVES. 47 



•1 




ADJECTIVES. 




p. 








N. 


U^LOl 


altai 


ajia 


G. 


a|/wv 


alloiv 


a^lwv 


D. 


a^loig 


uUctig 


a^ioig 


A. 


a^lovg 


a^lag 


alia 


V. 




a^iuL 


alia 



Note 1. Adjectives in oog have ^ in the feminine. Except 
when oog is preceded by q. E. g. 

anXoog, anlot], anXoov 
a&Qoog, a&goa, a&goov. 

2. Many adjectives in og have only two endings, og, ov. 
E. g. r^ovxog, riavxov. 

Particularly, compound adjectives in og have two endings 
E. g. sTTL^r^ixLog, ini^n'i}iiov. 

But compound adjectives in xog have three endings. 
S. 6, -^ (quiet) TO (quiet) 



N. -^'{ji;;)/o? 


rjavxov 


G. 7javxov 


71OVX0V 


D. -^ay^fw 


■^ovxco 


A. riavxov 


riavxov 


V. '^'(n;;^E 


riavxov 


7>. 




N.A.V.^au^w 


riavxo) 


G. D. -^fft^^oiv 


riav-^oiv 


P. 




N, -^(TVj^Oi 


riavxa 


G. ^at;;f£«v 


riavxo)v 


D. riovxoig 


^lavxoig 


A. Tjavxovg 


javxa 


V. ijavxot 


■ijavxa 



Note 2. In Attic writers and in the poets, many adjec- 
tives in og, which commonly have three endings, are found 
with only two. E g. 6, ri ikEv&sQog, to iUvd^sgov, free. 

Note 3. The ending « of the feminine is long. Except 
the feminine of Slog, divine, and a few others. 

Note 4. For the accent of the genitive plural of the feminine of bary- 
tone adjectives and participles in as, see above (§ 31. N. 2). 



48 



NFLECTION OF WORDS. 



[§§50,51. 



3. Adjectives ia soq, ta, sov, and oog, orj, oov, are contracted 

(§§32: 34). E.g. ' 

XQVOEog XQ^oovg, XQ^f^^^i XQ^^Vy XQ^^^ov %gvaovv, G. XQ^<^^ov 

XQvaov, XQ^'Jsccg xQ^^V'^j golden. 
UQyvQwg UQyvQOvg, ugyvqia agyvQa, ufjyvgsov agyvQavv, G. 

aQyVQiOV agyvQov, agyvgiag dgyvgag, of silver. 
unXoog anlovg, uiikori ankij, anXoov ankovv, G. anloov anXov, 

auXoTig wttAtjc, simple. 

Note 5. For the accent of some of the contracted forms of adjectives in 
loj, oos, see above (§ 34. N. 2). 

ADJECTIVES IN S12. 



§ 50. Adjectives in (x)g have two endings, coc, fov. They 
are declined like vtwg and wVw/fw*' (§ 33). E. g. fi/'/ew?, 
BvyBiav. 

TO {fertile) 

Evysuy 

tvysco 

svyfM 

svyecov 

tvyswv 



Evytxa 
ivyeMV 



S. 0, l] 


{fertile) 


N. 


ivysbog 


G. 


I vy£(o 


D. 


ivysM 


A, 


tvysoiv 


V. 


svyecag 


D. 




N.A.\/ 


\ svyso) 


G. D. 


svysuv 


P. 




N. 


ivyerx) 


G. 


evysbip 


D. 


evysojg 


A. 


svyiO)g 


V. 


evy£(o 



tvyita 

tvyEOJV 

Evyswg 

ivysca 

Bvyso) 



ADJECTIVES IN r^. 

§51. Adjectives in i;?, gen. sog, have three endings, vft 
tia, V. E. g. yXvxvg, yXvutta, yXvy.v. 



s. 


{sweet) 


tj {sweet) 


TO {sweet) 


N. 


yXvxvg 


yXvxsia 


yXvuv 


G. 


yXvysog 


yXvuslag 


yXvxiog 


D. 


yXvuEv yXvy.u 


yXvHsln 


yXvyJ'C yXvuH 


A. 


yXvxvv 


yXvxtiav 


yXvxv 


V. 


yXvHV 


yXvxtla 


yXvxv 



§§ 52, 53.] 


ADJECTIVES. 




49 


D. 










^.AN.yXvuh 


yXvxsia 




yXvxis 


G. G. 


;'Ai'x£otv 


yXvxsiaiv 




yXvxioLV 


P. 










N. 


yXvxisg yXvxsig 


yXvxstat 




yXvxia 


G. 


yXvx£b)v 


yXvxHOJV 




yXvxicov 


D. 


yXvxiai{v) 


yXvxsiaig 




yXvxsai{v) 


A. 


yXvxiag yXvxetg 


yXvxuag 




yXvxea 


V. 


yXvxieg yXvxeig 


yXvxelat 




yXvxsa 


Note 1. 


The Ionics mak 


e fern, ta 


or 


iij. E.g. ^udvg, 


§a&ia or ^a&irj. 








Note 2. 


The poets sometimes have mas 


and fem, r?, neut. 


V. E. g. 


, ?; tjdvg, TO Tidv. 









ADJECTIVES IN h^ AND 72'. 

§ 5S« 1. Adjectives in ijc, gen. £o?, have two endings, 
Tjg, f?. E. g. «A7ji^i??, aXij&eg. 



S. o, i5 (^^Me) 

N. «A?j &i^g 

G. aXi^diog aXrj^ovg 

D. uXrjx^u vcXrjd^sl 

A. aXi]dia aXr^d'l^ 

v. «A??^f? 

I>. 

N.A.V. «A7j^£€ «A??^^ 

G. D. aXrj&soiv aXi]9oiv 

P, 

N. aXrjdieg aXrjdHg 

G. alrj&iwv oiXi]&d)v 

D. aXrj&eai{v) 

A. aXrj&sag aXrj&ug 

V. aXr^^ieg aXri&ug 

2. Adjectives in ic, gen. toe, 
rj()/?, r^^t, G. I'Joto?, knowing. 



TO {true) 
aXrjd^ig 

uXtjf^iog aXrjd^ovg 
aXrjxfB'i uXr^d^d 
aXrj&sg 
aXrj&ig 

aXrj&ss uXri&ri 
oiXr^dioiv aX^d^oXv 

aXrjdsa aXti&i] 
aXrj&^av aXi]&a)V 
uX7]-S^tai{v) 
aXrj&ia aXrj\}ri 
uXrjdia aXrj&ij 

have two endings, ig, i, E. g. 



ADJECTIVES IN AS, E12:, im, 0T2, T2, SIN, 112. 

§ 53. I. Adjectives in «?, gen. avjogj have three endings, 
ag, uaa, av. E. g. nac> naaa, nav. 
5 



50 



INFLECTION OF WORDS. 



[§53. 



N. 


{all) 
nag 


^{all) 
Ttaaoc 


10 


(all) 
ndv 


G. 


navTog 


nd(ji]g 




navzoq 


D. 
A. 
V. 


Tiavil 
ndvTu 
nag 


7i(xar] 

Tiixaav 

Tidaa 




navil 

ndv 

ndv 


D. 










N.A.V.Tittvre 
G.D. ndrioiv 


ndaa 
ndaaiv 




ndi'xs 
ndv JO IV 


P, 










N. 


navtfg 


Tidaai 




ndvTCX 


G. 
D. 


ndvTOJV 
7taai{v) 


nccatov 
naaaig 




ndvTbiV 
ndai{v) 


A. 


naving 


ndaag 




ndvxa 


V. 


ndvTsg 


ndaai 




ndvra 


So all 


PARTICIPLES in (xg. E, g. Tvipag, 


tJ(//i 


Dfffa, ^v^|J^ 


Tvii/avTog. 











Remark 1. These two adjectives in cig, y,iXag and xdXagt 
have aiva in the feminine. Thus, 

fisXug, fisXaiva, f^eXar, G. fieXavoc, black. 
rdXag, TdXaiva, xdXfxv, G. TaXarog, unfortunate. 



2. Adjectives in ug 


, ger 


1. svrog, have 


three endings, 


i<so(x, fv. 


E. g. xaqhig, 


X(yQifuaa, x'^Q^^^- 




S. h 


{graceful) 


V 


{graceful) 


TO (graceful) 


N. 


X(^i>lsig 




XriQuaaa 


Xrx()''sv 


G. 


X(^(jleyTog 




XnQLsa(Ji]g 


XUQttvxog 


D. 


X(^(jl(VTt 




XifQiiaari 


X(tQhvxi 


A. 


XaQlnra, 




X(i()leoattV 


XiioUv 


V. 


XaQisv 




Xl^QlfOUOC 


XU(jUv 


D. 










N.A.V.;^a^a}'T£ 




XctQtioaa 


XngtBvxs 


G. D. 


XttQiiVTOLV 




XctQisaaaiv 


XOtQlSVXOtV 


P. 










N. 


X(y.(iUvxf.g 




XotQuaani 


Xctglsvxa 


G. 


XCtQLBVTOiV 




XfXQisaawv 


Xngiivxcov 


D. 


XaQhai{v) 




X^y-QiEoaaig 


Xagl8ai{v) 


A. 


XnoUviag 




XoiQiiaaag 


XagUvxa 


V. 


XagUvTsg 




XngUGoai 


Xoiglevxa 



§53.] 



ADJECTIVES. 



51 



Note I. The endings ijsig, i]foaa, tjev, are contracted into 
fjg, rjoaa, rjv. E. g. 

TifiT^sig Ttfifjg, Tifxr,eaaa tLfiijaocij nixtjev rifirjv, G. rifirjevTog 
TiiurjvTog, valuable. 

The endings oBig, osaaa, oev, are contracted into ovg, ovaaa, 
ovv. E. g. 

nXaxofig nXaxovc, nXaxosoaa nXayovaaa, nXaxosv nXaxovVf <jr. 
nXuxosvTog nXuxovnog, fiat. 

Remark 2. The dative plural of adjectives in tn forms an exception to 
the general rule (§ 1 2. 5). 

3. Participles in dg have three endings, ug, itaa, iv. E. g. 
jid^ilg, Tc&tloa, ri&iv. 



S. 6 (placing) 


V {placing) 


x6 (placing) 


N. 7L&slg 


TL&slaa 


xidiv 


G. xid^ivTog 


Tid^ilarig 


xi&ivxog 


D. tid^ivn 


Ti&siat] 


xi^evxv 


A. Tt&evia 


Ti&Hoav 


xi^iv 


V. Tl^f/? 


Ti&siaa 


xi&iv 


1>. 






N.A.V.Tt^fVTS 


ri&daa 


xi&ivxi 


G. D. ji^ivroiv 


Ti&slaaLV 


Xi&ivXOLV 


P. 






N. Ti^ivxBg 


TiStioai 


TL&ivxa 


G. rv&ivtmv 


ZL-&Bio(av 


xt&ivx(ov 


D. ri^uaiiy) 


XL&uaaig 


xi&tcaL(v) 


A. Ti&ivrccg 


xiddaag 


XL&ivxa 


V. rid^irxeg 


Xt&U(J(Xi 


XL&ivia 



4. There are but two adjectives in rjv ' 6 xeqtjv, ^ xiquvoi, 
TO xtQBVy G. xsQsvog, tcnclcr ; and 6 agarjv or ocqqtjVj xo agasv or 
aQQSv, G. agatvog or aggsvog, male. 

5. Participles in or? have three endings, ovg, ovaa, oV. 
E. g. didovg, didovoa, didov. 



s. 


(giving) 


V (giving) 


xo (giving) 


N. 


didovg 


didovaa 


didov 


G. 


didovxog 


didovarjg 


didovxog 


D. 


didovxi 


didovatj 


didovn 


A. 


didovxa 


didovaav 


didov 


V. 


didovg 


didovaa 


didov 



52 



INFLECTION OF WORDS. 



B53. 



i>. 






N.A.Y.didSvrs 


5i(5ov(/« 


didovTE 


G. D. dtdovToiv 


^t^OUtfttil' 


didovTOiv 


P. 






N. didovTsg 


5t5oi;ffat 


didovta 


G. didovTcov 


(^i^OUffWV 


didovTitiV 


D. didovai{v) 


didovaaig 


didovat,{v) 


A. didovTag 


didovoag 


didovTce. 


V. 5/(5oVTf? 


didovaai 


didovia 



6. Participles in vg have three endings, vg, vau, vv. E. g. 
dsixvvg, dsiavvaa, dtixvvv. 



S. 6 


(showing) 


-q (sJiowing) 


TO {sJioiving) 


N. 


dsLKvvg 


dsixvvaa 


dsixvvv 


G. 


dsLxvvvTog 


dsixrvai-jg 


duxvvvTog 


D. 


dsiXVVVTt 


8sixvvot] 


duxvvvri, 


A. 


dsixvvvia 


dstxvvaav 


deixvvv 


V. 


dsixvvg 


8uxvvaa 


duxvvv 


D. 








N.A.Y.dfliCVVVTS 


dsixvvaa 


5hxvvvts 


G. D. 


dsixvyvToiv 


duxvvaaiv 


deixvvvTOiv 


P. 








N. 


dsixvvvTsg 


Seixvvaoci, 


SuxvvvTa 


G. 


dsiXVVVTMV 


duxvvoMV 


dsixvvvTmv 


D. 


dsrAVvai{v) 


dsixvvaaig 


dHxvvai{v) 


A. 


dsixvvviag 


dsixvvaag 


deixvvvTa 


V. 


dsixvvvTsg 


dsixvvoai 


deixvvvra 


7. Adjectives in wr, gen. 


. ovTog, have three 


endings, mv, ovaa, 


. E.g. 


kxwv, exovaa, exov. 




^. 


{willing) 


■^ (willing) 


TO (willing) 


N. 


SXOiV 


kxovoa 


£x6v 


G. 


sxovTog 


exovarjg 


kxovTog 


D. 


kxavu 


exovatj 


exovn 


A. 


kxOVTU 


Ixovoav 


exov 


V. 


kxwv 


kxovaa 


exov 


D. 








N.A.VixoVw 


sxovaa 


exovTS 


G D. 


exovTOiv 


kxovaaiv 


hxovxoiv 



§53. 



P. 

N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 



£xovTeg 
iaovxbiv 
hxovoii^v) 
inoviag 



ADJECTIVES. 



knovaau 
sxovawv 



53 



sxovaaig 
kxovaag 



exovja 
exovTwv 
sxovai{v) 
ixovTct 
ixovTOt / 



So all PARTICIPLES in my. E. g. TvnxiaVt xvnxovaa, tvtixov, 
G. TV7ixovxog//q)iXe(i}r, qiXsovaa, qnXiov, G. cpUeovxog, contracted 
(fiXiJr, qpt/ouffa, (fdovv, G. cpilovvrog. 

NoTK 2. The feminine of adjectives in a?, i/j, «wj, Fj, a;y, gen, »r»f, is 
formed by dropping oj of the genitive, and annexing va. E. g. 

fern. fraira (§ 12. 5) 
" TtB-iTra. I ibid.) 



ixuv, Ikovtos 



5;5ow<ra (ibid.) 
5£<xvi/<ra (ibid.) 
tKoZtra (ibid.) 
;t;a^;£<r<ra (§ 12. N. 2). 



8. Adjectives in wv, gen. oj'o?, have two endings, mv, ov. 
E.g. 



S. 6, 
N. 


Txincap 


G. 


ninovog 


D. 


TxinovL 


A. 


Tiinova 


V. 


ninov 


D. 




N.A.Y.neTiovs 
G. D. ninovoLV 


P, 




N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 


Ttinong 
nsTxovav 
71 inoaiiv) 
Ttinovag 


V. 


TieTiovsg 



TO (ripe) 

nsTtov 

ninovog 

ninovi 

ninov 

ninov 



nsnovs 
nsnovoiv 



nenova 

nsnovcov 

ninoGiiy) 

ninova 

ninova 



9. Participles in mg have tnree endings, w?, via, 6g, 
Ttxvcpwg, Texv(pvla, Tnvq)6g, having' struck. 



E. 



m^ 



INFLECTION OF WORDS. 



m 54, 55. 



s. 


c 



c 


TO 


N. 


TETVCpOjg 


TSTvq)v7a 


XExvcpog 


G. 


TsrvqiOTog 


TSTVcpvlag 


xsxvcpoxog 


D. 


TETV(p6xL 


TSlV(f>vl(X 


texvcpoxi 


A. 


TETVcpoxa 


Ttxvfpvlav 


jsxv(p6g 


V. 


TeTV(f(6g 


TSTVcpvioi 


tsxvcpog 


D. 








N. A. V. TEJVCpOTB 


Tixvcpvla 


Tsxvcpoxs 


G D. 


rSTVCpOTOlV 


TsxvcpviaLV 


TSXVCpOXOlV 


P. 








N. 


tsivq)6Tsg 


TSXVCpvluL 


xfxvcpoxa 


G. 


-ISlVCpOTOJV 


Tixvcpvmv 


xsxvcpoxtov 


D. 


TSTVcp6ai{v) 


TBxvcpvtaig 


xsxvcp6ai(v) 


A. 


TSTVCpOXUg 


Tsxvcfvlag 


Tixvcpoxa 


V. 


TSTVCpOTSg 


TExvcpvlai 


TBXVCfOXCl 



ADJECTIVES OF ONE ENDING. 

§ 54. The following are some of the adjectives which have 
only one ending : 6 «/?A?jV» '^xog ' o, -^ a^gtog, axog ' 6, ^ ayvwgj 
wxog ' 6, rj udfxi^g, rjxog' 6, 17 otiylXiipf nog' 6, ^ al'^oxp, nog ' 6 
al&ojv, o}vog ' 6 axfxrjg, rjxog ' 0, ^ uval-Aig, idog ' 0, 1] wtittjV, rjvog * 
6, 17 aQyrjg, -jjiog or exog ' 0, 7] uQna^, yog ' o /?A«|, xog ' 0, t} 
dgofivcg, ddog ' 6 ed^ilovxj'ig, ov ' o, rj enrilv^, yog ' 0, ^ snrjXvgf 
vdog' ^ enlxf^, nog' 0, 7] iVQiv, ivog' 0, ^ evaiip, nog' 6, ^ rjh^, 
yog ' 0, rj rjfit&vrig, ijxog ' o, '^ Inndg, ddog ' 6 /ndxag, agog ' 0, 7} 
fittXQUiOJV, Mvog ' 6, 7] (iay.Qavxr]v, srog ' 0, tj ^mvv^, x^? ' o, r] 
vofzdg, ddog ' 6, 73 naqn^lwip, nog ' o, 7} naganXr}^, yog ' nsvtjg, 
tjxog ' 6 noXvd'i^, xog ' 6 nQ0^X7]g, ijxog ' 0, ij anogdg, ddog ' 0, rj 
(polvi^. 

Add to these the compounds of -^gl^, ^(oga^, naXg^ xdg, 
E. g. ogx^oOgi^, xgixog ' 6, ^ zalXlnaig, aidog ' o, ^ fiaxgoxeig, 
sigog. 

Note. Some of these are also used as neuters, but only in the genitive and 
dative. 

COMPOUND ADJECTIVES. 



§ 55. Compound adjectives, of which the last component 
part is a substantive, follow the declension of that substantive. 



<J 56.] COMPOUND ADJECTIVES. 56 

Such adjectives may have a neuter, when it can be formed 

after the same analogy. E. g. 

ivxotQig, I, G. iTog, graceful^ from tv, x(^Q^9> ^^og 
ivsXnig, I, G. idog, hopeful, from iv, iXnig, l8og 
dlnovg, ovv, G. o(5o?, two-footed^ from dig, novg, nodog 
ttdanQvg, v, G. roc, tearless, from «-, ddxgv, vog 
ivdulfiixiv, ov, G. ovog, happy, from «r, dalfxuv, ovog _ 
uiytdi^TOjQ, og, G. oQog, magnanimous, from ^s'/a?, r^xoq. 

Note 1. The compounds of noXig generally have idog in the 
genitive. E. g. 

anoXig, i, G. idog, vagabond. 

Note 2. The compounds of fii^irjg, ttut^q, and cpg^v mind, 
change ij into w. E. g. 

ui.a]T(ag, og, G. o^o?, motherless 
dndxwg, og, G. ogog, fatherless 
oojcpgoov, ov, G. o?'o^, discreet. 

Note 3. The compounds of ;/£7w?, laughter, and jcs'^ag, A(W», 
are either of the second or third declension. E. g. 
(piXoysXojg, av, G. w or (oiog,fond of laughter 
tglxsgcog, (ov, G. w or uiog, having three horns. 

ANOMALOUS AND DEFECTIVE ADJECTIVES. 

§ 5G» The following list contains most of the anomalous 
and defective adjectives. 

ivg and ^vg, neut. iv and i]v, good, G. iijog, A. ivv and ^vV, neut. 

Plur. G. ivioiv, of good things. 

The neuter ev, contracted from c'y, means, well. 
^cog, Nom. mas. living, alive. The rest is from the regular ^loog, 

rj, 6v. 
usyag, ptydXr], (xiya, great, is declined in the following manner! 

TO {great) 
fisya 
fisydXov 
fisydXa 
fisycc 
^iya 



fxeydXbi 
usydXoiv 



iS. [great) 


V {great) 


N. fisyag 
G. fitydXov 
D. (jsydX(o 
A. fisyav 
V. fisydXs 


HiydXri 

fisydXrjg 

fi^ydXt] 

fisydXrjV 

fisydXrj 


D. 




N.A.V. (AsydXoi 
G. D. fisydXotv 


fifydXa 
uiyaXaiv 



56 



INFLECTION OF WORDS* 



[§56. 



P. 

N. ^syaXoi (ityalm fitydXa 

G. ^sydkMV fjisydkojv fieydlav 

D. fisydloig ^eydkatg /AsydXoig 

A. [liydlovg (isydXag fitydkcc 

V. fisydXoi fjisydkuL fisydla 

Observe, that all the cases, except the nominative and 
accusative singular, masculine and neuter, come from the 
obsolete MEFAAO^. 

The vocative singular ^xfydh is very rare. 

nXmg,full, borrows its feminine from nliog. Thus, nlitog, nXia, 
nUtav. In composition it has only two endings, wg, av, (§ 50.) 

noXvg, noXXij, noXv, much, is declined as follows : 



s. 


(much) 


ri {inuch) 


TO {much) 


N. 


noXvg 


noXXr^ 


noXv 


G. 


noXlov 


noXXrjg 


noXXov 


D. 


noXXia 


noXXfj 


noXXw 


A. 


noXvv 


noXX^v 


noXv 


P. 


{many 


{many) 


(many) 


N. 


noXXol 


TtoXXal 


noXXd 


G. 


TtoXXwv 


noXXoJf 


noXXwv 


D. 


noXXolg 


noXXalg 


TToXXolg 


A. 


noXXovg 


noXXdg 


noXXd 



The dual is of course wanting. 

Observe, that all the cases, except the nominative and 
accusative singular, masculine and neuter, come from noXXogt 
r\^ 6v, which is used by the lonians. 

The epic poets decline noXvg like yXvuvg' thus, noXvg, noXua, 
Tiolv, G. noXiog. 

ngaog, meeJc, borrows its feminine and neuter from nQuvg, ngaua, 

TtQav, G. ngasog. 
Gc^g, 0, ^, safe, neut. gmv, A. omv, A. Plur. aug, neut. Plur.^aa, 

the rest from the regular aSog, a, ov. The feminine ad is 

rare. 
(pgovdog, rj, ov, gone, used only in the Nominative, of all genders 

and numbers. 



§ 57.] DECREES OF COMPARISON. 57 

DEGREES OF CO]\IPARISON. 

COMPARISON BY TEP02, TAT02. 

^57. 1. Adjectives in og are compared by dropping g, 
and annexing tc^oc for the comparative, and jazoq for the 
superlative. If the penult of the positive be short, o is 
changed into w. E. g. 

aocpog, leisCy aocpwiegog, reiser, ooqxxnaTog, wisest 
ciuiAog, dishonored, uTt^ioTsoog, uTifxoiuTog 
a£fiv6g, venerable, asuvoTsgog, Gt^voxaxog. 

Note 1. In general, o remains unaltered when it is pre- 
ceded by a mute and a liquid. (^ 17. 3.) E. g. nvxvog, dense, 
Ttvxrotfgog, nvxvoTUTog. 

Remark 1. In a few instances Homer changes a into u even when the 
penult of the positive is long. E. g. xaxo%iiios, xaxo^utun^oi. 

Note 2. A few adjectives in og are compared according to 

the following examples : 

epilog, (filiegog, cpiXiaTog 
[xiaog, fisaaixegog, (isaaiTUiog 
anovdalog, anovduLsorsQog, anovduiiararog 
oifjocpdyog, 6ipo(f}ayiatsgog, oipocptt/lGTaTog. 

Remark 2. Those in oog are always compared by saisgog, 

tOTUTOg. E. g. 

anXoog, ankoioTsgog, anXoiaiaxog, contracted anXovajigog, 
anXovoTUTog. 

2. Adjectives in vg, gen. sog, are compared by dropping?, and 
annexing rsgog, xaiog. E. g. 

otvg, sharp, o^vrsgog, o^viazog. 

3. These two adjectives, iniXag and rdXag, drop og of the 
genitive, and annex isgog, tutoq. Thus, 

fiiXag, avog, fisXavrsgog, fieXdvTaTog 
jdXag, avog, TuXdvTsgog, TaXdvTatog. 

4. Adjectives in rjg gen. to?, and sig gen. svTog, shorten ijg 
and Big into eg, and annex xsgog, rarog. E. g. 

aXrj&i^g, aXrj&iatsgog, dXr]&eaTaTog 
Xccgleig, xf^Qi^oisgog, ^a^f£(jTaTO?. 



58 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [^ 58, 

Note 3. T"£i/B«f, £«?, false^ has also comparative '^^iv^iffni^os. 

IJivijs, JJT9?, j)oo7:, follows the analogy of adjectives in ^j, gera. toj * thus, 

VtViffTiPOS) ^iviffTXTOg. 

5. Adjectives in wv, gen. orog, drop og of the genitive, and 
annex soisgog, saiarog. E. g. 

Gwcpgtjv, ovog, UMcpQovtareQog, aejcpgoviaiaTog./ ] 

6. The adjectives agnu^, a;i(XQig, /5A«|, ftdaaQ,, are compared 
as follows : 

ugna^, yog, agTtayloTSQog 
a^ngig, a%agiaTsgog 
/?A«^, xog, fiXaxloTsgog, ^laxloTaiog 
[idaag, (mitixgifgog, fiaxugiarog. 

Note 4. Substantives denoting an employment or character 
are sometimes compared like adjectives. E. g. paodevg, king, 
^aadsvxegog, more kingly, (^aailtviajog, most kingly ; xUmTjg, 
thief, nXsmloTiXTog, very thievish. 

Note 5, The pronouns do not admit of different degrees in tlieir significa- 
tion. Nevertheless the comedians, for the sake of exciting laughter, compare 
avTof in the following manner : avros, himself, auTori^ot, himself-er, avTOTocTos, 
himself-est, ipsissimus. 

COMPARISON BY IJIN, I2T02. 

§ 58, 1. Some adjectives in vg drop this ending, and annex 
Imv for the comparative, and laiog for the superlative. E. g. 
ri8vg, pleasant, '^dlcov, TjdiaTog' 

2. Comparatives in av are declined according to the follow- 
ing example : 



S.6,7} (pkasanter) 

N. TjdiMV 

G. rjdlovog 

D. rjdlovi 

A. rjdlova rjdla 


TO (pkasanter) 

TjdlOV 

^diovog 
tidlovL 

TjdlOV 


D. 




N. A. fjdlovs 
G. D. ridiovoiv 


^dlovs 
ridiovoit 


P. 




N. r,8lovig ^dlovg 

G. ^diovcov 

D. 7idloat{v) 

A. Tjdlovag rjdlovg 


^dlova rjdlw 
•^Siovcov 
■^8loaL(v) 
"^dlovcc rid lea 



<J 59.] DKCKEfTS QP COMPARISON. 59 

Observe, that the accusative singular masculine and feminine, 
and the nominative and accusative plural of all genders, drop 
the )', and contract the two last syllables. 

Note 1. A few adjectives in w? form their comparative by dropping the last 
sj'llable t>f the positive and annexing fftruv or ttcjv. E. g. 
^a^vi. Jut, 'Xa.ffauv 
/3«Syj, dee]-)., Pmit9uv. 

Note 2. Kbutv?, jiojeerful, changes a. into i or e^ in the comparative : thus, 
x^otTVS, x^iia-ae^, K^iaffui, K^iioiruv. ( §§ 58. N. 1 : 2. N. 3.) 

The Doric xdppeov for xpi'ira-uv IS formed in the following manner : x^arvi, 
Koufftra/v, xcc^trcov, xdfpuv. ^^ ^ 58. N. 1 : 26. 2 1 1 '• 6. N.) 

Note 3. These two adjectives, fiiya; and okiyos, form their comparative by 
droppmg the last syllable, and annexing ^&>v. Thus ftiyos.;, f^'t^uv (Attic fiii^uv) -, 
okiyos, iXi^. (^ 2. N. 3,) 



ANOMALOUS AND DEFECTIVE COMPARISON. 

§ 50. 1. The comparison of an adjective is anomalous 
when the adjective has, or is supposed to have, more than 
one positive. 

2. The comparison is defective^ when the adjective has no 
positive in use. 

3. The following list contains most of the adjectives which 
are anomalous or defective in their comparison. 

a/a&og, good ecuslrtop aqiaroq 

ygdoobiv or -/.quikxiv yt^uTiurog 

XojiMp or /,o)(x)p /muotoc or loioTog 

*A^uu7, the proper comparative of aoKm;, belongs to the Epic language. 

For (iiXriuv, ktjluv, the epic poets have fiiXn^oi, Xatnooi. 

K^ecTUf, the positive of xoiiirtrtuv, x^aTurrc;, occurs in Homer. 

For (HXria-'ro;, the Doric dialect has ^iyrtj-ro;. 

For xotiffiruv, the Ionic has xoiffiru}), and the Doric xuppeov. {§ 58. N. 2.) 

The poets have xa^r/trro; for x^xTttrros. (§ 26. 2.) 

The Epic language has also compar. ^s^t£^«;, superl. (pUiffros or (piprceros. 

The regular comparative and superlative, ctya^un^ts, uyaBsorctTos, do not 
occur in good writers. 

alo^Qo? ( }i:2XT2), lighj, alayjcor, aVa/jaTog. The comparative 

aiaxQOjfQog is not much used. 
aX/Hvog {Ayirrz), painful, uXysivoisgog or a).ymv, ciXysivoTaTog 



60 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 59. 

or oilyLGTog. The regular forms alysivox^Qog, aXysivoiaTog, 
are more usual in the masculine and feminine. 

afiHVbjv, see ayu&og. 

agslcav, agiaiog, see ayad^og. 

^sItcmv, [UlTiaTog, see aya&6g. 

eXaxvg^ see ^lytQog. 

EAErXT2, infamous, tliyxiaxog. The plural of the positive 
occurs in Homer (11. 4, 242: 24, 239). 

i'dXarog, last, a defective superlative. 

(X^Qog {EX0r2), hostile, tx^Qorsgog or f^^twr, ix&Qoxaxog or 

'lIKTS, see nunog. 

Haaog, bad aay.lojv v.axiaxog 

rjUacav rjziuxog 

The forms W^v, nKiirros, come from *HKT2. (§ 58. N. 1.) 
The regular comparative kkkuti^o? is poetic. 
For ;cs/^4»y and ri<rffuv, the lonians have ^i^iiuv and la-a-u*, 
naXog (KAAVy:), beautiful, xnXUcav, xaXXiaxog. The doubling 

of the l seems to be an accidental peculiarity. 
y.dg^bjv, see ayadog. 
KEFJTJS, crafty, xegdiMV, jcsgSLOiog. 
XQuxvg, see aya&6g. 

yvdQog (KT/ir2), glorious, xvdlojv, xvdioxog. 
y,vvx£Qog, mure impudent, a defective comparative, derived from 

Kvcav, Kvvog, dog. 
Xtoi'atv, iMtarog, see aya&og. 
fiaxQog (marts, MllUrs), long, ^ay.QoisQog and ixaaom', fia- 

y.QOiaxog and ^nqyuoxog. (§ 58. N. 1.) 
(iiyag, great, fxEi'^oiv (Ionic ^iC,biv), ^r/iaxog. (§ 58. N. 3.) 
(iiygog, small iXaaacov ildxiarog 

(.IHMV flilOTOg 

fiiygoiegog fjiy.goxaiog 

The forms IXaa-ffuv, Ixd^^ta-TOf, come from ika;^;^vs. (§ 58. N. 1.) The 
superlative /^.titrrct is poetic. 

oXlyog, Utile, oU'Qmv, oXiyioxog. (§ 58. N. 3.) 

olyrgog {OIKTTS), pitiable, oixxlon', oi'xziaxog or olxxgoxaxog. 

onXoxtgog, younger, onXoxuxog, youngest, Epic. It is derived 

from onXov, weapon. 
TisTiMV, ripe, nenalxsgog, mncdxaxog. 
ntcav, fat, nioxsgog, nioxcxxog- 
TxoXvg, much, tiXumv or nXkov, nXsiaxog. 
ngoxsgog, former, ngmiog, first, derived from the preposition itgot 

before. 
gaSiog (PATJS), easy, grmv, gaaxog. 



5 60.] 



NUMERALS. 



61 



The lonians say pnioios, pruuvy p^iffros. 

The epic poets have pvtrt^es, ptttraref. 
taxvg (OAXTS), swift, Totxlwv commonly ■daaotav, tdj^ioTog* 

(§§ 14. 3 : 58. N. 1.) 
vnsQTSQog, higher, vnsgraTog, highest, derived from the preposi- 
tion ^716^, above, 
vGTSQog, later, voTarog, latest. 
'TWT2, high, vipioiv, vipiorog. 

fpaavTtQog, brighter, (padvtarog, brightest, derived from cpalvoj. 
g)eQTSQog, cpsQTUTog, (ptQioTog, see aya&og. • 

XHQbiv, x^igiOTog, ;^f^s/w>', see yay.og. 

Note. In a few instances new comparatives and superlatives are formed from 
adjectives, which are already in the comparative or superlative degree. E. g. 
•X^etritrei from ^^uras, ^ti^ort^es from '^I't^uv. 

NUMERALS. 



CARDINAL NUMBERS. 



§ 60. 1. The numerals Hg, dm, TQEig, and Tsaoagsg or t«t- 
TUQtg, are declined as folltws : 



S. 
N. 
G. 
D. 

4. 



(one) 

svog 

hvL 

e'va 



^ (one) 
fj.la 
(iicig 



D.T(a,Tcc,Ta {two) 
N. A. dvo and dv(o 
G. dvolv and dvelv 

D. dvdlv 

P. ol, at (three) 

N. TQEig 

G. tgiaiv 

D. tQiai{v) 

A. TQiig 

P. ol, «E {four) 
N. Tiaaagsg 

G. reoadgoiv 

D. TiaaaQai{v) 

A. 



TO (owe) 



ev 

hog 
kvl 

IV 



P. 

N. A, 

G. 

D. 



Ttaaagag 



[two) 
wanting 
dvwv 
dvai{v) 

TO, {three) 
rgla 
rgmv 
xgiol{v) 
rgla 

TO, (four) 
tiaaaga 
TEGodgcov 
Tiaa(xgai{v) 
tiaaaga 



6 



62 INFLECTION OP WORDS. [ § 60. 

Remark. Jvo is found undeclined. 

2. The cardinal numbers from 5 to 100, inclusive, are in- 
declinable (§ 45. 2). 



5. 


nivzE 


40 


ihaaaqaxovxa 


6. 


I'l 


50. 


mvTrjXovra 


7. 


hmd 


60. 


k^r'jXOVTa 


8. 


oy.T(a 


70. 


kjSdofj.-^y.ovTd 


9. 


ivvia 


80. 


oy8o)]xovTa 


10. 


diy.a 


90. 


ivvsvTixoyta 


11. 


I'vdexa 


100. 


Ixaxov 


12. 


dadsxoc 


200. 


didxooioi, ai, a 


13. 


dexajQsli; or rgia'aaldiita 


300. 


TQiay.ooLoi, at, a 


14. 


5tnaT£oaaQsg OX TeoaagFU- 


400. 


rsTQaxoatoi, at, a 




y.aidtxa 


500. 


ntJKy.xoaioi, ai, a 


15. 


dsxanevTs or niviinalSma 


600. 


e^axocJiot, at, a 


16. 


dsxas^ or kyacalSsy.a 


700. 


enjixxodLoiy at, a 


17. 


dexasntd or kJiTaxrudfua 


800. 


5 1 

oxTaxooioi, «fc, a 


18. 


dsxaoy.TCO or oy.T(oy.Uidsxa 


900. 


evraxoaioh ai, a 


19. 


8f.y.as)>via or evvsayoiidsya 


1000. 


xDuoi, (XL, a 


20. 


HXOOL^V^ 


2000. 


biax'^lioi, ai, a 


21. 


eixoai sig, or dg xai Hy.oai 


1Q§00. 


^VQioc, ai, a 


30. 


TQiuaovja 


20000. 


duriuvQioi, at, a 



Note 1. The compounds ov8ug {ov8i, elg) and ij.7]dsig {/.irjds, 
dg) have nom. plur. ovdtvsg, ^.i]8svEg, insignificant persons. 

Note 2. The accent of the feminine ^/a is anomalous in 
the genitive and dative. (§ 31. N. 2.) 

Note 3. JsxaTQng, dexariaoaQsc, and the first component 
part of TEoaagsaxaldexa, are declined like rgug and TEaangsg 
respectively. 

Note 4. Thousands are formed by prefixing the numeral 
adverbs (§ 62. 4) to ;^t/.tot. 

Tens of thousands are formed by prefixing these adverbs to 

Note 5. Instead of any number of tens -{- 8 or 9, a circumlocution with 
tiuv (from Hm, to want) is often used. E. g. AvaTv yiovn; ilxoai, twenty 
wanting two, simply eighteen. 'Evoj Viovn; r^idftovra, thirty wanti?ig one, 
simply twenty-nine. 

This principle applies also to ordinals. E. g. 'Evoj Bsav UKoerrov era;, the 
nineteenth year. 

The participle Vimv (from tiea, am wanting) with its substantive is sometimes 
put in the genitive absolute. E. g. TLivrnKovra. fuZs Isovo-^;, forty-nbie. So 
with ordinals, 'Evoj ^eovra; r^ixKOffTu 'iru, in the twenty-ninth year. 



<J 61.] ORDINAL NUMBERS. 63 

Nmte 6. Dialects. The dialectic peculiarities of tlie cardinal numbers are 
as follows : 

1. Epic ?« for (u/a, Im for ivi. 

2. Epic }oico, ^oio'i, declined throughout. 

4. Ionic r'tffvi^ii, Doric r'tTTo^is or Ttro^is, iEolic Tttrv^it, poetic dat. plur. 

riT^atri for Tirra^trt. 

5. Doric -Tif^.Tt. 

12. Ionic and poetic luu^iKa and tvoKathixa. 

14. Ionic rKm^iffKx'iliKoe., indeclinable. 

20. Doric uxctri, Epic \uKo<rt. 

30, 40, 80, 200, 300. Ionic r^iriKovra^ Ttffai^nxavra,, oy^uKovra, iitiKocioit 

9000, 10000. Old lvv£a;^rXa;, h.KxxJ^-ot- 

ORDINAL NUMBERS. 

^ 61. The ordinal numbers are, 

1st. ngwiog, 7], ov 30th. TgiaxouTog, i^, ov 

2d. devTtgog, a, ov 40th. TsaaagcixoaTog, if, op 

3d. rghog, t}, ov 50th. 7i£VT7]KoaT6g', t^, ov 

4th. TsragTog, rj, ov 60th. k^rjxoarog, rj, ov 

5th. nsfiTiTog, t}, ov 70th. h^Sdo^ty/^ooTog, tJ, ov 

6th. tuTog, 7), ov SOth. oydorjyooTog, tJ, ov 

7th. k'^doijog, ij, ov 90th. ervsv7]xoar6g, t^, oy 

8th. oydoog, tj, ov 100th. enaTOOTog, 1^, ov 

9th. tvvaTog, rj, ov ^Oth. diClxooiooTog, tJ, ov 

10th. dixurog, rj, ov 300th. ToiaxoaiooTog, r\y ov 

11th. hhiy.ttiogy rj, ov 400th. xsjgaxooioaTog, rj, ov 

12th. dwdixarog, 7], ov 500th. nePTaxoaioaTog,!], ov 

13th. rgiaxaiSexmog, V), ov 600th. e^axoaiooTog, rj, ov 

14th. Tiaaagaxai8ixajog, rj, ov 700th. knxaxoaioaTog, rj, ov 

15th. nevTsxaidsxciTog, rj, ov 800th. oxxay^ootooTog, r\, ov 

16th. exxuidexuTog, r], ov 900th. ivvaxoaiooTog, rj, 6v 

17th. inTaxttLdixatog, r), ov 1000th. xt^^oorog, ri, ov 

18th. oxTwxaidsxaTog, r], ov 10000th. fivgioaiog, tj, ov 

19th. evvsaxaidsxaTog, rj, ov 20000th. diafivgiooTog, »j, ov 
20th. slxooTog, ri, ov &c. 
21st. elxooTog ngwrog, or ngco- 
rog xal eixooTog 

Note 1 . Homer has TtT^aros for rira^rot, i^ifAaros for iS^ofcei, iyoiaros 
for tyioes, tlvatos for ivvaros or tvarof. Herodotus has TiffO'i^iffx.aihtKa.ryt for 

Note 2. A mixed number, of which the fractional part is ^, is expressed by 
a circumlocution, when it denotes a coin or weight. E. g. ULifi-rrav fifufivaTar 



64 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§§62,63. 

= 45 mincB } but Hivn rif*'if*-iia.7a, = 1=2^ minee, "EvvaTov hfHTa.Xjuiro* 
= 8^ talents; but 'Ewea rifJtira,Xavrei = | = 4^ talents. Tira^Tov v/ai^ 
fioXov = S4 oboli i but Tio-troi^x hf^tuQoXa = | = 2 060/f. 



NUMERAL SUBSTANTIVES, ADJECTIVES, AND 
ADVERBS. 

§ 63. 1. The numeral substantives end in «?, gen. a5o?, 
feminine. E. g. fiovdg, monad, unit, dvdg, rQtdg, triad, mvidgf 
k^dg, h^dofidg, oydodg, evvsdg, dsxdg, exaTOvrdg, xdidgj (xvgidg, 
myriad. 

2. The numeral adjectives in nXoog or nXdaiog correspond 
to those in fold, in English. E. g. dnXoog, simple, dinXoog or 
dmXdaiog, double, twofold, jginXoog or xqinXdaiog, triple, three' 
fold, TSTQUTiXoog or rsToanXdaiog, quadruple, fourfold, 

3. The numeral adjectives answering to the question no- 
atalog, on what day 1 end in aiog. They are formed from the 
ordinals. E. g. btvxiqaiog, on the second day, TQnaiog, on the 
third day. 

4. The numeral adverbs answering to the question noadxig, 
how often ? end in dxig. E. g. Tsxgdxig, four times, n^vrdaig, 
five times. 

Except the first three, ana^, once, dig, twice, and rglg, thrice. 



ARTICLE. 

§ 63. The article 6, the, is declined as follows : 
S. M. F. N. D. M. F. N. P. M. F. N. 

N. 71 TO N. TO) TK TW N. ol (Xt Ttt 

G. xov Trig TOV G. xotv xalv xotv G. xwv xojv xuv 
D. Tw xij Tw D. xoLV xcitv xolv D. xolg xalg xotg 

A. xov xriv x6 A. Tw xd tw A. xovg xag xa 

^ y 

Note 1. For quantity, accent, and dialects, see above (§§ SI. N. 1, 
2, 3 : 33. N. 2, 3, 4.) 

We only observe here that the Dorians have ra/, t«/, for «/, a/. 

Note 2. The original form of the article was TO 2, from which come the 
oblique cases, the Doric forms rol, rai, and the adverb ras. 



§64.] 



PRONOUN. 



PRONOUN. 



PERSONAL PRONOUN. 



tl 



64. The pers 
native .7 is obsolete. 



s. 


(^) 


N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 


f/O) 
f;UOV, [iOV 

ifioc, (xol 


D. 


(we two) 


N.A.ywt, >'w 

G.D. VWiv, TMV 


P. 


(tae) 


N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 


rjfiug 



al pronouns 


are eyw. 


, av, 7. The nomi- 


S. {thou) 




S. {he, she, it) 


N. OV^ 




N. 7^ 


G. aov 




G ov 


D. aot 




D. oI 


A. as 




A. r 


D. {you two) 


D. {they two) 


N.A. aq)ioiy 


acpta 


N.A. ffqcwe 


G.D. a^wiV. 


, OCpMV 


G.D. acpid'i'v 


P. {ye, you) 


P. (Mc^) 


N. v^sl? 




N. aq)£ts n. ff^ea 


G. v/iwy 




G. oqpwv 


D. v^iiv 




D. ocplai{v) 


A. v^aj 




A. agpa? n. aq)io^ 



Remark. The dual ro} and ocpoi are very often written with- 
out the iota subscript ; thus, vco, aqcw. 

Note 1. The particle yi is often appended to the pronouns 
of the first and second person for the sake of emphasis. E. g. 
P/tays, I indeed, for my part; av ye, thou indeed. The accent 
of eyuys is irregular (§ 22. 3). 

Note 2. Dialects. The dialectic peculiarities of the per- 
sonal pronouns are exhibited in the following table. 

£yia. 

' Sing. N. Epic and Doric iyav. 

G. Epic e^io, ifislo., ifii&ep, lonic and Doric ijAEv, fisv, 
D. Doric ifilv. 
Plur. N. Ionic rmhg, Epic aix^sg, Doric aiiig (long a). 
% G. Ionic rjfxitov. Epic ii^uwv. 

D. Epic a(ji^i or uixfiiv, poetic ^^tV (short i), '^fiXv. 
A. Ionic ^{.isac, Epic «^/i€, Dori(^«|U€ (long a), poetic 
^/uttf (short a). 

6* 



INFLECTION OP WORDS. [§65. 

% N. Doric TV, Epic xvvq. 
G. Epic ff£o, acto, Gs&sv, tsoIo, Ionic and Doric aeVf 

Doric also tsv or rsvg. 
D. Doric TtV, mV, Ionic and Doric to/. 
A. Doric Ts, Ttv, TV (enclitic). 
Plur. N. Ionic v^isg, Epic vfi^xtg, Doric r^s? (long v). * 
G. Ionic vfiicov, Epic vixsltav. 
D. Epic v'^^t or vjjfiLv, poetic v^tV (short ^), vfiiv. 
A. Ionic -u^ea?, Epic v^^s, Doric v/i£ (long v), poetic 

v^dg (short a). 

V. 

Sing. G. Epic "o, eIo, I'd^sv, lao, Ionic and Doric ev. 
D. Doric tV, Epic koX, 
A. Epic £f. 
jP/Mr. N. Ionic ocpisg. 

G. Ionic acpsMV, Epic acpstav. 
D. Epic and Ionic d^/ or crtptV. 

A. Ionic aqpeag. Epic and Ionic acpsy poetic aq)(xg (short 
a), Doric ips (in Theocritus). 

The Attic poets use the accusative atpi in all 
genders and numbers. 

Note 3. The accusative pV or vlv, him, her, it, them, is 
used in all genders and numbers. 

The epic poets and the lonians use ^Iv, the Attic poets 
and the Dorians, vlv. 

§ 65. 1. The pronoun avjog is declined like Goq)6g 
(§ 49. 1), except that its neuter has o instead of ov. Thus, 

avrog, he, himself, avi'^, she, herself, amo, it, itself, G. aviov, 

Tjg, ov. / 

' 2. With the article before it, amog signifies the same, 
(§ 144. 3,) in which case it is often contracted with the arti- 
cle. E. g. ravTOV, TUVTM, tavTij, for tov avrov, tw uvtm, rfj avtjj. 

When this contraction takes place, the neuter has o or ov * 
thus, TavTo or ravrov, for to «i5to. 

The contracted forms xaviTJ and Tavxd must not be con- 
founded with tavTj] and rama from oiiTO?. # 

Note. The lontens insert an e before the endings of «vtw, 
amtjv, ammv, aviotg, E. g. avztijv for avii^v. 



§66] 



PRONOUN. 



m 



REFLEXIVE PRONOUN. 

// ^66* The reflexive pronouns are efxavTov, omviov, lavrov. 

They are compounded of the personal pronouns and aixof. 

They have no nominative. 

S. M. (of myself) S. F. (of mi/self) 

G. ifiavTov G. ifiavT^g 

D. ifi(xvr(o D. ifxavTrj 

A. ifiav^ov A. ifittVT^v 

P. (of ourselves) P. (of ourselves) 



G. 
D. 
A. 


riiuv ttvtolg 
^fiug avrovg 


G. 
D. 
A. 


'^fxwv avruv 
rifiiv avratg 
ri^ag avrdg 


S. 


(of thyself) 


S. 


(of thyself) 


G. 
D. 
A. 


asavTov or aavtov 
asuvTw or oaviM 
asavTov or occvtov 


G. 
D. 
A. 


asavrrjg or aavr^g 
Giavrji or aavrrj 
asavrrjv or Gavrrjit 


P. 

G. 
D. 
A. 


(of yourselves) 
vfiMV avtuv 
v^Xv avToTg 
Vficcg avrovg 


P. 
G. 
D. 
A. 


(of yourselves) 
Vfiwv avTuv 
vfnv avralg 
vf^ag avrdg 


S. 
G. 
D. 
A. 


(of himself ) 
savTov or avTOV 
savTb) or avTw 
saviov or avjov 


S. 
G. 
D. 
A. 


(of herself) 
iavrijg or avrrjg 
kavrfj or avrfi 
iavri]v or avrriv 


P. 

G. 
D. 
A. 


(of themselves) 
lat;TWJ' or avxtav 
kavToTg or avToI? 
kavTovg or avrovg 


P. 

G. 
D. 
A. 


(of themselves) 
iavtm' of avxwv 
Bavralg or avxcug 
kavrdg Or a^raV 


he 


contracted forms of 


eavrov must not be confounded 



with the corresponding forms of avrog. 

Note 1. The third person plural also 
means of the personal pronoun and avxog. 
for lavx(av. 

Note 2. The neuter Itxvri or awra, from lai/raw, 
Note 3. The dual airoTv of the reflexive pronoun 

Note 4. In Homer these pronouns are often written separ- 
ately. E. g. efxev avr^g, for ifiavxrig. 



is often formed by 
E. g. o(pojv avxmr, 

sometimes occurs. 
iavTou is sometimes used. 



68 



INFLECTION OF WORDS. 



[§§67,68. 



Note 5. The lonians use smv for av. E. g. iutavxov for 
ifiavxov. (§ 3. N. 3.) 

POSSESSIVE PRONOUN. 



I 



§07. The possessive pronouns are derived from ihe per- 
sonal pronouns. In signification they are equivalent to the 
genitive of the personal pronoun. 

ifiog, 7j, 6v, my, 

vw'ixBQog, a, ov, of us two, 
^fiixEQog, a, ov, ouVj 

aog, ari, aov, thy, 
aqxa'CxEQog, a, ov, of you two, 
Vfiexegog, a, ov, your, 

og, ^, ov, his, her, its, 

aq)sx8gog, a, ov, their, 

Note 1. Dialects. JF^irst Person Plur. Doric a^iog (long a), 
Epic a^og (long a), for tifiixegog. In the Attic poets a^iog is 
equivalent to the singular sfiog. 

Second Person Sing. Ionic and Doric xsog for aog, Plur, 
Doric and Epic v(j,6g (long v), for vfiex^gog. 

Third Person Sing. Ionic and Doric hog for oV, Plur. Epic 
and Doric ocpog for ocphsgog. 

Note 2. The dual vutn^ot and fffutn^es are used only by the poets. 



frdVn 


ifiov 
vwi 


(( 


TjfiBig 


<f 


aov 




OCpbi'l 

Vfis7g 


II 


r 
OV 


II 


a(psig 



INTERROGATIVE PRONOUN. 



§ 68. The interrogative pronoun xlg, who? ivhich? what ? 
is declined in the following manner : 



S. M. F. 


N, D. M.F.N, 


P. M. F. 


N. 


N. xlg 

G. xlvog, xov 

D. xlvi, TW 

A. xlva 


it N. XIVB 

xlvog, xov G. xlvoiv 
xlvi, Tw D. xivoiv 

xl A. xlvE 


N. xlvsg 
G. rlvoiv 
D. xloi(v) 
A. xlvag 


xlva 
xlvwv 

xlai{v) 
xlva 


The forms 


xov, XM, must not be confounded with the articles 


xov, TW. 









Note. Dialects. Sing. G. Epic xio, Ionic and Doric xev, 
for xov, D. Ionic xim for tw, P/wr. Ionic, G. rew?', D. leot^, 



5§ 69, 70.] PRONOUN. 09' 

INDEFINITE PRONOUN. 

§ 69, 1. The indefinite pronoun rig (grave accent), awy, 

certain, some, is declined as follows : 



s. 


31, F. 


N. D. 


M.F.N. 


P. 


31. F. 


N. 


N. 


TtV 


rl ^ N. 


rivs 


N. 


riveg 


riva 


G. 


Tivog, tov 


Tivog, rov G. 


rivotv 


G. 


rivSv 


tivav 


D. 


tivl, TW 


rivl, Tw D. 


rivoiv 


D. 


riai{v) 


Tial{v) 


A. 


Tiva 


rl A, 


Tire 


A. 


rivag 


TLva, uaaa 



Note 1. Dialects. Sing. G. Epic rio, Ionic and Doric rsv, 
for rov, D. Ionic tsw for tw, Plur. G. Ionic ifcW, all enclitic. 

2. The indefinite pronoun dslva, such-a-one, is declined as 
follows : 

P. 



s. 


Allge 


N. 


dstva 


G. 


dslvog 


D. 


dsivi 


A. 


dslva 



N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 



All genders, 

dtlveg 

deivav 



Note 2. Aristophanes (Tbesm. 622) has tou hheif for too hTtog. 

DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUN. 

§ 70. The demonstrative pronouns are ods, ovrog, and 
ixstvog. 

"Ods is 
Thus, o(5«, 

Ovrog is 

S. 31. 

N. 

G. 

D. 

A. 



simply the article with the inseparable particle dL 
r^8s, rods, G. roiids, rrjads. 

declined as follows : 

(this) F. (this) 



N, (this) 



ovrog 
rovrov 
rovroj 
rovrov 



avrij 

rccvrrjg 

ravrrj 

ravTt]> 



D. {these two) {these tioo) 

N. A. 
G. D. 

P. 
N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 



rovrta 
rovroLV 

{these) 



ravia 
javraty 

{these) 



rovr(ov 
rovroig 
rovrov g 



avrat 
rovroiv 
ravraig 
lavrag 



rovro 
rovrov 
rovrta 
rovro 

{these two) 
rovKo 
rovioLV 

{these) 
ravroi 
rovrav 
rovroig 
ravroi 



70 



INFLECTION OF WORDS. 



[§71. 



^EnBtvog, he, that, is declined like ovTog. Thus, exsivog, t], o, 
G. iauvov, riQ, ov. 

Note 1. Dialects. D. Plur. Epic Toladwoi, roHadsai, for 
Tolqdsy from ods. 

The lonians insert an « before the endings of tovtov, ravxrig, 

TOVTO), TOVTIOV, TOVtOVg. E. g. JOVTSOV fOT TOVTOV. 

For lyiBlfog, the Ionic dialect has y.dvng, the Doric, ttj^o?, 
and the ^Eolic, yiiivog. 

Note 2. The letter / (long) is often appended to the de- 
monstrative pronouns for the sake of emphasis. E. g. ovioal, 
txmri'L, this here ; inuvoul, that there. 

The short vowel is dropped before /. E. g. odl, i]8l, to8u 
tout/, Tavxi, for odi'C, ^de'i', to8u, tovto'C, TavTd'C. 

RELATIVE PRONOUN. 

§ Tl. 1. The relative pronoun og, who, which, that, is de- 
clined as follows: 



s. 


M. 


F. 


N. 


D. 


M. 


F. 


N. 


P. 


M. 


F. 


N. 


N. 


og^ 







N. 


to 


a 


(a 


N. 


ol 


aX 


« 


G. 


ov 


r 
rig 


r 
ov 


G. 


OlV 


alv 


7 

OlV 


G. 


(OV 


T 
(OV 


r 
(OV 


D. 




7 

V 


M 


D. 


o'lV 


cclv 


7 

OlV 


D. 


of? 


«I, 


olg 


A. 


ov 


riv 





A. 


£0 


a 


a) 


A. 


ovg 


ag 


a 



2. The relative ooTig, whoever, who, is compounded of og 
and the indefinite pronoun Tig, which are separately declined. 
Thus, 



;S^. M. 




F. 


N. 


N. oajig 




rtxig 


XL 


G. OVTLVOg, OTOV 
D. (OTlVt,, OTO) 
A. OVTLVa 




Jiaxtvog 

1]TLVL 

^vxtva 


OVTLVOg, OTOV 
(OTlVt, OTOi 
XI 


p. 








N. ohivtg * 
G. (ovTiv(ov, ox(av 
D. OLGXiaL{v\ oioLai{v) 
A. ovaxLvug 


ctXtLvsg 
r 
(OVXLV(OV 

alaxiaL{v 
aaxivag 


axivoc, axxct 
(xwxiviav, OX03V 
oiGXLaL{v), oxoiai{v) 
axiva, uxxct 



The neuter o xi is often written o,xi, to prevent its being 
confounded with the conjunction oit, that. 



§§ 72, 73.] PRONOUN. 71 

Note 1. Dialects. Sing. Epic, N. ojig for oang, G. otco, 
0T£u, oTT€t', for oToi', D. oisco for oro), A. oTcia, neut. oirt, for 
ovrtyw, o rt, respectively, Plur. Ionic, G. oiKxtv for otwv, D. 
oxioLOi, fern. oTSjjat,. 

The accusative singular artj'w stands also for the neuter 
plural azii'tt. 

Note 2. The particle ;r£^ is often appended to og. E. g. 
oa;if(), TJ7rf(>, oTrf^, G. ovjieg, rjOTcsQ, written also separately og 

nSQ, 7j TTSfJ, o Tlfg. 

Note 3. The particle ovv is often appended to the com- 
pound relatives ooTig and oonsg. E. g. ootkjovv, oansgovy, 
whoever, written also separately, ooxtg ovp, ootibq ovv. 



RECIPROCAL PRONOUN. 

§ T2. The reciprocal pronoun is aXXriX(av, of one another » 
The nominative case and the singular number are of course 



ting: 
D. 


M. 


F. 


N, 


G. 
D. 
A. 


aXXriXoiv 
aXXi]XoLV 
aXXriXia 


aXXriXaiv 
aXXriXaiv 
aXXriXa 


ixXXriXoLV 
oiXXriXoiV 
aXXriXta 


P. 








G. 
D. 
A. 


aXXriXixiv 
ttXXriXoig 
aXXriXovg 


uXXriXbiV 

aXXrilaig 
aXXriXag 


aXXrjlbSv 
aXXriXoig 
aXXriXcc 



PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. 

§ 73. 1. From the obsolete 770^, what? 'on02, who, 
and TOS, this, and from the relative pronoun oc, who, come 
the following corresponding pronominal adjectives : 

Interrogative. Indefinite. Demonstrative. Relative. 

noaog, how much ? nouog, of a xoaog or xoaoods oaog or 

how many ? certain or Toaoviog, so onoaog, as 

quantity much much as 



72 



INFLECTION OF WORDS. 



R73. 



notog, of what 
quality ? 


noiog, of a 
certain 
quality 


Totog or roioads 
or TOLomog, such 


olog or 
onotogf as 


norsgog, which of 
the two ? 


wanting 


wanting 




OTtOTEQOg, 

whichever 
of the two 


nooTog, of what 
numher ? 


wanting 


wanting 




oTioarog, of 
what nuni' 
her soever 


noaTotog, in how 
many days ? 


wanting 


wanting 




onoaxcuog, 
in what' 
ever num- 
ber of days 


TifjXixog, how old? 
how large ? 


ntiXlxog, of 
a certain 
age, of a 
certain size 


TTjXlxOg or X7]Xl- 

xoads or ttjXi- 
xovTog, so old, 
so large 


riXUog or 
onrjXlxog, 
as old as, 
as large as 


nodanog, of what 
country ? 


wanting 


wanting 




OTiodanog, 
of what 
country 
soever 


wanting 


wanting 


Tvvvog or Tvvvov- 
Tog, so little 


wanting 



Note 1. Toaovrog, Toiomog, and ti^Xixovtog coincide with 
ovTog in respect to the diphthongs ov and av, E. g. ToaovTog, 

TOOaVTT]. 

In the neuter they have both o and ov. E. g. tooovro or 
toaovTov. 

Note 2. The demonstrative forms often take / (§ 70. N. 2). 
E. g. ToaovToal, as much as you see here. 

Here also the short vowel is dropped before the letter /. 
E. g. Toaoadl for xoaoods'L 

Note 3. The particle ovv is often appended to the relative 
forms (§ 71. N. 3). E. g. oaoaovv, how much soever. 

2. The following adjectives also belong here : 

aXXodanog («Uo?),7?, ov, foreign, aficpoh both, G. D. ccficpdlv, used 
aXXog, 71, 0, other. (§ 33. N. 1.) only in the dual. 
afiq)6TSQog (olf^cpco), a, ov both. txceaiog, rj, ov, each, every. 



§ 74.] VERB. 73 ' 

kxdisgog, a, ov, each of Uuo. navTodanog {nag), ri, oVy of all 

ixtQog, a, ov, other, another. kinds. 

ri^tdanog {rj^tlg), i], ov, our vfxsdunog (vfiEig), r^, ov, your 

countryman. countryman. 

Idiog, a, ov, proper, peculiar, 

his own. 



VERB. 

^ 74. 1. The Greek verb has three voices; 
the active voice, the passive voice, and the middle 
voice. 

2. There are five moods; the indicative, the 
subjunctive, the optative, the imperative, and the 
infinitive. 

3. There are six tenses, the present, the imper- 
fect, the perfect, the pluperfect, the future, and the 
aorist. 

The primary or leading tenses are the present, 
the perfect, and the future. 

The secondary or historical tenses are the im- 
perfect, the pluperfect, and the aorist. 

4. The indicative is the only mood in which the 
imperfact and pluperfect are found. The subjunc- 
t-ive and imperative want also the future. 

5. There are three persons ; the first person, 
the second person, and the third person. 



74 



INFLECTION OF WORDS. 



[§74. 







Synopti- 






ACTIVE 




Indicative. 


Subjunctive. 


Present. 


TVTtTCO 


TVTtTCO 


Imperfect. 
Perfect 1. 
Perfect 2. 


hvTtTOV 
TSTVCpa 

TiivTza 




TSTvcpa 

TETVTCCO 


Pluperfect I. 
Pluperfect 2. 

p iitnrp 1 


Tvyjo 








Future 2. 
Aorist 1. 
Aorist 2. 




lU/LcLJ 

BTvxpa 

STVTtOV 


TVXpCJ 

Tvua 






PASSIVE 


Present. 
Imperfect. 
Perfect. 
Pluperfect.. 
Future 1. 


TVUTOfiai 

iTVTirofir^v 

itervfjifirfv 
Tvcpd-jjaofiat 
TVTTTJaouac 
TETvipoixai 

hvTCiiv 


TVJtTCO^at 


TSTVfiflivOS « 




J? uim u zj. 
T^iitnrp ?? 




Aorist 1. 
Aorist 2. 


Tvcp&a 
Tvnco 






MIDDLE 


Present. 
Imperfect. 
Perfect. 
Pluperfect. 
Future 1. 
Future 2. 
Aorist 1. 
Aorist 2. 


TVTtXOfiaC 

irvTiTouT^v 

hsTvi-ifxriv 
Tvyjo^aL 
TVTtio/iat 
izvyjdfXTfv 


TVTlTCOfiac 


TSTVfXfXSVOS a 






TvipofiaL 

TVTtOfiai 



§74.] 



VERB. 



75 



cal Table. 



VOICE. 

Optative. Imperative. Infinitive. Participle, 



TVTITOifiL 


Tvnze 


TVTtietV 


TVJtxav 


T£T VCpOlflL 
TSTV7lOt(,U 


TBTVCpe 
TSTVTtS 


T£TV(pevat 

TSTVTtivaL 


T£TV(pC0S 
TSTVTICOS 








Tvyj€tv 
Tvneecv 
Tvyjac 
Tvuelv 

TVTtTsad'at 










TVTtOLflL 

VOICE. 

TVTtTOlfXriV 


Tvyjov 

TV71S 
TVTtrOV 


Tvyjas 

TVTICOV 
TVVtZOf^SVOS 


TSTVfllzivOS EL- 


TSTVyjO 


TSTVXp so d^OLL 

TV(p&rjvaL 
rvTZTSod-aL 


TSTVfifxsvog 


TV(p&rf(jOtlJL7JV 

Tvjtriaoi^niv 








IVTirfGOfXSVOS 


TVTturiv 

VOICE. 
rvmoiariv 


TV7l7J&t 
TV71T0V 


TV71HS 
TVTtXO^SVOS 


Teivfxixivos u- 


TSTVyjO 


T£TV (pd^ai 

Tvipsa&ai 
zvTtesad^ai 
Tvxpaod^ai 


TSTVfl^SVOS 


Tvipoifxriv 

TVTCSOLfJLrfV 
TV7lOLI.l7^V 








TVTCOV 


Tvxyd^evos 
Tvito^ievos 



76 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 74. 

ACTIVE VOICE. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present. I strike, I am striking. 

S. Tvmoi D. Tvnrofxiv P. Tvntofifv 

jvmsig Tvmsrov ivjitete 

TVTiTEt jimmov TViiTovai{v) 

^ Imperfect. I struck, I was striking. 

S. STVTITOV D. ilvmO^BV p. ECVJtXOy,iV 

tXVTCTSg ETVTlTtTOV £TV7llSTS 

ejV7iT£(v) iivmirriv etvutov 

Perfect 1 . I have struck. 
S. TSTVcpa D. T£ivq)()cy.ev P. xixvcpa^tv 

xixvcpag . xExvcpaxov xexvq)axs 

TBTvq>£{v) xExv(paxov X£rvq)ciai{v) 

Perfect 2. Synonymous with Perfect 1. 
TsxvTxa, inflected like Perfect 1. 

Pluperfect 1. I had struck. 

S. ixsxvcpELV I), ixexvcpsi^sv P. hsxiKpuixav 

ixexvcpeig Ixbxvcfuxov ixsxvcpsixs 

ixsxvq)Ei EXEXvq)£lxrjv txExvcpiioav or -saap 

Pluperfect 2. Synonymous with Pluperfect 1. 
hsxvTiEiv, inflected like Pluperfect 1. 

Future 1, I shall or will strike. 

S. TVlplO D. XVlpOflSV P- XVlpO^EV 

TVlpEig TVlpEXOV XVtpEXS 

tvifjEt rvipExov xvipovaiiv) 

Future 2. Synonymous with Future 1. 
rvnita contracted xvna, inflected like qpds'w (<5 116). 

Aorist 1. I struck. 

S. IVvj/za JD. EXVipay.EV P. ixvipccfXEV 

ETVipag ixv*if)axov ixvipaxs 

iTV\f)E{v) exvipaxTjv txvijjuv 

Aorist 2. Synonymous with Aorist I. 
hvTiov, inflected like the Imperfect. 



<5 74.] ACTIVE VOICE. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present. I strike, I may or can strike. 

S. Tt/TTTO) D- IVnTOJI^iV P. jvmoifisv 

Tvnir,g rvnTTjxov TVTtTrjis 

TvntT) rvnrijTOV TV7iT(aai{v) 

Perfect 1. I have, or may have, struck. 
TExvqxa, inflected like the Present. 

Perfect 2. Synonymous with Perfect 1. 
tsTvnb), inflected like the Present. 

Aorist 1. I strike^ I may or can strike, 
S, rvifjoi D, Tvifiafisv P. TVip(a[XEV 

TVlpTjg TVlpllTOV JVlfJTJTS 

tVlpT] TVlpr}TOV TVy/W(7l(v) 

Aorist 2. Synonymous with Aorist 1. 
Tvmo, inflected like Aorist 1 . 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 

Present. / might, could, vmuld, or should strike. 
S. tvmoifXL D' TVJtroLnsv P.. rvmoi^sv 

tvJttoig jvmonov Tvntont 

Tvnxoi Tvniohr^v xvmouv 

Perfect 1 . / might, could, would, or should have struck. 
TSTVcpoifxi, inflected like the Present. 

Perfect 2. Synonymous with Perfect 1. 
tsTvnoinh inflected like the Present. 

Future 1. / would or should strike, 
tvfoi^h inflected like the Present. 

Future 2. Synonymous with Future 1. 
Tvnioifxi contracted rvnol^i, like cpiXioiixi (§ 116). 

Aorist 1. I might, could, would, or should strike. 

S. TvipaifAt D. Tvipaifitv P. tvipaifiSP 

TVipaig TvifjaiTGV TVipans 

xvipai TVtpttlxriv xvt^aiiv 

Aorist 2. Synonymous with Aorist 1. 
rvnoifxi, inflected like the Present. 

7* 



W 



78 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [(^ 74. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Present. Strike thou, be thou striking. 
S. D. P. 

XVTCTS TV7TTEX0V TVTTTSTS 

ivmizm rvmixoov rvmiTwaav or -movtfav 

Perfect 1. Have struck. 
Thvcps, inflected like the Present. 

iT Perfect 2. Synonymous with Perfect 1. 

tixvTiB, inflected like the Present. 

Aorist 1. Strike thou. 
S. D. P. 

TVipdiw TvipaxKV xvipaxwottv OX -avxoav 

Aorist 2. Synonymous with Aorist 1. 
Tvns, inflected like the Present. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Present, xvnxtiv, to strike, to he striking. 

Perfect 1. Tsxvcpivai, to have struck. 

Perfect 2. xBxvnivat, synonymous with Perfect 1 

Future 1. tvijjuv, to he about to strike. 

Future 2. Tvnhtv contracted xvnuv, synonymous with Future 1. 

Aorist 1. xvxjjai, to strike. 

Aorist 2. Tvnt%v, synonymous with Aorist 1. 

PARTICIPLE. 

Present, tvnxiav, ovaa, ov, striking. (§ 53. 7.) 

Perfect 1. xsxvqxog, vTa, og, having struck. (§ 53. 9.) 

Perfect 2. xixvumg, via, 6g, synonymous with Perfect 1. (ibid.) 

Future 1. xvipav, ovaa, ov, about to strike. (§ 53. 7.) 

Future 2. xvnsoiv, iovoa, iov, contracted xvnav, ovaa, ow. (ibid.) 

Aorist I. Tinpag, aaa, av, striking, having struck. (§ 53. 1.) 

Aorist 2. ivTioiv, ovoa, oV, synonymous with Aorist 1. (§ 53. 7.) 



§74.] 



PASSIVE VOICE. 



79 



PASSIVE VOICE. 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



S. 



S. 



s. 



s. 



s. 



rvTiTOfiat 
TV-mji or 

JVflTSJttt 



hvmofirjv 
hvnxov 

hvitTSTO 



TSTV(lfiai 



itSTVipO 
iTStVTlTO 



Present. 7 awi struck. 

D. tVUTOflsd^OV P. TVnx6(ltd^(X 



tec Tvmtod^ov 

tVTlTEO&OV 

Imperfect. Iicas struck. 
D, irvnto^sdov P. 
iivjiTEa&ov 
hvTiTiod^riv 

Perfect. I have been struck. 

D. TSTVflflS&OV P' 

TSTVCp&OV 



xvnisod^s 

TVnXOVTUl 



eivnx6fi£&a 

ixVTlXEO&S 

ixvnxovxo 



XBTV^iflsd^a 
xixVCpd^E 

XExv^fiivot elai 



Pluperfect. / had been struck. 

D. iisxvfAjj.E&ov p. ixExvfifiS&a 

ixixvcp&ov ix£XV(p&£ 

6X£xvq)&rjV xexvyfiivot rjaav 



Future 1. 
xvff&Tqaonav D. 

%v(p&iqori or -as* 
zvq)&rjaExaL 



I shall or icill be struck. 

xv(pd^rj(j<)(.iE&ov P. xvq)d^r]a6fi£&a 
xv(p&ija£a&e 
xvff&^aovxai 



xvcp&rjOEa&ov 
xv^&rj(j£a&€V 



Future 2. Synonymous with Future 1. 
tvif^aofiai, inflected like Future 1. 

Future 3. I shall remain struck. 
xnTvipofiaii inflected like Future 1, 

Aorist 1. I was struck, 

itvcp&ijv D. ixvcp&ri^Ev P. ixv<^&Tjfitv 

ixvq)&r}g ixvcp&rjxov £Xvq)&i]X8 

ixv(p&7] ixvcp&'^xrjv ixiKp&rjaav 

Aorist 2. Synonymous with Aorist 1. 
hvTirjv, inflected like Aorist 1, 



80; INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 7^ 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present. I am struck, I may or can he struck, 

S, Tvmojfiai D. TV7it(afiE&ov P. TvmoSfiS&a 
tvnrj] TVJirtja&ov rvnttjad-e 

tvmriTai rvmrfad^ov rvnimvtai. 

Perfect. / have been struck, I may have been struck, 

S. TSTV^ysvog (t], or) b), fjg, -^ 

P» xizv^fisvoi (at, a) m^Ev, ^zs, maiiv) 

Aorist 1. I am struck, I may or can he struck* 
S. Tvcp&m D. rvq)&cofj,8v P. tvip&oifiev 

XV(p&fjg TV.Cp&TJTOV tvq)d^7Jts 

TV(p&f} iV(f)&rixov xv(f)&ojai{v) 

Aorist 2. Synonymous with Aorist 1. 
Tvnw, inflected like Aorist 1. - 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 

Present. I might, could, ivould, or should he struck, 
S. TvmolfiTjv D. xvmol^B&ov P. rvmol^B&a 

XVTITOLO JVTlTOia&OV tVTlTOLa&S 

rvTiroiTO TvnTola&7]V Tvmoivio 

Perfect. I might, S^c. have been struck. 
8. TETVfi^ivog (??, ov) fl'tjv, si'rjg, ei'rj 
D. TtTV^fxivw («, w) d'rjfiev, eI'iitov, el^xrjv 
P. tsTV^^EVOi («t, a) sl'tji^sv, eV^^te, sl'tjaav 

Future 1. I should, or jvould be struck. 
Tvcp&rjooli^Tjv, inflected like the Present. 

Future 2. Synonymous with Future 1. 
xvTtrjaolfxrjv, inflected like the Present. 

Future 3. / should or would remain struck. 
TSTVifJolix-rjv, inflected like the Present. 

Aorist 1. I might, could, would, or should be struck, 
S. TV(p&slr}V D. Tvcp&elrj^uEV P. TV(p&elr]y.£V or -sifiiP 

jv(p&slr]g TVcpd-dr}rov Tvq)&£lr]fe or -sits 

Tvcp&elr] xv(f)dEiriTi]V xvq)&£iirjaav or -sIbp 

Aorist 2. Synonymous with Aorist 1. 
xvnuriv, inflected like Aorist 1. 



<J 74.] PASSIVE VOICE. 81 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Present. Be thou struck, 
S. D, P. 



xvmov Tvmea&ov jvnTsa&s 

%vniiadoi Tvmio^uv Tvmio&waav or -a^mv 

Perfect. Be thou struck. 
S. D. P. 

TSTV(p&(0 'tiTvq)&(ov TExvq>&03oav or -cfid^mv 

Aorist 1. Be thou struck. 
S. D. ~ P. 

Tvq)&ijtt TV(p&r]Tov rvcp&tjTS 

TVcp&'^Tio rvq)di]t(av Tvq)d^^rb)aav or -(fd^ivtmv 

Aorist 2. Synonymous with Aorist 1. 
tvntj&i, inflected like Aorist 1. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Present. Tvmsa&ai, to be struck. 

Perfect. TSTvq)&ai, to have been struck. 

Future 1. Tvcp&^oeo&ai, to be about to be struck. 

Future 2. Tvm^asa&ai, synonymous with Future 1. 

Future 3. reivipsa&ai, to remain struck. 

Aorist 1. xvQp&rivai, to be struck. 

Aorist 2. TV7i7}vat,, synonymous with Aorist 1. 

PARTICIPLE. 

Present. TVUTOfisvog, rj, ov, being struck. 
Perfect. mvfijAsvog, rj, ov, struck, having been struck. 
Future 1. Tv<f)&i^aofxsvog, r], ov, about to be struck. 
Future 2. ivTirjaofisvog, r], ov, synonymous with Future 1. 
Future 3. TSTvipofisvog, about to remain struck. 
Aorist 1. TV(p&slg, uaa, iv, being struck. (§ 53. 3.) 
Aorist 2. xvndg, slooc, iv, synonymous with Aorist ]. (ibid.) 
All participles in og are inflected like oocpog (§ 49. IV 



82 INFLECTION OF WORDS. {§ 74. 

MIDDLE VOICE. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present. / strike myself. 
tvTiTOfiai, like the Present Passive. 

Imperfect. / jvas striking mi/self. 
iivnroiiTjVt like the Imperfect Passive. 

Perfect. / have struck myself. 
TETVfifiai, like the Perfect Passive. 

Pluperfect. / had struck myself. 
iisTVfifxrjv, like the Pluperfect Passive. 

Future 1. I shall strike myself. 
Tvipo(iai, inflected like the Present. 

Future 2. Synonymous with Future 1/ 
Tvnsofiai contr. TVTtoviiaL, inflected like cpileo^cti (§ 116). 

Aorist 1 . / struck myself. 

S. iivipafn^v D. hvipa^E^ov P. hvipccfis&oi 

iTVipb} iivipaa&ov hvipaads 

ixvipoLTO hvxjjdad^riv irvxpavro 

Aorist 2. Synonymous with Aorist 1. 
itvnofirjv, inflected like the Imperfect. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present. I strike, I may or can strike, myself. 
tvTiTbi^ai, the same as in the Passive. 

Perfect. / have, or may have, struck myself. 
Tsivf/fiivog (tj, ov) a, as in the Passive. 

Aorist 1. I strike, or may or can strike, myself. 
S. Tviptanai, D. TVip(x^^i&ov P. TVifjw(is&a 

xviprirair tihiji]o&ov rvt^(x)vxav 

Aorist 2. Synonymous with Aorist 1. 
TVTKoixai, inflected like Aorist 1. 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 

Present. / might, &c. strike myself, 
TvnTolfxriVy the same as in the Passive. 



§ 74.] MIDDLE VOICE. 83 

Perfect. I might , &lc. have struck myself. 
TSTV^ifxirog (?;, or) ili]r, as in the Passive. 

Future 1. / should or icould strike myself, 
jvipolfirfV, inflected like the Present. 

Future 2. Synonymous with Future 1. 
TVJi£ol^r,v contr. Tvr[ol^n]v inflected like (fiXfol^r^v (^ 116). 

Aorist 1. / might, &c. strike myself. 

S. TVif/ttljxr}V D. TVipai\us&ov P. TVipaiiAS&a 

TVipaio TVifjaia&ov jiniJUia&B 

rvipaiTO tvipala&riv jvipaivTO 

Aorist 2. Synonymous with Aorist 1. 
rvTtol^rjv, inflected like the Present. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Present. Strike thyself 
xvnxovy as in the Passive. 

Perfect. Strike thyself 
TSTvyjo, as in the Passive. 

Aorist 1. Strike thyself 
S, D. P. 



tvipai . Tvifjcea&ov jvipaa&B 

TVif/da&b) TVipua&Mv rvtpda&aauv or -a&av 

Aorist 2. Synonymous with Aorist 1. 
Tvnov, inflected like the Present. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Present. Tvmsodat, to strike one's self 

Perfect. mvtp^m, to have struck ones self 

Future 1. rvipead-fu, to be about to strike one's self 

Future 2. Tvnhad^ai contracted Tvnua&ai, synonymous with 

Future 1. 
Aorist 1. TVi^aad-ui, to strike one's self 
Aorist 2. Tvnia&ai, synonymous with Aorist 1. 

PARTICIPLE. 

Present, ivmofxevog, r], or, striking himself 

Perfect T^rvfufihog, rj, or, having struck himself. 

Future 1. xvipo^nog, ?j, ov, about to strike himself 

Future 2. Tvmofxfvog contracted rvnov^svog, tj, ov, synonymous 

with Future 1. 
xA.orist 1. Tvipafxsvog, r], ov, striking or having struck himself, 
Aorist 2. Tvno^ivog, rj, or, synonymous with Aorist ]. 



84 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ §§ 75, 76. 

AUGMENT. 

'^75. 1. The perfect and third future of all 
the moods and of the participle, and the imperfect, 
aorist, and pluperfect of the indicative, receive an 
increase at the beginning, called augment. 

2. There are two kinds of augment ; the syllabic 
augment, and the temporal augment. 

The syllabic augment is formed by prefixing a 
syllable or tv^o syllables to the verb. 

The temporal augment is formed by lengthening 
the first syllable of the verb. 

SYLLABIC AUGMENT. 

^ 70. 1 . When the verb begins with a con- 
sonant follov^ed by a vowel or a liquid, the augment 
of the PERFECT is formed by prefixing to the verb 
that consonant together with an f. E. g. 

TVJTTCo perf. rirvqia, xsTi'/ufJocL 

So ^i;w, Ts&vxa' (fi(a, Tiicpvxa ' ;ifa/j'w, xsxrjva' xgaio, yJ^^gr]^ 
iiai. (§ 14. 3.) 

This kind of syllabic augment is called reduplication. 

2. When the verb begins with a double con- 
sonant (^, I, \p), or w^ith two consonants the second 
of which is not a liquid, the augment of the per- 
fect is formed by prefixing an f. E. g. 

^TjTsco perf. e'Q)]Triy.a, f'C,i]X7]fica 
av.uTCTM " toY.acpa, eayap^ixi. 

Note 1 . Some verbs beginning with a liquid take tt instead of the redupli- 
cation. See the Anomalous Xay^dvut Xaf^,€cive,>, Xiyea collect^ METPfl» 
•PEa Mty. 

Note 2. Verbs beginning with ^31, yX, iiv, are variable in 
the augment of the perfect. E. g. yXvq>co, fylvcpn or yiylvcpa * 
jzvrjfiovsvca, ifj.vrij.6vsv)ca' juijj^v^a'/co, fAE{xvr](xai. .i^.-iiV)i\ 



§§ 77-79.] AUGMENT. 85 

Those beginning with ^». always prefix an s. E. g. yj'air^i^co, 
iyv(i)Qiy.a. 

Note 3. In a few instances, verbs beginning with tt take the reduplication. 
See the Anomalous 'x't-rTo^, frTritrau. 

The verb KTa.oft,a,i, possess, has perf. pass. ixTtjfioa and xiKr>if/.ai, 

NoTF 4. The Epic language, in a few instances, prefixes the initial consonant 
together with an t/. E. g. ^<«, ^li^iu for Vi^ix. 

^ ^ 77. 1. The augment of the pluperfect is 
formed by prefixing an s to the reduplication of the 
perfect. (^ 76. 1.) E. g. 

Tt'Tirci), ttrvcpa pluperf. imvifuv. 

2. But when the perfect begins with f, the plu- 
perfect takes no additional augment. (^ 76. 2.) E. g. 

oxuTiToi, i'ay.ucpcc pluperf. e(jy.u(fSLr. 

Note 1. The additional augment s of the pluperfect is often 
omitted. E. g. rflnnab), h^TO.iVDyAtiv or TfTfAtiiTjxfn'. 

Note 2. Tlie verb "urTrifii often lengthens the syllabic augment g into u in 
the pluperfect active. See in the catalogue of Anomalous Verbs. 

^ 78. When the verb begins with a consonant, 
the augment of the imperfect and aorist is 
formed by prefixing an f. E. g. 

rvmoj imperf \ivnxov aor. tivipa. - 

Note 1. Tliese four verbs, ^ovXoftut, 'hvva.f^tat, Xavu^ and /uiXXa, often take 
the temporal augment in addition to the syllabic. See in the catalogue of An- 
omalous Verbs. 

Note 2. In the Epic dialect the second aorist active and 
middle often takes the reduplication through all the moods and 
participle. E. g. y.nfuiM, y.sy.<i/.iov ' }m{.ijjuvo), }.sXa;j6(.tr,i'. 

In some instances an s is prefixed to this reduplication, but 
only in the indicative. E. g. qgd'CM, nicfQudor or ijiicpgadov. 

Note 3. The syllabic augment of the imi)erftet and of the 
aorist is often omitted by the epic poets. E. g. (pigw, cpsoor for 
s(pfQOv' TQSJico, Tqano^iriv for hQano^r^v. 

^79. When the verb begins with g, the aug- 
ment is formed by prefixing an s, and doubling the 
gi%U). E.g. 

QUTiTb), imperf. i'g^amov, perf Iggucpa, pluperf. igqdcpHv, aor. 
iqQCiipa. 8 



86 



INFLECTION OF V/ORDS. [§80. 



Note 1. In a few instances, Homer does not double the ^ after the syllabic 
augment. E. g. pi^co, 'i^i^a, for ippi^x. 

Note 2. The verb pwrico, in Homer, has perf. pass. part, pi^vrufjiiva. for 
ippv-TTufiiva. 

Note 3. The verbs AEIH, MEIPH, and ffiiu, in some of the past 
tenses, double the initial consonant after s. See in the catalogue of Anomalous 
Verbs. 

TEMPORAL AUGMENT. 

^80. 1. When the verb begins with a short 
vowel, the augment of all the past tenses is formed 
by lengthening that vowel. A and f become -q, 
and o becomes «. E. g. 

uy.olov&iw, imperf. rjy.olovd^ov, perf. r^xoXov&i^yn, pluperf. 

riyiolovdTqy.iiv, aor. ■^xoluv&rjaa. 
iXsico, rjksEoVf rjXi7]not, r]XEi]xeiv, 7jXsr}oa. 
o-Q&ab), b)Q&o6},u]r, o}Q&(xij.iaL, (ogdM)ui]t'f MQ&oiaa. 

So Xxiifvw, Txixsvov, Tasisvavc' vyialvo), vyiaLVov, vy'iava, 

2. If the vowel is already long, no change takes place ; 
except that « (long) is commonly changed into ?;. E. g. -^^s- 
Qooa, r]fj.£goov' oodivo}, atdivov' a'Caaat, rj'i^cc. 

3. When the verb begins with a diphthong, the augment is 
formed by changing the first vowel of that diphthong in the 
manner above specified (§ 80. 1, 2). E g. ahio}, jjrfov adaij 
rjdoV (xvXsM, i]vXeov ' fr^o//«f, rivxtt^ifjv' oly-iu), oixtov. , 

For the iota subscript, see above (§3). 

Note 1. Some verbs lengthen t not into >j but into u. Such are luoj, IS/^&», 
iXitrira), 'Ixku, IXxvoj, 'i^yrat, i^Tv^u, ioyxZ.ofiXi, i<rTia,u. See also the Anomalous 
'EAil, 'i-Tu, £;t:«, 'En, "yifii. 

Note 2. Some verbs beginning with a vowel take the syllahic augment. 
See the Anomalous ayvv/^i, aXiirxofieti, avhuv/Uy i'luu, ilWca, Elliri, 'iXvcay 

iVVt/[/,t, EPm, ol^'iCO, Ul^'iU), Uv'iOfjt,UI. 

Note 3. A few verbs beginning with a vowel take botli the xyllahic and teiTi' 
poral augment at the same time. See the Anomalous av'^avu, HB-m, 'I't^fn, o'lyu^ 
o^uu. See also \S\& i^luperfect of the anomalous lUu, 'ixru, and EPFIl. 

Remark 1 . The perfect of the Anomalous 'iB-eo lengthens the syllabic aug- 
ment s into ti. (Compare §§ 77. N. 2 : 78. N. 1.) 

Remahk 2. The verb U^ruZ^u), (originally o^ru^eo) changes lo into iu in the 
augmented tenses. E. g. imperf. Imoto.^ov. 



<§§ 81, 82.] AUGMENT. 87 

Note 4. The temporal augment is often omitted in the 
Attic dialect. E.g. U}]8iC,o^aL, uifdi^oyrjv' svglaxb}, evgiaxov' 
olroco, oXvoov. 

Verbs beginning with the diphthong ov are never aug- 
mented. E. g. ovTtx^Mf olha^ov, never uvia^ov. 

Those beginning with sl are seldom augmented. 

Note 5, The Epic and the Ionic dialect may omit the tem- 
poral augment in all verbs. E. g. ccyo<j£vco, ayoQsvov ' e^o^oh,, 
e^ofirjv ' ofidsb), o^iktov. 

§ 81, 1. Some verbs beginning with «, e, o, followed by 
a single consonant, form the augment of the perfect by pre- 
fixing the first two letters to the temporal augment. I^. g. 

dyslgco perf. i^yfgxa, uy-'^ysgaoc 

ogvaaoj " wQvxa, 6q-wqvx(*. 

This kind of augment is called Attic reduplication. 

Verbs which take the Attic reduplication : aXelqxa, alico, 
iXiyxco, sltaoMi efisM, eQsidb), ogsyo), ogvaaco. See also the An- 
omalous ayiigio, ayw, algioj, ANEOJl, agaglaxoJt cc^sm, iydgto, 
tXavvwy EAETOSL, ENEEKJl, ENEOSl, ivilxo), igslnat, f^w, 
rjiivo), o^oj, oXXv^ij afivvfit,, OllSL, ogvv^i. 

* 2. The PLUPERFECT in this case takes no additional aug- 
ment. E. g. uyslgw, ccyrjyegya, ayrjysgxeiv. 

Except anovoi, axriyoce, ^x^yxofiv* eXavvw, iX^lafiai, TjXrjXaixtjV. 
See also the Anomalous EylETOSl. 

Note. The epic poets sometimes omit the augment of the second syllable. 
See the Anomalous axx^^fAtvos, aXdofieu, a-^a^'iffKu, k^iu. 

AUGMENT OF COMPOUND VERBS. 

^ \ 8S. 1. Verbs compounded with a preposition 
receive the augment after that preposition. E. g. 

Ttgoa-ygdcfco, imperf. ngoa-sygcccpov, perf. ngoa-ysygacpa, plu- 

perf. ngoa-eyeyguq)fiv, aor, ngoa-iygaipa. 
ngoa-anxia, jigoa-rjnTov, 7igoa-T]cpa, 7igoa-7](f>siv, TTgoa-Tjipay. 

So ifx-niTiKO (§ 12. 1), iv-iniTiTov' sy-xglvb) (§ 12. 2), «>-&- 
ygivov, fy-y.sagijtoi' ovX-Xvoj (§ 12. 3), avv-slvov, avX-XiXvxa' av- 
^vi^ob) (§ 12. 4), ovv-f'^v{^oov • iy.-Xv(o (§ 15. 3"^, i^-iXvov. 



88 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§83. 

Rkmark. Prepositions ending in a vowel lose that vowel before the syllabic 
augment t. (5 135. 3.) E. g. a.-ron.o'TrTU), KTrixoTTov, 

Except TTs^'t and tpo. E. g. -^i^ixo'^rTu, "n^/ixo^Tov ' ^eoXiyu, TpoiXtyov. 
(ibid.) 

Note 1. Some verbs compounded with a preposition take the augment before 
that preposition. Such are af^tpia-SfiTim, JivriSoXi/u, if/.voXa.u, Iva,vrioof4,en. See 
also the Anomalous afAipiivvvf^tf ccf/.'jri;)(^u, a,va,XtiTxeu, uvoiyev, oi(pir,f^i, xaB^i^ofAuif 

Note 2. Some take the augment either before or after the preposition. 
E. g. <7r^o^vf*iof/.a,i, lT^oB-Vf/,iofji,ijv or T^os3-jf/,iof/.nv, See also the Anomalous 
xecB-su^M, 

Note 3. A few verbs take the augment before and afcer the preposition at 
the same time. Such are uvo^B-ocd, ^iki'tkco, ^lecxovtM, Ivo^Xiu, ^aootviea. See 
also the Anomalous xvocXttrKu, av't^eo, KocBrrtfAui. 

2. In verbs compounded with other v/ords the augment 
stands first. (§ 135.) E. g. 



aae^ica, t^ai^iov, rjos^rixa, derived from aae^^rjg (a-, as^i 



CO h 



Note 4. From /cnrorfsipjiw, derived from iTr-^or^expos (^Ivros, T^i(f>ai), Ly- 
curgus forms perf. tTToTiT^o^ijKa for i-r-roT^o^nxa. 

3. Verbs compounded with the particles ev and ^ttr-, if they 
begin with a, s, o, take the augment after these particles. In 
all other cases the augment precedes these particles, or, in 
compounds with sv, it may be omitted (§ 80. N. 4). E. g. 

evaQeaiib}, fvrjgeaTSOv, evijQsoitjy.a 

dvaiy-QSOTeMy dvarj^ioTeov, dvarj^sarrjy.a 

evdoKiy^eco, rivdoxlfisov, rjvdo}ii'{i.r}Ka 

dvaTv;(eojj edvarvx^ov, dedvoTV/i^xa. 



VERBAL ROOTS AND TERMINATIONS. 



§ 83. 1. The root of a verb consists of those letters which 
are found in every part of that verb. It is obtained by drop- 
ping (o of the present active (§§ 94 : 96). E. g. the root of 
Isyo) is As/. 

2. The root of a tense consists of those letters which are 
found in every part of that tense. E. g. jvip is the root of the 
first future active of tvtitu. 



§84.] 



VERBAL ROOTS AND TERiMINATlONS. 



89 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 

§ 84. 1. The following table exhibits the terminations of 
the primary tenses of the indicative. 





Active. 




Passive and Middle 


Person. 


1st. 


2d. 


3d. 


1st. 


2d. 3d. 


Singular. 


in 


? 


Oi 


^KXI, 


aai, ai rut 


Dual. 


f^iV 


JOV 


TOV 


flS&OV 


o&ov od^ov 


Plural. 


fXEV 


T£ 


rat 


Ht&oi 


a&s vxai 



2. The following are the terminations of the secondary 
tenses of the indicative. 





Ac 


tive. 




Passive and ]h 


Fiddle, 


Person. 


1st. 


2d. 


3d. 


1st. 


2d. 


3d. 


Singular. 


V 


? 




fir]v 


ao, 


TO 


Dual. 


fiSf 


TOP 


T1]V 


fXS&OV 


ud-ov 


a&T]v 


Plural. 


^6V 


TE 


auv, V 


fisda 


uds 


VTO 



Note 1. The terminations ^/ and <ri are found in the indicative of verbs in fn 
(§ 177). In the greatest number of verbs they are dropped. E. g. TiJrT«, 
Ti/iTTW, rirvfa, r'tTu^i, for TV'Xrofji.t, TUTrin, TiTV(pxfii, Tirv(pitn. 

Note 2. The Jlrst aorist active has no termination in the first person singular. 

Note 3. The third person singular of the secondary tenses of the active has 
no termination. 

Note 4. The termination aetv is found in the j^luperfect. Also in the iTti- 
perfecl and second aorist of verbs in fi i ;§ 117,. Also in the aorisf passive 
(§ 92 . In all other cases it drops ffx. 

The Alexandrian dialect frequently uses this termination in the imperfect and 
second aorist E. g. ff^x^ot, \ffx,^Z,'^ay for £<r^a:^9v ' EAETOH, vkB^otrav 
for rikS-ov. 

Note 5. The terminations irxt, <ro, are found in the perfect and pluperfect 
passive ,§ 91). Also in verbs in ^/ (§ 117). In all other cases they drop <r. 

The Alexandrian dialect sometimes uses »•«/ in the present passive of verbs in 
«;. E. g. oSvvau, 2d pers. sing, ohuviifott contracted otuvoiffau 

Note 6. Dialects. The following table exhibits the dia- 
lectic peculiarities of the indicative mood. 

Active. Sing. 2d pers. Old oQa, aT, for g. The Attic dia 
lect uses ada in some instances. 

The old termination ol is found only in 
the old iaal for dg from dn'i, am. 
3d pers. Doric xX for ai, as 5t(5co//i, 5l8(xm for 
dldwoi' 
8* 



90 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 85. 

Plur. 1st pers. Doric (.ug for fihv, as iql^m, igl^o^sg 
for iQlt,Q^sv. 
3d pers. Doric vit for vai, as fio;(&l^co, (lox&l- 
^ovTi for y.oxd^l^ovav (that is ^ox&iQovai). 

Passive. Sing. 1st pers. Doric ^«j/ for ^tjv, as hvnxo^av for 

Dual. 1st pers. Doric and poetic fiso^ov for (Asdov, as 

rvnTOf-uadov for TVJirofis&ov. 
Plur. 1st pers. Doric and poetic fisa&a for ^£i9^«, as 
TVUToiisa&a for rvTiTous&a. 
3d pers. Ionic and Epic «T«t, mto, for i/roti, yto. 
These terminations are found in the per- 
/ec^ and plitperfect passive. Also in the 
present and imperfect o^ verbs in /^ t (§ 117). 
The termination axo is found also in the 
imperfect of verbs in w (§ 85. N. 6). 

§ 80. 1. The vowel, which stands between the termination 
and the root (§§ 83 : 84), is called the connecting voivel. It 
is an o in the first person of all the numbers, and in the third 
person plural ; in all the rest it is an s. Except that, 

(1) The connecting vowel of the perfect active, ^nd first 
aorist active and middle, is an «. But in the third person 
singular of the perfect and of the first aorist active it is an e. 

(2) The connecting vowel of the pluperfect active is an u. 
In the third person plural it is an £i or £. 

(3) The present and future active lengthen o into w, in the 
first person singular, and f into si, in the second and third 
person singular. 

3. The following table exhibits the terminations and the 
connecting vowels united. 



Pres. S^ Put. Active. 
P. 1st. 2d. 3d. 

S. 03 EL-g SL 

D. O-fXSV E-TOV E-TOV 

P. 0-^EV S-TS OVOi (§ 12.5) 

Imperf. S^ 2d A. Act. 
P. 1st. 2d. 3d. 
<Si. o-v E-g s 

D. O-flEV E-TOV E-TTjV 
P. 0-[lEV E-XS O-V 



Pres. Sf Put. Pass. 8^ Mid. 
1st. 2d. 3d. 

o-(j.ai E-ai, 7], EL E-rai 

o-psd^ov E-a&ov E-a&ov 
o-ps&a E-a&E o-vxai 

Impf Pass. S^ Mid. S^ 2 A.Mid. 
1st. 2d. 3d. 

o-priv E-o, ov s-ro 

o-pE&ov E-a&ov E-a&fjv 

O-pE&a E-a&E O-VTO 



§ 85.] VERBAL ROOTS AND TERMINATIONS. 91 



JRirst Aorist Active. 



First Aorist Middle. 



P. 


1st. 


2d. 


3d. 




1st. 


2d. 


3d. 


s. 


a 


«-? 


€ 




a-fiT]V 


a-o, ft) 


«-T0 


D. 


a-fjev 


tt-TOV 


a-Tijv 


a-fii&ov 


tt-ffi^OV 


a-a&r}V 


P. 


a-fx£v 


a-T£ 


a-v 


Perfect 


Active. 


a-ox)s 


a-VTO 




P. 


1st. 




2d. 




3d. 






s. 


a 




«-? 




£ 






D. 


a-^Ev 




a-TOv 


a-Toy 






P. 


a-fisv 




a-TS 
Pluperfect Active. 


«at (§ 12. 


5) 




P. 


1st. 




2d. 




3d. 






S. 


H-V 




«/-§ 




£t 






D. 


Sl'fiSV 




ft-TOV 


fi-T7jy 






P. 


ei-ixsv 




EL-TB 


£L-auv, £-oav 



Rejuark 1. For the terminations of the Jirst and third person singular of 
the active, see above (§ 84. N. 1, 2, 3). 

Remark 2. The endings tat, lo, ao, of the second person singular of the 
passive and middle, are contracted into >? or u, eu, u, respectively. In Attic 
authors, u is more common than y. 

Note 1. In some instances the t/iird person plural of the perfect active 
takes civ for a^i. E. g. yiyvua-xu, 'iyvunotv. 

Note 2. In the Alexandrian dialect the second aorist active and middle often 
takes the connecting vowel a of the first aorist. E. g. EIAH, uoa. for ulov ' 
(P'.vyu, 'iipuyav for i(pvyov ' tv^iffxu, iv^xfir,v for iv^d/u.rjv. 

On the other hand, the Jirst aorist active and middle^n some instances, takes 
the connecting vowels (a, i) of the second aorist. Seethe Anomalous (ixivcj. 

Note 3. The Doric dialect uses the short connecting 
vowel e in the second person singular of the present active. 
E. g. a^ikyoj, afiiXyig for aj^iXysig. 

Note 4. The Epic and the Ionic dialect have, in the singular 
of the pluperfect active, sa, tng, se, for eiv, sic, si. E. g. ;if«/yw, 
i/.s/ip'sa, h.fx^ivtag, ixf^V^'^^' 

The Attics contract these endings into rj, r^g, t]. 
In some instances the ending ?? of the third person singular 
takes V movable before a vowel. See the Anomalous EJASl. 

Note 5. In the imperfect and aorist active, the Epic and the 
Doric dialect often use the endings oy.ov, oxsg, aye, plur. 



92 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 86. 

axofxev, Gxsre, axov. In the imperfect passive and aorist middle 
they often use the endings axofzrjv, axeo, oxsto, plur. oxofis&a, 
axsa&s, axovro. 

In the imperfect and second aorist of mute and liquid verbs ^ 
an 6 stands between these endings and the root. E. g. 
tvTcitoxov, TV7iTeax6fii]v for tivTCTov, exvTTTo^rjv 
TVTisay.oVf Tvneaxofirjv " ervnov, eTV7i6^i]V. 
In the imperfect o^ pure verbs these endings are very seldom 
preceded by s. 

In the frst aorist active and middle an a stands between 
these endings and the root. E. g. 

xvipaaxov, TVipauxoftrjv for sTVipa, tTvipaij.rjv. 

In some instances the imperfect also prefixes an « to these 
endings. E. g. a^vnia), xQvmaaxov for ex^vjirov. 

Note 6. The Ionic dialect uses the termination aio in the 
imperfect passive ; in which case the connecting vowel be- 
comes «. E. g. yQacpm, fyqafpiato for iyqacpovjo. In pMre 
2;er6s the connecting vowel is omitted before axo. E. g. ^7^- 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



§ 8G. 1- The subjunctive mood uses the terminations of 
ihe primary tenses of the indicative (§ 84. 1). 

2. Its connectiiijj vowels are w and r]. But the second and 
third person singular active have ji. 

3. The following table exhibits the terminations and the 
connectinor vowels united. 



Passive and Middle. 
1st. 2d. 3d. 

M-fjiai, f]-ah J] rj-zai 

(a-fie&ov r]-G&ov rj-a&ov 
(O-ixeda r]-ads (a-vxat, 



Active. 
P. 1st. 2d. 3d. 

S. (O Tj-g 7} 

D. a-fisv ri-Tov tj-tov 

P. (O-IXSV 7J-TS W(Jt (§ 12. 5) 

Remark. The ending ^ai in the second person singular of the passive and 
middle is contracted into »j. 

Note 1 . The perfect of the subjunctive active is sometimes formed by means 
of the perfect active participle and ufti. E. g. riruipui (wa, h) Z, ^s, ^, for 



§87.] 



VERDAL ROOTS AND TERMINATIONS. 



9S( 



Note 2. The Epic language often uses wfn, r.a&a, //trt, for 
(0, ijg, J]. {^ 84. N. 6.) E. g. Tvx^fJii, Tv^jidOvc, Tvxjjai, for Tv;fa?, 
V^> V' 

Note 3. Sometimes the Epic language uses the connecting 
vowels (o, s) of the indicative. E. g. e^vaw, cpdlw, subj. f^v- 
|o//e»', q)&lsTai, for igv^cj^sv, cp&lr^xaL. 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 

§ 87. 1. The optative mood uses the terminations of the 
secondary tenses of the indicative (§ 84. 2). 

But the first person singular of the optative active takes 
/tt (§ 84. 1) ; and the third person plural ends in tv. 

2. For its connecting vowel it has ot. But in the Jirst 
aorist active and middle it has at. 



3. The following table exhibits the terminations and the: 
connecting vowels united. 



P. 1st. 

S. Ol-fXt 

D. Ol-[liV 

p. Ol-flSP 



Active. 
2d. 



3d. 



oi-g ov 

OL-TOV oi-zriv 
OL-TB Ol-SV 



First Aorist Active. 
P. 1st. 2d. 3d. 

S. ai-fiL ai-g ai 

D. ai-flEV ai-TOV tti-TTjV 

P. ai-fxev at-Tf cci-sv 



Passive and Middle. 
1st. 2d. 3d. 

Ol-l-irjV OL-O Ot-TO 

oi-fi£&ov oi-od^ov 0L-a&r)V 

Ol-flE&a OL-oS^S OL-VIO 

First Aorist 3Iiddle. 
1st. 2d. 3d. 

ai-fir}V ai-o cci-to 

ai-fj.e&ov ai-adov aL-aS^rjv 
oci-iAS&a ai-ads ul-vio 



Note 1 . The perfect of the optative active is sometimes formed by means of 
the perfect active participle and e/^/. E. g. ri7v(pui {via, os) itftv, uns, tiny for 
TiT v<poif/,i, ots, ei. 

Note 2. In many instances, particularly in contract verbs, 
the optative active takes the endings olriv, olrjg, oh], dual oItjtov, 
OL^TT^v, plural oirjfiEV, olrjxs, olrjaav. E. g. (pEvyu, nscpEvyoirjv for 
7teq)siiyoi^i. 

Note 3. The fi?'st aorist active in the optative has also the 
endings sia, SLag, eis, dual si'utov, skxttjv, plural Ela(xiv, eIuts, uav, 
E. g. TV7iT(o, Tvijjsta for jvipccifxi. The second and third person 



94 



INFLECTION OF WORDS. 



K88. 



singular, and the third person plural, of this form, are more 
common than the corresponding persons of the regular form. 
These endings are said to belong to the ^oiic dialect. 

Note 4. In the Epic language the third person plural of 
the optative passive and middle often takes the termination axo 
(<^ 84. N. 6). E. g. a^dopai, a^rjuaiaTO for ag^aaiVTO. 

Note 5. In some instances the second person singular of 
the optative active takes the termination o&a (§ 84. N. 6), 
E. g. jiXalo), xXaiOLud^a for xXaloig. 

Note 6. The Alexandrian dialect uses, in the third person 
plural, oiaav, aiaav, for otsv, aisv, (§ 84. N. 4.) E. g. tvtito), 
TVipoiaav, Tvipacaav, for tvttolev, zvipixuv. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 



5 88. 1. The following are the terminations of the impera- 
tive mood. 



Active. 
P. 2d. 3d. 

S. -dX 1(0 

D. JOV TO)V 

P. Ts Twaav, vTwv 



Passive and Middle. 
2d. 3d. 

ooy a&b) 

a&ov o&iov 

ode odwoav, a&o)v 



Note 1 . The terminations &/, ffo, are used when the connecting vowel is 
dropped (§§ 91. N. 6, 7: 117). But when the connecting vowel is used, 
9-/ is dropped, and o-o becomes o. 

2. The connecting vowel of the imperative is an e. 

But in the first aorist active and middle it is an «. In the 
second person singular, however, the first aorist active ends in 
ov, and the first aorist middle in at. 

The termination vxmv is preceded by o. But in the first 
aorist active it is preceded by a. 

3. The following table exhibits the terminations and the 
connecting vowels united. 



P. 2d. 

S. 8 

JJ. S-TOV 

P. 8-TS 



Active. 
3d. 



e-x(0 

S-XKIP 

s-xtoactv, o-VTOJV 



2d. 

6-0, OV 

s-a&ov 
s ads 



Passive. 
3d. 

s-a&oov 
£-adojaar, B-a&av 



^89.] 



VERBAL ROOTS AND TERMINATIONS. 



95 



Pirst Aorist Active. 
P. 2d. 3d. 

S. ov a-Tca 

D. a-Tov a-T(ov 

P. a-rs a-TCOuav, tx-vrcov 



First Aorist Middle. 
2d. 3d. 

«i a-a&co 

(x-a&ov a-adatv 

a-a&€ a-adct3(sav, a-adcav 



Note 2. The ending lo of the second person singular of the passive and 
middle is contracted into cv. 

Note 3. In some instances, the first aorist takes the connecting vowel s of 
the second aorist. See the Anomalous ayui, AEXH, Olil bring. 



INFLNITIVE MOOD. 



§ SO. 1. The terminations of the infinitive mood are the 
following. 



Active. 
Present, Future, 2 Aor. v 
Perfect vai 



Passive and Middle. 
All tenses, except Aorist Pas- 
sive (§ 92), a&ui 



Active. 




Pres., Put., 2 Aor. 


ii-v 


Perf. 


t-vca 



2. For the connecting vowel, the present, future, and second 
aorist, active, have an u. In the frst aorist middle the con- 
necting vowel is an «. In all the other tenses it is an ?. 

But ihe first aorist active infinitive ends in at. 

3. The following table exhibits the terminations and the 
connecting vowels united. 

Passive and Middle. 
Pres. , Fut. , 2 A . Mid. i-o^ai, 
1 Aor. Mid. a-a&at 

For the perfect and aorist passive, infinitive, see below 
(§§ 91 : 92). 

Note 1. The termination of the infinitive active in the Epic 
language is (.isvai or ^iv, which is always preceded by the con- 
necting vowel e. E. g. nlvoj, nivi^tvui or niviuev for nlrsLV. 

Note 2. In the infinitive active, the Doric has sv or tjv for 
eiv. E. g. doay.b), ^oaxsv for ^oaysiv' ;(f)ctg(o, ;^a/^7p for ^aigsiv. 

Note 3. The lonians change ttv of the second aorist active 
into isiv. E. g. (jakXco, ^aXisiv for ^aXtiv. 



90 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ §§ 90, 91. 

PARTICIPLE. 

§ 00. 1. The root of the present, future, and second 
aorist, active, participle, is formed by annexing ovt to the root 
of the tense (§ 83. 2). E. g. 

Present, rvnrav, jvm-ovT-oq, (§ 36. 3, R. 1) 
Future 1. Tvipmv, Tvip-ovt-og, (ibid.) 
Future 2. tvtiewv, TVJis-ovT-og, (ibid.) 
Aorist 2. rvTiwv, rv7i-6vi-og, (ibid.) 

The Jirst aorist active annexes ccvt to the root of the tense. 
E. g. Tvipag, TVip-ixvt-og, (§ 36. 2 ) 

The perfect active annexes ox. E. g. xeivwwg, TETvm-oT-og, 
(§ 36. 2.) 

Note. The ^olic dialect uses aig, aiaa, in the frst aorist 
active participle, for m^, aaa. E. g. diaaeco, diax7]auig for 
diox^oag' 

2. The participle in the passive and middle ends in ofiEvog. 
But in the frst aorist middle it ends in d^xsrog. E. g. xvtum, 
rvTTTOfxsrog, xvipoifievog, (§ 49. 1.) 

For the perfect and aorist passive participle, see below 
(§§ 91 : 92). 

PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT PASSIVE AND 
MIDDLE. 

§01, 1. The perfect and pluperfect passive and middle 
have no connecting vowel (§ 85. 1 ). E, g. Travco, 

Perfect. 
Indic. S. Titnav-fxai, ninav-aai, ninav-xai, D. nenav-^s&ov, 
ninav-a&ov, ninav-a&ov, P. 7is7iav-fnd(x, nsnav-a&s, ns- 
Tcav-vxai. 
SuBJ. and Oft., see below (§ 91. 3, 4, 5). 
Imperat. S. Tcanav-GO, mnav-od^oj, D. ninav-a&ov, nenav- 

a^cav, P. Txsnav-a&s, mnav-adtaaav. 
Infin. ntnav-G&au 
Part, nsnav-^ivog, rj, ov. 

Pluperfect. 
S. s7i snav-firjV, eninavao, enenav-xo, D. snfTiav-fis&ov, 
eninav-ad^ov, ircEnav-cf&T^v, P. ensTcav-^sd-ot, ininav- 
a&s, insTiav-vxo. 



§ 91.] VERBAL ROOTS AND TERMINATIONS. 97 

2. In mute and liquid verbs, the third person plural of the 
perfect and pluperfect passive is formed by means of the per- 
fect passive participle and dal, rjaar, from fifxl. E. g. TiinTco, 

Perf. 3d plur. T£TV(jj.isroi («/, a) sioi, for tstvu-vtui, 
Plup. 3d plur. T£ivyi.ie'roi («i, a) TJuar, for iiixvn-vxo. 

Note 1. The Epic language in a few instances drops <r of the termination 
ffctt. E. g. ptakXUf perf. pas. /3i/3A«^a/, ^i^Xnai for (sijiXricrat. 

Note 2. The Epic and Ionic dialects form the tlm^d person 
plural of the perfect and pluperfect passive by annexing axait 
axo, to the root of the verb. (^ 84. N. 6.) E. g. cpdel^w, 

Perf. 3d plur. iipduQUTni for icpd^aQ^iiroi ual 
Plup. 3d plur. ecpdagaio for scp&agfASvoi riaav. 

(1) jtf is commonly changed into s before axai, aro. E. g. 
oixeto, oixiaiai, oi'^eaTO, for ojxrjvrai, ojy.rjVTO. 

(2) The consonants n, /?, x, /, are generally changed into 
their corresponding rough ones (9, x)) before ajai, aio. E. g. 
Xsyw, hXexoiTui, /.(Xixajo. 

(3) Z becomes 8 before aiai, axo. E. g. aycovl^w, aycovldocToci, 
rjyiavidaxo. 

3. The perfect passive subjunctive and optative is formed 
by means of the perfect passive participle and ni.d. E. g. 

Perf. Subj. xsxvfifASvog (tj, ov) w, fjc, f/, rjxov, to/^isv, r^xf, win. 
Perf. Opt. Tsxvfjfxsvog {rj, ov) el'rfV, £h}g, n'l], ujitov, HrixrjV, tt'^ 
fist'y ii'Tjxe, tl\oav. 

4. The perfect passive subjunctive of verbs in axx), ew, and 
,©w, is, in a few instances, formed by prefixing the augment of 
the perfect to the contracted present subjunctive {^ 116). 
In this instance «£ are contracted into tj. E. g. yxao^xai, 

Perf. Subj. y.sy.TW(.iai, jj, TJxai, (xi(.adov, naOov, tSfj^sS^a, rjods, 



5. The perfect passive optative of verbs in aco, fw, and ow, 
is, in a few instances, formed by dropping ^mi of the perfect 
passive indicative, and successively annexing the regular ter- 
minations of the optative passive (§ 87. 1 ) preceded by i. E. g. 
Tixdoj^ai, yiy.rrifj.ai, 

Perf. Opt. nBnTTjuriV, jjo, fixo, rjfis&ov, ffddov, ■fja&rjVy ff^i&oif 
ia&s, f,vxo. ' ' ' ' ,.,^^^,jy,,; 

9 



98 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 91. 

Note 3. These two verbs, xTu.ofjta.i and f^ifji^trnKu, form the perfect middle 
optative also by prefixing the reduplication to the contracted present middle 
optative. Thus, xiKTM/jt.^v, uo, Zro, &c., fiif/.vct>f/,nv, uio, mto, &c. 

M'tfcvy'iTxw often changes m into ot, in the perfect middle optative. Thus, 
fAtfivol/xnv, eio, otre, &C. 

In the Ionic and the Epic dialect these verbs change ou into iw, in the perfect 
middle optative. E. g. KiKTisofjcriv. f/.i(jt,victii^'/iv, for Ki/iruif>i,7iv, fi,ifji,vufjt.7iv. 

Note 4. Avu is perhaps the only verb in vu, which forms the perfect passive 
optative after the analogy of verbs in ucj, ta, ou, :§ 91. .5.) Thus, "kvu, X«- 
y.vfji.a.1, ki'AVfitjv, vo, yra, &c., or, more analogically, XiXvi/Jtyiv, v7o, uTro, &c. 

Note 5. In the perfect passive subjunctive and optative of verbs in uu, ia>, 
eea, vu, § 91. 4, 5, N. 4, some grammarians phce the accent on the ante- 
penult, if the last syllable permits it (§ 20 . E. g. they write x£«tj-'^»j», 

Note 6. In some instances the second perfect active drops the connect- 
ing vowel in the dual and plural of the hidicalive, and throughout the impera- 
tive. In this ca.se, the second plupeuiect follows the analogy of the second 
perfect. See uvwyu, AEIH, tyil^u, EIAfl, uku, EAETGH, x^a^«> 
vuff^u, TtlB^u, in the catalogue of Anomalous Verbs. 

Note 7. The second perfect active of a few pure verbs 
in aoj, fb), is syncopated (§ 91. N. 6) in the dual and plural of 
the indicative, throughout the imperative, and in the iiifinitive. 
In the subjunctive and optative it follows the analogy of verbs 
in fxt (§ I i?). In the participle it is contracted. E. g. from 

BASly 

Perfect 2. 
Indic. S. ^i^3ua, ^ii3aag, (jt^^at, D. ^Si3a^sv, (jt^Sixjov, ^i^arov, 

SuBJ. S. ^fjSM, /?f/5/]?, /5f/5/], D. l3c-^w{Asr, fie^rixor, ,/5f/5^TOV, 

P. (Se^Mufv, ^i'pi'jTe, t3el3coai{v). 
Opt. S. f^fjjulriv, I3ff^(x',rjg, (3ff)a[r], D. (if^alrip,BV, f^^^alrjioVy 

/?f/5«t?jT??v, P. ^^Ijrxlijfisv, ^f(3(xtrirs, ^i^alr^aav. 
Imper. S. ^i^a&i (§ 88. N. I), ;5f./?Mrw, D. /5£/5«tov, ^s^Saxtov, 

P. §i^ait, (SE^aiwaav. 
Infin. ^^pdvai. 
Part. /?f,5«wV, ^e^awaa (sometimes ^^Suvla), ^e^aog, G. /Jg- 

^aoTog, contracted /56/jw'c, ^f^Moa, /5f/5wV, G. ^s^anog. 

Pluperfect 2. 
S. i[3e^uHV, i^e^txfig, i^t^an, D. i^s^a^iv, i^i^axoVj i^s- 
§aTt]v, P. f(3s^aixsv, ii3ii3aTS, l^e^aaKV. 

Note 8. The singular of the second perfect and second 
pluperfect of verbs in «w, cw, is not used in the indicative. 



§ 92.] VERBAL ROOTS AND TERMINATIONS. 99 

Note 9. The feminine participle of verbs in aw generally 
ends in aa, in the second perfect. Its uncontracted form is 
not used. 

Note 10. The accent of the third person plural of the 
indicative (§ 91. N. 7) is placed on the penult, contrary to the 
general rule (^ 93. 1). 

AORIST PASSIVE. 

§ OS. 1. The root of i\\e first aorist passive is formed by 
annexing d-s or ^rj to the root of the verb, (§ S3. 2.) 

The root of the second aorist passive is formed by annexing 
s or ij. (ibid.) 

2. The aorist passive uses the terminations of the active 
voice, and, in its inflection, follows the analogy of the second 
aorist active {i'&tjv) of ildrijxi (§ 1 17) ; except that all the reg- 
ular terminations of the indicative, imperative, and infinitive 
are preceded by r^. E. g. Ti;n:Ta), 

Aorist 1. 

Indic. *S'. sTvq)&i]v, tjg, 7], D. tjjuev, rjTOV, tJttjv, P. hvq>&7]fiev, 

SuBJ. S. TV(f)^£(o, BTjc, ijj, D, twpsv, tr]TOV, srjTOV, p. ionfiiVy 
dijTs, ib)oi, contracted rvcp&u, fjc, jj, cofisi', ijiov, rjiov, tofisv, 
iJTS, wai. 

Opt. S. Tvcpd^elrjv, firjc, sir], D* uri^iiv, eItjTOV, ti7]T-)]V, P. slTjfisv, 

ilTJTS, flrjODtV. 

The syncopated endings el^fv, ute, eIev, (see the par- 
adigm,) are more common than the regular ones. 
Imperat. S. TVCfdriTL (§ 14. N. 4), r^^(x^, D. TjTov, riTMV, P. 

rjTS, r^TOjaav or evrwv. 
Infin. Tvq)&7lvai. 
Part. Tvcp&elg, non, iv, G. iviog. 
Aorist 2. 
eivnrjv, througtiout like Aorist 1. 

Note 1 . The Epic language often changes nfav of the third person plural 
of the indicative into iv. E. g. xoff/iia, x'oa-fin^iv for iKO(rfi.r,^ntrav. (§ 1 17. N. 17.) 

Note 2. The Epic language often changes t in the uncontracted subjunctive 
into u. E. g. -rvtp^uu for rv<p^iu. (§ 111. N. 17.) 

Note 3. The Epic language often takes fjuvai or ^£» for va/, in the irifinitive. 
E. g. Tvcp^rifi.iva.1 or rvipS^Jj^sv for 7vip^nvot.i. (§ 89. N. 1.) 

Note 4. The Epic language, in some instances, drops the connecting vowels 
in the second aorist middle. See the Anomalous uXXoftai, u^a^iirx&i, yi^ 
y^oftai, 1ix,of-th 'EAH, X'iyu, AEXH, filyvvfjit, o^vufn, vi^B^a. 



100 INFLECTION OP WORDS. [ § 93. 

ACCENT OF VERBS. 

§ 03. 1. In polysyllabic forms the accent is placed on 
the antepenult, if the last syllable permits it (§ 20) ; if not, it 
is placed on the ^eww//. E.g. 

TVTTTOfiEV, rsTVcpoi * hsTVfiiurjv, hvcp&fjv. 

Compound verbs are not excepted. E. g. avaym, avays. 

3. In dissyllabic forms the accent is placed on the penult. 
E.g. 

TVTXTOi), TVTlTSig. 

3. The perfect active infinitive, the Jirst aorist active infini- 
tive, the perfect passive infinitive and participle, and the 
second aorist middle infinitive, take the accent on the penult. 
E.g. ^ ^ 

tSTVcpsvat, cpiXTjaai, rsivcp&ai, Tervfi^svog, Tvnia&ai. 

Also the Epic infinitive in i^sv. E. g. nlvca, mrsfxEv. 

Note 1. In the Epic language, the perfect passive infinitive and participle^ 
in some instances, take the accent on the antepenult. See tiie Anomalous 
a,Xaofji,ai, ocXtTaivu, «,%iu, 'EH seat. 

4. The second aorist active infinitive and participle, and the 
perfect active participle, take the accent on the last syllable. 
E. g. 

Tvnuv, Tvnojr, T£rvq)Mg. 

Note 2. The verbs EIAH, Ellin, EAETOfl, sv^icrx&>, Xxf^.Uv<!^, in the 
second person singular of the second aorist active imiyerative, take the acute 
on the last syllable. In composition, however, they follow the general rule 
(§ 93. 1). See in the catalogue of Anomalous Verbs. 

5. The second person singular of the second aorist middle 
imperative usually takes the circumflex on the last syllable. 

E. g. TVnXCO, TVTIOV. 

6. In compound verbs the accent cannot go farther back 
than the augment. E. g. 7iQoae;(w, nqootlxov not ngoasixov. 

Note 3. In verbs compounded with a preposition, the ac- 
cent is placed on that preposition when the augment is omitted. 
(^ 78. N. 3.) E. g. iix(paiv(a, sficpaLvov for ivicpaivov. 

Note 4. When the augment, upon which the accent would 
have been placed (§ 93. 1), is omitted (§ 78. N. 3), the accent 
is placed on the penult. E. g. nlmia, nlms for smnTS. 



§<5 94, 95.] FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 101 

FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 

PRESENT ACTIVE. 

\ 94. 1. The present active jndicative is the 
source from which all the other tenses are derived. 

2. Verbs are divided into 'pure verbs, mute verbs, and liquid 
verbs, according as the letter before w is a vuivcl, a mute (tt, 
/?»<?'■ »«> /'j X' T> «5, ^, also ^), or a liquid {X, fi, v, q). E. g. 
Tt/ittw, cpdsco, are pure verbs ; Idnoj, nUxw, are mute verbs ; 
/uc'Aw, jf^w, are liquid verbs. 

Note. 1. These statements apply also io deponent verbs (§ 208'', as such 
verbs are supposed to have been derived from a corresponding ^ive voice. 
E. g. i^viofAtti, a pure verb ; yi^^ofAxi, a mute verb ; i^u^ofAui, a liquid verb. 

Note 2. The title, *' Formation of the tenses," relates 
only to ihe first person singular of the tenses of the indicative. 
For the inflection of the tenses in the other moods, see above 

(§§83-92). 

^ 95. The penult of a pure verb (^ 94. 2), if 
short, is lengthened in the perfect, pluperfect, future, 
and aorist. ^, in the penult, w^hen it is not pre- 
ceded by f, I, or g, is changed into t^. 

For examples, see below. 

Remark. This rule does not apply to the second perfect, 
second pluperfect, second future, and second aorist. 

Note 1. Some pure verbs retain the short vowel through all 
the tenses. Such are aidiofxat, axaofiai, alecj, uvv(a, aQxsa, 
agota, agvco, ythiw, ffxico, S^Xdoi, xoteo), fis&vm, vsixtM, It'w, mvco, 
andwy xavixa, jfUw, tqeu}, xf^h'm. See also the Anomalous aya- 
fiat, uXsofxai, dfi^uvvvfii, (XQaQlaxca, ctQiaxco, dalw divide, dufxaoo, 
daxiOfiai, doctiai, ilamoj, tvvvfii, egdo), sa&lcj, Xrjy.i, lldaxofxai,, 
xaXtio, xXda break, fiodofiai, fis&vu, valw, o(j,vvjj.i, ONSLMI, na^ 
Teofiai, nsrdvvvfAi, axtddvvvfiL. 

Note 2. The quantity of the penult of some pure verbs is 
variable. See the Anomalous aivioj, algs(a, dxaxl^W; ^ulvot, 
yafiio), dtoj bind, 6l8(a^i, 8vva(iat, 8v(a, igvoj, ivqlaxw, S^vm, 
XatTjfit, f'a^w, aoQsvvvfii, XQSfidvvviui, Xv(a, [idxo^ai, vsfxco, o^m, 
nlXvTjfii, nl}xnQr]{ii, nlvta, nlmw, 7to&i<o, '^ PEJl, a^svvvfM, OTigioj, 
aTOQSvvvfii, Tt&rjfii, cp7](il, cp&dvco. 

Note 3. 'K^au changes a into u, contrary to the rule. E. g. p^^^fu, Xi^' 
ffifiai. — ^Ax^oKOftai does not change a into )i, as aiK^oci<rdfieii, 
9* 



102 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [^ 96. 

Note 4. Ti^nf/n lengthens t into u in the perfect active and passive. See 
in the catalogue of Anomalous Verbs. 

§ 96, The present in actual use is not always the foundation 
upon which the other ^arts of the verb rest. Many verbs have, 
or are supposed to have, more than one present. In order there- 
fore to be able to ascertain the original or simple present, the 
learner must become acquainted with the methods by which 
new presents may be derived from a given present. These 
methods are exhibited in the following paragraphs. 

1. Some verbs beginning with a consonant, followed by a 
vowel or a liquid, prefix that consonant together with t. E. g. 

<^ didooi from JOSL 

TLTQaoi " TPASl. 
A few verbs beginning with gt, ox, m, prefix l. E. g. 
tarttw from ^TASl. Also the verb 'ESI, thus, Ua. 

Note 1. A few take the Attic reduplication, but without 
the augment of the second syllable. (§ 80. 1.) E. g. AFArSl 
from ayw. 

Note 2. The Attic reduplication of oviwfjt-i from ONAQ, and the prefix of 
fji.a,t(jLa,u from (axu, are anomalous. 

2. Many verbs, of which the root ends in a labial {n, /?, 9), 
drop w and annex tw. E. g. 

xvnxbi from TTIISI 
H^VTiTca " KPTBSl, (§ 7) 
^inxo) " 'PWfl, (ibid.) 

So anta (qo), ^dmo) (qp), ^XduTca (/5), dgvurca ((p), &dnT(a ((jp), 
&QvnT(a {(f), y.alvnroi (/5), aXimw (tt), xotitw (tt), vlnioi (/5), 
QUTtTO) (qp), aadnxta {cp). 

Hence it appears, that the root of the simple present of 
verbs in tttw ends in a labial ; generally in n. 

3. Many verbs, of which the root ends in a palatal (x, Y,x)y 
or lingual (t, 8, S-), drop w with the preceding consonant, and 
annex oom. E. g. 

(folaaoj from 0PIKJI xdaoa from TAPIl 

TiodadM " nPAFSl ^klaaco '' BAITJl 

^^^00(0 " BHXSl TiOQvaow " KOPTOSl, 

So dXldaaco (/), ^gdaaoi (t), iQsaoM (t), l^aoGta (x), xrjQvaaoi 
(jt), Xlaaoficct, (x), fiaXdoato («), TraWw (t), TrAaWw (^9^), lagdoam 



^ 96.] FORMATION OF THE TENSES. l63 ' 

Hence it appears, that the root of the simple present of verbs 
in aaca ends either in a palatal or in a lingual ; generally in y 
or d. 

Note 3. Tixru is formed from TEKXl by changing t into i and annexing 
r to the root. v§ 96. 16.) 

Note 4. The last syllable of the simple present of a.<pvff<rej and yd(r(ru is either 
lyu or ^cj. 

4. Some verbs, of which the root ends in a palatal (x, y, x), 
or lingual (t, d, xl), drop w with the preceding consonant, and 
annex ^w. E. g. 

xQii^w from KPAIJl aru^ca from 2TArfL 

Note 5. In most cases presents in ^w, especially in poll/' 
syllabic verbs, are considered simple. E. g. ilnl^w, ;fw^t^w. 

Note 6. The last syllable of the simple present of a.^'prd^u, (iacrTa^a/, vuffrd- 
^Oy va'i^ej, (rcLXvi^u, is either <yu or "ha/. 

Note 7. Some verbs have acru or ^u in the present. Such are c<pdara-a> or 
ff<pd^eo from 2^Arn, a^fio^u or K^/noffffu from 'APJMOAn. 

5. Some verbs annex r to the last letter of the root. E. g. 
ri^vb) from Tf//w, tt/jo; from nui. 

6. Many verbs insert v before the last letter of the root. 
E.g. 

XAN/in from XAASl 

AAMBJl " AdBn., (§ 12. 1) 

ENErKSl " ENEKSl, (§ 12. 2) 
|5aAAw " BAAJl, (§ 12. 3.) 

Here belong all verbs in Uu and q^m, and some in yya, as 

7. Some verbs annex avw or aivca to the root. E. g. «v|aVw 
from fty^w, QXta&alrb) or ohaddvco from OAIZOIl. 

Some annex ajo) to, and insert y before the last conso- 
nant of the root. E. g. 

^av&aro) from MAO SI 

Xttfipdva ** AABJl, (12. 1) 

Tv/^aVw " rrxiz, (§ 12. 2.) 

8. Some annex axw or taxw to the root. E. g. ytjgdaxvi 
from yrjgdoyf nv'iuxo) from ;<v(y. ** 



104 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [<^ 96. 

y" Sometimes the vowel before oxoj is lengthened. E. g, 
&viiax(a from ONASl. 

9. Some annex wto to tlie root. In pure verbs this ending 
very often doubles the v. E. g. 

deixrvca from /lETKIl 

Sometimes the vowel preceding this ending is lengthened. 
E. g. ;((avvv(a from ;^ow. 

10. New presents are very often formed by annexing «&>, 
«ft), ow, or vb), to the root of a verb. E. g. 

QLTIXUO from QiTlTbi 

OMOIl " OMJZ 

11. New presents are formed by changing « of the perfect 
into w. E. g. 

(jDiJft), perfect nsifvyM, new present 7iicpvx(a. 

12. Sometimes the sound of the present is strengthened by 
the endings «5^w, 6i9^a>, vO^to. E. g. diojxa&a from ^i&jxw, cpleyi- 
■&(a from cpXsyio, (p&ivvdoi from qiO^lvoj. 

NoTK 8. "E9-:^« comes from i'^iw by annexing 9>iw to the root ; thus ?S-d'a>, 
t<r-B-a>, (§ 10. 3.) *E<r;^/ft/ is immediately derived from 'ia-^u. 

13. Many presents are formed from dissyllabic presents, 
which have s in the penult, by changing the s into o and annex- 
ing fw. E, g. noQ&eo) from nigdoi. 

Or by changing g into w and annexing aw. E. g. orqwcpuco 
from aiQscpM. 

Note 9. JJiTOfitxi gives vror%of/.a,t, •roTaofji.ai, and 'ruraefx.cii. 

14. A few verbs insert a before the last consonant of the 
root. E. g. ^/a/co from MlTJl. 

Note 10. Ai^d^xa comes from AIAAXH by changing ;^; into x after the <r. 
Udf^u is formed from IIAQn by inserting ir before 9-, and changing 9 
into X. 

15. A few verbs annex aw to the root. E. g. «v|w from 
./^rrJl, 77JS^i2 from nETSl. (§§ 9. 2 : 10. 2.) 

16. A few change e into i. E. g. yr/Tyw from nETSl, axl^ 
dvijjiL from 2KE/lAfl. (§ 96. 5.) 



^ 97.] FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 105 

Note 11. All the tenses of verbs in Ttrw, aa(o, ^m (§ 96. 4), 
ro) (§ 96. 5), X).(o, QQ(», (xvbj or uino (§ 96. 7), axo), lay.M, vvw, 
a&b), sdco, vd^o), ^M (§ 96. 15), except the imperfect, generally 
come either from the simple present, or from a new present in 
«w (§ 96. 10), or from both. 

17. In dissyllabic verbs the radical vowel is sometimes 
placed after the last consonant of the root. (§ 26. 2.) E. g. 

ONAJl from OANSl 
TMESl " T£>a) 

eposi " eopsi. 

18. In many instances, the penult of the original present is 
lengthened : 

a becomes rj or ai ' as AABSl, JIIBJl • fPANSl, (pairco. 

X — H, and, before a liquid, I • as £PinJl, tgdnoi ' KPlNJlj 

E — ft (rarely 7j) ; as 2:nEPSl, ouhqw. 
o — ov ' as AKOSl, axoi'w. 

V — tv, and, before a liquid, v ' as rliTrSl, qo^r/w * AI^^XTNJl, 
ala/vro}. 

On the other hand, at is shortened into «, el into T or s, 
ev into v, i] into « (rarely into «), t into t, ov into o, iJ into v. 

Note 12. Sometimes tv in the penult is shortened into «. 
See the Anomalous uUo^ai, d^iu run, nliw, nvtw, qioi jiuw, xia. 

NoTK 13. 'EXauvi* comes from iXciu by lengthening a into aw, and annexing 
» to the root. (§ 96. 5.) 

19. The radical vowel is often either ?, «, or o (rarely w). 
This takes place chiefly in dissyllabic verbs, (§ 2. N. 3.) E. g. 
2I1EPSI, 21IAPSI, 2:11 OP Jl. 

Note 14. In some instances the diphthongs ei and tv are 
changed into oi and ov respectively. See the Anomalous JEISl, 
MUSI, er/M, EylETOIl, nu&oj. 



IMPERFECT ACTIVE. 

§ 97. To form the imperfect active, drop a of 
the present, annex ov, and prefix its augment. 
E.g. 

jvnTta imperf. tivnTov 



106 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [<^ Qg. 

FIRST AND SECOND PERFECT ACTIVE. 

^98. 1. To form the perfect active, drop o 
of the present, annex xa, and prefix its augment. 

E.g. 

nam) perf. ninavjia 

(fdsb) " nfcpUr,}ia (^ 95) 

drjXob) " did )i)MyM.. I'lhid.) 

««5a) " ^ya --(§ 10. 4) 

nti&(a " ninHY.a (ibid.) 

iXnl^ot) •' 7JXTiiy.a (ibid.). 

So Ti|M«o), ifil^n]Ku (§ 95) ; 5^«'o>, (5£(54)«Ka (ibid.) ; t/w, Ttn- 

>trt (ibid.) ; dayQVco, dtduygvya (ibid.). 

(1) The first perfect active of liquid verbs is always derived 
from the simple present. E. g. ay/fXlb), i','/yfXya ' ifjnXXoj, h'ipaXxa ' 
(fahb), 7iB(fnyya' xa&alQW, ytyu&a^xct. (§ 96. 6, 18.) 

(2) When the radical vowel is either f, «, or o, the first per- 
fect of dissytlabic liquid verbs takes «. E. g. aieXXoD, eatuXxa ' 
<pd^£lg(o, t(fitu(jyu. (^ 96. 6, 18, 19 ) 

Note 1. The verbs xXivu, x^ivu, vrXuvu, drop » in the first perfect active. 
Thus, xixXtKu, xix^iKx, TtTXvxa. 

2. To form the perfect active of mute verbs 
whose root ends in a labial (n, (3, cp) or a palatal 
(%, 7, x)^ drop a of the present, annex a, change 
the preceding smooth or middle mute into its cor- 
responding rough mute {(p, x)^ and prefix its aug- 
ment. E. g. 

xql^fxi perf TaTQicpa 

yQcicpo) *' ysygacpn 

nXsxto " TifnXfxi^- 

So Tvnito, Tsrvcfa ' nguoaM, ninqi-f'/f*-' (§ 96, 2, 3.) 

The perfect formed according to these rules (§ 98. 1,2) 
is called the first perfect active. 

Note 2. The first perfect of the following verbs changes the radical vowel i 
into « (§ 96. 19): xXWru, xixXe(pa ' 'jrifjtTu, Tivof4.(pa, ' r^icra, riT^o^a 
(snmttimas TiT^a.(pa^. See also the Anonialous aya/, i'Sw, ENEFKn, As- 
yeo collect, and r^'K^eu. 

Note S. The anomalous AEIH, in the first perfect, changes ti into et 
(§ 96, N. 14), See in the catalogue of Anomalous Verbs. 



§99.] 



Formation of the Tfii^sts. 



107 



§ 99. Some verbs form their perfect active also by drop- 
ping m of the present, annexing «, and prefixing the augment. 

Eg- 

urjTTOJ pert, otorjiitt. 

The perfect thus formed is called the secOx\d perfect 

ACTIVE. 

The following list contains nearly all the verbs which have a 
second perfect active. For the changes of the root, see above 
(§ 96), 



uyfVfii {Am), tuyu. 

axoico {AKOJI), ax^y.ooc. 

aidut'b) (^ A/1 Si), I ad a. 

AlSEOJl, dyt]vo&a. 

avwyxxi, vcvMya. 

aguotaxM [APSi),, uQUQa. 

^aivM (BASl), ^i§ace. 

/?t^§ w'axta( EFOJl), part. /?? /?^xJ?. 

(iuvXo^uL {BOTAfi), ^i^ovXa. 

y7j»tf!,k {riiesi), yiy-q^a. 
y'yvoftrn {rBNJl, FASl), yiyo- 

r<t, yiyaa. 
rJlNJl, ytyMVce. 
8ai(a [jAfl), d-ed 1^,(4. 
JAJl, diducc. 
dsQxofiai, dd5ogy.a. 
dlfa, did'ttx. 

duvntb) {zIOTIISl), didovna. 
APEMSL, M^QOfxci. 
iyilijbr [ErEPSl)y lygr^yoQa. 

iS-(o, si'b)&a. 

UTASl, olda. 

uxo), soix(x, oixa, iixa. 

EylETOfL {EylTOSl), ili^Xv&a. 

D.jib), I'oXnoc. 

ENEOSl, fWivo&oc. 

igsiTica (EPIIJli), igriQiinDt. 

f'^w, b;(b)x()i. 

-^ullm (OAAJl), Ts&rjXa. 

0A0JI, ra&r]7i(X. 

&vi]ax(o (ONAJl), xi&vaa. 

XoTTjfii {2TASl)y sajaa. 



xsv-doii, xixzvSoc. 

xi^dw^ xtxi^da. '•' ' 

xXd^b) {KAAFJI), yexXrjya, xs- 

xXayya. 
xoTiTw {KOnSl), aixona. 
iCQix'^to {KPAFJI), xsy.Quya. 
vjilvb) {KTENJI), exrovtt. 
lufXTKo, ktXajina. 
'Xavddvw {AAOSI), XeXrjda. 
Xiiaxb) (AAKJI), XiXaxa. 
Xsljib), XsXoina. 
^aivM {BIANSI), ^i^r]va. 
imignio) {MAPUJI), ftifiagna^ 

MEIPSL (MEPSl), BJi^OQix. 

}.iiKbi, jxsf.ir]Xa. 

MENU, ^sfiovu. 

fii]x(io{.mi (mAKJI), f^iitrjxa^ 

o'^M i^O/JSl), odotidu* 

oiyat, eaiya. 

oXXv^L [OASi), oXcoXa. 

O/Jfl/onctma. 

OQWyi {OPJiyf OQMQa. 

Tra'cj/ft) {FIAOJI), Tiinov&oc, tis- 

nrj&a. 
neldb), ninoida. 
nigdoD, nsnoQda. 
Tx^yrvftL (lIAFJfl), 7vsnt]yci. 
nlnxbi (lIETJl), part, ntmtag. 
nXr]&()t>, ninlri&H. 
nXtJaao) {iJAAFfl), ninXrjyoc, 
nguaaw {I2PAFJl)i nsngdya^.^^ 
gy'iyvvfu (PAFIl), iggtaya. 
Qiyico (PIFH), iqqtyix. 



108 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§§ 100-102. 

eaigco (^APJl), aiatjga- ^£i'/w, nicpsvya. 

ariTiw, aiaTjTca. cpdslgw {(POEPSl), e(p&OQa. 

anEigco {SIIEPSL), sonoga. cpQlauco ( 0PJKJI), nscpglxa, 

ffTcUw (2TEASI), toToXa. ^TZJl, part, nzcpv^wg. 

axsgyco, taxogya. (pvw, ndcpva. 

T7JXW, TSTTjxot. ^f^Jvo) {XANJl), vAx^oi. 

TtxTW i^TEKSl), rhoxa. xavduroo {XA/JJl), xixavSa. 

TAAJl, xhlaa. ;^£^w {XE/JSl), xe^oda. 

tgl^G) {TPITJI), TtxgTya x^^'i^ {XAAASl), «£>Aa5«. 

(palva (^0ANJI), nscp^vcc. 

Note. In Homer, a few pure verbs in au, tea, form their second perfect parti- 
ciple by changing a or £ into jj and annexing us. E. g. /Sagsw, /SsySa^jj^j. 



FIRST AND SECOND PLUPERFECT ACTIVE. 

^ lOO. To form the first pluperfect active, drop 
a of the first perfect, annex siv, and prefix its aug- 
ment. E. g. 

rvniM, TSTVcpa 1 pluperf. ixsxvcpFLv. 

§ 10 1. To form the second pluperfect active, drop a of the 
second perfect, annex fiv, and prefix the augment. E. g. 
ayovM, ax^Hocc 2 pluperf. riKi]v.6fi.v. 

, FIRST AND SECOND FUTURE ACTIVE. 

^ lOS. To form the future active, drop o of the 
present, and annex aco. E. g. 

navoa fut. navoM 

J cpiXioi " qpdrjo'w (§ 95) 

8ril6(a " drjXwaca (ibid.) 

Xsinca " Xslipw (§5.2) 

TtXixto " nXs^co (ibid.). 

So Tiiidw, xiiir,aco {§ 95); dgaa, dguao) (ibid.); t/w, xjam 
(ibid.); daxgv(o, d ax gvxs (o {\b\d.) ; xgl^M, xglipw (§8.2); ygdcpa, 
ygdipco (ibid.) ; XiycOy Xs^co (§ 9. 2) ; tsi^w, tev^co (ibid.) ; ad(a, 
aau (§ 10. 2) ; nsl&iti, ndaco (ibid.); iXnl^oj, eXnla(o. (ibid.): 
ffTTfiWwjaTts/ffO} (§ 12., 5). ,?r'''"'o^'' 

The future thus formed, is called the first future active. 



§ 103.] FORMATION OF THE TENSES. M9 

Note 1. Futures in Taw, from verbs in i^w, often drop the 
a, and are inflected like contract verbs in s(o (§ 116). E. g. 

i(Ofil^oi), fut. xo^hb), xofiico, nig, lel, dual ihtov, plur. loviisv, 
isiTS, lovau . ■.[ 

Note 2. Some futures in ccooj and saw often drop the or, and 
are contracted like verbs in aw and eco. (ibid.) E. g. 

iXdb) fut. ildaoj, f).da eXu 

dittoxidd^w " diaoxsddabj, diaoxsdda diaoxsBa 

TBliia ** Ti?.ecscj, rsXiio TfAw. 

Note 3. The Doric dialect, in the inflection of the first 
future active, follows the analogy of contract verbs in i<a 
(ibid.). E. g. rofievco, fut. ro^Bvaa, Doric ro^svob). 

Note 4. The Doric often forms futures in fw from pure 
verbs or from verbs in ^o), which among the Attics have a(o in 
the future. E. g. yeXdca, ysXd^co ' xofitCco, xo/u/|w. 

Note 5. The poets often use aom for aw, in order to make 
the preceding syllable long by position. E. g. avvco, avvaata * 
yeXdo), yeXdoaca. 

§ 1025^ To form the future active of a liquid 
verb, drop co of the simple present, and annex eo 
contracted o. E. g. 

fiivo) fut. fisrib) contr. ^ugjw 

vqlvb} " yotvia xgivoj, (§ 96. 18) 

djxvvo) *' dfivyaco dfivru, (ibid.) 

icce^alga " xa^agm xa&agu, (ibid.) 

xTBivat " yjEX'to} xtsjw, (ibid.) 

ateXXca " aieXia ajeXta, (§ 96. 6.) 

The future thus formed has been called the second future 

ACTIVE. 

Note 1. A few liquid verbs have their future in cu. Such are xv^u, xi^ffu' 
^i^uy <pv^fu ' xiXXu (KEAXl), xiXffu. See also the Anomalous a^a^terxuf 

Note 2. The pure and mute verbs have no second future active. In the 
paradigm rixru, the second future Tvriu tvxu is introduced merely for exam- 
ple's sake. 

10 



^ 



110 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 104. 

FIRST AND SECOND AORIST ACTIVE. 

§ 104. 1. To form the aorist active, drop o of 
the present, annex aa, and prefix its augment. E. g. 



navco 


aor. 


tnavaa 


cpiXio) 


<( 


i(f)lXt]oa (§95) 
idijXcaaa (ibid.) 


drjlcb) 


(I 


Xu7t(x) 


(C 


I'XHipa (§ 5. 2) 


nXixM 


tc 


enXs^a (ibid.). 



So ri(xa(a, ixlfit^aa (§ 95) ; dgaco, edgaaa (ibid.) ; ai^t«w, 
^vlaaa (ibid.); t/w, lilffw (ibid.); da^igvoj, iddxgvaa (ibid.); 
tqI^o), eiQiipa (§ 8. 2) ; yQacpa, eyQccipa^ (ibid.) ; As/w, fierce 
(§9.2); rsvj(M, sTsv^a (ibid.); ad(o, ^aa (§10.2); nd^b), 
£nsio(x (ibid.); eXnlC^, riXniaa (ibid.). 

Note 1. A few pure and mute verbs annex a instead of va. See the An- 
omalous aXii>f/,cii, ^XTSofAUi, Einn, ENEFKn, IvuKca, xetiu, fftvu, X^'^' 

NoTK 2. Three verbs take x« instead of <rit. See the Anomalous S/Sw^/, 
ittfAi, and TiB^Tifjii. 

Note 3. The Dorians often form aorists in $a from pure 
verbs, or from verbs in ^(o. E. g. yeXdo), i/sXa^a ' ^op'^w, 

Note 4. The poets often double the a after a short vowel. 
E. g. dvvca, 7]vvoaa ' ysXdw, iyiXauau. 

2. To form the aorist active of a liquid verb, 
drop o of the simple present, annex a, lengthen 
the penult, and prefix its augment. ^, in the 
penult, is lengthened into r^, and s into ei, E. g. 

xqIvm aor. BxgTva (§ 96. 18) 
dfivvG) " TJfivva (ibid.) 
p vtfi(o " Evei^u (ibid.) 

TlXXca " srlXa (§ 96. 6, 18) 

aq)dXX(o *' iocprjXa (ibid.) 
Those liquid verbs, which have at in the penult of the pres- 
ent, take r] or a in that of the aorist. E. g. qoatVw, E'^rjva ' 
xa&atQO}, ixdd^riga or sxd&dQa. (§ 96. 18.) 

The aorist formed according to these rules (§ 104. 1, 2) 
is called the first aorist active. 

Note 5. Af^a and ukXeftai change « into » only in the indicative (m con- 
sequence of the augment). Thus, ^ga, apu, a^aifti, a^ov, a^ai, a^cts ' aXXofi,ait 



§ 105.] 



FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 



Ill 



nX&fjttit, S.\o)ft.a.t, oi'ka.tr^a.i, aXie/^ivos- See in the catalogue of Anomalous 
Verbs. 

Note 6. A few ligiiid verbs take tra in the first aorist active. Such are 
xti^u (KEPn), iKi^tra • KiXXu (KEAH), 'UtXffot ' xv^u, 'Uv^ffct ' rti^tu 
(TEPXl , irt^ra. See also the Anonjalous k^agiffKu^ t'/XXu, S^wfAt. 

§ lOS. Some verbs form their aorist active by dropping 
(a of the present, annexing ov, and prefixing the augment. E. g. 

TEfiO) aor. tTffiov. 

The aorist thus formed is called the second aorist active.. 

The following list contains nearly all those verbs which, 
have a second aorist active. For the changes of the root, see 
above (§ 96). 

iQunoa {EPIKSI), 7]Q(xov. 
iQunoa (EPIIIJI), rjgmov. 
iQvyydvM {EFTFJI), iiJQvyov^ 
igvxco, sQVxaxov. 
BVQloy.bi (ETPJI), svqop^ 

OAfPSl, txacpov. 
■&iyyar(a {eiPJl), e&iyov, 
d^v^oxb} {O ANSI) J s&avov. 
S^QOJOXM (OOPJl), e&ogov. 
KAJfLy y.i'nudov. 
xaivci) {K ANSI) J exavov. 
xoifxvb) (kAMSI), txafiov. 
xev&b) (KTOSl), exv^ov. 
xixdvb) (KIXSI), bxixov.. 
y.luL,ixi {KAArSl), txXayov.. 
xQcx^o) (KPAFSI), exgayov. 
xidvfa (KTENSI), ixxavov. 
xivnim (KTTIISL), exTvnov, 
Xayxnraa (AAXSI), eXa/ov. 
Xafi^avo) (AABSl), tXa^ov. 
XavO^dvb) {AAOSl), Ua&ov. 
Xdaxw {AAKSI), eXanov, 
Xdnta (yiniSl), tXinov. 
fiav&dvo) (MAOSI), t^adov. 
[KXQTlXb} (MAPUSI), fiifxaQTiov. 
METPSl (MEPSI), epixoQov. 
[xi]xdo[xat, {MAKSl),e^axov^ 
[xvxdofiai {MTKSI), I'/xvxov.. 
oXio&alvw ( 0AT2.0Sl)j wXiaS'oy, 



ayoi, Tjyayov. 
dxaxl^fa {AXSl), ^xcixov. 
dXe^oj {AyJEKSl), ijXaXxov. 
uXnaiva {AydITSl),JlXirov. 
dXcpalvbi {AAfPSi), rjXq)ov. 
afxaQTdv(o(AMAPTSL), i]^aqxov. 
dfinXaxlaxw {AMUAAKJI), ijfA- 

nXaxov or TJuXaxov. 
avduva (^AASL), tadov or ddov. 
dncKplaxb) i^A<PSl), rjnacpov. 
d^aQiaxto {^APSl), tJqdcqov. 
ATPSL, av()OV. 
^dXXb) {BAASl), i'^aXov. 
^Xaaxdvbi {BAA2TSI), t^Xaoxov. 
(iXwaxb) (^MOASi)y t^ioXov. 
BPAXSl, i^qaxov. 
ddxvbj {AAKSl), edttxov. 
JASly sdaov. 

daQ&dvb) (AAPOSl), edaQ&ov. 
dsQxofiai, tdgaxov. 
A IK SI, tdixov. 
APAMSl, tdgcc/xov. 
EIASl (TJJl), iidav. 

EinSl, UTXOV. 

EAETOSL {EAT&Sl), ijXv&ov, 
'EASl, slXov. 
ENEEKSl, i]Vfyxov. 
ivlnxbi {ENinSi)y ivivlnov. 
ivianw, evionov^ 



«7Tw, tanov. 



112 INFLECTION OF t^ORDS. [ §^ 106, 107. 

ocpEiXoi {0<I>EASI), MCfi^lov. rixTia {tEKSL), etsxov. 

ocpXiaxdvoj {00 All), bxpXov. rnvaxofAat {TTKJI), tTVxov. 

ndlXoj {UAASl), enaXov. r^^yco {TMAFfL), bj^ayov. 

ndoxM {I2A0J2), tnad-ov. xogaw {TOPSL), i'Togov. 

nsldbj (^UIO/l), ETtid^ov. rgeTTOJ, tTganov. 

nigdoj, tnagdov. T^sqpw, trgacfov. 

nsg&co, enga^ov. zgwyo) {TPAFJI), bjgayov. 
ninxM i^IIETSl), tnwov, XntTov, xvyxdvoi ( TTXJl), exvxov. 

nivb) {niJl), iTiLOv. (PAFJl, tcpayov. 

nX^Goca {iJAArSl), BnXrjyov. (IjENJI, nefpvov, tnscpvov. 

nOPSl, BTiogor. qosi'/w [(liTESl), ecpvyov. 

nittlgb) {mAPJl), tmagov. q^gd'CM {(PPAASl), E(pgadov. 

GTH/co y2'TIXSl)y lanxov. xd'C,03 (XA/lJl), xexadov, 

OTvysM {2TTrJl)y savvy ov. ;^aa'w (XANJl), e'xavov. 

TAFSl, iiayov. ;^«j'5«Vw {XAAJl), ix^^dov. 

xi^vbi (zsjAta), STEiJ-ov, ha^xov. XPAI2MSL, sxgoiianov. 
TETMJl, txsT^ov. 

Note. Some of these verbs have also a first aorist active. See a^a^iffxa, 
Einn, ENEFKn, xXa^u, xTtUu, fjt.K^'prru, •roiff^u, {r£/9-&/, •rig'^Uy mTTTUt 
in the catalogue of Anomalous Verbs. 

PRESENT AND IMPERFECT PASSIVE. 

§ 106. 1. To form the present passive, drop o 
of the present active, and annex o^ai, E. g. 

rvTiTOi pres. pass, rvmo^au. 

2. To form the imperfect passive, drop o^ai of 
the present, annex 0^7/1/, and prefix its augment. 

TVTiTto, TVTiTo^at imperi. pass. nvnxofxTjv. 

PERFECT PASSIVE. 

^107. To form the perfect passive, drop o of 
the present active, annex fxat, and prefix its aug- 
ment. E. g. 



nav(o 


perf. pass, nsnavfiai 




(piXi(o 


" 7tscpiXr}fittL 


(§95) 


drjXooi 


" dsdi^XMfXDCi 


(ibid.) 


Xelno) 


" XiX8ifxfJ,aL 


(§ 8. 1) 


nXixsa 


*' nsnXey (lai 


(■§ 9. n 



§ 108.] F0R3IAT10N OF THE TENSES. 113 

So Tijuaw, jntjxr,ixai (^ 95) ; arido), ^liu^at (ibid.) ; r/w, rhi^ 
fiai (ibid.) ; day.QVM, deddxfjv/jtat (ibid.) ; tqI^w, rixQi^^ab 
("§8. 1); YQaqjOi, ydyga/xixai, (ibid.); Xiyca, Xikf/fxai' jsvxco, xt- 
Tsv/fiat, (§9. 1) ; «(Jw, fiaiiai (§ 10. 1) ; neld^to, ninsia^ai (ibid.) ; 
Xcogt^co, xf;f(w^iff|Uat (ibid.) 

For the inflection of the perfect passive, see above (§91). 

(1) The perfect passive of liquid verbs is always formed 
from the simple present. E. g. a/yiXXM, TJyysX^ai, ' cpulvtOj 
mcpafifiac. (§ 96. 6, 18: 12. 3.) 

(2) When the vowel of the root is either e, «, or o, the 
perfect passive of dissyllabic liquid verbs takes «. E. g. aiiX- 
X(o, i'araXfiat' qi&slgoj, icp&ccQixai. (§ 96. 6, 18, 19.) 

Note 1. Some pure verbs, especially such as retain the 
short vowel in the penult (§ 95. N. 1, 2), insert a before the 
terminations ^uat, rai, fisd^ov, fis&oc, E. g. 

jsXibiy TiriXsafiat xsiiXEaiai, tet sXiafis&ov, TixsXia^t&a. 

NoTi 2. The liquid verbs mentioned above (§ 98. N. l), and a few others, 
drop the » in the perfect passive. E. g. xX/»w, xixXi/tat. 

Note 3. Some liquid verbs in vm change v before fi into a, 
E. g. q)alv(o, nicpao^ai for necpaii^av. 

Note 4. If the terminations ^m, fxe^ov, ^e&a, be preceded 
by two consonants (except Xy., Xy, gx, gy, gx), the consonant 
immediately preceding them is dropped. E. g. lignwy Thsgf^ai, 
TETsg^e&ov, TETsg^s&a, 

Note 5. In a few, instances, the epic poets retain the lingual (J, 9-) un- 
changed before ft. E. g. KAAH, xiKalf/,a.i ' Ko^vtrru (KOPTGH), xsxa- 

Note 6. The following mute verbs change t into a in the perfect passive : 

(rT^i(pUf IffT^XfAfAKI ' T^'lTtU, TiT^afAfAai ' T^iipM (©PEOil), TiB^^llif/t/Aai. 

(§ 96. 19.) 

PLUPERFECT PASSIVE. 

§ 108. To form the pluperfect passive, drop 
fiat of the perfect passive, annex [xr^v, and prefix 
its augment. E. g. 

rvma, texvfzfiai plup. pass, iteivfifxijv, 
10* 



114 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§§109,110. 

FIRST AND SECOND AORIST PASSIVE. 

^109. To form the aorist passive, drop a of 
the present active, annex ^t^v, and prefix its aug- 
ment. E. g. 

navM aor. pass, inav&rjv 

(piXsoa *' , , icpdri&Tjv (§ 95) 

drjXoG) " idrjXw&Tjv (ibid.) 

Xdnoa *' fXdqj&tiV (^ 7) 

nXiHb) '' lnX£'4&r}v (ibid.). 

So ttfida, erii^-^d^Tjv {^ 95) ; avicxM, ipua&ijv (ibid.); cpcogdwf 
iqxagi^d^Tjv (ibid.) ; jgi^a), ixQicp&rfV (^ 7) ; ygacpco, s'/Qucfhriv ' 
Xs/oj, eXtx^fjv (ibid.); rsvzca, eTevx&rjv ' ado), fja&rjv (§ 10. 3); 
nsl&ca, inslad^tjv (ibid.) ; ;^a)^/^to, exMgla&rjV (ibid.) 

The aorist passive thus formed is called the first aorist 

PASSIVE. 

(1) The first aorist passive of liquid verbs is always derived 
from the simple present. E. g. dyyiXXbi, '^yysX&rjv ' cfa.ivo), 
e'qxxv&TjV. (§ 96. 6, 18.) 

(2) When the vowel of the root is either ?, «, or o, the first 
aorist passive of dissyllabic liquid verbs takes «. E. g. aTiXXw^ 
iardXS^rjv ' q)&ElQ(a, i(p&ug&T}v. (§ 96. 6, 18, 19.) 

Note 1. Some pure verbs, particularly such as retain the 
short vowel in the penult (§ 95. N. 1, 2), insert o before Sr}v. 
E.g. 

Tflfw, eTeXioi9rjV. 

Note 2. The liquid verbs mentioned above (§ 98. N. 1) often drop the » 
in the first aorist passive. E. g. xXivu, i*A./vS->;», commonly i*Xi'S«y. 

^ 1 1 0. Some verbs form their aorist passive also by drop- 
ping w of the present active, annexing Tjr, and prefixing the 
augment. E. g. 

Xsyb) aor. pass. iXsyrjv. 

The aorist passive thus formed is called the second aorist 

PASSIVE. 

The following list contains nearly all those verbs which have 
a second aorist passive. For the changes of the root, see 
above (§ 96). 

ayvvpi {AFSI), iayr^v or idyijv. aXXdaaoj {AAAAFSI), ijXXdyrjv. 



§§ 110, 111.] FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 



115 



agrtd^to (^APITArJl), -^Qndyrjv. 

^oLTnoi {BA0JI), i^d(pr}V. 

jSkdTtro} (BAABSl)y i^Xd^rjv. 

^Xinm, i^XiuTV. 

/J^f;jfw, i^Qdxrjv. 

ygdq)M, eygdcprfv. 

J Ally iddtjv. 

dtxfxdoj {jAMJl)f iddfifjv. 

dsQxoixtti, id^dx-qv. 

degio, iddQijv. 

eVX(o (EylJl), idXT)V. 

^tvywfii {ZTFJl), f^vyrjv. 

S^dma {OAfP/l), ixdaprfV. 

■&iQOfiai, i&dgrjv. 

^Xl^ta, t&Xl^r^v. 

&QV71T(0 {0PT0JI), STQVCpTjV, 

xuQta \KEPSi), ixdgtjv. 
xXenxb) {KAJEnil)\ ixXdnrjv. 
xXlrco, ixXlvrjV. 
xomco (KOIIJI), ix6ni]v. 
xalta or x«(u, ixdrjv. 
xgvTtKo {KPTBfl), ixgv^riv. 
Xsyat, iXEyr,v. 
XETiWf eXinrjV. 
fxalvo) {MANJl)i ifxdvtjv. 
fiiyvvfiL {Mini), ifilyriv, 
ol'yo), ol'yrjv. 

ogvaaco {OPTrJft), (agvyrjv. 
ndXXb) {llAAJl), (7tdXr}V. 
Tiugo) {lUEPH), indgrjv. 
nriyvv^i {HAFJl), indyrjv. 
'ttAexw, inXdxTjv. 
nXrjaait} (lIAArJl), fnX^yrjv, 
inXdyrjv. 



nvtyo}, inviyrjv. 
gib) (PTJl), eggvtjr, 
griyvi'ixt (PAFJl), eggdyrjv, 
g'lTiKx) i^PIfliJl), iggicpTjV. 
or,n(a {^AIIfL), iadiiriV. 
axdnxui {2KA^li), eaxdcprjv. 
anugw {SIIEPSi), eandgTjV. 



ffT/f5w, Eorl^r,v. 



axeXXb) {^TEAfi), i(STdXr,r, 

atsgib) {^TEPfl), ioxigriv. 

axgecpo), eoTgd(pTjV. 

avgojf iovgrjv. 

acpdlXw {^(PAyJJl), ia(fdXr)v. 

ocpdoub) (^2<I)ArJl), ia<fdyriv, 

rdoaco {TAFJi), (idyrjv. 

ri^rw {ri^m), hdfjirjv, 

regno}, hdgTiTjV. 

tsgoo^ai, irsgarjv. 

T7;xw {TAKJI), exdxTjV. 

tfnjya {TMAFU), ir^dyriv, 

Tgsnco, iTgdnrjv. 

Tgscpta and xgdqxo, ixgdifijv, 

rgl^o), irgl^riv. 

Tvmo} {TTnJl),iTVTtr]V. 

Tvcpo) {0T<PJl), irvq)7)V. 

(paivw (flfANJl), iqpdvTjV. 

(p&iiga) {(IjOEPJI), iifd^dgtiv, 

(fXiyco, e(pXeyTjV. 

q)gdaG(a {(liPAFJl), icpgdyrjv. 

(pgvyto, ecpgvyrjv. 

<fvm, i(f)vrjV. 

Xalgb) (XAPJl), (X^griv* 

y^v^w {V[fTFfL), etpvyr}v 



FIRST, SECOND, AND THIRD FUTURE PASSIVE. 

§ 1 1 1. 1. To form the first future passive, drop 
^tfv of the first aorist passive, annex d'tjaofxai, and 
reject the augment. E. g. 

TUTTTw, iTV(pd-r}V 1 fut. pass. TVfpd^^aofim. 

2. To form the second future passive, drop t^v of the second 
aorist passive, annex rjaofiai, and reject the augment. E. g. 
TVTiTO), izvnrjv 2 fut. pass. xvTt^aouai. 



116- INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ §^ 112-;114. 

^112. To form the third future passive, drop 
at of the second person singular of the perfect 
passive, and annex o^au E. g. 

Tvnra); TsiVf^jxai, Ttzvipau 3 fut. rsiv^iiJOfiat. 

Note. Liquid verbs, and verbs beginning with a vowd, very seldom have a 
third future passive. 



PRESENT, IMPERFECT, PERFECT, AND PLU- 
PERFECT, MIDDLE. 

^113. The present, imperfect, perfect, and plu- 
perfect, middle, are the same as in the passive. 

FIRST AND SECOND FUTURE MIDDLE. 

^114. 1. To form the first future middle, drop 
o of the first future active, and annex o^at. E. g. 

TVTiTOjj Tinpta 1 fut. mid. jvipo^ai. 

Note 1. When the first future active ends in o) (§ 102. 
N. 1, 2, 3), the first future middle ends in ovfiui. E. g. 

xo///^M, xofiiM, 1 fut. mid. noniov^ai, inflected like cpdovfiuu 
xaXdoj, xala, I fut. mid. xaiovfiut. 

So in the Doric dialect, tvtttd), tvj/^w, 1 fut. mid. rvxpovjiea. 
The Attics sometimes use the Doric first future middle. 

2. To form the second future middle, drop a of 
the second future active, and annex o^at. E. g. 

axilloj, atsXioj ffidw 2 fut. mid. oisXeoiiai, contracted 
aielovfLcci. 

Note 2. In a few instances the second future middle is found in mute and 
pure verbs. See the Anomalous t^e/ixi, ftat^dvu, fta^^ofiou, !r/v«, ^ifrru. 



§ 115.] 



FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 



ti¥ 



FIRST AND SECOND AORIST MIDDLE 



§ 115. 1. To form the first aorist middle, drop 
a of the first aorist active, and annex ap^v. E. g. 

TvnTco, eTVipu 1 aor. mid. hvipdfirjv. 

2. Some verbs form their aorist middle by dropping 
to of the present active, annexing o^ijv, and prefixing the aug- 
ment. E. g. 

'£^11 aor. mid. d)L6[ir,v, 

The aorist middle thus formed is called the second aorist 

MIDDLE. 



The following list contains 
have a second aorist middle, 
see above (96). 

ayslgo) {ArEPSL), '^/(g6fn}V. 
ay (a, rjyayofxrjv. 
al'gb) (APSl), ^§6fj,r}v. 
ula&dvofLai {AI^OSl)', tjo&o- 

aXnalvoj (AytlTJl), TjXiTOfirjv. 

anaxi^w (AXJI), riy.cixofjiriv. 

ocXXofiUL (AAJI), ifXofxriV. 

(jdXXof (BAASl), e^uX6nr,v. 

ylyvofiai {rENJl), iysvofii^v. 

daio) {AASi), idaofirjv. 

iydgoi {EFEPfL), rjygofxrjv. 

EIASl, sidofiTjV. 

'EAJI, stXo^rjv. 

sno), kano/iiTjv. 

igo^ai, TjQOfirjv. 

svqIoxoj (ETPJI), evQ6iJ,rfV. 

^0), iaxof^rjv. 

ixvEOfuaL (ixoj), ly.ofiTjV. 

Note. Some of these verbs have also 



nearly all those verbs which 
For the changes of the root, 



TtiXo^ai, ix£yX6iJ,r}v. 
Xafj^ttva {AABJI), eXa^ofiijv. 
Xav&dva} (AAOJI), iXa&ofiTjv. 
Xday.a) {AAKJl), XeXaxofirjV. 
Xstnco {AIIISl), iXL7i6fir)v. 
oXXvfii, {OAfl), (oXofXTjv. 

OQVVfJ.L (OPJl), MQOfitjV. 

oGcp§aLroi.tai [O^0PSl), o}aq>go~ 

nst&o) {niOSl), inid^ofxrjv. 

nixo^ai, emo^xrjv. 

nX^oaco (llylAril), nsnXijyo- 

nvv&uvo^ai (UTOJl), invd^o- 

tsfxva (rg'iuo)), iiaixoixriv. 
iBQTiv), iragnofxrjv. 
rly.ro) (TEKJI), eTExofxrjv. 
rgETTco, hganofXTjV. 

a first aorist middle. Such are af^it, 



1.18 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§116. 

CONTRACT VERBS. 

^116. Pure verbs in ao/ eco, and oo, are con- 
tracted by the Attics in the present and imperfect. 

Note 1. Dissyllabic verbs in sw are contracted only when 
€ and £ come together. E. g. nlio), n'Aesig nXelg, nXiet nisi, nXio- 
fisv, nXsEts TtXelis, nXsovai. 

Remark. Aiu, bind, deviates from this analogy (§ 116. N. 1). E. g. 

atovfft ^evffi, ^lofiKi ^ovfAat, 

Note 2. For the contraction of ti^oiuy ^da, xvdu, <rtivaa», tfAiea, Xi'*"t 
•^au, see above (§ 23. N. 1). 

Note 3. The movable v (§ 15. 1) is very seldom appended 
to the contracted third person singular of the imperfect active. 

Note 4. The Epic dialect sometimes changes the radical 
vowel £ into el. E. g. oxvsloj for oy.vta. 

Note 5. The Epic contracts ssai into stat, and iso into slo. 
E. g. aldsEui aidslai, aldsEo aldslo, from aldiofiai,. Sometimes it 
drops the second s. E. g. [xv&iai for fxv&isai from fiv&iofxai. 

Note 6. The Epic protracts w or « (contracted) into aa or 
«a, and w (contracted) into ow or (aa or coo, and w into ow. 

ayoQao^tti, ayoQaEG&s ayoQaa&e, Epic ayoqaaa&E 
TXfddco, TiEdro, Epic nsdooj ' neddsig nfdag, Epic neddag 
^/5aaj, Tjfidovaa ^/5c3aa, Epic i^/^wwaa * ri^dovTtg r^avxigy 

Epic ri^movug 
mTLao^ai, aiuaoiTO «mwTO, Epic aliLObno, 

In the Epic dialect, verbs in ow sometimes follow the analogy 
of verbs in «w. E. g. drj'iobj, drj'ioovTo difiovvto, Epic ^j^to'wvro • 
dtj'iaouv dtj'idlsv, Epic ^Tjlowfy, as if from 8r(i(xbi. 

Note 7. In some instances the Epic changes the radical 
vowel a into w. E. g. ^aw, ^ww. (§ 96. 19.) 

Note 8. The Ionic very often changes the radical vowel a 
into €. E. g. (foiTEM for (pondta. 

Note 9. The Ionic often changes «o into m. E. g. /wiyfa- 
vimviai for firj^avdovxaL from firjxavdoucci. 



§ 116.] 



CONTRACT VERBS. 

ACTIVE VOICE. 

INDICATIVE xMOOD. 



119 









Present. 






/ honor 




Hove 




I manifest 


S. 


Tifidco 


S. 


cpiXita 


s. 


dr}X6(o 




Tf/UW 




(piXw 




drjXoj 




Tifidfig 




(piXeeig 




drjXoBig 




rifiag 




(piXslg 




drjXoig 




TlflOCBC 




q)iXiBi 




drjXoBi 




rma 




(fiXtl 




drjXdl 


D. 


tifidofisv 


D. 


(piXioniv 


D. 


dr]X6oixBV 




rifiUfisv 




(piXovfisv 




drjXov(j,BV 




TlfXaBTOV 




(piXsstov 




drjXosxov 




rifidtov 




q)iXBiTov 




dr}Xovxov 




tlfldsTOV 




(piXitxov 




drjXoBxov 




Tl^dtOV 




cpiXstiov 




drfXovxov 


P. 


rijido/itsv 


P. 


q)iXiofisv 


P. 


driXoofiBV 




rifiwfisv 




(fiXovfiiv 




drjXov^BV 




tlfldsTS 




(piXsBTS 




drjXoBxs 




TLflUTe 




q)iXslTS 




drjXovxs 




jifidovai{v) 




(pdsovai{v) 




8r}X6ovai{v) 




rifieiai{v) 




(piXoii(ji{v) 




drjXovai{v) 






Imperfect. 






S. 


hlfiaov 


S. 


icplXsov 


S. 


id)]Xoov 




SllfiOW 




tcplXovv 




edtjXovv 




iTifiocsg 




i(flXsEg 




idi^Xofg 




itifiag 




iq)lX£ig 




idi^Xovg 




erlftas 




iq)tXEs 




bStiXob 




itifia 




i(plXn 




IdriXov 


D. 


hifidofxiv 


D. 


icpiXiofiBV 


D. 


idfjXoofxsv 




itlfiWfXEV 




iq)iXovfisv 




idrjXovfiBV 




hifidixov 




iq)LXiBTov 




idrjXoBxov 




srLfidxov 




icpiXsiTOV 




sdrjXovxov 




iTi/xaiTrjv 




iapiXeBTTjV 




idTjXoixriv 




irifidTTjv 




BCpiXBlxrfV 




idrjXovxtjV 


P. 


STlfldofiSV 


P. 


icpiXiofXBv 


P. 


idrjXoofiBV 




hifiafiEV 




BCpiXoVfXBV 




idr,XovfXBV 




iufAdsTS 




icpiXtBxs 




idrjXosxB 




irifjiocTS 




iq)iXs7,xs 




BdT}X0VX8 




ixifiaov 




icplXBov 




id^Xoov 




itlutav 




imXovv 




idriXow 



mi 



INFLECTION OF WORDS. 



B 116. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



s. 


Tf/iOtW 


s. 


cpiXiix) 


S. 


drjXooj 




TLfim 




q)ila 




drjXw 




TLfiaijg 




Cpditjg 




drjXorjg 




TLfxag 




(pd^g 




di]Xdlg 




Ti^dri 




CpiXsr} 




d^Xoj] 




TL^a 




(fiijj 




dtjXol 


D. 


TifxaoJixsv 


D. 


(pdiioiiev 


D. 


di]X6(t)(iEv 




TlfXUlXSV 




q>ilwijiiv 




dr]XoJ^£V 




Tlfld'f]TOV 




(pderjxov 




dr]X67]xov 




XL^aTOV 




(pdrjrov 




diqXwxov 




xifiat^rov 




cpdirixov 




di]X6rixov 




TlflUTOV 




(fdiixov 




drjXioxov 


P. 


TL^iaWfiSV 


p. 


cpdicofisv 


P. 


8riX6(o^tv 




Tlfl0J(J,EV 




(pdiZfisv 




drjXdj/isv 




tiudrjTS 




(pdsfjxs 




8i]X67]xs 




TLfldxS 




cpdrjis 




drjXcjxs 




TLfi(xa)ai{v) 




(pdt()}Gi{v) 




driXowatiy) 




TL^ojai{v) 




(pdcooi{v^ 




drjXuaL^v) 






OPTATIVE MOOD 


'. 




S. 


TLf/doiflL 


s. 


(pdioLy.1, 


8. 


dtiXooifii 




nii^iii 




q) dot fit 




drjXdlfiL 




Ti^doLg 




cpdsoig 




d7]X6oig 




Tifxcog 




qidoig 




dr}X6ig 




Tifidoi 




cpdsoi 




di]X6oL 




TiflCO 




cpdol 




drjXol 


D. 


TLjldoLllSV 


D. 


q)dsoL^sv 


D. 


di]X6oifiEV 




rifiMfxsv 




q).do7fiev 




dr]Xdly.£V 




tlfldoiTOV 




cpdioixov 




drjXoonov 




XL^onov 




cpdoTnov 




drjXolxov 




xifiaoiirjV 




cpdsoljtjV 




dr]XoolxrjV 




XlfiMXt]V 




cpdohriv 




di]Xolxtjv 


P. 


xiixdoifisv 


p. 


cpdioLiiEV 


P. 


dr^XooifiSV 




Xl[AW(l£V 




(pdol^ev 




d7]Xol(lEV 




XllldoiTB 




(fdioixs 




drjXooixs 




XLfiaxs 




cpdotxB 




drjXoixs 




xifidoisv 




cpdsoisv 




drjXoouv 




XlfiMBV 




(pdouv 




dijXouv 






Or thus (§ 87. N. 2). 






Tl[i(07]l 


>, (oriq, MTj 


cpilolriv, oitig, olt] i 


^Xolfjv, olrjg, olr] 


(a7]fj,sv, (6r}T0V, w^tt^v 


oltjfisv, (hlrjxov, oi'^xrjv 


olrjfii 


iv, ovr]xov, oirixfiv 


mrjfisv, (07JTS, arjaav 


oirjfiEV, oirixE, olriaav 


olrj^i 


IV, oirjxs, olriaav 



^116.] 



CONTRACT VERBS, 



121 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 



s. 


jlfias 


s. 


cpiXss 


S, 


driXoB 




xlfiu - 




q)iXsi 




briXov J 




TifiaeTO) 




(piXshoi 




8riXoBX(a 




ti^idiat 




q)iXuT(x) 




StjXovim 


D. 


Ti^dsxov 


D, 


q)iXssTOV 


D. 


drjXoeTOV 




TlfidlOV 




q)iXtlTOV 




di^XovTOV 




rifiahbiv 




(fiXdxbiv 




hiXoixbiV 




Tifidrwv 




cpiXdTCJV 




8r]Xovxbrv 


P. 


Tifidets 


p. 


cpiXins 


P. 


drjlosxs 




TlfidlS 




CplXilTS 




drjlovxs 




rifiaiTbjaav < 


or 


(f)iXsh(aaav or 




&r}Xoixa)GCiv or 




tifiaovTCov 




(fiXtovrcav 




drjXoovxatv 




Tifidjcoaav 


or 


(pddibiaav or 


8rjXovx(oaav or 




Tificovrav 




(piXovvTtav 




dr}XovvT(av 






INFINITIVE MOOD. 






Tifiduv 




(piXiuv 




drjlosiv 




Tifiav 




cpdslv 




drjXovv 






PARTICIPLE. 






tifiacot 


', dovaa, dov 


q)di(oy 


', aovau, iov 


dtjXofav, oovace, oov 


Tifim 


', cooa, av 


tpdojv, ovaa, ovv 


dTjXwv, ovaa, ovv 


G. 


dovTog, oovToc 


r G. 


iovTog, ovvTog 


G. 


oovTog, ovvxog 




PASSIVE 


AND MIDDLE. 




INDICATIVE MOOD.— 


Present. 


S. 


Tifido^ai 


S. 


cpdio^av 


S. 


8r{X6o(j.at 




TLfiOifXat 




(pdovfxaL 




drflovfiat 




lifidri 




cpdbji or -iu 




SrjXoi] 




tifxa 




cpdS] or -ii 




drjlol 




TifxdsTai, 




cpdisTUi 




dr^Xosxai' 




rtfiaruL 




cpdiixaL 




d'ijXomm 


D. 


Ti^aofis&ov 


D. 


Cpdsofis&ov 


D. 


8f}Xo6}iS&ov 




TlfJ-Cti^sd^OV 




q)dov^£&ov 




dijXovfzs&ov 




rifidtad^ov 




cpdsso&ov 




dtjloEa&ov 




Tifxdo&ov 




cpdsla&ov 




drjXovaS^ov 




Tifidso&ov 




(pdho&ov 




dljloEO&OV 




rificiaS^ov 




(pdiia&ov 




dTjXovad^ov 


P. 


Ttfxaofis&a 


P. 


(fdt6(x0a 


D. 


df]Xo6fis&a 




TlfKOflsd^a 




g)dovne&a 




di]Xov^£&a 




tifidia&t 




q>dssa&s 




dvjXosa&s 




-tifida&s 




(pdstad^s 




di^Xovad-s 




TlfxdoVTUt 




(pdsovrai 




drjXoovTtti 




TlfXWVTUt 




cpdovvtai 




StiXovvtat 



11 



122 



INFLECTION OF WORDS. 



[§116 



S. iiifiaofirjv 
ixifioiftrjV 
ixi^dov 

STlfidsTO 

D. iTiiJ,a6y,s&ov 

iiifiaBad^ov 
hi^dod^ov 

iziiJ-ixa&rjv 
JP» iTLfia6p.B&a. 

STlflOi'fXS&a 

iTifuda&s 
sTifidorio 



Imperfect. 
S. ecpdBOfiTjv 

iipdiov 
icpdov 

S(pilsfTO 

D. icpilio^s&ov 
i(pdovfis&ov 

icpiXstad-QV 
Ifpiluadov 

icpiXda&riv 
icpdila&T^v 

P. icpdsofis&a 

iq)dov^s&a 
€q)de£a{)s 

eq)dtla&E 
ecpdiovro 
ecpdovvjo 



idrjXovfiijv 
i8r}X6ov 
i8r,kov 

idrjlovTO 

D. idrjlooiisd-op 
e8t]}.ov(j.E&ov 

edr]X6s(j&ov 
edrjXoii(j&ov 

idrjXosad-rjv 
edrjXovo&TjV 

P. idifAooixs&a 
idriXovfied^a 

idrjXoso&s 
idr]Xova&s 

idrjXoovTo 
idr]XovvTo 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



S. 



D. 



P. 



ti^aojfiat 


s. 


(pdiM^m 


S. 


di]X6(afiai 


tifxw^uai, 




(fdta^ai 




driXwyaL 


Tiixdr] 




cpdiji^ 




dtjXoi] 


TLllW 




cpdjj 




driXol 


Ti^arjrat 




(f)dh]xai 




drjXorjroct 


XLUdrau 




cpdrjzoiL 




drjXd)T(Xi> 


Ti^aw^E&ov 


D. 


cpd((afi£&ov 


D. 


57jX0CO(i8d-OV 


Tl}lC0^£&OV 




<pdMlJ,8&0V 




dr,X(aiie&oy 


Tiy.driod^ov 




(fderja&ov 




8riX6ri(jdov 


Tif^da&ov 




q)dr^adov 




drjXojad-ov 


TLfiaTja&ov 




q)dsrja&ov 




dfjXoriG&ov 


Tifxdo&ov 




ipdrja&ov 




drjXwad-ov 


Tiiiam/AEd^a 


D, 


ilgpde(6fis&a 


P. 


dt^XoaifAB&a 


TlfXOJfXS&U 




(pd(a}iE&a 




8t]X(6{XEd-a 


Tifidrja&£ 




(pdirja&B 




dtjXorjcS^s 


Tifiaa&s 




q)drjads 




drjXwad^s 


tifidoyvTUi 




q)ds(avTtti> 




drjXocovrat 


Tifimvittt 




(fdMVtUl 




drjXuvTac 



§116.1 



CONTRACT VERBS. 



123 



S. 



TifiaolfiTjy 
rtfttafiiiy 
Tijiaoio 

Tt/uaotTo 
D. iifiaolfis&ov 

Tl^aOLG^OV 

tifictoia&i]V 

P. Tifittoi^s^a 
rificofisd^a 

TljMiOia&S 
■tlfldoiVTO 



8. 



D. 



P, 



OPTATIVE MOOD. 

S. (piksolflTJV S. 

q)iXolixr]V 
(fiXioLO 
(piXdlo 
cpiXioiTo 
(fiXoiro 
D. (piXeolfis&ov D. 

(fLXoi^nd^ov 
qjtXsoia&ov 
(ptXdia&ov 
qnXsota&Tjv 
<fiXoiad^r}v 
P. (piXEol/xEd^a P. 

CplXolflE&U 

cpiXioia&s 

q)iXolad^s 
(piXiotvro 

q>i.Xo1vTO 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 



ttfxda&(0 

rifidsa&ov 

rifida&oi> 

Ti/xda&6 
Tifxaea^waav OF 

Ti^dad^waav or 
TLfidad^uv 



S. 



D. 



P. 



(piXiov 

(piXov 
(piXsio^ta 

q)iX£ia&ca 
(piXisa&ov 

(piXita&ov 
CpiXesa&cav 

(piXela&(ov 
qnXsiads 

q)iXeia&e 
cpiXiiu&oioav or 
(piXEsa&av 
. cpiXBla&maav or 

cpiXiia&mv 



s. 



D. 



P. 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Tifidsa&at cpiXha&ai 

Tiiidad-ai cpiXu(j&at 

PARTICIPLE. 

tifiaofxsrog, r], ov q)iX£6^Evog, t], ov 

Tifico^evog, rj, ov cpiXovfisvog, rj, ov 



d7]Xooifiriv 

di]Xoifif)V 
dr,X6oio 

dr^Xolo 
^i]X6oixo 

dr/Xolro 
drjXoolfiE&ov 

dT]Xol{iE&oy 
briXooiad^ov 

driXoiad^ov 
dijXoola&T}v 

driXolad^TjV 
drjXooifiE&a 

dTjXolfisd^a 
dr]X6oia&s 

d^Xolad^f) 
drjXooiVTO 

drjlfiivTO 



drjXoov 

dTjXov 
drjXoiaS^o) 

dtjXova&a 
drjXoEO&ov 

Sr)Xova-&oi' 
dr/Xoia^cav 

drjXova&av 

dtjXoEG&E 

dr]Xova&s 
dr^.oia&caaav or 
drjXosiJ&tav 

dr/Xova&aiaav or 

dr]Xova&(av 



drjXoEO&at 
drjXova&at 



drjXoofXEvog, ij, ov 
6r]Xovfievog, ij, ov 



124 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [<J 117. 

VERBS IN ML 



§ 1 17. 1. Some verbs in cua, scj, oco,vco, form their 
present and imperfect, and their second aorist active 
and middle, by dropping a, and annexing the termin- 
ations without the connecting vowels. (§^ 84: 85.) 

The augment of the past tenses of verbs in fit follows the 

general rules (§§ 78-80). 

Note 1 . All verbs in ^ may be inflected like verbs in a. E. g. rtBiu, iug^ 
iuy for TtB-n/Mf m, tia-tf imperf, iriB-tev, tis, tt, for ir/S-jjv, tjs, jj. 

2. The radical vowel {«, s, o, v) is lengthened in the singu^ 
lar o{ the present and imperfect Indicative Active. A and e 
become ri, and o becomes «. 

The first and third persons singular of the present indicative 
active end in p, ai, respectively, (§ 84. N. 1.) E. g. 
iaxata gives XoTrjfxi, rjg, fjai ' tazfjv, rig, r^ ' 
Tid-ifo " tld^Tjfxi, fjg, ijat ' ixl&tjv, tjg, rj ' 
didoM " dldooiii, tag, ougl ' idldoiv, ag, w * 
dsixrva '* dslxvvfii, tJj, vat ' idslnvvv, Hg, v. 

Note 2. The termination vot of the third person 'plural of 
the indicative active is often changed into aat. E. g. ti&rjfitf. 
Tt&iaat for rt&stat, that is, for tt&svai, (§ 12. 5.) 

3. The Indicative Passive and Middle generally retains 
the short vowel of the root. E. g. 

Igtcxg}, loxrifit, pass, 'laiafiai, otoat, arai ' lojafirjv, aoo, ato ' 
Tt&eciJ, Tt&rjfxi, " tl&£fiai, eoat, erat ' enSefxrjv, sao, txo ' 

dtdocO) d Ida) (It, " dldofxaiy ooai, oxat ' ididofirjv, oao, oxo ' 

dsizvvo), dslxvvfiif " dEiHW^iaty vaai, vxcct ' idsDiVVfj.'i^v, vao, vxo^ 

Note 3. The terminations am, go, of the second person singu- 
lar, often drop the a, and are contracted with the radical 
vowel. E. g. xl-Orifii, xi&sfiat, xi^saai, xl&sat contracted xI&t]. 

The old writers (as Homer, Hesiod, Herodotus) generally 
use the uncontracted second person singular. 

4. The Subjunctive of verbs in Tj^ut and wfit takes the con- 
necting vowels and is contracted. In this case arj and ajj are 
contracted into t; and j] respectively. The subjunctive of verbs 
in vfit follows the analogy of wtttw. E,g. 

laxdcj, Xaxfjfii subj. laxaa, djig, dj] contracted loxco, jjg, jj 

ttd^BOi, xl&riixt " ri&ioj, srjg, it] " ri&M, jjg, ^ 

dtdoo), dldoifit " didoo), orjg, ojj " dtdco, wg, w 

dsixrvo},dsl}ivv[i,i *' Ssixvvco, V]]g, vj]. 



§ 117.] VERBS IN fU. 125 

Note 4. In some instances the subjunctive of verbs in u/ai rejects the connect- 
ing vowel. K. g. Iseiffxtleivvv/xi, '^luffxihoivvlitri for ^laffxt^avyuif. Such forms may 
be easily mistaken for the corresponding ones of the indicative. (§ 86. N. 2.) 

5. The Optative Active of verbs in r^fn and w^t annexes 
to the root of the verb the endings rjv, r]g, rj, dual tjtov^ tjttjj', 
plural 7}y,sv, Tjrt, rjaav, preceded by i. E. g. 

tc/TOco), larrjfii opt. act. lataltjv, airjg, alrj 
tid^iio, ri&rjfxi *' TiOeltjV, di]g, slrj 

didooj, dldoifxi " didolrjv, oiijg, olrj. 

The optative active of verbs in v^t follows the analogy of 

TVTTTW. E. g. dsiTlVVb), dtlxVV^l, dHXVVOlflly VOig, VOL. 

Note 5. The dual and plural of the optative active often 
drop t] • in which case r^ijav becomes ev. See the paradigms. 

Note 6. In a few instances, the diphthong ai in the optative active of verbs in 
*/«/ is changed into w. £. g. ^itufn, 2 aor. opt. ^unv, ^cirti, for "hotnvt ^oins* 

6. The Optative Passive and Middle of verbs in r}ni 
and w/it annexes the terminations {^ 87), likewise preceded 
by an *. E. g. 

lazaoi, XaTTjfii opt. pas. laTat(ir}V, cuo, alto 
Ti-d'sca, ri&Tjfii *' rid-slfirjv, slo, hto 

didoM, dldcofiL *' didoifitjv, oto, olio 

The optative passive and middle of verbs in vj^i follows the 
analogy of ti'tttw. E. g. dsiy.vvco, dsUwfxi, ddxrvoifxriv, voio, volto. 

Note. 7. In some instances, the optative of verbs in v/ai is formed after ihe 
analogy of verbs in tjfit or uf^i. E. g. ^aivua), ^aivvfjii, pres. mid. opt. 3d pers. 
sing. iaivvTo (more analogically ^aiwTra). 

7. The Imperative annexes the terminations to the 
root. (§ 88. 1.) E. g. 

laraw, Xaxri^i imperat. Xarad^i, dxta ' Xoxaao, ua&w ' 
Tt&ib), Tl&r]fAL ** rldsri (§ 14. N. 4), hb) ' zl&sao, ia&o) ' 

didota, didwfiL " dldo&t, o'tw * didoao, oa&a ' 

dsixvvoj, dsUvvfii, " duxvv&i, vx(a ' dflxwao, vo&m. 

Note 8. The second person singular of the imperative active 
sometimes drops ^t, and lengthens the radical vowel. E. g. 
Xatrjixi, XaxT) for Xaxa&i ' dsixrv^i, dnxvv for duAVvd^i. 

Note 9. The termination ao of the second person singular 
of the imperative passive and middle often drops the a, and is 
contracted with the radical vowel. E. g. Xaxrjfxi, Xaxaao, Xaxao 
contracted-iaiw. 

8. The Infinitive Active annexes vat to the root of the 
verb. E. g. 

^ 11* 



126 INFLECTION OP WORDS. [§117 

iaidw, Xatri^i infin. act. lardvav 

Ti&iw, rldriy^L " Ti&ivat : 

didou, dldbjfii " didovat ■' 

dsLnvvca, ddxvv^L " dsixvvvcct. 

9. The Infinitive Passive and Middle annexes a&ai to 
the root. E. g. 

laTocM, Xaitjfxt inf. pas. &. mid. Xotaa&ai, axaad^ai 

didooj, dldwf^L " didoa&oci, doo&ai 

SsLxviKo, ddavvfiL " dsinvvoScxL. 

10. The root of the Participle Active is formed by an- 
nexing VT to the root of the verb. E. g. 

lardo), XaTtiixv part. act. loTag, dvTog, (§ 36. 2) 

Ti&aw, rlS^tjfiL " Ti&Eig, sviog, (ibid.) 

dcdoco, dldcofiL " didovg, ovTog, (ibid.) 

dsLxvvo), dsUvvfiL " dsixvvg,vvrog,{ihid.) 

11. The Participle Passive and Middle annexes lavog to 
the root of the verb. E. g. 

tarao), Xarrifxi part. pas. «S6 mid. laxcefisvog, aTUfievog 

tld^io), Ti&TjflL " Tld^fflEVOg, &£fl6V0g 

didobi, dldcofii " dt,86fi8vog, dofisvog 

duxvvco, dstxvvfiL " dsLxvvixsvog. 

12. The Second Aorist Active lengthens the radical vowel 
throughout the indicative and imperative, and in the infinitive. 
A, when it is not preceded by q, becomes t]. E. g. ^i^dta, ^i^r^nh 

2 aor. t^riv, rjc, 7], rjTov, ■^rr]v, ri^sv, tjts, rjaav ' imperat. ^Tj^t, 
tJto), tJtov, ijibjv, rixB, -^rwoav ' infin. /?^j'«t. 

Note 10. KTHMI and OTTHMI retain the short vowel in the second 
aorist active. See the Anomalous ktuvu and olrau. See also xXveo. 

Ai'^cofit and t/9->j^/ lengthen the vowel only in the singular of the second 
aorist indicative, and in the second aorist infinitive. See the paradigms. 

Note 11. The second person singular of the second aorist imperative, in a few 
instances, takes ? instead of 9-/. See the Anom. Vt^ufAi, 'ix^t "^f^h "r/S-x^i, <p^ia/. 

Note 12. The imperatives (ir,B-i and ^tjjS-/, from p>'i(ir>ftt and "ffrvf^t, in com- 
position, often drop S/, and change v into &. E. g. xara-fhai for xuTKptn^i, 

Note 13. The verbs ri^rifzi, 'Infjct, and Vitufi.^ lengthen s and o into u and w 
in the second aorist active infinitive : thus, ^uvat, tlvai, %ovvai. 

Note 14. KTIMI, HIMf, <^0IMI, and nAHMI, in some of the parts 
of the second aorist follow the analogy of verbs in >7^/ or ufAi, See the 
Anomalous KTIH, tt'ivu, (pS-ivu, and •x'kuu. 

Note 15. In a few instances, the second aouist middle lengthens the 
radical vowel in the indicative, imperative, infinitive, and paj'ticiple: See the 
Anomalous (idkXu, xi^avu, ovivtifAi, irifA-7rX9)iJi.i. 

Note 16. Those verbs in v(ii, of which the present is used. 



'J 117.] VERBS IN //f. 127 

have no second aorist. On the other hand, when the second 
aorist is used, the present is obsolete. E. g. dslrnvfit, has no 
second aorist ; and i'qjvv comes from the obsolete (PTML 

In order, therefore, to complete the paradigm of verbs in 
V}ii, the second aorist o^ JTMlis subjoined to dslxvvfii. 

Note 17. Dialects. (I) In the indicative the Doric has 

ri, V7h for at, rai. E. g. Tl&r,Ti, ti&evti. (§ 84. N. 6.) 

(2) In the imperfect and second aorist indicative, the Epic 
and Ionic dialects often use axov, oxofx'^v, in which case the 
radical vowel always remains short. E. g. tl&Tjfii, xl&soxov for 
iii&r/V ' l'(;T7/,uf, axdaxov for I'gttjv. (^ 85. N. 5.) 

(3) The Epic often drops aa in the third person plural of the 
imperfect and second aorist active indicative, in which case the 
preceding long vowel is shortened. E. g. Xanjfii, tarav for Igri?- 
aav ' Ti&rjfxi, tti&Ev for hl&eaav ' /ITMI, t8vv for tdvaav. 

(4) The Ionic often uses axai, uto, in the indicative passive 
and middle. E. g. Ti&tjfii, ri&iaTUi, hi^mio. (§ 84. N. 6.) 

(5) The Epic and Ionic often use the uncontracted sub- 
junctive. E. g. xl&rifjLL, d^iw for &6). 

(6) Sometimes the Epic, in the subjunctive, lengthens the 
radical vowel g into «t or ri. E. g. tI&i]^i,, &d(a, -d^tjr^c, for d^ia, 
^ir,g. (§116._N. 4.) 

(7) It sometimes shortens the connecting vowels of the sub- 
junctive. E. g. Tl&r]fii, d^tlofiBV for &eicafisv. (§ 86. N. 3.) 

(8) In the third person singular of the subjunctive active, it 
sometimes uses ai. E. g. dldojfxi, daai for dm. (^ 86. N. 2.) 

(9) Verbs in w^t sometimes change the radical o into &> in 
the subjunctive. E. g. didoyfii, dcoca, ^w'jjc, for 5w, dtog. 

(10) The epic poets sometimes lengthen the radical vowel 
in the infinitive active, and participle passive and middle. 
E. g. TlS^Tjfit, xid^rjiiivai, XL&rjfiEvog ' didoifii, didovvat. 

Note 18. AccrNT. The rules stated above (§93) apply also to verbs in fti, 
"We only observe here that, 

(1) The accent of the regular third person plural of the indicative active devi- 
ates from the rule t§ 93. 1). 

(2) The dissyllabic forms of the jrresetit active indicative of ilfti and (firift!, de- 
viate from the rule (§ 93. 2). In composition, however, they follow the rule. 

(3) The infinitive active takes the accent on the penult. E. g. Itrravat. Ex- 
cept the Epic infinitive in fAivat, as rt^r,f/tvxt. 

(4) The participle active takes the accent on the last syllable. E.g. /craf, <r/3i/f. 
(5j When the syllabic augment is omitted (§ 78. N. 3), long monosyllabic 

forms take the circumflex. E. g. yvu for lyvu from yiyyuaau, 

( f>) For the accent of the subjunctive and optative passive of "nxTvifii and 3jJ*»- 

fti, see the paradigms. 

Aiihaifjt.1 sometimes throws the accent back on the antepenult in the subjunctive 

and optative passive, when the last syllable permits it (§ 20\ "IffrrifAt sometimes 

does the same in the optative passive. 



12a 



INFLECTION OP WORDS. 



[§ 117. 



Present. 
Imperfect. 
Aorist 2. . 

Present. 
Imperfect. 
Aorist 2. 

Present. 
Imperfect. 
Aorist 2. 

Present. 
Imperfect. 
Aorist 2. 



Present. 
Imperfect. 



Synopti- 

ACTIVE 

Indicative. Subjunctive. Optative. 

Laxatriv 



eazTfv 

sdidcov 
edov 

idsLXvvv 
edxfv 



lazafiaL 



2 Aor. Mid. ioToi^uriv 

Present. TL&e^ai 

Imperfect. izLd'ifir^v 

2 Aor. Mid. i&e^iT^v 

Present. didofiuL 

Imperfect. iSt86fxi^v 

2 Aor. Mid. ido^riv 

Present. buytw^ai 

Imperfect. idsLxvvfj.rfv 

2 Aor. Mid. idvfir^v 



laici) 

€(TCO 

da 
dstxvvo 

dvo 



didcofxat 



J id" serf V 

SoLtfV 

dsixvvoi^u 

PASSIVE AND 
loTalixriv 



doifxffv 



dsixvvofiai detxvvoififiv 
dvofiai dvfiTfv 



$ 117.] 


VERBS IN [It. 




cal Table. 






VOICE. 






Imperative. 


Infijstitive. 


Participle. 


laia&i 


Idjdvai 


icfids 


(fZ^&l 


diijvaL 


ends 


Tl&STl 


Tid-svai 


TL^eU 


^itl 


&£tvai 


d^eis 


didod'i 


dMvai 


8idovs 


Bi&i 


dovvai 


dovs 


8BlXVvd'l 


88ixvvvai 


deixvvs 




Bvvai 


^i/'s 




icnadd'ai 


taxdiiBvos 


cxdao 


axdad^at 


azdfxevos 


Tid^eao 


Ttd^sad^ai 


tlM^bvos 


d-iao 


d^ia&ai 


-d'Efxevos 


diSoao 


didoad'ac 


8l86h£vos 


Soao 


Soa&at 


doflBVOS 


Bsixvvdo 


Ssixvvad'ai 


dsixvvixsvos 


dvao 


dvdd^ai 


dyfjisvos 



12# 



%m 



INFLECTION OF WORDS. 



K 117. 



ACTIVE VOICE. 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



S. 



D. 



P. 



S. 



D. 



8. 



D. 





Present. 




I place 

XatTjfXL 

Xairjg 
l'ffT7jai(y) 


Iput 
Ti&rjg 


I give 
dldfog 


I sliow 

dElXVVflt 

dsUvvg 


XoTCCflSV 

XuTaiov 
Xaiarov 


xi&STOV 
TL&STOV 


dldofiEV 
dldoxov 
dldoxov 


dsUvvixEV 
dsUvvxov 
deUvvxov 


Xaiafisv 

XataTS 

iaTaai{v) 


xi&sfiev 

xi^STS 

xid^£lai{v) or 


didoufv 
didoxs 

didovoi{v) or 
did6aai{v) 


dslxvv^EV 
deUrvxs 
8£ixvvaL{v) or 

dElHVVd(Jt{v) 




Imperfect. 




Xaxriv 
XoTrjg 
Xairj 


ixiarjg 

ixl^n 


idldcov 
idldcog 
idldb) 


ideUvvv 
idslnvvg 
idsUvv 


XoTafisv 
XoTutov 
laidiriv 


ixl&s^sv 
ext&STOV 

STld^SXTjV 


ididojxsv 
idldoxov 
ididoxrjv 


idEixrvfiEV 
idiUvyxov 
idsiyivvxTjv 


XoTUflSV 

XoTars 
Xaxaaav 


txi&£[^sv 

ixl&txs 

ixl&tottv 


idldoinEV 

idldoxs 

idldoaav 


idHXVVfXBV 

ideUvvxs 
idslxwaav 




Second Aorist. 




SaTTjV 

eotrjg 
satt} 




sd(ov 


edvp 

mg ., ^ 

edv 


satfjTov 


S&Efi£V 
i^fXOV 
£&ixTjV 


'ddoxov 
idoxTjv 


sdvxoy 
idvxrj> 


£OTr]fl£V 
IffTTJTS 

taxriaav 




td'OflEV 

i'doxE 
adoaav 


aSvfiEV 

id VIS 

idvaav 

(§ 117. N. 16.) 



117.] 



ACTIVE VOICE OF VERBS IN fit. 



131 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



S. 



D. 



P, 







Present. 




itrrw 


Tl&ta 


didoi) 


8si,XVV(0 


laTJjg 


Ji&jjg 


didatg 


dsixvvj^g 


lorjj 


ji&fl 


didw 


dsLitVVTj 


loTCOUiV 


Tl&WfXSV 


didoifisv 


dsixrvbi^tsv 


llIT^TOV 


Ti&iiTOV 


didwTov 


dsixrvrjTOV 


IgttJtov 


ri&7]T0V 


diduTov 


dsiXVV'lJTOV 


laTw^sv 


Tl&MIHtV 


didaifisv 


SBiKVVOa^BV 


ioTTJTS 


ll&lJTS 


dlSuTE 


dsiicrvijTS 


laiuai{v) 


TL&CJai.{t') 


didaailv) 


dsixvvcacfi^v) 



Second Aorist. 
OTO) in- ^w inflected Sm inflected 
fleet, like like the like the 

the Pres. Pres. Pres. 



dvto (§ 117.4.) 



OPTATIVE MOOD. 

Present. 



s. 


laTali]V 


TL&sir,v 


5L^oir^v 


dbiy.vvoifii 




laxalrig 


ti&slr^g 


didoiTjg 


dsixi'voig 




laxalr] 


ri&slrj 


SldoiTj 


deixrvoL 


D. 


loTaiTjU IV 


Tid^sirjfisv 


dtdolrjiiav 


dsLy.rvoii^fV 




laralrijov 


TiduViTOV 


didoiriTOV 


dsLXVVOlTOV 




iaiairjTr^v 


ri&sn^TriV 


8l80LriTl]V 


dEiy-VVolTTiV 


P. 


lorali]UiV 


ri&Hr,^fv 


didohiijev 


dfiy.pvoifisv 




laralrjs 


ri&eu]TS 


didolriTS 


diiy.rvoLTS 




laial\aav 


Or thus 


(§ 117. N. 5) 


deiy.ivoitv 


D. 


tOTUlTQV 


tl9utov 


didoiTOV 






taxaiTr^v 


TL^Hn]V 


dldo'TTjV 




P. 


Igtuih^v 


Ti&elixsv 


didolifisv 






IgtuIte 


tl^sHts 


diSolrs 






laruliv 


IL&HiV 


di5o7ev 








Second Aorist. 






aTah]v in- 


^fiTjv inflect 


. doir,v inflect. 


Svrjv 




flect, like 


like the 


like the 






the Pres. 


Pres. 


Pres. 


(§117. N. 7.) 



132 



INFLECTION OF WORDS. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Present. 



K 117- 



S. XoTa&v 


xi&BXL 


dldo&i 


dslnvv&i 


or Xaxri 






or dEiKVv 


laTaTca 


Tld^eKO 


didoxa) 


dsiKVVTO} 


D. XaxaTov 


xl&sxov 


dldoxov 


dsUvvxop 


laTttTbiV 


Xl&SX(OV 


didoxiav 


dsinvvxcav 


p. XaraxB 


xl&sxs 


dlSoxs 


dslavvxs 


iajaTtaaav 


XL&ixbJGUV 


didoxcjaav 


dsiKi'viojoav 


or loTuvTav 


or xi&ivxtav 


or didovxav 


or dsixvvvxav 




Second Aorist. 




S. Giy&L 


■&ixt or S^sg 


do&i or dog 


dv&i 


aii^rco 


-d^ixo) 


doxoj 


dvxoi 


D. gitJtov 


&hov 


doxov 


dvxov 


atriTOiV 


&ix(av 


docwv 


8vXbiV 


P. axrJTS 


S^ixs 


dors 


Svxs 


GTi^Koaav 


&ix(OGav 


doxojaav 


dvxaaav 


or Giavtav 


or S^evxcov 


or 86vxo)v 


or dvvxbiv 




INFINITIVE MOOD. 




Pres. laxavai 


xid^tvai 


didovat 


dsixvvvcci 


2 Aor. Gxrivtti 


■&Hvav 


dovvai 


dvvcct 




PARTICIPLE. 




Pres. laxag 


xi^sig 


dLdovg 


dsixvvg 


2 Aor. Gxag 


&dg 


dovg 


dvg 



PASSIVE AND MIDDLE. 





INDICATIVE MOOD. 






Present. 




I XoxafiUi, 
XoxaaaL 

Xaxaxai 


xl&B^ttV 

xldtam 

or xld^n 
xl&txai 


8l8oiiaL 
dldoaaL 

didoxai 


dsLHVVfAUL 

SsUrvaai 
ddxvvxai 


Xgxug&ov 

XGXaG&OV 


xi&ef.u&ov 

xl&iG&OV 

xi&ea&ov 


didofiE&oy 

didood-ov 

8ldoo&ov 


dsmvvus&ov 

ddy.vvad^ov 

ddy.vva&ov 


"*. iGxaixs&cc 
Xoxao&s 
Xoxavxat, 


xi&i(j.s&cx 

xl&EG&S 

xl&evxaL 


8id6fie&a 

dldoa&s 

8l8ovxav 


8iLKVVflE&a 

dslxvva&s 
dilnvvvxat 



§ 117.] 



PASSIVE AND MIDDLE OF VERBS IN fit 



133 



Imperfect. 



s. 


loToifiriv 
Xajaao 


indifxriv 
irl&soo 


idiSofxrjv 
idldoao 


idsLXVVfxrjv 
idelxvvao 




or VaTw 


or hl&ov 


or idldov 






laraio 


hl&sro 


id Id 010 


idelxvvTO 


D. 


XoTaa&ov 


STL&eflS&OV 
hl&EO&OV 


idi.d6jj.B&ov 
idldoo&ov 


idsiyvvfis&ov 
ideUvva&ov 




laiua&r]v 


iTi&ea&r}V 


ididoad^TjV 


idsL}ivva&rjV 


P. 


XoTao&e 


tTi&sfis&a 
hi{>sad-E 


ididofisd-a 
ididoa&s 


idsiicvvfXE^ci 
idsiy.vva&s 




XaravTO 


hldilTO 


ididovTO 


idtUrvvTO 



Second Aorist Middle. 



iOToifiTjV 


i&iuriV 


idofiTiv 


idvurjV 


inflected 


inflected 


inflected 


inflected 


like the 


like the 


like the 


like 


Imperf. 


Imperf. 


Imperf. 


IdsLxvvfiriv 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



Present 



8. 



D. 



lardjfiuL 

larjj 

larrjiai 


rt&cof.itti 


dido'yj.iac 

dido) 

didcoTUt 


dsixvvojfiai 

dsLxvvtj 

dsiyvvr^TttL 


larwfis&ov 

laxrio&ov 

laTrjO&ov 


TL&COHS&OV 

ri&rla&ov 
tid^ijad^ov 


didiofxs&ov 

Sidoiod^ov 

didwa&ov 


dsiy.vvfofisd-ov 

d(iy.vvria&ov 

dsmrvria&ov 


l0T(0(lE&a 

laTTJad^s 
laTtavrat 


xi&r,a&6 


didajfisd^a 

dLddJa&e 

didavTaL 


dsixvv(6(ie&a 

dsixriiTja&s 

8siy.vvo}vrai 



Second Aorist Middle. 



axMfiai 


^omuL 


dafiai 


dvb)[iat 


like the 


like the 


like the 


like ^ 


Present. 


Present. 


Present. 


dsixvvoofiat 



12 



134 



[NFLECTION OF WORDS. 



[^117. 



OPTATIVE MOOD. 

Present. 



S. laxal^ip 
laraio 

ijTolTO 


xi&Ei^rjv didolfitjV 
XL&eio didoto 
XL&Hxo Sidolxo 


dsLyivvolfiT^v 

dsixvvoio 

dsmvvoixo 


D. laTalfiE&ov 
laraia&ov 


xiSfiiJsd-ov didoi'jisd^ov 
xi&s7adov 8tdo7a&ov 
xi&slad-ijv 8idolad-i]V 


day.vvol^E&ov 

diiy.vvoiad^ov 

dsLxvvolo&rjV 


Itnata&s 
iaiaXvTo 


xid^eijus&M dtdol/xs&oc 
Xi&s7ads didolads 
XLd-ilvxo didoh'io 

Second Aorist Middle. 


dsLxvvoifis&a 

dsiyrvoia&s 

dsiicvuoivxo 


axalurjv 
like the 
Present. 


like the like the 
Present. Present-. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Present. 


dvjjijv 
(§117. N. 7.) 


S. t(jr«(jo 
or Xaioj 
tarda &(o 


xldwo dldoao 

or xL&ov or dldov 
xt&iado) 8c56o&oj 


deUvvao 
dsvavva&bj 


D. 'laiaa&ov 
nsxaadoiv 


xl&ea&ov dtdoa&ov 
xi&iodoiv didoadMV 


dslxvvis&ov 
dsiy.vva^oiv 


P. Xaxaads 
iaxdad^coaav 
or laxda&cav 


xi&Eads dldoad^s 
XL&iad^Monv didoadtaaav 
or xL&£(j&cjv or dtdoadaiv 

Second Aorist Middle. 


dsUvvads 
drixrvad^ojaav 
or dsixvvadcov 


axdoo 
like the 
Present. 


'&£oo or 19015 douo or dov 
like the like the 
Present. Present. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 


dvGO 

like 
deUvvao. 


Pres. Xoxaad^ai 
2 A.M. (jia'ffi^tti 


xld^Eo&m dldoa&ai 
■&£ad-aL doadai 

PARTICIPLE. 


ddxvva&ai 
dm&ccL 


Pres. loxd^svog 
2 A.M. axd^ivog 


XL&ifiivoq did6}i£vog 
d'ilxBvog do/uBvog 


dfixvvfxevog 
dvfxsvog 



Remark. It is supposed that the aorist of verbs in /Lti originally ended in 
«», ofttiv, (§§ 105 : 115. 2.) Hence its name second aorist. 



§ 118.] 



ANOMALOUS VERBS. 



135 



ANOMALOUS VERBS. 



§ 118. 1. Anomalous verbs are those which have, or are 
supposed to have, more than one present (§ 96). 

2. All verbal forms, which omit the connecting vowel (§ 85. 
1), are anomalous ; except the perfect and aorist passive 
(§§ 91 : 92). 

3. The following catalogue contains nearly all those verbs 
which are apt to perplex the learner. 

Remark. In this Grammar, obsolete or imaginary Presents 
(§ 96) and Nominatives (^ 46), are always printed in capitals. 
They are so printed *' in order that the eye may not become 
accustomed, by means of the common letters, to a multitude 
of unused and merely imaginary forms, .and thus rendered less 
capable of detecting barbarisms at first sight." 

Jl. originally FAm, whence xavd^ais 

(see xuTo.'yvuf^i.y which originally 
was *aFFa|«i;. (§§ 1. N. 1,3: 
10. N. 2.) 
u'/M, lead, a^io, /|a, Perf. rj^^a 
and «yrjO;(a, r^y^im, ^x^V^> 
2 A. rjayov, 2 A. Mid. i]ya- 
yofxrjv. (§§ 96. 19, N. 1 : 
81 1.) The Perfect /^^'T^'o^ce 
is not Attic. 

Note 1 . 'Ayra;^« is formed as 
follows: ay^, AFAm, AFOFH, 
Hyo^a, a.yr,yt)y^a., u.yr,')y^a.. The 
omission of the second y is acci- 
dental. 

Note 2. In Homer we find 
Aor. Imperat. 2d pers. plur. o^iTi 
for a-lxTU (§ 88. N. 3.) 

'a/1II, see urduvoj. 

uHQco {AEPfL)y regular, z=: 
aiQG). The epic poets have 
Pluperf Mid. 3d pers. sing. 

littQTO for y]EQT.O. (§ 96. 19.) 



AASl, injure, A. aceoa contract- 
ed aaa, A. Pass. ada&'t]v, A. 
Mid. aaau^riv. Pres. Mid. 
3d pers. sing, odxrai. (§ 109. 
N. 1.) 

a/afiat (ArAJl, AniMl), ad- 
mire, A. Pass. riyd(J&jp', F. 
Mid. uydaofxtiL, A. Mid. (not 
Attic) r,yaouui^v. (§§ 117 : 
95. N. I: 109. N. 1.) 

The Present dyuo^ai or 
dyalofim, am angry at, envy, 
is used by the epic poets. 

^ (§96. 18.) 

ayuQW {ArEPft), collect, uys- 
^w, TJysiQcx, ayriysQyn, ayr^y^q- 
fxni, rjysg&rjV, 2 A. Mid. v/yE- 
QOfiTjv (Epic), Injin. uyegi- 
a&(XL, Part. ayQOfisrog for 
dysQ6fXEvog. (§§96. 18:81. 
1: 26. 1.) 

ayvvfii (Am), break, F. «^w, 

A. I'a^a (rarely ?]!«), 2 Perf. 

eaya, 2 A. Pass. fuyrjV or 

sayr^v. (§§96.9:80. N.2.) 

NoTK. The siniple AFXl wa? 



ae^o), Epic, z=z av^M. 

arini (AEH), hlo2D, Injin. uijvatf 
Part. uuQ, Imperf. u^v (in 
Homer). Pres. Pass, uraiai. 
(§ 117. N. 17.) 

alrio), praise, iaoj and ijaw, eou 



136 



INFLECTION OF 'WORDS. 



[§ 118. 



and rjoce, ijy.cc, tjuai, id^riv. 
(§95. N.2.) 
aiQio), take, choose, rjoM, rjxa, 
rjfiai, i&7]v. (§ 95. N. 2.) 
From "i:jJl, 2 A. dXov, 2 A. 
Mid. ul6^i]v, 2 F. aw (rare). 

In the Perfect, the Ionics prefix 
to this verb a sort of Attic redupli- 
cation with the sm(^th breathing, 
a^ai^^Ko,, a^eii^t}fiat. (§ 81.) 
eil'goj i^APSl), raise, viqm, rjga, 
7jQiia, rji)fAai, y](j&t^v. (^^ 96. 

18: 104. N. 5.) 
alo&drofiai [aiZOJI), perceive, 

feel, Perf. Mid. fja&rjfiai, F. 

Mid. alaSi]ao/AaL,2. A. Mid. 
^ jia&S^nv. (§ 96. 7, 10.) 
axaxl^bJ {AXSL), trouble, afflict, 

F. «;<a^?j(jcy, A. rj}(dxi]aa, 2 A. 

fjzaxov, 2 A. Mid. ijxa/ofitjv. 

Mid. daaxl^ofACii, grieve, feel 

grief, am afflicted. (^ 96. 
^ 10, N. 1.) 
anaxiii-vog, rj, ov, sharpened, 

pointed, a defective Perf. 

Pass. Part, from AXSl. 

UHOV03 {AKOSI), hear, r^xovaa, 
TJaovya (not Attic), ova^ai, 
ova&rjv, ovao^ai, 2 Perf. ax?j- 
;<o«, 2 Pluperf. ri^rjuosLV. 
(§§96. 18:81: 107. N. 1: 
109. N. 1.) 

uldofxai, umnder, rove, Perf 
Mid. dXdXrjfiac synonymous 
with the Present, Infin. dld- 
Xrja&oci, Part. dXal-^fxEvog. 
(§§81. N.r 93. N. 1.) 

aXdacpoj {AAJSI), increase, Im- 
perf. (as if from dlddva) 
TiXdavov. (§ 96. 7.) 

aXdrjaxoj [A A/1 Si), grow, thrive, 
cause to grow,, F. dX8riow. 
(§96. 10,8.) 

aXs^o) (AAEKIl), ward off, F. 



dXe^i]aoo, A. Mid. rjXe^dixtjV, 
2. A. ^jXaXxov. (§§ 96. 15, 
10, N. ] : 26. 1.) 

Note. The Aor. HxaXxov is ob- 
tained in the following manner : 
AAEKH, AAAAEKa,^x^x«xtfv, 

dXiofxai or dXsvoj^rxL, avoid, es- 
cape, A. Mid. '^XedfiTjv or 
'i^Xsvd^Vv. (§§ 96. N. 12 : 
104. N. 1.) 

dXelg, see sIXXm. 

uXucpa {AAIfPSl), anoint, siiijojf 
ei-ipa, Perf. dX^Xicpa, dXriXiy,- 
fiai. (§§96. 18:81.) 

'Ayir^KJl (aASI), capture, 
Perf. euXaxa and ^XMy.(x have 
been captured, F. aXcaaoficd 
shall be caytured. From 
'AASIMI, 2 A. edXojv and 
-^'Awy 2^«s captured, aXoo, dXol- 
7]v and aX(07]v, dXwvai, dXovg. 
Pass. aXla-Ao^ai, am cap- 
tured. (§§ 96. 8, 10 : 80. 
N.2: 117. 12, N. 6.) 

dXiTttlvoj {AAITSI), sin against^ 
offend, F. dXiftjaca, 2 A. ijXi- 
Tov, 2 A. Mid. '^XaofirjV. 
(§96.7,10.) 

^ The Perf. Mid. Part. 
d.Xnri(xivog has the force of 
an adjective, that has sinned 
against, that has offended, 
(§93. N. 1.) 

aXXo^a-i CaASI), leap, spring, 
A. Mid. riXd}.n]v, 2 F. Mid. 
aXovfiai, 2 A. Mid. t/Xo^r^v. 
(§§ 96. 6: 104. N. 5.) 

Note. Forms without the con- 
necting vowel, 2 A. Mid. 2d pers. 
sing. ak(re, 3d pers. sing. uXro, 
Part. ccXf^ivos, all with the smooth 
breathing, for i^Xtiro, r^Xiro, akofts- 
vos. (§ 92. N. 4.) 

dX6(o (AAJl), used only in the 
compound dvaXoa, which 



§118] 



ANOMALOUS VERBS. 



137 



see. See also 'Ayir^KIl. 
^ (§ 96. 10.) 
aXvaxoa {AylTKSl), shun, avoid, 

F. «Al'|w, a. ijU'^n. (§ 96. 
, 14.) 
aXqxxlvd) or aXcpavoj (AA(hfL), 

procure, bring, find, 2 A. 

nX(fov. (5>96. 7.) ^ 
'AASL, see aUaxofiai, uXoco, aX- 

Xofiai. 
a^aQxavM (AMAPTSI), err, sin, 

miss, Perf. i]fiduTrjy.u, Perf. 

Pass. -^fiagTrj/xtxi, A. Pass. 

rjfXdQTriyfriv, F. Mid. ocjxaQ- 

xriaofXHi, 2 A. rjfxuQTor. (§ 96. 

7, 10.)^ 
• For rinaQTov Homer has al- 
so rjut^QOTov, with the smooth 

breathing. 

Note. The Homeric ^'/tifi^orev 
is formed as follows : 'ABIAPTH, 
'AMOP^TXl, vf^t^rev, rif^^orov, H/ut- 
fi^orov. (§§96. 19: 26. 2, N.) 

afiSXioxM and nuT/.oM, miscar- 
ry, (xu^Ut')a(o, 7J/u^3X(i)(}(t, iju- 
/9Ao)x«, r]u3Xio/iiai , riu^XwdtjV. 
(§ 96. 8.')' The Present ««- 
^Xow occurs only in com- 
pounds. 

afiTtsxw (ociuq)l, f^o)), wrap a- 
round, clothe, Imperf. aanu,- 
Xov, F. Kjuqpglw, F. Mid. «u- 
cps^ofiai, 2 A. ijfiTTtoxor, 2 A. 
Mid. rjfX7iiax6}ir]v. Mid. u^ns- 
XO(jiai, wear, put on. (§§ 14. 
3 : 82. N. 1.) 

afxniaxvsofKxt. [uncpl, la^vtofiai), 

afiTtXaxlaxoi and afilSXaxlaxo) 
{AMnAAKn.), miss, err, F. 
«jU7rAax>](JW, 2 A. rjfinXay.ov, 
Infin. afjnXnxHv and some- 
times ccTiXaituv, without the 

^ /u. (§ 96. 8, 10.) 

auq>isvvi>i.iL {nu(f>l, errvui), clothe, 
12* 



F. uficptiiTO} or djuquM, A. 
ijiopisaa, Perf. Mid. rificph- 
GjiKxi, A. Mid. ■^jjq)ieadjui]v. 
Mid. ui.i(f>tevyvj.iai, put on, 
dress myself. (§§ 1 02. N. 2 : 
^ 82. N. 1.) 

a»vxA/(/>cco sometimes MJ-aAow 
(«)■«', \4yI/yKfL, dXoM), eX' 
pcnd, consume, Imperf dvt]- 
Xia'Aov or dvdlovv, F. aj-wAw- 
aw, A. nrdXwaa or avr^Xojoa, 
Perf «r«'Awxa or «»'7^7wx«. 
In double composition, A. 
7ji'uXoj(ja, as XKT7J /(iAwaa. 
(§§80. N. 4: 82. N. 1.) 

(xrddib) (ylzlJl), picase, delight, 
Imperf i',rdavnv or edrdavov 
or £>y''5«roJ', F. udrjOM, 2 A. 
rM(5ov or ddov, 2 Perf e'«(5of. 
(§§96. 7, 10:80. N. 2, 3, 5.) 

For 'ia^cv Homer lias also iSa^ov, 
with the smooth breathing. 

The Doric has 2 Perf. 'ici'^x, with 
the smooth breathing. 

Note. The simple 'AAfl was 
originally FA AH, from which came 
2 A. iFFaJof (like ifji.ff.o^ov from 
MEIPIl), which finally was chang- 
ed into swaSav. (§ 1. N. 1, 3.) 

AJy^On, spring forth, 2 Perf. 
drr'jyo&a synonymous with 
the Present. (§§ 96. 19 : 

uj'f^co {cci'oc, ixco), hold up, F. 
Mid. ure^ofiai, 2 A. ursif/oi, 
2 A. Mid. ^vea/6iiirp'. Mid. 
dvixo^ah endure, Imperf ?]- 
vfxo^tjv. (§ 82. N. 3.) 

avolyw {dvd, oi'/o)), open, Im- 
perf. dvsM'/or, F. dvol^M, A. 
dvsoj^a (later ?/ro*|«), Perf. 
dviojxn, Perf Pass, dveoiy/nai, 
A. Pass, dvibjxdnv, 2 Perf. 
«v£w/« s<«wrf o/j£7? , 2 A Pass. 
(later) 7>o//;jv. (§S2. N. 1.) 



138 



INFLECTION OF WORDS. 



[§ 118. 



avdtyioiy Imperf. avooyior, =z fol- 
lowing, 
arw/w, command, order, |w, |«, 
2 Perf. avar/a synonymous 
with the Present. 

Note. Forms without the con- 
necting vowel, 2 Perf. 1st pers. 
plur. ot.yuyfji.iv, Imperat. eivaa^S-i, 
Mv&i^S-io, eivco^B-i, for civwyi, itco, 
trs. (^§ 91. N. 6: 88. N. 1.) 

The last two forms take the Pas- 
sive terminations aSu, a-B^s, a,)iuy~ 
irS-M, Hvwy-ff^i, (§§ II : 7.) 

anavQaco ^tto, avQciai), take 
away, A. Part. anovQaq^ A. 
Mid. Part. anovQn^ivoc. 

a7taq)lay.co {a<IjSI), deceive, F. 
anncprioo-), 2 A. ^Tttxcpov, 

^ (§ 96. 8, 10, N. 1.) ^ 

uTiolavw (uTco, lavto), enjoy, Im- 
perf. uniXavov or dnrilavov, 
F. anolavob), A. anslavaa or 
anrjlavaa, F. Mid. uTioXavao- 
aai. 

anovqag, see anavQaoi. 

dgao^ai, invoke^ curse, dao- 
^ai, aodfir^v, regular. From 
APHMI comes Epic Infin. 
dgriixsvai. (§ 117. N. 17.) 

dgagiaxb) (APSI), ^fit, adapt, 
join, F. aQOb), A. -;^Qaa, Perf. 
Pass. uQ-riQ^^ai, 2 A. I'jijaQov, 
2 Perf. (XQtlQa (Ionic ag^oa). 
Part. fern. d^aQvla (§§ 96. 
8, 10, N. 1 : 81. N.: 103. 
N. 1: 104. N. 6.) 

Note. The syncopated 2 A. 
Mid. Part, il^/utvog has the force 
of an adjective, suitable, adapted, 
(§ 92. N. 4.) 

dQsaxfo (aPSI), phase, gratify, 
F. aqsiiM, Perf Pass. i'^Qinmc/.i. 
(§^ 96. 10, 8 : 95. N. 1 : 
107. N. 1.) 

ugvvixai {APH), procure, ac- 



quire, earn, save, Imperf 

TjQVVpTjV. (§ 96. 9.) 

agoo), plough, till, oata, oaocy 

aqriQona, agijgofioci, o&tjV. 

From APSIMI, Lifin. Act. 

(Epic) (xg6fifA,£vtti. (§§ 81 : 

^ 95. N. 1 ) 

dgTKt^M, seize, snatch, dam or 
«|(y, aaa, or a^a, axoc, aafAai, 
or a/fi(u, da&TjV or dx&r^v, 2 
A. Pass. ilgna/Tjv. (§ 96. 
N. 6.) 

APSI, see kI'^w, agaglaxw, dgs- 
(jiiM, kgrvpLcu. 

av^co or ofi'la'yto (ATrSl), in- 

crease, F. ai;^'?j'ora), A. rjv'^rjGcc, 

Perf Pass. rjv^rjpKi, A. PasS. 

^Tjv^n'^r^v. (§ 96. 15, 7, 10.) 

avgdbj, avgib), avgiaxoi-iai, (AT- 
PJ2,)used in the compounds 
anavgao}, enavgio), inavgl- 
(fxopac, which see. (§ 96. 
8, 10.) 

ATPSl, see the preceding. 

acpiMvxai, see aq)ir]^v. 

d(fh]fcc {dnc, Iripi), let go, Im- 
perf (ufi'sov or Tjcptiov some- 
times t]cpl7]v, F. dcprjacx), A. 
«(jp?]xot, Perf acpuxoc, Perf. 
Pass. difsL^ai, A. Pass, wgos- 
-i^T^i' or dcpsl&rjv, 2 A. dtp7]V, 
2 A. Mid. dcpiuTjv or wcjps/- 
^.,r. (§82. N.l.) 

Note. The form a^6»i'T«<, in 
the New Testament, stands for 
Perf. Pass. 3d pers. plur. a(pt7vTai» 
(See 'I'yifAi.) 

d(fii'<juoi, draw forth ijiquids), 

F. wqpvlw, A, r,(f,vGa. (§ 96. 

N. 4.) ^ ■ 
A<hSL, sec dnacploy.b). 
d/sa) (AXJl), Part.dx&b)v, ovaa, 

afflicted, grieved, Perf Pass. 

d^irix^pai or d^dxrinaL, am af' 



§ 118.] 

Jlicted, grieve, Injin. uy.u/ji- 

a&ai, Part. uiin)(r,^iro!; or 

«x7j;^i>»'oc. (§§96. 10:95. 

N. 2: 81. N. :93. N. 1.) 
ux^o^uL {ax en.), am offended, 

pained, fed indignant, A. 

Pass. rixdio&TiV, F. Mid. 

azdeaoum. (§^ 96. 10 : 95. 

N. 1 : 'l09. N.'l.) 
axwiiUL or u/n/unt (AXII), =■ 

uxax'^ouai, which see. (§ 96. 

^•' ' , ... 

AXJl, see uxrexi^o), ax'c(xi, axw- 
uai. 

ao), blow, Imperf. «ov. (§ 80. 
N. 5.) 

«Q), sleep, Aor. ueaa or uoa. 
(§ 96. 10.) 

lio), satiate, hifin. w//fi'«t (Ep- 
ic) for itiiv, UU01, uaa. Pass. 
(ioufii, 3d pers. sing, utui 
Epica«T«t. (§116. N. 6.) 

awoTo, see uf^ioo). 
13. 

pairw and (iuaxoi {BAfl), go, 
walk, F.^Si'iOO) shall cause to 
go, Perf. '/5i(?r,x«, Perf. Pass. 
/?i/?«^«i (only in composi- 
tion), A. Pass. f,?«,^7;i' (only 
in composition), F. Mid. 
l5r,ao}Ani, A. Mid. (Epic) f,/5r;- 
adur/V and t^i]o6ur,v, 2 Perf. 
/5f;5««, 'S^wi'y. ,56;9ol, InJin. ,5f- 
/5aV«/, P^r^. .-5f/5o)c. From 
^liSrjiu, 2 A. I'^/jr, (joi, (jidriv, 
^ij&L (in composition often 
/?«), /5r;7«,, >'c. ((n§ 96. 5, 
18,8: 95. N. 2: 85. N.2: 
91 N. 7.) 

Note. The Homeric (il^/uiai or 
(itiaf/.a.i, I shall live, is a 2 A. Mid. 
Subj. for ^^fitti. ;§§ 116. N. 8, 
4: 117. N. 17 : 215. N. 7.) 

^dllo) {BAASl), throw, cast, 



ANOMALOUS VERBS. 



m 



F. ^aXo) sometimes ^aX^ao), 
Perf (3i^Xrr^a, Perf. Pass. 

(jt[ilr,^ai, A. Pass, fi^kr,&rjv, 
F. Mid. ^Irtao^ui (Epic), 
2 A. }]3ahn', 2 A. Mid. e'^5a- 
/oVtjv. (§ 96. 6, 10, 17.) 

From BAESl, BylHMT, 2 
A. t;.5;.7jv, 2 A. Mid. ipJi- 
fiT/v, Subj. 3d pers. sing. 
^'/.r,8Tui for j3)SiTai, Opt. ^UU 
fir,v, Injin. ^li^a&ui., Part. 
/?;./j>6voc, all Epic. (§§ 117. 
N. 15, 17: 96. 19.) 

^doy.o}, see ^julro). 

^uaxu^w, carry, uooy, aoa, a- 
yuai, cxxar^v. (§ 96. N. 6.) 

BAIl, see (julrb). 

fikOjuuL or (jtloiAui, see ^3ulv(a. 

^ciSdo) or /5//?/;iUi (^^.a), = 
^5a/v&), which see. (§ 96. 1.) 

(3i3uo)oy.o) [BO PR), cat, F. 
(jouwbi, Perf ^i^iowy.n, Perf. 
Pass. /3f{igo)uui, A. Pass. 
^'ljoo)&riV, 3 F. (^ffioowofiUL, 



2 Perf Prtr^. 



teooog 



. From 



BPRMT, 2 A. e;??wy. (§§ 96. 
17, 1,8: 117. 12.) 
/vio'ci), /^r^, ojaa, oj;;«, oixai, 0)O0- 
ficcL. From BISlMr, 2 A. 
f'fjion', ^iw, i^iolrjv and ^ioW/V, 
Cjion-ai, Siovq. (§ 117. 'l2, 

N. 6.) 

(jLo'usy.o^uL (,5io'cij), revive, bor- 
rows the other tenses, ex- 
cept Imperf J from the pre- 
ceding. 

iJXuoTuvo) {BAA^rn.), hud, 
sprout, F. ^)MOTr,a(xi, A. e- 
ljhiair,au, 2 A. t^jXaaxov. 
(§§ 96. 7, 10 : 76. N. 2.) 

BylASl or BAE.Q., see /SwAAw. 

fiXojaico) {MO All), come, go, 



J 40 



INFLECTION OF W0UD3. 



[§ 113. 



Perf. fiijx^Xwxa, 2 Aor. I'^uo- 
Xov, 2 F. Mid. fxoXov{xai. 
(§§ 96. 17, 8 : 26. N.) 

Note. The Present likv<rxu is 
formed as follows: MO AH, 
MAOn, MBAOn, fifik^cTKco, 
^XutTKu. The fjt, is dropped because 
the combination jw/SX cannot begin a 
Greek word. (^§ 16. N. 1.) 

pouo}, crij out, rjOM, tjou, r,xa, 
ri^ai,, rjO^r^v, rioo^ai, regular. 
From the simple BOJl come 
the Ionic forms ei^busa, e^w- 
a&r]v,^Moo^ui. (§ 109. N.l.) 

BOAEJl {BAylSl), Perf. Pass. 
^s^6Xr]fiai, =1 ^dXlb). (§ 96. 
19, 10.) 

BO All, see ^ovlo^ai. 

BOPSl, see /5</9^wffxw. 

poGKM {BOfi), feed, pasture, 
F. /JoaxTjVw, A. £(36axr}oa. 
(§96. 8, 10.) 

§ovlofiai (BOASI), will, Imperf. 
s(3ovX6fxr]i' or ri^ovl6^)]v, Perf. 
Pass. ^8si3ovXr}fjai, A. Pass. 
i^ovXi]&i]V or ri[jovh]flijv, F. 
Mid. (iovX-^aofiiu, 2 Perf. ^3i~ 
^ovXa comp. in Homer tioo- 
^B(iovXa. (§§96. 18, 10_: 78. 
N. 1.) From the simple 
Present come Pres. Pass. /5o- 
Xo(xaL, 2d pers. plur. ^oXeads. 

BO II, see /5oaw, (^ooxm. 

BPAXJl, crash, rattle, 2 A 

BPOSl, see ^i(3Q(6axco. 

^QdxaoiiaL (BPrXSl), roar, 
rjoofxcti, rjadfirji', Perf. i3s^QV- 
Xa synonymous with the 
Present. (96. 10.) 

r. 

yafjsoi (rAMIL), marry, F. 
ya(ji(a, A. syrjficc, (later iya- 
}xriaa), Perf. yfyafxrjya, Perf 
Pass. yfynjxrjfjKXi, A. Pass. 



f'y(i{z^&i]v, Part. fern, also 
ya^e&s7(ja, F. Mid. yaf/eaao- 
/i«t(in Homer). (§§96. 10* 
95. N. 2 : 102. N. 5.) 

r^/Z, see riPNIl. 

yeyojvoi and ysywriu) {rSlNSl), 
call aloud, 2 Perf ^'gy&jrw 
synonymous with the Pres. 

ydpo^ai {FElSfL), beget, bring 
forth, am born, A. Mid. 
iysivdfATjv begat, brought 
forth. (§ 96. 18.) 

yivTo, see ylyro^ai, " EASl. 

PENJl, see ylyvo^ni. 

yil&ew {mo SI), rejoice, riaa, 
rjaa, 2 Perf yiyrj&a synony- 
mous with the Present. 
(§ 96. 10.) 

yrjonoy.io and yrj^do), grow old, 
uaai, uaa, ana, uaojuai. From 
FJIPIIMf, 2 A. iyi^o(7v, yrj- 
Quvat, yrj()(xg. (§ 1 17. 12.) 

11 FN SI {FENSl, FASl), pro- 
duce, cause to exist, Perf. 
Mid. yFysvrjjiiai, Pass, iyivi]- 
drjv, F. Mid. ysvi](jO(.iai, 2 
Perf yiyova (poetic also 
yiyaa), 2 A. Mid. iytv6^i]v. 
Mid. ylyvo^ai OX ytvof.iai, 
produce myself, make myself, 
become. (§§" 96. 1, 5, 10, 
19 : 26 1.) 

The 2 Perf yiyaa is in- 
flected, as far as it goes, 
like (it(3an (§ 91. N. 7.) 

Note. For 2 A. Mid. 3d pers. 
sing. ly'tnTo, we find 'iyivro or y'iv- 
ro. (§ 92. N. 4.) 

yiyv(x)a}ii(i{FNOSi)).ciiiQYyivb)i}y.(xi, 
know, A. i'yrojun (chiefly in 
composition), Perf h'yrMy.u, 
Perf Pass. eyvMafxai, A. Pass. 
fyvcoa&rjv, F. Mid. yvbhjofiat. 
From TiySlMf, 2 A. tyvMV, 



§ 118.] 



ANOMALOUS VERBS. 



141 



yvu, yvoiTjv, yvcud-i, yrojyai, 

yvovQ. (§§ 96. 1, 8: 76. 

N. 2 : 107. N. 1 : 109. 

N. I : 117. 12.) 
yoaoi {rOSl), hcwail, regular. 

Imperf. also ty^^^' From 

rOIIMr, Infin. Epic /o/J/zf- 

via. (§§96.10: 117. N. 17.) 
riLNJl, see yfywvbi. 

z/. 
dttivvoi) or dalco, give to eat, 

entertain, F. dacaco, A. tdixi- 

aa, A. Pass. i8nla&i]v, A. iVlid. 

fdaiaocfxtjv. Mid. dulvv^iai, 

feast. Opt. 3d pers. sing. 

dalvvxo. (§§ 96. 9: 109. 

N. 1- 117. N. 7.) 
dal(o {JASI), divide, Perf. Pass. 

dtdaaf.iai, 3d pers. plur. ds- 

dalaTui (in Homer), F. Mid. 

Saao^ai, A. Mid. idaudf^tjv. 

(§§ 96. 18 : 107. N. 1 : 95. 

N. 1.) 
daico (JASl), burn, 2 Perf. dt- 

drja, 2 A.Mid. eda6^r]v. Mid. 

8alo^ai, am on fire, burn. 

(96. 18.) 
danvw (J/IKJI), bite, Perf. de- 

8rixit, Perf Pass, dedrjy^iai, 

A.Pass. edrix&Tjv, F.Mid. (5??- 

^Ofxai, 2 A. iduHOv. (§ 96. 5, 

18.) 
dafxdco {JAMSI}, subdue, tame, 

dufidaca, iddixuavc, Perf. ds~ 

8(^rjxa, di8fU)](Aai, A. Pass. 

idij,t]&r]v, 2 A. Pass. i8d^ii]V. 

(§§96.10,17:95. N. 1.) 
8df^vi]fi,i, (^8afj.d(x)), Pass. 8d^va~ 

fiai, = preceding. (§ 96. 5.) 
8ag&di(o {/JAPOfl), sleep, Perf. 

888d()&i]ya, A.Pass. iSdQ&rjv, 

F.Mid. 8a()&ijao}iai, 2 A. 

tSagd^ov or s8(3a&ov. (§§ 96. 

7, 10: 26. 2: 11.) 



8ar social, divide, share, A.Mid. 

i8arsdfx7^v. (§ 104. N. 1.) 
JASl, see 8al(a. 
JAJl, cause to learn, teach, 

Perf 8£8drjKa have learned, 

Perf. Pass. 8e8dr]fi(xi, F.Mid. 

8ut]aofi(xi, 2 A. i8aov, 2 Perf. 

5£^a« /mi;e learned, 2 A. 

Pass. e8drjv I learned. From 

jEziAJl, Pass. 8s8doy,ai. 

(§96. 10, 11.) 
8e8laxo{xai or 8e8laaoixai, =; 5«i- 

^et ((Jfi'w), 2^ behooves, one must. 
Impersonal, F. ^£?jff£t, A. 

i8£t]G£. 

8EL8caaofxaLOV 8ii8iTTo^(xi {81(a), 
frighten, scare, A.Mid. i8ii~ 
St^dfiTjim (§§96. 11, 8, 3: 
76. N. 4.) 

8ei8(o, see JEIfL. 

8£Uvi'fii {JEIKJl), show, F. 
8d^oi, A. i(Jei|«, Perf. Pass. 
8i8siy^ai, A. Pass. 68stx&r]V, 
(§ 96. 9.) 

The Ionic has 8i^(a, tSs^a, 
8i8syfj,aL, i8£X^V^- 

jEIfl or 8l(a or 8d8w,fear, A. 
I'^£(a« (in Homer h88ELaa), 
Perf. ^i^oixa «wi afraid, 
F.Mid. 8naofim, 2 Perf ^s- 
5r« «/?« afraid. (§§ 96. 18, 
N. 14:98. N. 3: 79. N. 3.) 

Note. Forms without the con- 
necting vowel, 2 Perf. Iti'^iju.tv, hi- 
^/T£, Imperat. li'iti^i, 2 Pluperf. 
ihltifAiv. {^ 91. N. 6 : 76. N. 4 : 
88. N. 1.) 

8i}iM, build, A. l'8sifia, Perf. 
8s8/uriy.a, A. Mid. i8sLy.d(j7}V. 
(§ 96. 17.) 

8to(^aL, see <5£w, want. 

8BQxofj.ni, see, 2 A, eSgattoVf 
2 Perf 5£(5oox«, A. Pass. 



142 



[NFLECTTON OF WORDS, 



[§US 



'idsQxd-rjP, 2 A. Pass, td^axr/v. 
(§§96. 19, 17: 2(3.2.) 

6ixoy,(ti, rcccwe, dkdi-y/^iai, tdil- 
X&^v^ 8b^ojuai, a86'^_(X(ur/r, regu- 
lar. 

Note. Forms without the con- 
necting vowel, 2 A. Mid. iViyfjcnv^ 
itixTo, (for l5£;^;o'^»v, iV-xifo,) In- 
Jln. "hix^^oit (for '^i;\^iffB^oii, Fart. 
Uyf^'cvas as Present, (^t^ 92. N. 4 : 
9. 1 : 7:11.) 

ds(o (rarely di'diji^i), bind, i^aw, 
Tjocc, fx«, e^uxi, iSi]r, 8(1 F. 
dedriaofiai. (§§ 95. N. 2 : 
96. 1: 116. R.) 

deca, am wanting to, want, F. 
(JsTjato, A. f8&-}]ovc, A. Pass. 
idsi]&7]r, F. Mid. dtr^ooi-iaL. 
Mid. di.oy.ai, want, need, 
pray, beseech, (§ ^"6. 10.) 

For A. 3d pers. sing. 
idirjosv, Homer has dijasv. 

JHKSL, see duxvbj. 

drjcj (/iASl), as Future, shall 
find. 

didaaxbi {/ll/iAXSl), teach, F. 
8tdd$M (poetic also didaanij- 
0(a), A. edida^a (poetic also 
sdiddoarjoa), Perf. dsdldax'^, 
Perf. Pass. Sidldayyai, A. 
Pass. ediSdxdriv. (§ 96. 10, 
N. 10.) 

dldriyi, see dew, bind. 

didQaaiicj (zlPAJl), run away, 
Perf. didgay.a, F.Mid. 8Qdao- 
yau From JPI/MT, 2 A. 
idgav, d§M, dgahp', dgad^i, 
dQoivui, dgdg. (§§ 96. 1 , 8 : 
117. 12.) This verb occurs 
only in composition, 

dldcjfii and didow {/IOJl),give, 
F. 8b)0(a, A. tdavM, Perf. 
8s8(aiia, Perf. Pass, 8s8ofiai, 
A.Pass. i86&riv, A. Mid. i8(a- 



iuxyi]v (not Attic), 2 A. i'8u)r, 
8oi, 8ui7]', 8a{}i or 8(j<i, 8ovvaL, 
8ovt:, 2 A. Mid. [86fi7]v. 
(§§96. 1 : 117: 104. N. 2: 
95. N. 2.) 

8l^<'>, seek, F.Mid. Si'Ct'iooycci. 
Mid. 8l^r,yai, seek, retains 
the 7j throughout, as Part. 
8,^;]yarog. (§§96. 10: 117. 
3.) 

/IIKSI, cast, fling, 2 A. tScxor. 

810),. see /JEISI, 8eidiayoyai. 

ZiMASl, /tMESL, see Saydw, 

8i-fJ.b). 

86axut or 8e(xT(H, it seems. Im- 
personal, A. Mid. 8oda(}a- 
10, Suhj. 8odaaiiaL, Epic. 
(§§ 102. N. 5: 86. N. 3.) 

8oKim {/iOKJl), seem, think, 
F. (5o'|w, A. WoHu, Perf Pass. 
8i8oyyaL. The regular forms 
(JoxTj'ao), Tjfjce, rnxat, are not 
common. (§ 96. 10.) 

8ov7TS(x) (AOrnn), resoundy 
sound heavily, A. i8ovTir,oot 
(also iy8ovnriaa^, 2 Perf 8i- 
8ov7ia. (§ 96. 10.) 

Note. The A. lytov'Trvitra comes 
from TAOrnEn, which is formed 
after the analogy of xrvriu from 
TXnn. ^§ 7.j 

/IPAJMSL or /JPJCMfl, Perf «5f- 
8gdfA7ii(n, Perf Pass. 8£8gu- 
yriiuut (little used), 2 A. ttJ^ce- 
^or, 2 Perf 8i8goya (Epic), 
F. Mid. Sgnyovyai, = XQ^x^i 
which see. (§ 96. 10, 19.) 

8vray(u {/tTNASl, /iTNUMi), 
am able, can, Imperf i8vvd- 
yTjv or r,8vrdyr)v, Perf Pass. 
8e8vvrj(xai, A.Pass. i8vvridriv 
or ri8vv^]^i]v (and i8vvda&7]v\ 
F.Mid. 8vvriaoiiai, A. Mid. 
(in Homer) i8vvr^adiir^v. 



§ 118.] 



ANOMALOLS Vf.UBS. 



143 



(§§ 78. N. 1 : 95. N. 2 : 
109. N. 1.) 

$v(o and dvr(o, enter, set, cause 
to enter, F. dZifco, A. t^vau, 
Perf. dedvxn, A.'Pass. tSu&ip; 
F. Mid. dvGoficu, A. Mid. 
idvaufirjv (E[)ic also t'dvcjo- 
fiTjv), Part, dvao^usro? as 
Present, settiiig. From 
jrjVlI, 2 A. e'div] diU), dvriv, 
dv&i, dvrcet, (5uc. (§§ 96. 5 : 
95. N. 2: 85. N. 2: 117. 
12, N. 7.) 

E. 

kdcpd-T] or fa(fO-T], was fastened, 
Aor. Pass. 3d pers. sing., 
found only in Homer. 

iysiQO) {El'EPSl), wake, rouse, 
F. e'ysgu, A. ilysiQu, Perf. 
iyrjyfQxa, Perf Pass. fyr\ytq- 
fiaL,A. Pass. ^^ysQ&TiV, 2 Perf 
iyQriyoQU am awake,2A. iyqo- 
fii]v, eyQoli.trjv, eyQSo (Epic), 
iygia^ai. Mid. iyilgo^iuL rise. 
(§§96. 18: 81: 26. 1.) 



Note 1. The Attic reduplication 
of iy^riyo^u is anomalous. 

Note 2. Homer has 2 Perf. 3d 
pers. plur. iy^nyo^^a,(ri for iy^nyo- 
^actrt, as if irora ErEPGH. 

Note 3. Forms without the con- 
necting vowel, 2 Perf. hnperat, 
2d pers. plur. ly^viyo^^i, Infin. 
iyor.yicS-eti, with the terminations 
of the Passive, aSi, a^B-ai. 
edb), see iaf^lou 
'E/JJI, see the following. 

f^o,uai (EzlJl), seat mifself, sit, 
Imperf tC,6^n]v, A. Pass, c- 
adr^v (later), 2 F.Mid. I^ov- 
^«t. (§§96. 4: 114. N. 2.) 
This verb is chiefly used in 
the compound y.a&ii^o^my 
which see. 

i^ilw or S^Om, will, F. i&eXrjao> 
or ^eltjoo), A. TJ&sXtjaa, Perf. 
^&sXr,ya. (§ 96. 10.) 

e&o), am accustomed, 2 Perf. 
tYo3&a (Ionic i'oy&a) synony- 
mous with the Present. 
(§§96. 19: 80.N.3, R. 1.) 



EUSlff/iSl), see, F. tldriaco (rare) shall hioia, F.Mid. ^^taofiau 
sliatl know, A. Mid. slaafirjV seemed, 2 A. sldov (rarely I'dov) 
saw, I'dw, Idoifii, Ids and Ids, idnr, idur, 2 A. Mid. udoui^v saw,. 
i'd(/)fiai, Idoi/urji', idov (as interjection, l8ov, behold!), tdsa&ai, 
Idonsvoc, 2 Perf olda know, sldw, eldelr/v, i'adi, ildivuL, sidcog, 
2 Pluperf 7jdeiv knew. Pass, sldouai, seem, resemble. (§§ 96. 
18, 10, N.'l4: 93. N. 2 : 80. N.' 4.) 
The 2 Perf oida, and 2 Pluperf 
follows : 

Perfect 2. 
Ind. S. ol8a D. 

oiad-a 
oi8s{y) 
SuBJ. S. u8(a, iWfiq, 

el5(oaL{v), 
Opt. S. Hdsl7]v, Hdsi7]c, udilrj, I), nddr^iov, Bldsi^rvjV, . 

u8di]fiiv, sl8sl7]TS, tlSdriaav. 
Imp. *S^. Xa&L D. i'axov P. I'ars 

Iff TO) laxbjv i'fJTwaav 



',8eiv, are inflected as 



P. I'afisv 
tars 

el8jj, D. sidyjiov, P. eldcofisv, ddtJTS, 



VOTOV 
i'OTOV 



'44 



INFLECTION OF WORDS. 



[§ 118. 



Inf. sldivai. 

Part, sidcag, via, 6g, G. 



OTog. 



Pluperfect 2. 

S. rjdsiv, jjdr] D. T^dsifisv, ]iofisv P. jjdsifiEV, yafiBV 

jjSsig, ^deia&a, jjdsLTov, fiaxov jjdsiTS, rjais 

jjdrjo&a 
fjdsLf jjdrj, i]8biv t]8slrriv, jjoT)]v f/dsaav, fioav 

Note 1. Perfect. Ind. 2d pers. sing. eT<r3-a stands for oT^ctffB-a. (§§ 84. 
N 6 : 91. N. 6 : 10. 2.) In the dual and plural, the forms JWav, iV^sv, 
JVts, stand for 'I^rav, t'^f^tv, i'^re. (§ § 91. N. 6 : 10, 1, 3.) 

SuBJ. and Opt. i't^a, I'thuvjv, come from EIAEIl, whence also the F. 
e/Ww. (§ 91. N. 6.) 

Imp. iV^/, 'Uru, &c. for 'l^^,, 'llru, &c. (§§ 91. N. 6 : 88. N. 1 : 10. 3.) 

Pluperfect. For 1st pers. sing, ^t'/i, and Sd pers. sing. p;j or '^hiv, see 
above (§ 85. N. 4.) — For 2d pers. sing. puirB-a, or >?'5>j<rSa, see above 
(§§ 84. N. 6 : 85. N. 4.) — For the syncopated forms ^<rfjciv, ytrn, ^aaVf 
see above (§§ 91. N. 6 : 10. 1, 2. 3.) 

Note 2. The regular forms of the Perfect cTJaj, ofha.fi.it, e'ltttTov, ot^etrs, 
ofhecffi, belong chiefly to the later Greek- 

Note 3. Dialects. Perfect. Ind. 1st pers. plur. Epic and Ionic i^^j* 
for 'Ifffjkiv. 

Inf. Epic 'ttfjbtvai for '^ifjt,tvai for iJSs'va/. (§ 89. N. 1.) 

Pluperfect. Epic and Ionic m'thuv, tjs, u or n, plur. vnttufi-iv, iirt, Sd pers, 
iVav. (§§ 85. N. 4: 91. N. 6 : 10. 2.) Here the prefix h seems to be 
the syllabic augment lengthened. (§ 80. N. 2.) — For 3d pers. ^g. »j^s/, 
Herodotus (1, 45) has Huh. 



£l'y,(a, seem, resemble, 2 Perf. 
I'oixa, sometimes glxa (Ionic 
olxa), synonymous with the 
Present, 2 Pluperf. emxHv. 
(§§ 96. N. 14 : 80. N.'2, 3, 

4.) 

For 2 Perf. 3d. pers. plur. 
ioUaai we sometimes find 
sl^ccai. 

Note. Forms without the con- 
necting vowel, 2 Perf. 'i3tyju.tv, 
iTKTov, for Uixa/jiiv, Wikxtov, 2 Plu- 
perf. ilKTYIV for iMKUTYtV. (§§ 91. 

N. 6 : 9. I.) 

The epic poets have also yiUra or 
'i'Uro for \mxu, with the Passive ter- 
niination t« (§ 84. 2). 



tlllixi or iXlw or uUbi {EAfL), 
roll up, drive to, F. ulriow, 
A. eiltjaa, Injin. also li(j«t 
or Hlaai, Part, also I'Aaa?, 
Perf sllrjxa, Perf Pass. 
€i'k7]/j.(xi,, hXfiai, A.Pass. £tA?j- 
^rjv, 2 A. Pass, idXrjv, InJin. 
akTJvai,, Part. ccXuq. (§§ 96. 
18, 10, 6: 104. N. 6: 80. 
N. 2.) 

Note. The form Uxviro for Plu- 
peif. Pass. 3d pers. sing. il\*iro, is 
formed as follows : EAU, OAEH, 
Ix^fjcviv, \eXyifji,yiv, -viffo, loXfiro. ( § § 96. 
13 : 80. N. 2.) 



SLy.ag^ai, 



see MEIPSl. 



§ 118.] ANOMALOUS VERBS. 146 

Bifii {ESI, E2SL), am, w, ih]v, I'o&i, slvai, wV, Imperf. ^v (some- 
times tjfxr}v), F. I'ao^ai, iaolfiViV, I'aEO&ai, iaofisvog. 

Present. 

Ind. S. flfic D. iafxiv P. eofiiv 

sic:, si iaiov sots 

satl{v) iatov slal{v) 

SuBJ. 8. 0), ^g, fi, D. (Ofisv, 7JT0V, rjTOV, P. (Ofisv, tits, (aai,{v). 

Opt. S. sl'rjv, sir}?, sl'r], D. sl'7]}isVy sl'rjjov, eti^TriV, P. sVrjfisy, 
sii]Ts, sVijaav or siev. 

Imp. S. i'a&L D. laxov P. sate 

soTOi taxQjv eoTOj aav, satwv 

Inf. sivcci, to be. 

Part. wV, otaa, uv, G. ovrog, being. 

^ Imperfect. 

S. ijiv, ij D. rjixiv _ P. tjfisv ^ 

Tig, ria&a rixov, riaxov rixs, •^aie 

7}, TjV '^'t'JJ'j rjaxTjv riaav 

Future. 
Ind. S. eaofiui, tap or lasi, eoixai or taxai, D. iaofis&or, 

soso&ov, sasa-d-ov, P. ioofxs^a, I'afa^f, i'aovxai. 
Opt. >S^. iaoinr^v, sooio, taoixo, D. foolfied^ov, saota&ovjaol-' 

a&TjV, P. (uoifis&a, taowi^s, I'aoirxo. 
Inf. laso&ai, to be about to be. 
Part, iooj-urog, t], or, about to be. 

Note 1. Present Ind. The 2d pers. sing. iT belongs to the Middle 
voice. (Compare <ptXio(jt.ai, 2d pers. (pi\in or (^/X Is/ contracted (p/Xs?.) — 
The forms iffri, ia-/uiv, io-Tcv, ia-ri come from the original ESH. — The 3d 
pers. plur. uo-l is formed from EH after the analogy of riB-iia-t from TiB-yif/,u 

SuBj. and Opt. u, ilnv are formed from EH after the analogy of tiB-Uj 
TiSe/jjv, from rt^n/^i. 

Imp. "a-^i, sa-Tu, &c. come from the original ESfl. In the 2d pers. 
sing, the radical vowel t becomes /. 

Part. uIv, oStra., ov, stands for lav, hZo-a,, Uv. (See next Note.) 

Imperfect. The 1st pers. sing. ?is contracted from ««. (See next Note.) 

— For the 2d pers. sing. nirS-a, see above '§ 84. N. 6.) — The 3d pers. 
sing, viv is contracted from yitv. (See next Note.) — The forms ^(rrov, ^(rrjjy, 
HffTi, come from the original ESH. 

Note 2. Dialects. Present. Ind. 1 st pers. sing. Doric i/a/^i for slfit. 

— 2d pers. sing, old i(rg-'t for i7s, from the original E2H. (§ 84. N. 6.) — 
Sdpers. sing. Doric IvTt, not to be confounded with the 3d pers. plur. — • 

13 



146 



[NFLECTION OF WORUS. 



[^yiis. 



1st pers. plur. Ionic s/^tv, poetic If^zv. — 3d pers. plur. Ionic ta.a't (like 
TiB^ictffi from TtB->]f4,i), Doric ivri (§ 117. N. 17^ 

SuBj. uncontracted 'in), j'jjs, ?»), iufz-zv, itirt, sutriy^, Ionic. 

Opt. uncontracted 'iotf^i, 'ioi;, sot, &c, Ionic. 

Imper. 2d pers. sing. tVa, after the analogy of the Middle. — 3d pers. 
sing, rf^w for iffTui. 

Inf. Epic 'ifAfuvcci, 'i^fnv, 'ifuvKt, tfjtiv, Doric ^/tsv, nf^tS' (§ 89. N. 1. ) 

Imperfect. 1st pers. sing. Ionic ioc or noe-, 'iov, 'Uxav. (§ 85. N. 5.) — 

2d pers. sing. Ionic aaj, sV*s£j, Epic 'ina-B-a. (§ § 84. N. 6 : 85. N. 5.) — 

3d pers. sing. Ionic 'h{v), 'iirxs, Epic 'itiv, -".nv, Doric «j. (§ 80. N. 2.) — 
Sd pers. plur. Ionic and Doric sWv. 

Note 3. The 3d pers. sing, iffri takes the accent on the penult, ttrri, 
when it signifies he, site, or it exists. Also when it comes after s/, ovk, aSf 
aXX' (for aXXa), and tovt (for rauTa) ; as eu» itrri, aXX* sVt*. 

tifiL {ill, ESI, ElSl), go, shall go, Xw, I'oi^i or lolriv, Id^i, Uvat, 
Icov, Imperf. ysiv, F. Mid. naofjai (Epic), A. Mid. (Epic) 
Maafinv.^ (§§'96. 18: 87. N. 2.) 

The Present and Imperfect are inflected as follows : 

Present. 
Ind. S, u^i D. I'fiiv P. i'fiev 



fig, d i'rov 


Vie 


fhi{v) i'lov 


m(ji(v) 


SuBJ. S. i'to, i'j]g, I');, D. Taiisv, I'rjTov, I'rjTOV, P. i'oifxfv, I'rjxe, 


■■■■'■-■ i'(aai{r'). 




Opt. S. i'oi^t, i'oig, Xoi, D, i'oijj,€v, Voljov, lolup', P. Voifisv, 


Ions, i'ouv. 




Imp. S. X&i, d D. I'tov 


P. lis 


lib) i'lMV 


i'ltadav or lovroiV 


Inf. Uvai. 




Part. Imv, iovaa, Iov, G. lovzog. 




Imperfect. 




fjfig, fjfia&a fjfijov, fixov 


P. fifiixsv, ri^tv 


fjsi, jJBLV fjeurjv, yTi]V 


jjfoav 



Note 1 . Present. Ind. The 2d pers. sing. sT, like (7 from £/>/, follows 
the analogy of the Middle. — The 3d pers. plur. 't'dert follows the analogy , 
of TtB-iuffi i'rom TiS-nf^i. (^ 117. N. 2. ; 

Imp. 2d pers. sing. jT is used only in composition, as i'^s/ for i^i^t from 
i^ii/u.1. Compare ^ 117. N. 8.) 

Inf. nvcti comes from the imaginary lEH, IHMI, after the analogy of 
•TiSsva/ from ri^^iu, Ti^nf^i. 

Imperfect. The forms hrj, r,u;, &c. follow the analogy of the Pluperfect 
Active. 



^118.] 



ANOMALOUS VERBS. 



147 



Note 2. Dialects. Present. Ind. 2d pers. sing. Epic ttrBx for 
iTf. (^^ 84. N. 6.) 

Inf. Epic ?/*«»«< or f^iv, without the connecting vowel t. (§ 89. N. 1.) 

Imperfect. 1 st pers. sing. Ionic H'ix, yia, Epic rf/av, ^av. The Ionic forms 
are often used by the Attics. — 3d pers. sing. Ionic «/», Epic *e. —3d pers. 
dual Epic 7t>}v. — 1st pers. plur. Epic jfa^sy. — 3d pers. plur. Ionic ^iV«y> 
Epic r.rxv, 7ffuv. 



^. 8tnix, 
fi'jioi/iii. 



ti'^nai, see ttxto. 

EIIlfL {J^JIJl), say, . 
2 A. sinov, ei'TKi), 
elni, slni7v, slnwv. (^^ 96. 
18: 104. N. 1: 93. N. 2.) 
From "PLJl (which see), 
Perf. uQrtxa, Perf. Pass. tX- 
QiifAui, A. Pass. fQQ^&riv or 

fQQed^tjV, 3 F. £l()1]aOflUl. 

From siQM, F. iQsco f^w. 

The epic poets have also 
2 A. eecTiov (§ 80. N. 2.) 
iXgyvinL or uqyoi (old igyco, 
itgyco), inclose, include, shut 
in, F. eXQ^d), A. flfj^a or 
iQ^a, Perf. Pass, tl^yfirxi or 
ttgyf-iai or i^y^at. (§§ 96. 
18,9: 80. N. 5.) 

tiQb) {EPJI), F. f^£Ci) f()&>, rrr 

EinU, which see. (§ 96. 
18.) 

ctffxft) or TaKW [h/.m), hken, 
compare, Imperf. ij'iay.oi' or 
lazor, (§ 96. 14 ) 

fl'ca&u, see l'.?w. 

ilavrco (rarely e'Xdo)), drive, 
march, F. fl^xcjo) or fAoi, A. 
riXnaa, Perf. th]lay.a, Perf. 
Pass. iXrjXreuai, later <-7.//'/l«- 
ff|U«r, A. Pass. ^).ddr,v^ later 
i/Wv-^ryv. (§§96.N. 13: 95. 
N. 1: 102. N. 2: 107. N. 1: 
109. N. 1.) 

EAETOn. {EATOPS), F. Mid. 
flfvaoiini, 2 A. rjkud^ot' com- 
monly ^Jt^ov, eAi^co, tlf^oi^u, 
sJl&s, us sir, i).dc6>', 2 Perf. 



eh'jlv&a (rarely f'^h'Sa), — 
t(j/^f)fitr.i, which see. (§§ ^6. 
18: 26. 1 : 93 N. 2.) 

Note. Homer has 2 Perf. i/xjj- 
XovS-a, 1st pers. plur. ttXvXouB'fAtf 
for £;x>jXa(/3«^6v. (^§ 96. N. 14 : 
81 : 91. N. 6.) 

I'Atto), cause to hope, give hope, 
2 Perf. eolna as Present, 2 
Pluperf. fwlniLv as Imper- 
fect. Mid. Uno/^oii, cause 
myself to hope, simply / 
hope. (§ 80. N. 2, 3.) 

'EAfl, F. aw (rare), 2. A. 
hXov, t'Xo}, sloifxi, fkf, hXslr, 
klbir, 2 A. Mid. dloprjv 
(Alexandrian elXnf/rjv), z= 
nloib), which see. (^^^ 80. 
N' 1: 85. N. 2.) 

Note. It may be supposed that 
•EAH was origlncilly FEAH, of 
which the 2 A. Mid. 3d. pers. 
sing., without the connecting vowel, 
would be FiXrs or Fsvro > like 
/SaNr/s-ra; lor /3s At/o-t«j). The 
form FsvTo was finally changed into 
yUro, he seized, which- is found in 
Homer. (^^^ 1. N. 3 : 92. N. 4.) 

EylfL, see ullm. 

ENEEKJl (ENEKfl), A. ijvfy- 
x«, Perf. fi'i^voxc, Perf. Pa.ss. 
irt^ifyuai, A. Pass. rii'e/SrjVf 
2 A. v/i'f/xoi', = qoiow, which 
see. (§96. 6: 104. N. 1 : 
98. N. 2: 81.) 

EISEOR, float, lie on, sit, 2 
Perf. hrtvo^a. (§§ 96. 19 : 
81.) 

ENEKIl, see ElVEEKSl. 



148 



fNFLECTION OF WORDS. 



[§ 118. 



ivsnta or ivvincn or ENITIJl or 
ENIUnSl (tv, EnH), F. in- 
ani^aoi or ivLipoi, 2 A. tiianov, 
poetic, — ElllSl, which see. 
(§ 96. 14, 16, 10.) 

ivircKa or ivlaao) (ENIIIJI), 
chidey 2 A. ivsrlnov and (as 
if from ENIUAnil), rjvlTTa- 
nov. (§ 96. 2, N. 1.) 

ENIZIIJI, see gVcTTw. 

evvino), see ivsnos. 

evvv^i (ESI), put on, clothe, F. 
law, Perf Pass, tl^at or 
fa^at, Pluperf. Pass. iXf^rjv or 
ca^?;?^ or ksaixTjv, A. Pass. 
£U&ip', A. Mid. Uod^r]v, 
poetic. (§§ 96. 9 : 95. N. 1 : 
107. N. 1 : 109. N. 1 : 80. 
'N. 2.) 

ioXriTo, see slklw. 

inavQibi or inavQlaxo^ai (J^h 
avQso), avQtaHo^ai), c^njoy, 
F. Mid. inavQTiaoiiai, 2 A. 
lni]VQov, snavQio, snavQuv, 
2 A.Mid. i7ir}VQ6fi7]v, inavQW- 
fiaL, inav§ea&ai, and inav- 

inlaxafitti (EniSTASl, ETII- 
2THMt), understand, Im- 
perf '^TiLaTUfiTjv, A. Pass, i^yrt- 
OTi^&Tjv or inioTTJ&Tjv, F. Mid. 
innsTtiaoixai. (§§ 117: 80. 
N.4.) 

£77i2, see £177^2. 

«7iw, am occupied with, am 
busy, Imperf. unov, F. Mid. 
Eipo^iav, 2 A. lanov, gjim, 
anuv, oncav, 2 A. Mid. ecjTro- 
^Tjj^, ana fiat, onol^rjv, anov, 
ansG&oci, anofAfvog. Mid. eno- 
fiaL, follow, (§ 80. N. 1.) 

The old poets have 2 A. 
Mid. Subj. I'aTZMfxai, Inf. 
sonsa&ai, Part. iano^Evog. 
Note. It seems that sarw was 



originally SEIIfl, whence 2 A. 
sVjcrav, syncopated JViTav. (Compare 
vs, ffvsi sus ; iTof^at, sequor ; u-ri^, 
super ; Itto, sub j t, 5e ; %(AKTVi, 
semis', 'i^ofiui or rather 'EAU, 
serfeo J aAj, 5«/, sahim.) 

EQaoi (poetic tQ(xiuai, inflected 
like XoTa^ai.), love, am in love 
with, A. Pass, rigdadriv, A. 
Mid. 7J(juadiArjv (poetic) fell 
in love. (§§ 95. N. 1 : 109. 
N. 1.) 

EPrSL or ^8oj, see qi'^m. 

i^slnco {EPinU), demolish, 
throw down, igslipco, Tj'geupa, 
rjg8npdfj.rjv, 2 A. ^Qtnov fell 
doion, 2 Perf i^rtQinu have 
fallen down, Pluperf. Pass. 
3d pers. sing. ioeoiriTO. 
(§§96. 18: 81. N.)' 

SQSM, see sQOfjiai. 

egi8(xlvco {EPIJR), quarrel, vie 
with, A. Mid. Inf. iqidr^aa- 
o&au (§ 96. 7, 10.) 

egofxai (EPSI), Ionic iXgofxai, 
Epic also i^ita, ask, inquire, 
F. Mid. eQ7]oofxm, 2 A. Mid. 
riQo^riv, I'gcoficci, egol}ii]v, {qov, 
ioiox^ai, tgofiEvog. (^ 96. 18, 

10.) 

The Present i'go^oci is not 
Attic. 
eggo) {EPJ2), go forth, go to 
perdition, F. fgg^oai, A. rf^- 
grjaa. (§ 96. 6, 10.) 

Note. From the simple Present 
comes the Homeric A. 3d pers. 
sing, 'i^o-t, in composition a-Tos^a-i, 
be caused to go forth, he hurried 
away. t§ 104. N. 6.) 

igvyydrb) or fgevyoy-ai^EPTrH), 
eructate, 2 A. rjgvyov. (§ 96. 
7, 18.) 

igv&alv(o, (EPTOII), make red, 
F. sgv&rjaw, A. '^gv&f)aa, 
Perf ^^gv&rixa. (§ 96. 7, 10.) 



§ 118.] 



ANOMALOUS VERBS. 



149 



i^vxM or fQVynra or tQVitnrno), 
impede ^ kerj), 2 A. (Epic) 
egvxnxov (as if from EPr- 
KAKJl), Inf. fgvxaxksiv. 
(§§ 96. 7, 10 : 89. N. 2.) 

iQiib} or siQvo), draw, fQvao), 
Perf. Pass. iXtJv^ai, A. Mid. 
tiQvatxfiTjv. (§ 95. N, 2.) 
From EIPTMT, Pres. Inf. 
HQVfiivai, Pres, Pass. Itif. 
d'^vad-ai or t'QV(}&aL, Imperf, 
Pass. 3d pers. sing, hqvto or 
f'QVTo, all Epic, 

l'^^o^«£, ^0, come, Imperf tiqxo- 
Hrjv. From EAETOIl (which 
see), F. Mid. iXevaofiiai, 2 A. 
rj/iV&ov commonly ^k&ov, 
tld^w, iX&oif.ii, i).&£, iX&slv, 
a&Mv, 2 P. iXitlv&a. 

EPSl, see Igofxai, toga). 

ESOEfL, Perf. Pass. Part. 
iad^TJixivog or ijad^rjfjevog, tj, ov, 
clothed, dressed. 

iad^iM, poetic ta&a) or |'5w, eat, 
Perf Pass, f'drjdeo/nat, A, 
Pass, '^dsad^riv, 2 Perf ednda 
(Epic), Pres. Pass, idniiai, 
as F. Active, shall eat. From 
fT>AriL (which see), 2 A. 
i'cpayov. (§§96. 10, 19, N. 8: 
98. N, 2 : 81 : 107. N. 1 : 
109. N, 1.) 

Homer has Iiif. Act. t^//,tvai 
(for l3i^Ev«<\ and Perf. Pass. 
I^«V«'. (§ 89. N. 1.) 
i'anb) [Enfi), used only in the 



ivglcfxbi {ETPP-),find, F, (vgri- 
OM, Perf cu^/jxa, Perf Pass. 
iVQri(.iui, A. Pass. iVQfdrfV, 
2 A. 8VQ0V, 2 A. Mid, (vqo/jtiv 
and, in writers not Attic, 
f t'^o«>7jv. (§§ 96. 8, 10 : 95. 
N. 2: 85. N. 2.) 

f^^^w, Aa^e, Perf Pass. TJx&TJiiai, 
F.Mid. ix&^aoiim, 2 A. Mid. 
TJx&6fi7]v. Pres. Pass, f;f,9^a- 
7'o,«at (later tx^ofxai), used 
chiefly in the compound 
anf^^oiyofiat, am hated. 
(§96. 10,7.) 

f^w (EXJl), have, Imperf. d- 
Xov, F. t'lw, 2 A. for/ov, ax<a, 
oxoItjv, oyfSiv, a^o>j', 2 A. Mid. 
iaxofAtjv, axojfiai, axolfxijv, 
axov, axio&ai, axofievog. 
(§§ 14. N. 5 : 80. N. 1 : 
87. N. 2,) From JSXEJI, 
2XHMh 2 A. Imperat. 
axk. (§ 117. N. 11.) 

The forms tr^fifoi, itr^nxa, i^^fi- 
fjt,a.i, lir;^'cS-t]v, which commonly are 
subjoined to ix'^t in strictness be- 
long to Iffxt^i which see. 

Note 1 . Homer has a 2 Perf. 
ixi-'xt (H. 2, 218), formed as fol- 
lows : 'x'^, OXn" (§ 96. 19), 
*';^*> ^X^X"-^ o)C'^xa contrary. -\o 
the rule i,^ 14. 3). 

Note 2. It would seem that the 
original form of 'i^a was SEXfl, 
whence 2 A. iVsj^av, syncopated 
IffX'*- V Compare t-ru. ) 



/wpgra^. 2d pers. plur. I'tfTie- Fj/^w (rarely sipdw), cook, hoil^ 
Ts (poetic), = EinSl, which F. kifji^aw, A. it^rjoa. (§ 96. 

10.) 
ESI, am, see eI^L 
'EJI, put on, see evvvixu 
'ESI, send, see Xki^l. 



see. (§ 96. 14.) 
tvads, see avddvw. 
Evdb), sleep, Imperf. rjvdov, F. 

ddrtaco. (§96. 10.) 



'ESI, place, cause to sit, set, A. slaa, Perf. Mid. ^pai sit, Pluperf. 
Mid. rturiv sat, F.Mid. uan^ni, A. Mid. dauuTjv. (§ 80. N. 1.) 
13* 



Ind. S. Tjjittt 



150 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 118. 

The Perfect and Pluperfect Middle are inflected as follows : 
Perfect Middle. 

D. ^fie&ov P. ^(itd^a 

Tixaif TjaToii ria&ov rjvxoci, 

SuBJ. (ofiai, used only in the compound xa^ri^on,, which 
see. 

Opt. oXiir^v, only in the compound ya^Tjficci. 

Imp. S, ^ao D. Jjo&ov P. ^a^s 

Inf. Tja&ai,. 

Part, ^fisvog, t), ov, (§ 93. N. 1.) 

Pluperfect Middle. 
S. ^(j,r]v D. ^fiE^ov P. ^fis&a 

rjto, TjOto Tjodrjv tjvto 

NoTK 1. For the forms ri<rTxi, nffro, see above (§ 107. N. I.) 
Note 2. For n^rai, n»T», the Ionic has tarat, 'iaro. (§ 91. N. 2.) 



mvTUh see Xri^i, 
Z. 

l^d(o, live, ^ijata, e'Cv'Jf^' £^»?xof, 
^rjaofim. (§ 116. N. 2.) 
From ZHMI, Imperat. ^ij&i 
(sometimes ^rj), Imperf i^^v. 
{§ 117. N. 8.) 

^tvyvv(ii {zrrji), yoke, F. 
^£v|w, A. I'^fvla, Perf Pass. 
t^tvyfiai, A. Pass, i^svx&rjv, 
2 A. Pass, f^vyrjv. {§ 96. 
18, 9.) 

i(avrv(j,L (ZOJI), gird, F. ^w'aw, 
A. I^waa, Perf l^wxa, Perf 
Pass. s^MOfiah A. Pass. eTw- 
a&vv (§§ 96. 9 : 107. N. 1 : 
109. N. 1.) 

H. 

rifiai, see 'EfL, place. 

^fil, say. I'he Imperfect riv, ^, 
is used chiefly in *he formulas 



7jv d eyu), said I; ^ d' og, 
said he. 

ri^vto, bend down, regular. 
Homer has Perf. 3d pars, 
sing. efAvr,fivxs (in composi- 
tion vne^vri^vHi) for i)uvxs. 
(§81.) 

O, 

0ANJI, see &ri^ay(a. 

■&ao(iai and d^rjsoum, admire, 
F. Mid. ^rji^aofiah A. Mid. 
i&TjaaixriV and i&Tji^adfifjV, 
(^96.18,10.) 

^ttTiTW (0A0JI), bury, S^difja), 
t&axpa, Tsd^afifxixi, 2 A. Pass 
im(pr]v. (§§96.2: 14. 3.) 

OAfPJl, am astonished, 2 A. 
txacpov, 2 Perf ri&rina (con- 
trary to§ 14. 3) synonymous 
with the Present. (§ 96. 18.) 

OASl, suckle, suck, A. Mid. 



§ 118.] 



ANOMALOUS VERBS. 



151 



i&r)aoefiT}v. Pres. Mid. Inf. 

■&rja&ai (contracted from 

^aw^at, §23. N. 1). 
■&iX<a, see i^dw. 
OEPJl, warniy F. Mid. &iQao- 

fiai, 2 A.'Pass. i&igrjv. Mid. 

-d^igofiai, warm myself. 

(§ 103. N. I.) 
^€0) {OETSl), run, F. Mid. 

■&Bvao(xai, &evaovfj,(xi. (§§ 96. 

N. 12: 114. N. 1.) 
^«w, put, see tl&rjfii. 
&7iioitai, see ^dofiai. 
-^lyyiivm ( OirSl), touch, F.Mid. 

■d^l^ofiai, 2 A. t&iyov, S^Lyttv, 

^lyi^v. (§ 96. 7.) 
^vii'axM (0ANSI), die, Perf. 

Ti&vrjxa am dead, 2 A. I'^w- 

>'ov, 2 Perf. le&vaoi, xs&valtjv, 

tidvad^i, TS&vdvaL, rsd^vsoig 

(Epic TE&rr](ag or xciu^yatoc), 

F. Mid. ^avoiifxai. From 

TEONHKJl, F. TE^yT/'lw, 

TE&v^^ofiai. (§§ 96. 17, 8, 

11: 91. N. 7: 99. N.) 
Ii^^t and t£w C^Ji), 56716?, Imperf. 

Perf. tixa, Perf. Pass, el^at, A ^ 

(not used in the sing, of the Ind.), to, sXtjv, i'&i or I'g, dvui, 

sXg, 2 A. Mid. t'fxTjv or s'lfjirjv, la^ai, ('ifxrjv, I'ao or ov, i'a^cii, 

tfitvog. (§§ 96. 1: 104. N. 2 : 80. N. 1: 95. N. 2: 117. 

N. 11, 13.) 

The Present and Imperfect, and the Second Aorist Active 

and Middle are inflected as follows : 



OOPSl, see ^qtaanta. 
OPEfPSl, see xqicfxa. 
OPEXSl, see rgexoi. 
■&Qvni(a {ePTOfJl), crumble, 

&QVifjb}, td^QVipu, 2 A. Pass. 

hqvifr^v. (§§96.2: 14 3.) 
^pw't/xQ) (OOPSi), leap, spring, 

2 A. i&oQov, F. Mid. &OQOV- 

f,m. (§ 96. 17, 18.) 
OT<TjJI, see jvcpco. 
■&V0), sacrifice, '&va(a, \&voa, 

ri^vica, eiv&T}V. (§§ 95. N. 

2: 14. N. 3.) 



Idgvco, locate, vata, van, vxa, 

vfiai, A. Pass. Idqfvd^riv and 

Idgvv&rjv. (§ 95. 5.) 
T/tSl, see ET/JIl. 
Uco, see 'ir,fxi. 
TC(o and l^aVw (^EJSl), seat, sit, 

F. law and Iw, A. IW, F.Mid. 

li;^m^ai. (§§ 96. 16, 4, 7, 

10: 102. N. 1.) 



i?jv or Xovv, F. ?jffa), A. riKfx, 
Pass. e^T^v or cI'^tjj', 2 A. -Jv 



Present Activ 


e. 




Present Passive and Mi 


Ind. S. %ri(u, 






. S. 


Xsfiac 


hi 
Xnoiiy) 








Xsaai, Xjj 
Xnai 


D. tsflBV 

Utov 






D. 


iifis&ov 
Xsa&ov 


tsTOV 








Xsa^ov 


P. Ufisv 
Uts 






P. 


UflS&CC 

Xea&s 


mai,{v), 


laat.{v) 




Xsviai 



152 



SuBJ. lo), like Ti&bj from 

jld-tjixi. 
Opt. ieiTjv, lik*j riSdrjv, 
Imp. S. is&i, Uto), D. I'e- 

TOVy IeT(OV, p. isTSy 

isTOjaav. 
Inf. livciu 
Part. Islg, uaa, iv. 

Imperfect Active. 
S. Xt]v, i7]g, Xfj, D. Xefisv, 
lerov, iiTrjv, P. Xe^sv, 
Xets, isaav. 

Second Aorist Active. 
Ind. S. 7iv 

V 

txov, uxov 

ET1]V, SLTTjV 

P. I'fxev, sifiev 

its, HTE 

I'aav, daav 



INFLECTION OF WORDS. ["^ 11-8. 

SuBj. iM^ai, like Tid^ojjKu. 



Opt. IsliJiTjVi like nd^dfiriV'. 

Imp. 8. tsao or Xov, Uad'aj 
D. lEa&oVf laG&ciav, P. Xeg^s, 
Ua&(aauv. 

Inf. Xsa&au 

Part. U^usvog, ri^ ov. 

Imperf. Passive and Middle. 
S. lEiarjv, Xego or Xov, uto, 
D. Isfii&ov, iE<}&ov, iia&ijv, 
P. U^E&a, Xsa&E, Xevto. 

Second Aorist Middle. 

too 
I'to, eIto 

D. "flE&OV, EtfXE&OV 

I'a&ov, eIoS^ov 

l'a&r}V, eXu&i^v 

P. e'(XE&a, EifxE&u 

I'o&E, Eiad^E 

evTo, eIvto 



SuBJ. w, inflected like the Subj. w^m/, inflected like the 
Present. Present. 

Opt. eXtiv, like the Pres- Opt. eX^^v, like the Present, 
ent. 

Imp. e&v, like the Present, Imp. eoo^ like the Present. 

Inf. Eivai. Inf. I'a&ai. 

Part. sXg, eIgu, ev. Part. EfxEvog, tj, ov. 

Note 1 . The Present Ind. 3d pers. plur. /«« is contracted froni SUtfi, 
(§ 117. N. 2.) 

Note 2. For Imperf. Act. "nv, there occurs a form 'luv, found only in 
composition. 

Note 3. Homer has F. 'iira,, A. i<ra, hxa. (§§ 95. N. 2 : 80. N. 3.) 

Note 4. The form 'iuvrat for Perf. Pass. 3d pers. plur. iTvrui, is obtained 
as follows 4 'EH, 'On, uf^ai,'ia>^a,,iuvTcci. (§§ 96. 19: 80. N. 3.) See 



§ 118.] 



ANOMALOUS VERBS. 



153' 



ixviofiai and Ixdtoi and t'xw, 
come, Perf. lyi^ai, F. Mid. 
t|0|Uaf, 2 A. Mid. ixoaT^v. 
(§ 96. 5, 10, 7.) 

NoTK. Homer has A. Act. Sd 
pers. plur. 7|ay for J^av. (§ 85. 
N. 2.) 

'JAIIMI CrAAJl), am propitious, 
Tmperat. Xladi or XXtid^i, 
Perf. (as Present) Subj. IXr]- 
xft), 0/>^. iXrixoifii, F. Mid. 
iXdaofiai, A. Mid. iXaad^rjV. 
Mid. iXuaxo^ai (rarely Ua'o- 
/^at), propitiate. (§§ 96. 8 : 
95. N. 2.) 

tnxu^ai {nTAJl, 'inTHMl), 
F. Mid. nT7jOoixai, 2 A. 1- 
jiTTjv, 2 A. Mid. imii^riv, =. 
netofiaL, which see. (§ 96. 1.) 

i'axoj, see el'aica). 

ioTTjfiL (2TAJI), place, cause to 
stand, F. axTfaw, A. taxriaa, 
Perf. ioTTjy.a stand, later 
Iffraxa ^<Z2;e placed, Pluperf. 
ItfTTjxfti' or sloTi^xEiv was 
standing, Perf Pass. ?ara~ 
fiai, A. Pass, iardd^rjv, 2 Perf 
taxaa stand, eorw, earairjv, 
i'aia&i, eardvai, eoTwg, 2 A. 

I'ffTT^V stood, OTW, GTCclrjV, GIT]- 

&t, OTTJvai, axdg. Mid. Xaia- 
[xai, cause myself to stand, 
stand, (§§96. I : 1 17 : 77. 
N. 2: 91. N. 7: 95. N. 2.) 

Note. The augment of the 

Perfect and Pluperfect, in this verb, 

takes the rough breathing, 
laj^txvdoj and loxdiaj, = ioxa, 

which see. (§ 96. 7, 10.) 
iaxv£Ofi(XL, = laxo^aL. (§ 96. 5, 

10.) 
Xoxfa (JxM)y take hold of, hold, 

restrain, F. o-;^»faty, Perf. 

BOXV^u, Perf. Pass, saxrjfiai, 

A. iaxs&riv, F. Mid. oxriao- 



fiai, 2 A. suxov. Mid. I'axo- 
fiat, restrain myself. (§§ 96. 
1, 10: 95.2.) 

IfL, see slfii, go. 
K. 

KAJJ2, see xaUv^ai. 

xa&e'Coixai {yard, eCof^ai), sit 
down, Imperf. ixa^eCotirjv, A. 
Pass, exa&sadrjv (later), 2 F. 
Mid. y.a&edovi^ai. (§§ 14. 1: 
82. N. 1.) 

xa&evdoj {xaid, su^w), sleep, 
Imperf xa&r,vdov or xcc&ev- 
dov or Exdd^ivdov, F. xad^tv- 
Sijaco. (§§ 14. 1 : 82. N. 2.) 

xd&rjixai {xaxd, ^jfj-ai), sit down, 
Subj. xd&Ufiai, Opt. y.a&oi^ 
pr^v, Imperat. xd&rjoo (later 
y.d&ov), Inf. xcc&rjo&ai, Part. 
xa&Tjfievog, Pluperf Mid. xa- 
■&rinr]v or ixa^^fiTjv sat down. 
(§§14. 1:82. N. 3.) 

xad^iQoii and xad-i^dvw [xard, 
tCb), I'Cdrw), seat, cause to sit 
down, sit down, Imperf ixd~ 
■&lQov, F. xaS^taca or xa&icj, 
A. ixd&iaa, Perf. xsxd&ixa, 
F. Mid. y.a&i^^aofiai. (§§ 14. 
1 : 82. N. 1.) 

xulvvpai, surpass, excel, Im- 
perf ixairv/.irjv, Perf. Pass. 
(from KA/lfL), xixaofxaL or 
xexudfiUL. (§ 107. N. 5.) 

xuLco or x«tu, 6z^;'w, A. (Epic) 
i'y.rja or Ixsa or ixuit, 2 A. 
Pass. fx«7?j/. From KATJl, 
F. xat'ffw, A. exavoa, Perf 
Pass, xixavfxai, A. Pass, e- 
x«^^7?j'. (§§ 96. 18 : 104 
N. 1.) 

xaXea (KAyJJl), call, F. xaXsoca 
or xfJ.w, A. ixdXioa, Perf. 
xexXrjxcc, Perf. Pass. xexXri^ai, 
Opt. xsxXfijxrjv, Inf. xexXtj- 



154 



INFLECTION OF WORDS. 



[§ 1J8. 



G&aiy Part. xsyXrjfuivog, A. 
Pass. iy,X^&^v. (§§ 96. 10, 
17: 95. N. 1: 91. 5: 102. 

N. 2.) 
tca^vm {KAMJl), labor, am 

weary, Perf. x£x^?;x«, 2 A. 

txufjLov, F. Mid. xajioviiai. 

(§96.5,17.)^^ 
xaidyvvfii [xaTcc, ayvvfii), break 

down, break to pieces, F. 

naid^a (also xaTea^ia, with 



the augment of the Aor. 
Ind.), A, xwTs'ala, Part, xa- 
red^ag with the augment of 
the Indicative, 2 Perf xwif- 
aya am broken to pieces, 2 
A. Pass. Kaxsdyrjv. 

Note. For Aor. Opt. 2d pers. 
sing, xard^aig, Hesiod (Op. et D. 
692) has xaad^as (see ayvvf/,t). 

xavd^aig, see the preceding. 
KATSl, see jccetw. 



xufiai (xficy, xda, KEIMl), lie down, recline, yecafxai, xEoifxijVf 
yelao, HHod^ai, xdfitvog, Imperf. sxdurjv, F. Mid. yslaofiau 
(§§96. 18: 117.) 

The Present and Imperfect are inflected as follows : 

Present. 
Ind. S. Hsl^ai D. xd^sd^ov 

xstaai, xuo&ov 

xstrccL xsia&ov 

Sub J. xEtaiiav, like Tvnxmfiai. 
Opt. xEolfiTjv, like rvmoifirjv. 
Imp. S. xhoo D. xsia&ov 

xsIg&co xsta&(av 

Inf. xtla&ai. 
Part, xsl^svog, rj, ov. 

Imperfect. 

8. ixEli.ir}V D. ixd^itdov 

sxtLOO tx(ia&ov 

txEiTO ixela&rjv ixsLVzo 

Note. The Present xia/ or xiliv has the signification of the Future, shatt 
lie down ; also, desire to lie down. 



P. x£ly,s&a 
xEia&s 



P. xeiG&s 
xdad-maav 



P. ixslfis&a 

£X£ia&S 



xiXoiuaL, command, F. Mid. xs~ 
Irioo^ai, A. Mid. iy.ilri(jd^i]Vy 
2 A. Mid. £y.Ey.X6firjy for exs- 
xsX6fzr)v. (§§ 96. 10 : 78. 
N. 2 : 26. 1.) 

xByTsca, prick, regular. From 
KENTJl, A. Inf. xsvoai. 
(§§96. 10: 12. N. 4.) 

xsgavvvfiL (poetic xsQccm), mix, 



F. 



XfQaGOi)) 



A. 



exeQaatx, 



Perf. 



XEXQaxn, Perf. Pass. xixQUfiai, 
or xExiqaofiai, A. Pass, e- 
KQix&riv or iy.EQaa&tjv. (§§ 96. 
9 : 26. 1 : 107. N. 1 : 109. 

N. 1.) 

For Aor. Act. Inf. Kt^»0'«h 

Homer has x^n^ai. 

xEgdalvo) {KEPJfL), gain, F. 

xEQ^arm (in writers not Attic 

xEQ^riata), A. ixigdava (not 



§ 118. 



ANOMALOUS VERIJS. 



155 



Attic ixs(jd)]aa), Perf. xsxi^- 
duxu or xexi^d)]xu. (§ 90. 
7, 10.) ^ 

xib), see xsiftai. 

x7}d(o (KAzJH), trouble, vex, 
worri/, F. Mid. xsxixdrioo^uai, 
A. Mid, Impcrat. 2d. pers. 
sing, xtt^ioai, 2 Perf. xixi]8a 
am anxious. Mid. x?J(5o,aa/, 
rtm anxious about, care for. 
(§§90. 18, 10, 11:95.N.2.) 

xi5vy]ui. Mid. xidt'a^ai, = oxi- 

xixX/joxb) {KAylJl), =i xaAi'o). 
(§90.17,1,8.) 

xiQWifii and xiuruco), :=: xsoav- 

vv^t. (§ 90l 10, 0.) 
x//«»co (JCIXJI), reach, Jind, F. 
Mid. xixn<JOfxai, A. Mid. ixi- 
X)]au}H}v, 2 A. exi/ov. From 
KfXHMI, 2 A. ixij^tjv, Subj. 
tii)^(xt (Epic x//c/w), Opt. XI- 
Xi^i-riv, Inf. xixijrui. Part, xi 
Xd<;, 2 A. Mid. Part. x/^>;- 
^^voq. (§§90.7, 10. 117. 
N. 17, 15.) 
xixQr]t.a {x^db}), lend, the rest 
tromxQato, which see. (§ 90. 

xlxo, go, Imperf. sxiov. 

xXdCb) {Kyi Am), clang, F. 
xXuy^bi^ A. txXay^a, 2 A. t- 
xXnyov, 2 Perf. xiv.lriyn OX xs- 
xlnyyu. From xfx>l>j'/(u, Pres. 
Part. xfxXriybiv. (§ 90. 4, 
0, 18, 11.) 

xXaIbi or x/«w, wcrp, F. xXwnjaw 
or xXaijooi. From KyiATJl, 
A. l'xAj><i/aa, F. Mid. xA«i'ao- 
ju«/, xXuvaovuai. (§ 90. 10 : 
114. N. I ) 

xAao), break, xXddM, ixXnan, xe- 
xZaxa, xixXuofiat, ixXaad-rir. 
From KAHMI, 2 A. Prt;-/. 



x;.«c. (§§ 95. N. 1 : 107. 
N. 1: 109.- N. I : 117.) 

xXvw, hear, Imperf. ixXvov sy- 
nonymous with the Aorist. 
From KyirMf, 2 K.Imperat. 
xXv&i and xixXv^i, 2 A. Mid. 
Part. xXvpsvog as adjective, 
celebrated, famous. (§§78. 
N. 2: 117. N. 10.) 

KM An., see xa,uvw. 

xoQtvrvfjL (KOPJI), satiate, F. 
xooiact), A. f'xoofaa, Perf. 
xix6qi]xu, Perf. Pass, xsxo^s- 
a,u«t (Ionic xfxoo>;/<at), A. 
Pass. exoQsu&jjv. (§§ 90. 
10, 9:95. N. 2: 107. N. 1: 
109. N. 1.) 

XQu^M ( KPAI'Il), cry, F. xow'^oj, 
F. Mid. xoa'lo.ur/^ 2 Perf. 
xixqaya synonymous with 
the Present. From AVi- 
KPAFJl), F. Mid. xfX5>«- 

^OfxriL, A. (later) f'x£'xor/|«. 

(§90.4,11.) 

Note. Forms without the con- 
necting vowel, 2 Perf. 1 st j)ers. 
plur. xixoa,yf/.iv, Iinpercit. 2cl pers. 
sing. Kiic^ax^i, 2 Pluperf. ! st. pers. 

plur. UU^ay/jiiy. (§ 91. N. 6.) 

X Q 8IJ cffxcd {y.(j fu uo) , KPIi\JlfMl)f 
suspend mi/ self, han^, Suhj. 
XQtfUouai, Opt. y.of(.jft'fiT]v Of 
X(jf{AOii.irir, F. Mid. XQf^}]ai)- 
f^ai. (§ 117.) 

xgepurvvpt (later xQeuaM), sus- 
pend, hang, F. -/.(jf^daco or 
x^f^w, A. cxoeijaaii, A. Pass. 
fy.ofjuda&rjv. (§§9(i9:95. 
N. 1: 102. N.2: 109. N.l.) 

XQijuvripi, xorjfxvauai, Imperf 

(yoriuruurjv, = preceding. 
(§ 90.0: 117.) 
xTuoy-ai, possess, Perf. Mid. xs- 
Kxripui and exxripai, Subj. xs- 



156 



INFLECTION OF WORDS. 



[§118. 



XT(o[iai, Opt. yEKT)'jij.ijV and 

XSXTMf^^]V (lOilic XSXTCw'iU ?;»'), 

Ijifin. H£XTi}a&aL, Part. y.e~ 
yxTjfisvo^, F. Mid. yi'^ao/xai, 
A. Mid. sy.TTjodfirjv, (§§ 76. 
N. 3:91. N. 3.) 
KTHVM and v.iivvvixi {KTENSI, 
KTAJl), kill, F. xTfj/w, A. 
txTsira, Perf. enxaxa and i- 
nr6v')]y.a, Perf Pass. sxTtxpai, 
A. Pass. iy.rd&Tjv (sometimes 
ey.Tui'&)]v), 2 A. EKxavov, 2 
Perf. suTova. From KTJIMf, 
2 A. 1'y.iai', XTW, y.x(ui]v, xtu- 
vui, nxdg, 2 A* Mid. iy:Ta^n]r, 
Hxdad^ai, y.xufiH'oc. ('>^§ 90. 
5, 19, 18, 16, 9, 13: 117. 
N. 10.) 

Homer has also F. Kravia, xrei' 

KTIIi, KTIMf, build, 2 A. 
Mid. Part. y.xl^ivog, r], ov, 
built. (§§ 117. N. 14.) 

xxvnsco {Km III), make noise, 
thunder, }]G(x), rjaa, tjna, rjfiai, 
ri&r]V, 2 A. I'xxvnov. (§ 96. 
10.) 

nvvib) (KTJl), kiss, F. yvooy, 
A. syvaa. The compound 
7iQO(Jxvi>siO, -prostrate myself, 
adore, is generally regular, 
as F. TXQOoy.vinjOM. (§§ 96. 
5, 10: 95. N. 1.) 

KVM or yvsco or xvi'ayM, con- 
ceive, to be pregnant, F. 
y.v^aw, A. iavrjoa, A. Mid. 
iy.vr}a(Xfirj7', poetic ixvadixijv. 
(§ 96. 10, 8.) 
^. 

AABSly see Xafiijdvo). 

layxdvia (ylAXJl), receive by 
lot, obtain, F. Mid. A?;|o^«t 
(Ionic Xd^oixm), 2 A. I'Aa/fov, 
Perf. «rA7j;^« and XiXoyxa. 



{%^ 96. 7, 18, 19, 6 : 76. 

N. 1.) 
ylAOSl, see XavS^dvco. 
ylAKSl, see Idanw. 
Xa^^dvta {AABSl), receive, fake, 

Perf. iiXi]cpa, Perf. Pass. tX^ 

Xrifx^ai, A. Pass. sXijcp&Tjv, F. 

Mid. Xj]ipofiai, 2 A. iXa^ov, 

2 A. Mid. .•;.w,5o>7;J^ (§§ 96. 

7, 18: 76. N. !.) 

From AAMBH, the Ionic lias 
Perf. Pass. kiXcef^/jcxi, A. Pass. 
fXdf^(p^y]v, F. jMid. Xiif/.-ypo/xcn. It 
has also Perf. XiXccBnxx. (§§ 96. 
G, 10: 107. N. 4.) 

Xca'Oura) {yLlOJl, Xi]&m), am 
hid, escape notice, Perf Pass. 
XtXi]a}iUL (in Homer XeXa- 
irf.mL), F. Mid. Xi)ao{jaL, 2 A. 
iXoc&ov, 2 Perf Xa7]&a, 2 A. 
Mid. iXa^i^np: Mid. Aai^^a- 
ro^ai (sometimes Xij&ofiai), 
forget. (§ 96. 7, 18.) 

Xduyo) (AAKJl), talk, gabble, 
A. fXaxTjaa, F. Mid. Awx^Jao- 
fAcxi, 2 A. iXny.ov, 2 Perf ;.f- 
Aux« (Ionic XeXrjya), 2 A. Mid. 
(Epic) Xday.o^Tiv. (§§ 96. 
14, 10 : 78. N. 2. ) 

/lai'w, tlofuov or yjXocvov, Xavaw, 
tXuvau, used only in the 
compound (y.itoXnvM, which 
see. (§ 78. N. 1.) 

J AX SI, see Xayxdvo). 

Xiyo), collect, I&1, J«, Perf. ft2o- 
;j^rt, Perf Pass. Hliy^iai, 2 A. 
Pass. fl£>/,r. (§§ 76. N. 1 : 
98. N. 2.) yiiyM, say, is 
regular. 

Note. Forms without the con- 
necting vowel, 2 A. Mid. Ix'iyf/.nv, 
3d pers. sing. Xixra, for iXtyo/^m, 
ixiyi-ro. (§§ 92. N. 4: 7.) 

AEXSl, cause to lie doivn, |w, |of, 
A. Mid. eXi^ujxrjV lay doivn, 



§11S.] 



ANOMALOL'S VLRUS. 



m 



Impcrat. (in Ilomcr) UiiOy 
Inf. U^aa&ai, 2 A. Mid. 
iXeyfiTiv lay down, 3d pers. 
sing. AfxTo, Lnpcrat. U^o. 
(§§S8. N. 3: 92. N. 4: a 
1 : 7.) 

ytJflSJl, see la^i^iura). 

hid^ara^ or bjv^tu, f^/zsc /o y})?'- 
,i'-(Y, F. ;i/;.;o;, 2 A. (I'^pic) 
Uhf.dor, 2 A. Mid. (l!^pic) 
Xf).aff6ft>p'. (§§ OG. 7: 78. 
N. 2 ) See lllso Invdario. 

Itiyio), Ionic, = Xuaxb), wliich 
see. 

yf//XJl, see XuyxuiM. 

luvot (old Ao'w, Aoiw), 7f'rt.N/(^ 
bathe, XovuM, tlovau, Xilovxu, 
Xf'Xovfini. Mid. Xovo^ni, com- 
monly Xoi\uai, wash mysclfy 
bathe. (§90. 18, 10.) 

The Present and Imper- 
fect commonly drop the con- 
necting vowels o and f. 
E. g. Pres. Xovfiiv for Aovo- 
/ufv, Xoviai for Xovstui, Xovp- 
Tat for Aoi;ovT«<, Xovo&ul lor 
Xovsa^ai, Imperf. I'Aoi/v for 
I'Aouoj', (Xovto for fAoi'fro. 

>lwt), /oo5f, 5o/l'C, Xvo(o, UAJon, 
XiXvxa, XsXv^uai, sXv&r^i'. (^95. 
N. 2.) 

From ATM I, 2 A. Mid. (Epic) 
3d pers. sing. Ayra as Passive. — 
For the Perf. Pass. Opt. 3d pers. 
sing. XtXvTo, see above (§^1.,N. 
4.) 

M. 

IMA on, see fiav&dvb). 

(.latfido}, see ^«'a). 

f.tuiojjai, (/.luoj), feel, touch, 
handle, F. Mid. (xdoofim, A. 
Mid. iuaadutjv. (§§96. 18: 
95. N. 1.) 

MAKSl, see ^r^-Aao^at. 

fxav&dv(o {HIAOfl), learn, un- 
14 



dcr stand, Perf ^efiuSrjy.a, 
F. Mid. fja&t'jao^ai, 2 A. 
i^u&ov, 2 F. Doric ^ccdev^iaL 
contracted from aa&eofiai. 
(§§9(3. 7, 10: 114. N. 2: 
23. N. 1.) 

^lUfJVUfittl, fight, Opt. ^UQVCiL- 

py]v or pucjrolyi]v, Imperf. 
t^iagvuf^r^v, inflected like 
'iarixi.iaL. 
^ixfjTiTc,) {MAPIin.), take hold 
of, seize, F. ydoipo), A. 
I'lAUfJkpa, 2 A. k^aqnov (also 

i^unov, without tlie q), 2 
Perf piiiaqna. (§ 90. 2.) 
pdxopuL (Ionic yuyjopiii), fight, 
combat, Perf. Mid. fufpuyi]- 
^ai, F. Mid. ^tax^oofjai (Epic 
f.ux/t]ao^ui), A. Mid. tpayj- 
ouujp', 2 F. Mid. ^ayovf^ai. 
(§'§90.10: 95. N. 2: 114. 
N. 2.) 



^aw 



xw and 



ftaipata, 



m, desire. 



eager, strive, feel a strong 
impulse, 2 Perf. iiipiaa sy- 
nonymous with the Present. 
Mid. puoj.iai, desire, seek, 
Imperat. /juho, Inf {.lajod-UL. 
(§§9G. N. 2: 110. N. 7.) 

The 2 Perf. ftXfjbrta. is inflected, 
as far as it goes, lilce ^\^a.a. (§ 91. 
N.7.) 

^laf^vay.o) {ue&vo)), make drunk, 
intoxicate, F. uEdvoco, A. 
f\ui&vau, A. Pass, i^t&vod^riv. 
Mid. fit^vaxofiai, am intoxi- 
cated. (§§ 90. 8 : 95. N. 1.) 

ixsdvb), am intoxicated, equiva- 
lent to the Middle of the 
preceding. 

MEIPSl{MEPn), divide, share, 
Perf. Pass. 3d pers. sing. 
upugraL it is fated, Part. 
Huccgfiivog fated, destined, 



153 



INFLECTION OF WORDS. 



[§ 118. 



Pluperf. Pass. 3d pers. sing. 
H^iaQTo it was fated, 2 A, 
£}ifioQov I obtained, 2 Perf. 
£(j,{xo(ja have obtained. Mid. 
IxslQo^iaiy receive a share, 
obtain. (§§96. 18, 19: 76. 
N. 1 : 79. N. 3.) 

The augment n o? the Perf. 
and Pluperf. Pass, takes the rough 
breathing. 

The iovvns fi.i/j!.o^yt~ai, /u.i/u.o^fAiva{ 
are sometimes used for i/'^a^ra/, 
ilfjt,a^f^ivo;. {i< 96. 13.) 

^illix), am about lo be or do any 

thing, shall, F. /as'/Iijooj, A. 

e^ah^au. (§ 90. 10.) 
/is'Aw, am a concern tu, F. fit- 

h]aM, A. luekijaa, 2 Perf. 

(Epic) ^5>i^Au. (§ 96. 10, 

IS.) 

The epic poets have Perf. Pass. 
3d pers. sing. //.i/xlikiTcti for fttfti- 
XtTxi. (§ 26. N.) 



y,EV(0 



and 



IJtfi 



j'co, remain. 



F. 



^svca, A. e/^8iva, Perf. Ms^^g- 
y;j;<«. (§§96. 1, 10:26. 1.) 

MENU (not to be confounded 
with the preceding), intend, 
purpose, 2 Perf. ^ifiova sy- 
nonymous with the Present. 
(§ 96. 19.) 

firjxdoi^ai, (MAKSI), bleat, 2 A. 
ifKxxov, 2 Perf. asfirjxa. 
From fASf^tjHM, Iraperf. f^6- 
^rjyov. (§96. 18, 10, 11.) 

pialvM, stain, regular. Homer 
(II. 4, 146) has A. Pass. 3d 
pers. plur. ^idv&rjv for fxlav- 
'&fv for f^jLLCivd-r^oav. (§ 92. 
N. 1.) 

fiiyvvfiL and firayo) {MtrJl), 
mix, F. /^/|o}, A. i'fii^a, Perf. 
Pass, fi^fii/fiai, A. Pass. 
i/ilX&TjV, 2 A. Pass. efxlyTji'. 
(§ 96. 9, 14.) 



Note. Form without the con- 
necting vowel 2 A. Mid. 3d pers. 
sing. ty^iKTO or fciuro for If/.tyira, 
(§§ 91. N. 4: 7.) 

jAipvrjaxfa i^MNASl), cavse to 
remember, remind, F. fxvi^aWf 
A. sj.ivi]aa, Perf. Mid. ^e'^uvtj- 
^at remember, Subj. fusfivm- 
fiai, Opt, ^Sfirfifjriv or ufixro}' 
(.irjp or psfivol).i7]v (Ionic 
/.iffirsco/uriv). Imp. f^isfin^oo, 
ii^J- }tfij.rrja&rxi, Part. fj.siurrj-~ 
ftiroq, A. Pass. ffjr)j(f&rjv, 
3 F. f^^^rijaaaai, F. Mid. 
fiii^oofitti, A. Mid. £fxv7]adpi]v. 



Mid. 



fii-^iv7]ay.of.iai, 



remind 



myself, remember. (§§ 96. 
1,8: 91. N. 3: 109. N. I.) 

^lyiVbi, see jASVM. 

MNASl, see pipvrjaaoj. 

MOylfL, see ^kmuy.ca. 

^vado^ai {MTKSI), bellow, r^ao- 
fxai, tjadfxrjv, 2 A. Efxvaov, 
2 Perf. ^£>i;x«. (§ 96. 10.) 

N. 

vain) (NAO,), dwell, A. i'raaa 
caused to divell, placed, Perf. 
Pass. vh'aafi(y.t, A. Pass. sW- 
a5^;jj', F. Mid. rdaojuai, A. 
Mid. ivaadfiTiv. (§§ 96. 18 I 
95. N. 1 : 107. N. 1 : 109. 
N. 1.) 

vdauM, pack closely, stuff, F. 
I'd^m, A. IVa|«, Perf. Pass. 
vivaa^iu. (§ 96. N. 4.) 

NASI, see vaiM. 

vEfiM, distribute, F. vsfiw or 
rsfii^aM, A. tvEipa, Perf. ?/£y£- 
^?jxa, Perf. Pass, vevsfjrjjxai, 
A. Pass. irsfx-^&rjV or ivsfiE- 

■&7)v. (§§96. 10: 95. N. 2.) 

yfi'o) (NJETJI), swim, A. Evsvaa, 

Perf. vEvivy.a, F. Mid. vjwo- 



§118.] 



ANOMALOUS VERBS. 



159 



uai, vEvaovjiitti. (§§ 96. N. 
12: 114. N. 1.) 
fl^d) or rlmco (NIBJI), ivash, 

(§ 96. 2.) 
voim {NOJI), tJiinJc, ro7;(j&>, 

ivotjou, viroTjKa, vsv6i]^ui, 

ivo^&r,r. (^ 96. 10.) 

The Ionic has vutru, ivaxrot, &c. 

all from the simple Present. 
vvara^o), feel sleepy, rvara^a) 

and rvoTocaot), frvara^ix and 

ivvaraacA. (§ 96. N. 6.) 

|i;^£tt)and ^vgdm {ATPSl),sliave, 
regular. Mid. ^vQsofiai, do- 
(xai, commonly ^vgofiai, shave 
myself, shave. 
0. 

o^w (OJfl), emit an odor, have 
the smell of, smell, F. o^Tjaw 
(Ionic o^fffw), A. aC,i]aa, 2 
Perf. o8ai8a synonymous with 
the Present. (§§ 96. 4, 10 : 
95. N. 2.) 

ol'/w or ol'yvvfii, open, Imperf. 
ato'/ov, F. ot^M, A. I'w^a, Perf. 
i'laxocy Perf. Pass, ebjyfiai, A. 
Pass. iojxSrjv, 2 Perf w/w 
stand open. (^'^^ 96. 9 : 80. 
N. 3.) See also droi/M. 

The epic poets change the diph- 
thong M into u7, as a!<1<x for u^a. 

old a, see ET/ill, 

oldalvcj or oiddvco or oldico, 
stoell, F. old^oa, A. w5i;a«, 
Perf wdrjya. 

oVxo^at, depart, am gone, Perf. 
oi'x(oy.a (in Homer also w];^??- 
xa), Perf Pass. Mxrjfim, F. 
Mid. o«^»j(7o^«i. (§96. 10.) 

ol'w or oiw (both Epic), think, 
suppose, A. Pass. (o^d^rjV 
(Epic (^tjdrjv), F. Mid. oitj- 



oofini, A. Mid. oi'ladfjrjv 
(Epic). Mid. oXo{.iai or ot,uat 
(Epic oi'ofxai), synonymous 
with the Active, Imperf. 
ojo'uTjr or bljuT^v. (§§ 96. 10 : 
i09. N. 1.') 

OTSl, F. ot'cfw, A. ware (rare), 
Impcr. oios, F. Pass, ola&r^- 
ao^ai, = (jDt^w, which see. 
(§§ 88. N. 3 : 109. N. 1.) 

olnidalvw and oXiad^dvoi (^OAI- 
2:0 Si), slip, slide, F.oXia&)^a(o, 
A. mXlu&rjGu, Perf uXla&riy.af 
2 A. w'Atc/^oi'. (§ 96. 7, 10.) 

olli\ui {OJJl), destroy, cause 
to perish, F. oUum or oAw, 
A. wUaa, Perf oAwAcxo?, 2 
Perf ol(x)la have perished^ 
F. Mid. hlov(iai, 2 A. Mid. 
wkofAip'. Mid. ollviim, perish. 
(§§96.6, 10: 81.) 

Note. The poetic 2 A. Mid. 

Part. oXofjbivo; or evkefnyas has the 

force of an adjective, destructivCy 
fatal, pernicious, 
ofivvfxi [OMSI), siDcar, A. wixo- 

aa, Perf o^mfioy.a, Perf Pass. 

ofXM^oanai and o^M^ofiai, A. 

Pass. cofioSrjv, F. Mid. o^ov- 

^ai. (§§96. 9, 10: 95. N. 

1 : 107. N. I : 81.) 
ouogyrvjUL {OMOPTSl), wipe 

off, F. OllOQ^M, A. WflOQ^a, 

A. Mid. w^o^lfijUTjr. (§ 96. 

9.) 
ovlvrj^u ( ONAJl, ONIIMl), bene- 
ft, F. oj'Tytfw, A. wrtjoa, 2 A. 

Mid. Mva^r^v and cav^firjv. 

Mid. orlva/xai, derive henefity 

enjoy. (§§ 96. N. 2: 117. 

N. 15.) 
ONJIMI ( ONOJl, ONIl)y Pass. 

oro^ai (inflected like dldoftat 

from didM^t), blame, fnd 



160 



INFLECTION OF WORDS. 



[§1!8. 



fault with, insult, A. Pass. 
av6a&t]v, F. Mid. oroaofmi, 
A. Mid. ciovoaa/nip> and wva- 
^nv. (§§96. 10: 95. N. 1: 
109. N. 1 : 117.) 

The form olivitr^i (II. 24,241) 
stands for Pres. Pass. 2d per.s. 
plur. onar^i from ONH. 

OIlfL, Perf.Pass. M^i^m, A. Pass. 
cjq)&rjr, F. Mid. oipofiai, A. 
Mid. 6ip(t[ir]v (little used), 
2 Perf. ortbiTin (poetic), r= 
ogdw, which see. (§ 81.) 

oQaoi, see, Imperf. IwQaov {Ionic 
^Qwv), Perf. sMQuyM, Perf. 
Pass, tcogafiai. From EJJSl 
(which see), 2 A. tldov, I'dxo, 
idoifiL, ids, idslv, Idwv, 2 A. 
Mid. udojiiiv, I'doifiai, idolfirjV, 
idov, Idta&ai, idofifvog. From 
Oi7Ji(whichsee), Perf.Pass. 
(OfijjaL, A. Pass. (t}(p^r]r, F. 

^ Mid. Sipof^ai. (§ so. N. 3.) 
ogvv^L {OPJl), rouse, excite, F. 

oQua, A. MQua, Perf. Mid. 

oQWQSfiai, 2 Perf oQOjga have 

risen, 2 A. Mid. mqoiji^v. 

Mid. o()vv(x(XL, also ogo/xcct, 

ogiofxai, rouse mi/ self, arise. 

(§§ 96. 9, 10: 103. N. 1 : 

104. N. 6: 81.) 

Note. Forms without the con- 
necting vowel, 2 A. Mid. 3d pers. 
sing. u^To, Impernt. 2d pers. sing. 
o^tro and o^trio, Inf. e^3-m, Part. 
o^fAivos. (§§ 92. N. 4: 11.) 

oacpQaivo/uai, {02^1'PSl), smelly 
F. Mid. oa(fQriao^at, A. Mid. 
(a(jcpQ7]odfit]v (later), 2 A. 
Mid. (oacpQOfj^Tjv rarely (oocpoa- 
fiTjv. (§§ 96. 7, 10: 85. 
^N. 2.) 

ovgioj, mingo, Imperf. fovgfov, 
F. Mid. oio^aouai. (§ 80. 
N. 2) 



ovTmo, wound, regular. From 
OTTHMT, 2 A. oviav, Inf. 
(Epic) omdfiivaL or ovidfiev, 
2 A. Mid. Part, ovid^nog 
as Passive, luounded. (§ 117. 

^ N. 10, 17.) 

ocfdXw {Ofl>EylSl), owe, must, 
ought, F. o(f>Eih]0(x), A. w(fd~ 
h]aa. (§ 96. 18, 10.) 

The 2 A. u<pi\ov and o<ptXov, is, 
t, always expresses a wish, that I 
would\o God! (§ 217. N. 3, 4.) 

ocpXioKavai [0(I>AfL), incur, for- 
feit, F. 6(ph](joj, Perf b)ipXi]- 
YAt, 2 A. ^<flov. (§ 96. 8, 7, 
10.) 

n. 

IlAOSl, see ndaxca. 

Tiai^a*, play, jest, tnaiaa, ni- 
naioixai, fnala&rjv, F. Mid. 
nai^o^ai, nai^ov^ai. In later 
writers, inaiht, nEnaiyfiai, 
enalx&V^. (§§ 96. N. 6: 
114. N. 1.) 

naloi, strike, F. nalaoo and 
7iut7]aco, A. Inaura, Perf. tts- 
TiatyM, Perf. Pass. nsTrr/iafxai,, 
A. Pass, enrua&riv. (§§ 96. 
10: 107. N. 1: 109. N. 1.) 

Tiaa^w {nylOn, nENOJl), suf- 
fer, A. £7rr/(j« (not common), 
F. Mid. ndooum (rarely tttj- 
Guixai), 2 A. tnn&ov, 2 Perf 
ninovSa (rarely nsTirjda). 
(§§ 96. 6, 18, 19, N. 10: 
12. 5.) 

Note. The form «r«?r«<rS8 (Od. 
23, 53 , for ^rsTovS-are, is ob- 
tained as follows : nAGH, HO- 
©n, ^rsoroSflt, cT£5rs-<r&s (for titoS-- 
trSsi with the Passive termination 
ff^i, (§§ 96. 19: 10. 2.) ' 
nuTsofiftL (bAJI), eat, Perf. 
Pass, ninao'fxai, A. Mid. 



Uia] 



ANOMALOUS Vr.RRS. 



IGI 



inaad/xrfV. (§§ 95. N. 1 : 
107. N. 1.) 
IIAfl, Perf. Mid. nenauai, pos- 
sess, acquire, A. Mid. £>-i«- 

TiH&oi (nrOSl), persuade, nsl- 
tfw, tntiaa, nensixa, Ttsnsi- 
afim, f7iflj&r,v, 2 A. tnL^or, 
(poetic), 2 Perf. mnoi&a 
trust, 2 A. Mid. eni&ofirir. 
Mid. nd&ouai, trust, believe, 
obey. (§ 96. 18, N. 14.) 

Note. The form WtTi9-/u,tv 
stands for 2 Pluperf. 1st pers. plur. 
»T£cra;S£/^£». (§ 91. N, 6.) 

nfhi^M and tiekuoi, cause to 
approach, bririg near, ap- 
proach, come near, ne/.dab), 
IniXaoa, fnekdod-ip' and fTtlu- 
^jjv. From nyJHMI comes 
2 A. Mid. £'7rA7-(/;jv. (§§ 26. 
1: 117. N. 15.) 

nflm, revolve, move about, am, 
Imperf. 3d. pers. sing, tnls 
for £7Tf;.£. Mid. Tiiloixai sy- 
nonymous with the Active, 
Part. nXo^ivog used only in 
composition, Imperf. 2d 
pers. sing. tnUo Inhv thou 
art, 3d pers. sing. enXEto he 
is. (§§26. 1: 23. N. 1.) 

IIEN0JI, see nuGxw. 

ninoa&s, see tkxgxw. 

ne^db), pedo, F. Mid. nuQ^^ao- 
pai, 2 A. tnaQdov, 2 Perf. 
ninogdu. Mid. nsgdofiaL, sy- 
nonymous with the Active. 
(§96. 19, 10.) 

JtEQ^o), sack, niqaxa, ensQacc, 
2 A. ^Qa&ov, (§§ 96. 19 : 
26. 2.) 

Note. Homer has 2 A. Mid. 
Inf. TioS^en without the connecting 
vowel for ^io^ir^ah (§§ 92. N. 
4: 10. 2: 11.) 

14* 



■jxiauM, later rri/rro), hoil, di:nyf, 
F. Tiiijjio, A. tnnpiA, Perl. 



Pass. 



UUftl, 



A. Pass. 



£7rf>;^7;v. (§ 96. 2.) 

nsTarrvfii {nETA.Q.), expand, 
spread, F. mTdaw or ttjioj, 
A. insTaocc, Perf. Pass, tts- 
TTTccaai, A. Pass. i7tETua&r,v. 
(§§'96. 9: 95. N. 1: 102. 
N. 2: 109. N. 1 : 26. 1.) 

TtsTopru, jly, F. Mid. niTy](30~ 
jAdi, 2 A. inxoi-iriv (for inno- 
priv), njwuai, nzolf^rjv, tits- 
nd-ai, nrop^uog. (§§ 96. 10 : 
26. 1.) 

nETJl, see nlnrco. 

IIETOR, see nvv&droi^iaL. 

necpi'ov, see <PENJl. 

nri/rvuL {nAril), later Tijjjffw, 
j^z, fasten, F. tttj^w, A. I'7rr/|«, 
Perf. Pass, ninviynai, A. Pass. 
inrixd^r^v, 2 Perf. ninrf'/a 
stand fast, 2 A. Pass, (nd- 
yriv. (§96. IS, 9, 3.) 

niien., see ndaxw. 

niOESl {nfOSl\ obey, follow, 
trust, ni&j]GO} also nsni&rioo), 
inl&rjoa. (§96. 10, 11.) 

IirOfl, see nsL&a) and the pre- 
ceding. 

nlXvrini and niXvaco (ttsAww), 
Mid. nllvafxai, = niXd'^b), 
which see. (§96. 16, 6.) 

Ttl/j-nXr/ixt and m^nXdb) {nAASl), 
fill, F. nXrjob), A. tTiXriGu, 
Perf. mnXtjxa, Perf. Pass. 
ninXrfapni, A. Pass, t;!^?^- 
ff.^r/V, 2 A. Mid. inXrifiriV, 
Opt. nXdfirjv, Imperat. nXri- 
ao. Part. nXrjufvoc. (§§ 96. 
1 : 107. N. i : 109. N. 1 : 
117. N. 15.) 

The letter ft, in the first sylla. 
ble, is dropped when, in composition, 



162 



INFLECTION OF WORDS. 



[§ 118. 



another y, comes to stand before the 
first syllable of this verb ; as i^- 
crlrXn/u.!, not iju.-9rtfx,TKnjut. The 
same is observed of ^i/nTron/iM. 
jiiiJ.7T^rj(.nQ.nd nifinQao) {UPASl)y 
bvrn, F. 7rQ7]oo), A. tnor^oa, 
Perf, Pass. ninQruy^at, A. 
Pass. f7igr,(sdi]v. (§§ 9G. 1 : 
107. N. 1 : 109. N.' 1.) 

For the omission of ^, in com- 
position, see Tif^-TTkrifti. 

nlvco {llISl), drink, 2 A. ymov, 
2 F. Mid. niov^im (later). 
Pass. 7itoiJ.ai, as F. Active, 
shall drink. From nOJl, 
Perf. ninbixa, Perf. Pass. 
nanofxac, A. Pass. d7io&i]v. 
From /7/ikf/, 2 A. Imperat. 
2d pers. sing. nu^i. (§§ 96. 
5: 114. N. 2: 95 N. 2: 
117. N. 14.) 

Tiintaxoi {niSl), cause to drink, 
give to drink, F. nlaw, A. 
Ima«. (§96. 1,8.) 

fiLTTodaKca {nsQao)), sell, Perf. 
nsTiQaza, Perf Pass. ntTtqa- 
fxai, A. Pass. mQiid^riv, 3 F. 
nsTiQauofiai. (§§ 96. 1, 8 : 
26. 1.) 

nimo) (nETfL), fall, A. "intoa 
(little used), Perf nsTtzMxa, 
2 A. I'.uHiov (Doric i'mTov), 
2 Perf Par^. TifTrrfwc, ?!£- 
mrjCiig, TUTcxwg, 2 F. Mid. ns- 
aov^ai. (§§ 96. 1, 19, 17, 
15: 114. N. 2.) 

niiraw and TiiTtrjfii {lIETASl), 
z=: neTfiPvvfii, which see. 
(§96. 16,6: 117.) 

71 LTV EM {nErll), = 71 UtW, which 

see. (§ 96. 16, 5, 10.) 
TTicpday.oj or ni(pavoi<(i) {<t>AJl), 
sho7D, make knoion, communi- 
cate. (§96.1,8.) 
IIJSl, see nlvm, ninlajcco. 



IlylArSl, see nXa'Cw, nlrjaooi. 

nXoc'Cw (iJylArsi), cause to wan- 
der, F. nlay'^M, A. inkay^ix, 
A. Pass. inldyxd^Tiv. Mid. 
TtXd^ofxai, wander about, rove. 
(§96.3,6.) 

ttAsw {nylETSl), sail, sTtksvaoiy 
Perf. nsnXfvxa, Perf Pass. 
nmAsvafxai, A. Pass. eTiAfiv- 
t/^Tjr, F. Mid. TiXsvaoixocLy 
nXsvaovfiai. (§§ 96. N. 12 : 
107. N. 1: 114. N. 1.) 

nXi^aoa (iJAArSl), rarely nXi^- 
yvv^i, strike, F. nXri^M, A. 
E7iXi]la, Perf. Pass. ninXri- 
yfiai, 2 A. ninXriyov (Epic), 
2 Perf ninXriya, 2 A. Pass. 
inXriyriv (in composition c- 
7r;i«V7jr), 2 A. Mid. (Epic) 
nsnXrjyo^urjv. (§§ 96. 18, 3, 
9: 78. N. 2.) 

;r/,&)w (ttAsco), w'aw, &C. 2 A. 
(from IIASIMI) enXwv, Part. 
TiXwg, G. nXMVTog, Ionic, = 
TiXib), which see. (§§ 96. 
19: 117. N. 14.) 

nvsb) (JINETJI, nNTJl), blow, 
breathe, A. snvsvoa, Perf. 
ntTivsvxa, Perf. Pass, ninvsv- 
aficci, A. Pass. envBvad-t]v, F. 
Mid, nvEvaofzai, nvsvaov^ai. 
(§§ 96. N. 12 : 107. N. 1 : 
109. N. 1 : 114. N. 1.) 

Poetic forms, Perf. Pass, vvrw 
y.at, am prudent, animated, intelli- 
gent, A. Pass. 3d pers. sing, lyrvvv^yi 
used in the compound u(je,-ir\6v^ny 
from avaTvEiw, 2 A. Mid. (from 
nNTMl) Wvvfinv. (§§ 96. 6: 
117. N. 15.) 
Tco&sb), long for, desire, miss, 
no&sob) and nodtjoo), ino&i]- 
aa, 7is7t6&7]xcc, nsno&rjfxai, 
ino&eo&vr^ (§§ 95. JN. 2 : 

109. N. 1.) 



<^ lis.] 



ANOMALOUS VERBS. 



laa 



nOPSl, give, 2 A. i'nooor, Perf. 
Pass. 3d. pers. sing. ntJtQO)- 
Tfu it has been decreed by 
fate^ Part, mnqbifiivog des- 
tined. (§ 96. 17.) 

IlOfL, see nlvM. 

nPAfl, see nifingr^/it. 

IIPIAMAT, buy, 2 A. Mid. 
(JiQidfirjV, nqiwixni, ngialfirjV, 
ngiaao or ngio), TTQiaa&ut, 
nQifi^terog. (§117. N. 9.) 

npo-a, see nopji. 

m'AJl, see Xnjafini, nri]aa(o. 

jcrt](j<jo), crouch, F. ttttj'Io), A. 
inrt,^ci, Perf. trnqxa. From 
llTASl comes 2 Perf. Part. 
TTfjTTT^wV. From HTHMI, 2 
A. 3d person dual tittj- 
T»jv, in composition y.aia- 
ninrr,v. (§§ 96. 3 : 99. N. : 
117. 12.) 

mOSl, see Ti/TTTf). 

nvrd^dro^uai {nTOfl), poetic 
nev&ojuat, inquire, Perf. Mid. 
ninvoficii, F, Mid. ntvaofxai, 
2 A. Mid. inva6firir. (§ 96. 
18, 7.) 

P. 

'PArily see gty/vvfu. 

Qttli'b), sprinkle, regular. From 
'PAJJl, A. Imperat. 2d pers. 
plur. (jMc/aaTf, Perf. Pass. 3d 
pers. plur. fooddarai, Epic. 
(§§ 104. N.4: 91. N. 2.) 

^£^w or egdb) or EPrSl, F. ^ttj^, 
A. f^'os^u (Epic also e^|a), 
2 Perf. £oo/a, 2 Pluperf. iwQ- 
ysiv. (§80. N. 2, 3. 

gita (PETSl, 'PTJl), fiow, A. 
toQivaa, Perf. iQgvr,y.a, F. 
Mid. gfvao}.taL or qviquopai, 
2 A. Pass. fooi^Tjr. (§ 96. 18, 
10, N. 12.)'' 

'PEP-, Perf nQr,iin, Perf. Pass. 



fXnr,fxai, A. Pass. f(>6i'dr,v 
or f'qqi&rfr (not Attic f/^^/;'- 
i?^?;?', fiQe^riv), 3 F. ft^?y'ao- 
^tti, = ETnSl, which see. 
(§§ 76. N. 1 : 95. N. 2.) 
griyrCfiL (PAFSl), later ^ijaaw, 
^crtr, 6Mr5^, F. ^/;|w, A. I'^'^tj- 
|a, 2 Perf tqqwya am torn 
to pieces, 2 A. Pass, igquyr^v. 
(§ 96. 18, 9, 3, 19.) 

qVylit) (Pirn), shudder, qiyr,0(a, 
&c. 2 Perf iqqlya synony- 
mous with the Present. 
(^96. 10.) 

'post, see gwvi'Vfji. 

'prSl, see qiw,Jlow. 

'^PSllfL, see qriyrv^i. 

QwrrvfiL (POSl), strengthen, F. 
Qowo), A. tqqbjaa, Perf. igqw- 
y.a, Perf. Pass, iggaififu, Imp. 
iootooofarewfll, &C. A. Pass. 
f66ow^riv. (§§ 96. 9 : 109 
N' 1.) 

^. 

anXnl'ib) {2'AJIIfrSl), sound a 
trumpet, F. oidnly^oi, later 
oaXnlao), A ladlniy'^a, later 
«(mA7rm«. (§ 96. 6, N. 6.) 

(j«ow (rarely adu)), save, oum- 
00), &LC. From ^ASIMI 
comes Imperf Act. 3d pers. 
sing. (Epic) adb). (§§ 96. 
10- 78. N. 3: 117.) 

ai3fvvvfji. {2BEfL), extinguish^ 
F. a(3£OM, A. i'aljfarx, Perf. 
Pass. eoi3iaix(ti, A. Pass, io^s- 
a^r/v. From 2BHMT, 2 A. 
£(7^7jr, o^flTjV, a/Srivai. (§§ 96. 
9: 95. N.2: 107. N. 1: 109. 
N. 1.) 

osvbi {2:rJl), shake, move, agi- 
tate, F. aevoM, A. tootvtt, 
Perf. Pass, toavfiai, Pluperf. 
Pass, eaavpr^r, A. Pass, ia^ 



164 



INFLECTION OF WORDS. 



av&7jv sometimes iovd^r^v. 
From ^TMT, 2 A. Mid. 
eaavfxrjv and aifxr^v. Mid. 
atvoficei and, without the 
connecting voweJ, asvuai. 
(§§96. 18: 104. N. 1:78. 
N. 3 : 79. N. 3.) 

GKfddvvvfAt {2KE/1ASI), scatter, 
disperse, spread, F. axiddata 
or ffjff^oJ, A. eay.edccaa, Perf. 
eaueday^a, Perf. Pass, say.sda- 
Ofiat, A. Pass, iay.sddod-ip'. 
(§§96.9: 102. N. 2: 107. 
N. 1: 109. N. 1.) 

axElXo} ( 2KEAJI, ZKAAfL ) ,dry, 
cause to wither, F. omlw, 
A. uiy.i]hi, Perf. t(jxXi]y.a am 
dried up, F. Mid. azlrioofioa. 
From 2'KyJIIMr, 2 A. g'axAr/r, 
axX(xli]v, axXtjvai. Mid. orxfAAo- 
^tat, wither. (§96.6,17,18.) 

ayldvi^^a {^KE/IAn.), Mid. axt- 
dva^ai, = (JTHiddrvvfii, which 
see. (§96.6, 16.) 

aovpiu {aevm), Imp. 2d. pers. 
sing, aovuo, 2 A. Pass. 3d 
pers. sing, taaova, in compo- 
sition dniaoova (Laconic) 
he is gone, he is dead, =i 
asvpru from oevu, which see. 
(§ 96. N. 15.) 

aob), see aw^w. 

anea&ai, see I'tiw. 

2:tAI1, see 'totrifiL. 

arsQso} or Gr(glay.(a {2TEPSI), 
deprive, bereave, F. aiSQi'iaM, 
A. cffTc'oTjffw, Perf. iaTSQtjxa, 
Perf. Pass. eartQrjfxai, A. 
Pass. ioTfgij&rjv, 2 A. Pass. 
P«r^. ffTf^jffcc (poetic). Pass. 
arsQeoixai or oTsgopai. (§ 96. 
8,10.) 

GTogivvvpi or arogvvfzi or attowv- 
vV|Ui {2T0PSI), strew, spread, 
F. GTogeao}, orgcaooj, A. 6ffT0- 



[§ns. 

^£aoj, taTgo)Gcc, Perf. Pass. 

tOTgto^ai, A. Pass, iarogi^ 

a&7p', ioTgw&tjv. (§§96.10, 

9,17:95. xN. 1: 109. N. 1.) 
an^/f'w {STTrSl), fear, hate, 

uivyriGM, &c. 2 A. I'trTf/oj'. 

Aor. also I'c/Ti/la I terrijied. 

(§ 96. 10.) 
o;f«t»^, see £^w, Ta^w. 
aw'i'w (Epic orow), Sflfve, (jwaw, 

ftfwc/a, aiacjxa, GSGcoGfiat, 

iawdriv. 
(jo'a) ((jaw ),rr:preceding. (§116. 

T. 

TAEfL, see TAJl, take. 

TAyiASl, bear, suffer, venture, 
A. erdXfxcsu, Perf. thXrjTia, 2 
Perf.- xixXaa, Opt. xexXaif^v, 
Imp. xhXa&t, Irijin. TsiXdvai. 
From TAHMI, 2 A. M;;?', 
tAw, rXnlr\v, tXtj&i, rXrjvni,, 
rXdg. (§§ 26. 1 : 95. N. 2 : 
91. N. 7: 117. 12.) 

Tufxi'M, F. Tallica, Ionic, z=. ts- 

7V//2, TAEJl, take, Imperat. 

2d pers. sing. ttJ (contracted 

from Ta'e) take thou, 2 A. 

J*«r;. TtxayMv, Epic. (§§ 23. 

N. 1 : 78. N. 2 ) 
Tsivo) {tENJI, TASl), stretch, 

extend, F. xivw, A. ixsiva, 

Perf. xhay.a, Perf. Pass. t€t«- 

|itat, A. Pass. exd&Tjv. (§ 96. 

19, 5, 18.) 
TEKJl, see t/xtw. 
T£|U>'w (rarely t£|Uw), cut, F. t£- 

iuaj, Perf. xixprjxa, Perf Pass. 

x£Tpt]/iini, A. Pass. expi]d^r}r,2 

A. ixs^ov and sxafiov, 2 A. M. 

ixafi6}irjv. (§96.5,17,19.) 
rixpov or h^x^ov, I found, met 

with, a defective 2 A. Act 

(§ 78. N. 2.) 



§113.] 



ANOMALOUS VERBS. 



165 



TETXSl, see n/^arw. 

T?5, see TAP., take. 

TIEJl, Perf. Part, iinr^wg af- 
flicted, Perf. Mid. Tsrh^^ui, 
am afflicted, am sorrowful. 
(§§99. N.) 

tld^rt^i (rarely Ti&fu, S-io)), 
put, place, F. d^riaia, A. I^tj- 
xa, Perf. Te&fiy.a, Perf. Pass. 
rs&£i^ai, A. Pass. aTed^r,v, A. 
Mid. e&r,x(/.firjv (not Attic), 
2 A. £^7;r, -^(0, i^f/z/r, ^iit 

or ^£?, ^ilroci, d^fk, 2 A. 
Mid. f^.>7jr. (§§ 96. 1 : 
104. N. 2: 95. N. 2, 4 : 14. 
3, N.3: 117. N. 11, 13.) 

t/xtw {TEKP.), bring forth, F. 
te'Sco, a. Pass, (later) hixdriv, 
F. Mid. xilouai, 2 A. I Tf xor, 2 
Perf. T£Toxa, 2 F. Mid. xey.ov- 
fiai, 2 A. Mid. (poetic) irfxo- 
fxr,v. (§§96. N.3: 114. N. 2.) 

riv(o, Tivv/ui, jlrvi'^i, = t/w, hon- 
or, which is regular. (§ 96. 
5,9.) 

TLxqdw (tPJJI), bore, F. tqtJ- 
(jw, A. iT^Tjaof, Perf. rerQrjya, 
Per. Pas. xiiori^m. (§ 96. 1.) 

TtT^wVxco {to PP.), wound, F. 
T^wffoj, A. ijQwou, Perf. re'- 
tQCOxn, Perf. Pass. xiTgo^yai, 

A. Pass. It^oj5-7jv. (§ 96. 
17, 1, 8.) 

TiTvaxofdUL (tTKP), prepare, 
take aim at, 2 A. Tervxov, 
2 A. Mid. TfTvy.ofjTjv, Epic. 
(§§96. 1, 14: 78. N. 2.) 

TAAP, see TAylAP. 

TMEP, T3IAP, see tc^jw. 

Topso) {to PSl), pierce, TogrjOM, 
&LC. 2 A. 8T0Q0V. (^ 96. 10.) 

TOPP, see TiT^w'gxw, rooeo). 

Toaaai, loaanc, ^=: tv/hv, iv^tur, 
from Tvyx^vbi, which see. 



TPAl'P, see r^&;;'w. 

TPAP-, see TtT(j<x(o. 

rgscfo) {OPEfl'P), nourish,feed, 
support, F. xf-Qsi^o), A. fi9^^f- 
i^rt, Perf. TSTQoqu, Perf. Pass. 
it&Quiui.iai, A. Pass. £5^^£- 
(jp5^r/v, 2 A. tT(jucfov (Epic), 

2 A. Pass. iioi'nfi)v. (§§ 14. 

3 : 96. 19 : 107. N. 6.) 
T^f>ft) {OPEXPS), run, A. £,9^^£- 

|«, F. Mid. ,^4;ttoa«i. From 
/JPAMP. or zIPEMP (which 
see) corae Perf 6idgapr,y.cc, 
Perf. Pass. dtdQUf^rifiui, 2 A. 
(dQctf.ior, 2 Perf dedgoixoi 
(Epic), F. Mid, doa.uoi\uai. 

(§ 14. 3.) 

TQwyio {tpaFP), eat,gnaiD, F. 
Mid. TQM^ij^uL, 2 A. sTQayov, 
(§ 96. 19. 

xvyxt'iv oj {ttXP), happen, at- 
tain, A. iTixr,au (Epic), Perf. 
T£Ti'^rjx«, Perf Mid. (poetic) 
TtTvy fxni or TSTsv/fiui, F, Mid. 
T(V$ofj,ai, 2 A. ITVXOV' (§ 96. 
7, 10, 18.) 

TVTTTto (tTUP), strike, F. ryy/w 
commonly TvnTr,(jco, A.'dTvipay 
Perf TtTvcpot, 2 Perf t£ti.',«- 
^/«i commonly jixvnjriyai,A. 
Pass, exvcpf^tp', 2 A. Pass. 
£zr'7T;jv. (§ 96. 2, 10.) 

r. 

VTXSurrjuvy.f, see /^urw. 
VTXwyvsoyui and vniayoyni, {vnoy 

iayvsoijai, i'axofxac], promise^ 

Perf Pass, vniayjium, A. 

Pass. vTxsoxi^rjr, F. Mid. 

VJioo/rjOOjiai, 2 A. Mid. vtis- 

0ArP, 2 A. I'rfnyor, PasS. (;d«- 

/o/^«( (later) as F. Active, 
:= ia&lo}, which see. 



166 



INFLECTION OF WORDS. 



[§H8. 



(paoxw, see cprj^l. 

0AJI, see nicpdaxoj, ^ENJl, 

0ENJI ( 0ASI), Mil, Perf. Pass. 

7i£(fajj.(xi, 3 F. ntq)i]aoy,ai,, 2 A. 

nscpvov or snecprov. (§^ 96. 

5, 19:95. N. 2: 78. N. 2 : 

26. 1.) 
(pigoj, bring, carry, hear, Im- 

perf. IcpiQov. From OISI, F. 

ottfw, A. Imperat. 2d pers. 

sing. owe. From ENErKSL 



(which see), A. ipfyy.a, Perf. 
errjvoxa, Perf. Pass, fvipey^ai, 
A. Pass. rjvs;^&i^v, 2 A. '/p?;'- 
xor. 
«5P£i;/o) {(PTril)y Jlee, escape, 



F. Mid. qjev^oixai, cpfv^ovfiaL, 

2 A. tcfvyov, 2 Perf. nicpfv- 
ya. (§§96 18: 114. N. 1.) 

Homer has also 2 Perf. Porf. 
vrKpu^oTi? (d,s form OTZfl), and 
Perf. Pass, Part. ^iipi/yf/.ivoi hav- 
ing escaped. 

^ri(il and cpdaxM {(PAJl), say, Imperf tgoT^r, F. cpi^oco, A. t(p7jan, 
Perf. Pass, nicfua^ai, 2 A. Mid. tqd^riv, Imperat. cfclo (Epic), 
Infin. (pda&m. (§§ 96. 8 : 95. N. 2 : 107. N. I : 117. N. 9.) 
The Present and Imperfect Active are inflected as fol- 
lows : 

Present. 



q>afjiEv 

(fare 

q)aai{v) 



Ind. S. cprjfil D. (fttiiiv 

q)rig (parov 

q)rjai{v) (pmov 

SuBJ. S. cpco, (fjjg, (pjj, D. (fM^uEi't q)i]TOV, q)rJTOV, P, (poiifjsVf 

(prjtEy q)coai{v). v. 

Opt. S. (paiTjv, (fati]g, rpali], D. qxxlrjfzsv, q)atr)Tor, cpairJTTjV,' 

P. cpttlriixEV, qialtjis, (palr^aav or cpaitv. 
Imp. 8. <;p«'5t(§14.N.4) D. (pnxov p. cpdxe 

(jDaTW (piiicov (fdiMoav, q)dvTO}V 

Inf. cpdvai. 
Part, qxxg, cpdaa, cpdv, G. cpdviog. 

Imperfect. 

S. I'qirjV D. icpa^ifv P. egjccixiv 

sqifjg, i'(p7]a&a icpaxov atpaxs 

ecpt] icfdxriv icpaoav 

Note 1. The 2d pers. sing, of the Ind. is very often written <pjt. 
Note 2. For the 2d pers. sing, of the Imperfect, see above (§ 84. N. 6). 

<p5-aVw {(1)0 AH), come before, MT, 2 A. l'(pd^7]v,^ cp&w, cp&al~ 

anticipate, F. cpd^doM, A. rp', cp&rpai, (pddg, 2 A. Mid. 

Vq>&aaa, Perf. i'(pdayM, F. f(pd(x^r,v, (p&dfierog. (§§ 96. 

Mid. (f&^ao^um. From (POII- 5 : 95. N. 2 : 117.) 



§11S.] 



ANOMALOUS VERBS. 



I(i7 



(p&lab), I'lpd^iou, i'if:&iy,u, f(/)c//- 
fiai. From (VOIML*^ A. 
Mid. fCfd^ijjTjv, Subj. ap&LM- 
fiai, Opt. cp&Tfirfi; Inf. cp&i- 
a&aiy Part. cp&tuspog. 
(§§96. 5: 117. N. 14.) 

(piXsco, love, regular. From the 
simple fpj'yjfi, A. Mid. ecpT- 
).a^i]v, Jmpcrat. 2d pers. sing. 
cfiUu, Epic. 

<fOQE(i), carry, bfMr, wear, regu- 
lar. From (POPllMr, Inf. 
(ill [-lomer) cpoorp'ai. (§ 117. 
N. 17.) 

(pouo {cfiQoii), (foi'ioM, &LC. used 
only in composition. From 
tJiPJIMT comes 2 A. Imp. 
cpotg. (§§ 96. 17: 117. N. 
11.) 

(liTrSl, 0rzfi, see (jpft'/w. 

ffvtOy produce, cpvooa, e'cpvaa, ni- 
(fvxa am, 2 Perf. niq)va am, 
2 A. Pass, (later) icpvriv. 
From <PTMI, 2 A. s(pvv a?:, 
Subj. cpvio. Opt. cpvriv, Inf. 
cpvvui, Part. cpvg. (^ 117. 
N. 7, 16.) 

X. 

XAJJ2, see ;^«^w, xav5aiw. 

xd^M {XA/lJl, KAJn.), yield, 
give loay, F. xsx«5?J(jw shall 
deprive, 2 A. viy.aSop I made 
to give way, deprived, 2 A. 
Mid. KSyadoprjV. (§§ 96. 4, 

10,11: 78. N. 2.) 
XalvM {XANJl, XAn.), com- 
monly ;j/riaxw, gape, 2 A. 
i'xnrov, 2 Perf. y.s/r]va, F. 
Mid. xavovfica. (§ 96. 5, 18, 

^ ) . . • 

XctlQbt {XAPJl), rejoice, F ;^/xt- 

^jy'aci), Perf. a^x'^^QriKa, Perf 

Pass. Y.fxf'iQn^Ky^i' (poetic y.i- 



XccQijai), A. Mid. fxV^d^V^ 
(poetic), 2 A. Pass. ixccQrjv, 
2 A. Mid. xf^a^o^u7?v (Epic). 
Homer has also F. xf/a^7Joa», 
ytsXOigi]ao(xni. (§§ 96. 18, 10, 
11: 78. N. 2.) 

Xocvddvb) {XAJJl, XANzlJl, 
XEJSziJl), contain, hold, re- 
ceive, F. Mid. xfioo^ui, 2 A. 
{'xadov, 2 Perf )c^xar8a. 
(§§96.6,7, 19: 12. 5.) 

X<ioy.M, see Xf^it'O}- 

xi'Cbi {XEJSl), caco, A. i'xsau 
and f'xfao)', Perf Pass, y.fxf- 
apai, F. Mid. ;f'£0"o^ai, ;^faoi}- 
^«^ 2 Perf k£>o(5«. (§§ 96. 
4, 19: 85. N. 2: 114.N. I.) 

^£w (XETSl, XTJl), pour, F. 
;f£a> sometimes ;^£i;c;w, A. 
I^fa sometimes i'xsvaa (Epic 
l^fi;«), Perf. ysxv/.a, Perf. 
Pass, y^x^pai, A. Pass, fj^y- 
^7/j'. From xiv^i/, 2 A. Mid. 
f>^W»'. (§§96. 18, N. 12: 
95. N. 1: 102. N. 2: 104. 
N. 1 : 117.) 

Xoca, see xcopvvpi. 

XPAI2MJly help, F. xQociapjjaat, 
A. fXQc/uTfxrjaa, 2 A. sxoai^ 
auov. (§ 96. 10.) 

Xgdot), deliver an oracle, /o/Jaw, 
&,c. Mid. x'^dofiui, use. 
(§§95. N. 3:'il6. N. 2.) 

XQ7] {xQuio), it is necessary, Im- 
personal, Subj. xQfjy Opt. 
XoH/j, Inf. XQ^n'f^h Part. 
neut. ;fofo)j', Imperf. fXQ'^^ 
or ;f(»)^j', F. XQ'n^^^- 

The compound wtto/'^jj, it 
is enough, has //?/. dnoxofiv, 
Imperf. untxQr]' 

Note. The Ind. ;^^»j regularly 
would be XSV' (§ l^^- N. 2.) 
The Opt. x^ilyi and the Ink, 



iC8 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [^ 119. 

X^rivat come from Xi'-'^ (Ionic', J//, 

XPHML (§§ 116. N. 8: 117. , , ,." „ ^ , 

j^^ 17.) V^'viff''. cool^ yjv^o), OLC. 2 A. 

The Part, ^oztiv stands for J*^^- ii/JVp^v (as if from 

x^<iov. (§ 116. n! 9.) k^rrji). 

The Itrnx;rfect 1^^*^^ is contracted J2. 

iromix^^iv (^ 116. N. 3!. For , 

X^m, see above (§§ 78. N. 3: t<>5£(M [SlOfl), push, Imperf. 

93. N. 4 ; 23. N. 3 , f'u&sov, F. (o^/^aco Of waw, 

XQMvyv^n {XFOJl), cnJor, F. A. tojocc, Perf. I'wjj^, Perf. 

;i/Lw'a&), A. i'/ooaa, Pevf >{£- Pass, tum^m, A. Pass, fw- 

XQbiy.a, Perf. Pass. yJyjjMafxm, a,97^r',F. Mid. &Vuo/^«<. (§§96. 

A. Pass. fXoo;o-.'>7yv. (§§ 96. 10 : 80. N. 2.) 

9 : 107. N. 1 : 109, N. 1.) (aitoixat, huy, Imperf fO)vw}j)]v, 

XMvvv^ui {xoixi), heap' up, dam, Perf. Pass, fO)rrj/.uxc, F. Mid. 

F. ;);'&)(/o), A. tyjuan, Perf us- oirj^'ao^ai, A. Mid. (not Attic) 

ji'oxrjf, Perf. Pass. v.r-xMapai, fo»r>;a</'^?jj'Or o)j'?;<m'/i>jj/. (§80. 

A. Pass. f>;a,9?p'. (ibid.) N. 2.) 

NoTR. In the catalogue of Anomalous Verbs, tenses of 
easy formation (as F. Pass.) are not generally given. 



ADVERB, 

§ 110. 1. Many adverbs answering to the question nwgg 
HOW? IN WHAT MANNER? are formed from adjectives, pro- 
nouns, and participles, by changing og of the nominative or 
genitive into wc. E. g. 

GO(f(x)q, wisely, from aogpoc, wise ; 

XagiivTbjg, gracefully, from xaQiuc, frroc, graceful; 

aXrj&wc, contracted aX^dwg, truly, from ali]drjg, sog, true; 

ovxbK, thus, from <vTog, this ; 

oVtw?, indeed, from wV, oVroc, being. 

2. Some adverbs of this class end in 5>;v or adr^v. Such 
adverbs are derived from verbs. E. g. yga^driv, scratchingly, 
from y^flKfbt, scratch ; Xoyddrjv, stlectedly, from Xeyw, select, 
collect. (§§7:96. 19.) 

3. Some end in dov or T]d6v. Such adverbs are derived from 
nouns. E. g. a/fXrjdov, i?i herds, from ayekr], herd ; TSTganodj]' 
dov, like a quadruped, from xsTganovgy oSog, four footed. 

4. Some end in / or il, tI or tsL E. g. e&sXovjl, voluntarily y 
from e&eXwv, ovtoc, wilting ; ^ag/^aQtaih ^i^e a barbarian, from 

^aoi'Cdo, act like a barbarian. 



§§ 120, 121.] ADVERB. 169 

5. Some end in |. E. g. ivaXXd^, by turns, crosswise, from 
ivaXXdaato, place across. 

6. A few adverbs of this class end in Ivdrjv. E. g. nXovxiv^ 
8r^v, according to [his) wealth, from nXomog, riches. 

§ \20. Adverbs answering to the question noadxig, 
now OFTEN ? end in dmg. Such adverbs are derived from 
adjectives, E. g. avxvdxig, often, from av^vog, frequent. 

For the numeral adverbs, see above (§ 62. 4). 

<5i 191. 1. Adverbs answering to the question no&i or 
nov, WHERE 1 IN WHAT PLACE? end in ^i or gi{v). E. g. 
(xvTo&i, in that very spot, from aviog. 

The termination ai(v) is chiefly appended to Ucimes of towns. 
It is preceded by tj • but when the nominative singular of the 
noun ends (or would end) in « pure or ^a, it is preceded by a. 
E. g. "A&Tivriai, at Athens, from ''Adi^rai, Athens; Oiomdoi, at 
Thespics, from Oeomal, ThespicD, 

(1) Some adverbs of this class end in ov or axov. E. g. 
avToii, there, from amog ' ixavjaxov, everywhere, from nag, nav-- 
to'?. 

(2) Some end in ol. E. g. "lod^^ol, at the Isthmus, from 
'la&fiog, Isthmus. 

(3) The following adverbs also answer to the question 
AVHERE? uyx'' ^^ Oi/Xov, oii'sxag, uvo), iyyvg, eaug, exn, iy-jog, hdov, 
ev&u or iyi'^ude or ivxav&a (Ionic irdavxu), evtog, t'ioi, I't/w, I'/.tag, 
xw'to), neXng, nion and nsQav, nXrjaiov, noQ^ah nooaw, t/JAs or 
jTjXov, d)8f, and some others. 

Note 1. The adverb oIkoi, at home, from o^ko?, house, takes the acute on the 
penult. (§ 20. N. 1.) 

2. Adverbs answering to the question no&er, whence? 

•FROM WHAT PLACE ? end in ^fi'. E. g. 

'Adi]'.7id^ev,from Athens, from U&rjvaL, Athens; 
ovQaro&sVffrom heaven, from ovgavog, heaven. 
Here belongs sv&fv or iv&h'ds or irreii&sv (Ionic ev&svisv), 
hence, thence, whence. 

3. Adverbs answering to the question no as, whither? to 
WHAT PLACE ? end in os, de, or ^s. E. g 

ixflas, thither, from ixsl, there; 
oiy.ovds, to the house, home, from oixog, house; 
Orj^a'Cs, to Thebes, from O^^Sai, Thebes, 
15 



170 



INFLECTION OF WORDS. [^§ l'^^, 123. 



Note 2. In strictness, the ending h is appended to the accusative singular or 
plural of the noun. 

Note 3. The adverbs olxoi^i, home, and (piyah, to JUght, imply nom. OIH, 
OTS, whence accus. eixx, (pvya. 

4. Adverbs answering to the question nri, in what direc- 
tion 1 end in r} or «^7j. E. g. 

ovda^ji, in no way, from olhanog, none ; 
akXa^i], in another dinction, from allog. 

Note 4. The ending »? becomes >} only when the nominative of the adjective, 
from which such adverbs are derived, is not obsolete. 

•§ ISS. The following adverbs answer to the question 

noli, WHEN? IN WHAT TIME? ud, aU(}lOV, ky.UOTOTS, tnsLTa, 

(X&tg or ;(&ig, vsmotI, vvxiojg, vvv, oips, naXai, navTOXs, neQvat, 
TiQiv, nqoxd^sg, 7TQ(07p', 7iQ03i, (jTi^uQov, TTjisg, vistfQov, and some 
others. 

§ 133. The following table exhibits the adverbs derived 
from 720^, 'OnO^, T02y and oc. (§§ 73. 1 : 63. N. 2 : 71.) 



Interrogative. Indefinite. 
nov or 7i6&i, nov or tto&I, 



Demonstrative. Relative. 
ro&i, here, ov or odi or 



where ? 


somewhere 


in this 
place 


oTcov or o;io- 
■&[, where 


n6&£v,ivhence i 


' 7io&iv,from 
some place 


ro&iv, thence 


O&EV or OTTO- 

^ev, whence 


nol or noas, 
whither ? 


nol, some- 
whither 


wanting 


oi or oTiot, 
whither 


nri, in what 
direction ? 


nri, in some 
direction 


jri or t}j8s: or 
'tavxri, in this 
direction 


7] or oTtri, 
in which 
direction 


noxe, when ? 


nors, at some 
time, once 


Tors, then 


OXi or OTXOXB 

when 


Ttug, how ? 


Tibjg, some- 
how 


TO)c or (hb^ or 
oviwg, thus, so 


b)g or oTtoag, 

as 


7ii]vixa, at 
jvhat time ? 


wanting 


rr]vly.a, xrjviy.a- 
ds, Trjviitavxa, 
at this or that 
time 


rjvlxcc or 
oTXTjvlxtt, at 
ivhich time 


TiTJfiog, when ? 

wanting 
wanting 


wanting 

wanting 
wanting 


xri^iog or XT]- 
(xoads or xrj- 
(4ovxog, then 
xicog, so long 
Tocpga, so long 


tjfiog or 071^- 
fiog, when 

Eoog, until 
o(pQ(x, as long 



§§ 124, 125.] ADVERB. 171 

Note I. The forms to^i, ^oB-'i, roB^i, o'S/, raS-iv, oT, rui, TrUfjt.oi, Trifles, rtf^osy 
re^^a, S^^ct, are poetic. 

Instead of rus, the poets sometimes use «?, with the acute accent. 

Note 2. The letter i is annexed to the demonstratives ravTi^f eSis, oSr«s, for 
the sake of emphasis. Thus, Tocvn^t, uli, ovraxrl. (§ 70. N. 2.) 

Note 3. Also the adverbs 'hiv^a, bS^aSs or IvreUS-sv, and vZv, take /. Thus, 
otv^i, ivSaS/ or ivTXvS-if ivTivBtvi, vvvi. 

Note 4. Some of the relative adverbs are strengthened by ^i^ or evv, or 
by both united. E. g. us, aiff-n^, affcrt^ovv, as ; ottou, otovovv wherever. 

§ 1.2 4L. 1. Some genitives, datives, and accusatives are 
used adverbially. E. g. 8ri^ooin, publicly, from dtj^oaiog, puh^ 
lie ; xeXog, finally, lastly, from xeAo?, end. 

2. Especially the accusative singular or plural of the neuter 
of an adjective is often used adverbially. E. g. fxovov, only, 
from ij.6vog, alone ; nolv or nolla, much, from ttoAvV, wimcA. 

Note. In some instances, a word with the preposition, which governs it, is 
used adverbially. E. g. Ta^a^^^rjfia (wa^a ;t?''^''')> instantly ; vgoi^you (rgo 
X^ytv), to the jrurpose ; xaBd'n^ [xxB-' clvt^^, as. 

COMPARISON OF ADVERBS. 

§ 195. The comparative of an adverb derived from an 
adjective is the same with the neuter singular of the compara- 
tive, and the superlative is the same vi^ith the neuter plural of 
the superlative, of tMt adjective. E. g. 

oocpSg, wisely, oocpwregov, more wisely, Goqxarata, most wisely y 

from aogpo'c, wise. (§ 57.) 
7l8ib^g, pleasantly, tJ8Tov, more pleasantly, ^diOToi, most pleas- 
antly, from ri8vg, pleasant. (§ 58.) 

Note 1. Some adverbs of the comparative degree end in us, E. g. ;^aXj- 
irus, ^aXtTTwri^us, from ^itXiTos. 
Superlatives in us are rare. 

Note 2. Some comparative and superlative adverbs end in u, particularly 
when the positive ends in u. E. g* avu, up, avuripu, avuTaTu, 

Note 3. The following adverbs are anomalous in their comparison : 

ay^i or ayxov, near, afftrav, ccy^^iffra. (Compare § 58. N. I.) 

Ixds, afar, tKttirri^u, ixxffTeiTu. (§ 125. N. 2.) 

tv^ev, within, Ivhori^u, iv^orxru. (ibid.) 

^«Xa, very, fteiXkov, more, rather, ftdXitrra, very much, especially. 

yvKTu^, nightly, by night ; vvxTixtTi^ov, farther back in the night, that is, ear^ 

Her in the morning, yvxTiatTara, very early in the morning. 
«i^ei, farther, beyond, vi^utTi^u or ^t^a'tTtoov, ^t^airdru. (ibid.) 
v^ov^yov, to the purpose, vr^ov^ytxiri^ov, more to the puriyose, T^oti^yialTctrcCf 

very much to the purpose. 



172 INFLECTION OP WORDS. [ §§ 126, 127. 

DERIVATION OF WORDS. 

§ 136. All words, which cannot be proved to be deriva- 
tive, must be considered as primitive. 

DERIVATION OF SUBSTANTIVES. 

§137. Substantives derived FROM OTHER SUB- 
STANTIVES end in 

idfjg, adtjg, ladrjg, Iwv, eg, a?, Tvrj, lojvt], patronymics : 

lov, Idiov, uQiov, vXXiov, v8qlov, vcpiov, iaxog, vlXog or vlog, laxt], 
ig, diminutives: 

log, Txrjg, dzrjg, tjxrjg, mrrjg, lOJTTjg, drog, rjvog, Ivog, svg, a, ig, ccg, 
cov, (avid, T7]g, rig, oaa, laaa, appellatives. 

1. Patronymics, that is, names of persons derived from 
their parents or ancestors, end in idrig, adrjg, ladtjg, gen. ov, and 
mv gen. corog, masculine : ig gen. idog, ag gen. adog, and ivi], 
icavT], feminine. 

(1) Patronymics from nouns in rjg or ag, of the Jirst declen- 
sion, end in adr^g (fem. ag). E. g. ^Innorrjg, '"innoTadrig son of 
Hippotes ; BoQsag, Bogeddrjg son of Boreas. 

(2) Patronymics from nouns in og and log, of the second 
declension, end in id7]g (fem. ig) and m^M (fem. lag) respec- 
tively. E. g. Kgovog, KQovl8r]g son of Saturn; "AanXriniog, 
l^axXrjniudrjg son of JEscidapius. 

In this case, the poets often use icav (fem. ivi], icavrj) for idrjg 
E. g. Kgovloiv for Kgoridrjg ' "AdgriOTog, 'Adgi^axlvT] daughter of 
Adrastus. 

(3) Patronymics from nouns of the third declension are 
formed by dropping og of the genitive of the primitive, and 
annexing idrig (fem. ig) or ladrig. E. g. HsXoip, nog, HsXomdrjg 
son of Pelops ; (Psgtjg, rjTog, tT)EgrjTiddrjg son of Pheres ; ^'Axlag, 
uvroQ, ^AxlavTig daughter of Atlas. 

The poets sometimes use lojv for i8rig. E. g. ni]Uvg, iog, 
IlijWmv son of Peleus. 

Note 1 . The epic poets often form patronymics from nouns in ivs, by drop- 
ping oi of the Ionic genitive (§ 44. N. 2), and annexing /aJ>?j, is. E. g. ITw- 
Xty; , vost TlytXrt'iatm son of Peleus ; B^itrius, ijos, B^ttrmi daughter of Briseus. 

Feminine patronymics in n'l's are sometimes contracted in the oblique cases. 
E. g. N«g£uj, iiot, N>?^»j?f daughter of Nereus, Nereid, gen. plur. l^ngj'huv. 

2. A DIMINUTIVE signifies a small thing of the kind denoted 
by the primitive. 



§ 128.] DERIVATION OF WORDS. • 173 

Diminutives end in lov, idioVf agiov, vXXtov, vSqiov^ vtfiov, 
neuter : laxog, vXXog or vXog, masculine : ioxtj, ig gen. idog, fem- 
inine. E. g. av&g(onog, man, uv&qojttiov, a little fellow; aricpa- 
vog, crown, oiscparlaxog, a little crown ; /xBliga^, xoc, girl, (xeiga- 
xiaxT], a little girl. 

Note. 2. The first syllable of /5/ov is contracted with the preceding vowel. 
E. g. /3«t/;, /Sae,-, ox, /3a/l/av, a tittle ox ; kit,n, iui, word, Xi^iihav, a Utile word. 
In this case, the ending u^iov often becomes I'^iov. 

Note 3. Many diminutives in av have lost their diminutive signification. 
E. g. -riSiy, iriS/«», jdain. 

3. National appellatives end in log, itTjc, axrig, rjrrjg, larrjcj 
icoTTjg, avog, r^vog, ivog, gen. ov, and tvg gen. iog, masculine : a, 
ig gen. i8og, and ag gen. a8og, feminine. E. g. Kogiv&og, Cor- 
inth, KoQir&iog, a Corinthian ; ZxdyuQa, Stagira, 2^a/SLQizT}g, 
aStagirite; Tf/ia, Tegea, TeysaTTjg, a Tcgean. 

Note 4. When the nominative singular of the noun denoting the place ends 
(or would end) in a or w, the ending lo; is generally contracted with the preced- 
ing vowel. E. g. 'AB^vvai, 'A^n*es,Ta;. 

4. Nouns denoting a place, where there are many things of 
the same kind, end in mv or ojvia. E. g. ddcpvi], laurel, dacpvojv, 
laurel-grove ; godov, rose, godatviu, rose-garden. 

5. Many masculine appellatives end in t;/c gen. ov. E. g. 
TioXig, city, noXlirig, citizen ; Xnitog, hurse, luTioTi^g, horseman. 
Those in nrjg have the t in the penult long. 

Feminine appellatives of this class end in Tig. E. g. TioXlug, 
female citizen. 

6. Some masculine appellatives end in evg. E. g. Xmiog, 
horse, Inntvg, horseman. 

7. Some feminine appellatives end in oaa or laaa. E. g. 
0ga^, a Thracian, Ogaaoa, a Thracian looman ; ^aoiXBvg, king, 
/SaalXiaaa, queen. 

§1S8. Substantives derived FROM ADJECTIVES end 
in la, T7)g gen. r/xog, avvr], eg gen. eog, a gen. ag, and rj. Such 
substantives denote the abstract of their primitives. E. g. 

xaxla, vice from xaxog, wicked 

o^vttjg, sharpness " o^vg, sharp 

dixaioovvT}, justice ** dlxacog, just 

iJd&og, depth " ^a&vg, deep. 

Note 1 . If the ending la be preceded by j or a, a contraction takes place. 
E. g. aXj}S-£/a, truth, from aXv^vi, "f> true; aiiaix, foUy, from ivoos, foolish. 

15* 



174 • INFLECTION OF WORDS, [§ 129. 

The ending ttct often becomes ta. E. g. uf^aB-lci for a^«9-s<a, ignorance, 
from a^aS-j??, ignorant. 

Note 2. Those in tjjs are always feminine. They are generally paroxy- 
tone. (§ 19. 2.) 

Note 3. If the penult of the primitive be short, the ending offvvn becomes 
uffivYi. E. g. h^caavvfj, priesthood, from ti^os, sacred. 

Note 4. Those in eg are always derived from' adjectives in vs (§51), by 
changing vs into »j. 

Note 5. Abstract nouns in a or »j, from adjectives in eg, are always paroxy- 
tone (§ 19. 2j. E. g. tx^t^"^) enmity, from ix.^^o?, enemy, 

%199. Substantives derived FROM VERBS end in 

«, iy, og, TTjg, xriq, Tiaq, Bvg, rjg, ag, Gig, aia, fiog, [ixXy fitj. 

1. Verbal nouns in «, i], and og gen. ov or sog, denote the 
ABSTRACT of the primitive. E. g. 

Xagd, joy from ;fa/^t«, rejoice^ (§ 96. 18) 

^dxri, battle *' }idxo(xai, fight 

%liyXog, confutation " iUyxm, confute 
nqdyog, thing ** tcqccggo}, do, (§ 96. 3,) 

Note 1. When the radical vowel is either s, «, or o, (§ 96. 
19,) verbal nouns of this class (§ 129, 1) have o in the penult. 
E. g. Xoyog, word, from U/oa, say. 

Note 2. Feminines in i'la. come from verbs in tvca. . E. g. (iaa-iXtia, sove- 
reignty, from (icifftXivca, reign. 

2. Verbal nouns denoting the subject of the verb (§ 156) 
end in ttjq (fern. Tsiga, tqiu, zqig gen. l8og), t7j?, tw(), «v?, ly? 
(fern, ig gen. /5o?), a?, and og gen. ov. The penult of those in 
triQ, trig, xoaq, is generally like that of the perfect passive 
<§107). E.g. 

QvxriQ, one who draws from'pril, draw 
TioirjT'^g, maker " noim, make 

qriTioQ, speaker " 'PESL, speak 

yQaq)£vg, writer " yqaqxa^ write. 

Note 3. Those in ^?, ag, gen. ov, annex these endings to 
the last consonant of the verb. They are chiefly found in 
composition. E. g. ym^hqrig, geometer, from yia, earth, and 
fiSTQsa), measure; (pvyado&rjgag, hunter of fugitives, from cpvydg, 
fugitive^ and d^riqaia, hunt. 

Note 4. Those in og are generally found in composition 
. E. g. (j,r}TQoq)6vog, a matricide, from firixriQ and 0ENfL 



§§ 130, 131.] DERIVATION OF WORDS. 175 

3. Nouns denoting the action of the verb end in aig, aia, 
fuog. Their penult is generally like that of the perfect passive 
(§'107). E,g.__ 

ogaaig, vision from oqccm, see 

tlnaala, conjecture " elxd^M, I conjecture 

diwyij 6c, pursuit " ditaxco, purs7ie, (j^ 9. I.) 

4. Nouns denoting the effect of the verb end in fj.a. Their 
penult is generally Hke that of the perfect passive {^ 107). 

xofxj^tx, that wJiich is cut off, piece, from xonxbi, cut, (§§ 96. 
2: 8. 1.) 

5. Verbal nouns in jurj sometimes denote the action and 
sometimes the effect of the verb. E. g. imaTijfjTj, Jcnoicledgej 
from fjuoTafiat, understand ; y^txfi^^, line drawn, from ygdifOi, 
write, (§8. 1.) 

DERIVATION OF ADJECTIVES. 

§130. Adjectives derived FROM OTHER ADJEC- 
TIVES end in log, oloq, y.og, cexog. E. g. iXsv&egog, Jree, sXsv- 
&iQiog, liberal; txMv, orrog, willing, hzovoiog, voluntary , {^ \% 
5;) dijXvg, female, dTjh'xog, feminine. 

§ 131. Adjectives derived FROM SUBSTANTIVES 

end in 

log, cciog, eiog, oiog, b)og' ly.og' sog, tirog, ivog ' sgog, 'tjQog, 
alsog, t]l6g, oiXog ' ijxog ' t]tig, isig, oeig ' (tiding. 

1. The endings log, aiog, eiog, oiog, woe, txo?, denote be' 
longing to or relating to. E. g. al&riQ, sgog, ether, al&sgiog, 
ethereal; 0tj(^aL, Thebes, Oi^^alog, Theban ; noirjTi^g, poet, 
noLTjTLy.og, poetic. 

2. The endings sog, fivog, ivog, generally denote the material 
of which any thing is made. E. g. xQ^aog, gold, xQ^aeogf 
golden; dgvg, oak, dgvirog, oaken. 

3. The endings sgog, rjgog, ahog, rjXog, (aXog, denote quality. 
E. g. Tgycp-^, luxury, Tgv(p?g6g, luxurious ; d^dggog, courage^ 
■&aggaXsog, courageous. 

4. The ending ifjiog generally denotes fitness. E. g. idwSriy 
food, i8w8iy.og, eatable. 

5. The endings rifig, uig, oug^ generally denote yMZwe55. E. g. 
rifiri, value, rifir^sig, valuable ; ;fa^t?, grace, xagieig, graceful. 



176 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§§132-134. 

6. The ending (od7]g denotes resemblance. E. g. nvg, fircy 
7tvg(6dT}g, like Jire. 

§ 133, Adjectives derived FROM VERBS end in to?, 

jiog, Xog, vog, tjg, og, ^lov. 

1. Verbal adjectives in jog are equivalent to the perfect 
passive participle. E. g. ttoum, ??iake, TioirjTog, made. 

Frequently they imply capableness. E. g. Sedofiai, see, &£a- 
Tog, visible, capable of being seen. 

Note 1. Sometimes verbal adjectives in rot have an active signification. 
E. g. »aXuT7u, cover, xxXv^tos, covering. 

2. Verbal adjectives in jfog imply necessity, obligation, or 
propriety. E. g. nouw, make, rconjisog, to be made, that 7nust 
be made. 

Note 2. The penult of adjectives in to; and nos is generally like that of the 
perfect passive (§ 107). 

3. A few verbal adjectives end in log, vog. E. g. JEISLi 
fear, 8uX6g, timid, dsivog, terrible. 

4. Many adjectives are formed from verbs by annexing »;? 
gen. sag, og gen, ov, to the root. Such adjectives are generally 
found in composition, E. g. a^ia&iyg, ignorant, from «- and 
pav&dvM, (§§ 96. 7: 135. 4;) noXvXoyog, talkative, from noXvg 
and Xiyw, (§§ 135. I : 96. 19.) 

5. Verbal adjectives in fnwv are active in their signification. 
E. g. iniaxr'ipwv, knowing, from lnlaxa(Xiu, know. 

§ 133* A few adjectives in wog are derived FROM AD- 
VERBS. E, g. x^'^?} yc^sterday, x^^oivog, yesterday^s, of 
yesterday. 



DERIVATION OF VERBS. 

§ 134:. Derivative verbs end in dw, ita, ow, svw, a^w, l^m, 
aivoa, vvw, usio}, idea. 

1. In verbs derived from nouns of the frst and second de- 
clension, the verbal ending takes the place of the ending of the 
nominative (§§ 31. 1 : 33. 1). E. g. 

Tip^], honor ripdw, I honor 

xoivMvog, partaker xolviovsm, partake 

pia&og, loages piad^om, let, hire 

dUrj, justice dixd^cj, judge. 



§ 135.] COMPOSITION OF WORDS. 177 

In verbs derived from nouns of the tJiird declension, the 
ending takes the place of the termination oq of the genitive 
(§ 35. 1). But when the nominative singular ends in a vowel, 
or in c preceded by a vowel (§ 36. 1), the verbal ending 
generally takes the place of the ending of the nominative. E. g. 
otofi, xoc, rudder ot«x/^ti>, steer 

^avfAa, wonder dt/.v^d^M, admire 

Note 1. Verbs in a/v&>, uvea, generally come from adjectives in as, vs gen. 
to:, respectively. E. g. fiup'oi, foolish, fca/^aivo), act in a foolish manner ; 
(iaB-us, deep, (ictS-uvco, deepen. 

Note 2. Verbs in oeio) exi)ress a desire, and are formed by 
annexing this ending to the root of the primitive verb. E. g. 
d(jdb), do, dg<xa(i(A), desire to do. 

Also some verbs in mw or «w express a desire. Such verbs 
are derived from substantives. E. g. oT^mi^yog, general, orga- 
Ttjyidb), desire to become a general. 

2. Some verbs are formed from nouns by changing the end- 
ing of the nominative into m, and modifying the penult accord- 
ing to <§, 96. E. g. ;(ahn6g, injurious, ;^«A£7rTa), injure, (§ 96. 
2;) (juXaxog, soft, fjixldaaM, soften, (§96. 3;) ayyeXog, mes- 
senger, uyysXXw, announce, (§ 96. 6 ;) y.(x{>ag6g, clean, xa&algo}, 
I clean, (§ 96. 18.) 



COMPOSITION OF WORDS. 

§ 13^. 1. When the first component part of a word is a 
noun of i\\e first or second declension, its ending is dropped, 
and an o is substituted. E. g. 

fiovaoTioiog, singer from ^ovaa, tcoUm 

Ugo7igE7ii]g, holy " l^gog, nginw. 

But when it is a noun of the tliird declension, the termina- 
tion og of the genitive is dropped, and an o is substituted. E.g. 
nai8oigl(irig, instimctor, from naig, naidog, t^//jw. 

Note 1. The o is generally omitted when the root of "the 
first component part elids in av, i, ov, v. (§ 36. 1, R. 1.) E. g. 

noUnog&og, city -destroying, from nolig, nig&w. 

Note 2. The o is often omitted when the last component 
part begins with a vowel. E. g. vKavrixogy newly bought, from 
viog, (ovrjTog. 



178 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [<J 135. 

Note 3. The o is sometimes omitted when the root of the first component 
part ends in v. (ibid.) E. g. y.ika.yKK^Tes, producing black fruity from fAiXust 
•avos, xa^iro's. (§12. 2.) 

Note 4. When the first component part is yia, earth, the o is changed into 
a. E. g. yiuy^aipos, geographer, from yea, y^aipzw. 

2. When the first component part is a verb, the connecting 
letter is s or i. Sometimes t becomes ui. E. g. 

lisvifia/oq, brave from ^aw, /urx;^?? 

(x();^iX£^aL'roc, thunder-ruling ** tx^j^co, xfQavvog 
di^idwQog, receiving presents " dixofxai, dwgov, (§ 9. 2 ) 

Note 5. Sometimes « drops i before a vowel. E. g. piypaffms (for pi^ia- 
rsr/f, that is, ptf-cri-aff'ris), coward, from ptTTTta, uffTFis, (§§ 96. 2 : 8. 2.) 

3. The primitive prepositions are the only ones with which 
other words are compounded. (^ 226. 1.) 

These prepositions generally lose the final vowel, when the 
word, with which they are compounded, begins with a vowel ; 
except mgl and TT^o. E, g. 

oLv-ayoi, lead up from uva, aya 

in-uLvib), praise " inl, alve(o 

ntQi-ixo3i contain " tuqI, I^w 

ngo-ixco, excel " ngo, l^w. 

Note 6. In ngo, the o is often contracted with the following 
TOwel. E. g. jtQovxca for nQo^x^- 

Note 7. *A/t^< often retains the / before a vowel. E. g. ay,^ii*vv/ii from 
ufi(pi, 'ivvvfit. 

Note 8. The Epic language often drops the final vowel of a 
preposition even before a consonant. E. g. an-ney.n(o for ano- 

4. The negative prefix «- (called alpha privative) corre- 
sponds to the English prefix un-, or to the suffix -less. Before 
a vowel it generally becomes av-. E. g. 

a-Goq>og, unwise from «-, aoqiog 
a-xqnaiog, useless ** a-, XQn<J^og 

av-akiog, unworthy " a-, a^iog. 



PART Til. 
SYNTAX 



SUBSTANTIVE. 

^ 136. 1. A substantive annexed to another 
substantive or to a pronoun, for the sake of explana- 
tion or emphasis, is put in the same case. E. g. 

ASQ^V? §(toiXivg, King Xerxes. Here ^aadsvg is an- 
nexed to ^fc'^l^i?. 
'EfXE xov TnQta, Me Tereus. 

A substantive thus annexed to another substantive is said to 
be in apposition with it. 

Note 1 . Sometimes the substantive is repeated for the sake of emphasis. 
E. g. Aao9-o>} B^oyaryi^ "AXreco yi^ovro; ' "A.X no/, o; A-iXiyifffft (piXoTra- 
Xi/ioitriv ai/dtriru, LaothOe the daughter of old Attes ; of Altes ivho rules over the 
warlike Leleges. 

Note 2. The repeated noun (§ 136. N. 1) is, in some instances, put in the 
nominative. E. g. ' Av}^9/u,oi;^t], ^uyarno ftiyakri-re^o; 'Utriuves' 'H £ - 
Tiuvt o; iveciivfu'To YlXa.x.u) iiXr,i<r(rri, Andromache the daughter of viagnanimoui 
Eelion ; Eetion, who dwelt at the foot of looody Placus. 

Note 3. Sometimes a substantive supplies the place of an adjective. E. g. 
2«y>j ToXti 'ExXatf, Sane, a Greciayi city, where the substantive 'ExXay, 
Greece, stands for the adjective 'Eax»jv/x«j, Grecian. 

Remark. Personal or national appellatives are often accompanied by the 
word avr^, man. E. g. ^(tsiXiv; av/io, a man who is a king, simply a king. 
*AvS^£{ 'A3^-/jv«r«/, 7nen of Athens, simply Athenians. 

Note 4. An abstract noun is often used for the corresponding concrete. 
E. g. 'P..xiavov, Ss4/v ysviriv, Oceanus, the parent of the gods, where the 
abstract yUnriv, jrroductioji, stands for the concrete yiviTriv, j^roduccr. 

Note 5. The limiting noun, which regularly is put in the genitive (§ 173\ 
sometimes stands in apposition with the limited noun. E. g. Asx.a fjtvecl 
tlffipo^a,, for Aixa fjtvuv s}(T<p9^ec, a contribution often inina. 

2. A substantive in apposition with two or more substantives 
is put in the plural. E. g. 

"AfiloTQi^g, 'AgTucpQsvrig, y.al Ms/a^d'Cr^g, Tuyol Il£Q~ 
objv, Amistres, Artaphernes, and Megabazes, leaders of 
the Persians, 



180 SYNTAX. [<J 137. 



ADJECTIVE. 

^ 137. 1. An adjective agrees with its substan- 
tive in gender, number, and case. E. g. 

UvtjQ aocpog, A wise man. 'Avdgog aocpov, Of a wise 

man. 
"Avdgsg aoq)ol, Wise men. "Avdgwv aoq)Ojv, Of wise 

men. 

This rule applies also to the article, to the possessive, inter- 
rogRtive, indefinite, and demonstrative pronouns, and to the 
participle. 

Note 1. A feminine suhstantive in the dual often takes a 
masculine adjective, article, pronoun, or participle. E. g. 

TovTco Tw Te^va, for Tuvia t« rex^'a, These tico arts. 

Note 2. Sometimes the gender of the adjective or participle has reference to 
the gender implied in the substantive. E. g. "^v^^ij QyiZeciov Tiipio-ixe, 
^^vinov ffKiJTT^ov 'i^uv, the soul of the Theban Tiresias, holdii^g a golden 
sceptre, where the masculine i;(^uv is used on account of Tn^seriuo. 

Note S. In some instances the gender and nu?nber of the adjective or par- 
ticiple are determined by the noun governed by its substantive. E. g. IIt>j- 
vuv ayiXui iiT o^i'iiTetv m, Jlocks of birds fearing, where the masculine 
I'TohitrccvTis refers to tt^v&Jv, although it agrees in case with ccyiXcu. 

2. If an adjective, pronoun, or participle ref^,s to tivo or 
more substantives, it is put in the plural. If the substantives 
denote animate beings, the adjective, pronoun, or participle, is 
masculine, when one of the substantives is masculine. If 
they denote inanimate beings, the adjective, &c. is generally 
neuter. E. g. 

Bovv yal X 71 710V xal xd ij.7jXov oXov g otitovc, An ox^ a 

horse, and a camel, roasted whole. 
AiS-oi T£ y.al nllv&oi nal ^vXa uiay.rwg eg g Lfif.isv c(. 
Stones, clay, wood, and brick, throion togethtr without 
order. 

Note 4. The adjective often agrees w\i\\ one of the substan- 
tives. E. g. "AXoxoi y.al v^Tiia texvu TioTidiy^isvui, wives 
and infants expecting. 

Note 5. The adjective or participle is often put in the dual, 
if it refers to two substantives. E. g. Kail lag y.cu ""Aim- 
SLvcdrjg rjxsTrjv uyoviB tov IlgodLy.ov, both Callias and AU 
cibiades came bringins^ Prodicus. 



§§ 138, 139.] ARTICLE. 181 

3. A collective substantive in the singular often takes an 
adjective or participle in the plural. E. g. 

TqoIijv kkovTsg ''A(j/h(ov otoIoq, The army of the Greeks 
having taken Troy. Here the plural participle iXovzBg 
agrees with the singular substantive ojokoq. 

Note 6. A noun or a personal pronoun in the dual often 
takes a participle in the plural. E. g. iVw xata^dvTsg, we 
both going doivn. 

On the other hand, a noun in the plural sometimes takes 
a participle in the dual, in which case only two things are 
meant. E. g. Alyvmol y>Xu'C,ovxs, tivo vultures uttering 
loud shrieks. 

Note 7. In Homer, the dual nouns oWe and 5«y^e are accompanied by plural 
adjectives. E. g. "Oirai (petiivee, two bright eyes. "AXki/u, a ^oti^t, two 
stout spears. 

Note 8. Tlie duals ^vo and oi(jt.<pu are frequently joined to plural substantives. 
E. g. A. Co ^pi/^eity for At/o "^v^^^u, two souls. 

§ 13 8. I. An adjective is often used substantively, the 
substantive, with which it agrees, being understood. E. g. 
tiJtXog sc. uvi]g, A friend. 
Ol ■&v7]Tot, sc. av&QcaTtot, Mortals. 

2. The neuter singular of an adjective or participle is often 
equivalent to the abstract (§ 128) of that adjective or participle. 
In this case the article precedes the adjective or participle. 
E. g. To HaXov, the beautiful, beauty, 1'6 fxelXov, the future. 

Note 1. Masculine or feminine adjectives often supply the 
place of adverbs. E. g, Zsvg :(-&t^6g e/irj, Jupiter went y ester- 
day, where the adjective x^^^og, hesternus, is equivalent to the 
Sidverh xOsg, yesterday. 

So all adjectives in oTiog answering to the question noaxouog, 
omohatday? (§62.3.) E.g. TgLralog acply.Bzo, he cmne 
on the third day. 

Note 2. It has already been remarked, that the neuter of an adjective is often 
used"~adverbially. (§ 124. 1.) 

ARTICLE. 

§ 139. 1. In its leading signification the Greek article 
corresponds to the English article the. E. g. 

'O avriQ, The man. Ol uvdgsg, The men. 

'H yvvT^, The woman. Ai yvvmy.eg, The women. 
To dhSqov, The tree. Ta devdga, The trees. 
16 



182 SYNTAX. [§ 140. 

2. A Greek noun without the article is equivalent to the 
corresponding English noun with the article a or an. E. g. 
avriQy a man ; yvvij, a woman ; dsvdgov, a tree. 

3. Proper names very often take the article. But the article 
is generally omitted when the proper name is accompanied by 
a substantive with the article, (§ 136.) E. g. 

'O ^'Olv^noq, Olympus. 

IliTrix'xoq o MLTvh^vaiog^ Pittacus the Mitylenian. 

Note 1. The article accompanies the leading character of a well-known story 
or anecdote. E. g. Tip "2 i ^ i (p i m Xiyavn, on [^&t/uitrT/)x.Xfls^ oh ^/' eturbv^ 
aXXoc. tia rriv toXiv tv^oKtfjt,o7, to a Serip/iian saying, that lie \_Themistocles] had 
become famous not through himself, but through the city, where the article ru is 
used, because the remark of the Seriphian and the reply of Themistocles were 
well known in Athens. 

Note 2. The article sometimes accompanies the second accusative after verbs 
signifying to call (§166). E. g. 'ET/;^;;£/^oi/(r< /3aXX£;v rov Ai^ttr-rov, a. v a. x ec~ 
X ov V T I i r V T^o'SoT'/iv, they attempted to strike Dexippus, exclaimingj 
" The traitor ! " not calling him a traitor. 

§ 14:0* 1. The article is very often separated from its 
substantive by an adjective, possessive pronoun, participle, or 
by a genitive depending on the substantive (§ 173). E. g. 

'O xalXitnrjg "Ayd&cjv, The elegant Agdthon. 
Top ifxov Xnnov, My horse. 

'O Osaoa'JiMV ^aadsvg, The king of the Thessalians. 

The article is also separated by other words connected with 
the substantive, in which case a participle (commonly yevofie- 
vog or biv) may be supplied. E. g. Tov xar'aaTQa Zrjvog, 
of Jupiter J who dwells among the stars. 

Remark 1 . Two or even three articles may stand together. E. g. T « t jf 
iToXu crvfA<pi^»v, that which is profitable to the city. T a T>ii t uv ^rokXuv 
'<^ux,ns o/^(ji.Bira, the eyes of the souls of the majority of mankind. 

Note 1 . In Ionic writers, the article is often separated from its substantive 
by the word upon which the substantive depends (§ 173). E. g. T<wv tis 
ff T p a, r I ea r i u V, for T&Jv ffT^ccTistiriuv rt;, one of the soldiers. 

Remark 2. Sometimes the article is separated from the word, to which it 
belongs, by an incidental proposition. E. g. ' AToTavtrxi rev, ototi jiouXoivro 
ixoLiTTot, yv\ttix,a. a. y i a ^ a, i, for ' A'TTaTctvo'cts rou yijvxTKO. eiyio-B-eti, o'Tors (iou- 
Xotvro 'ixetjToi, having stopped them from marrying whenever they wished. 

2. The words connected with the substantive are often 
placed after it, in which case the article is repeated. The 
first article however is often omitted. E. g, 

Kltiyivrig o (xi^Q 6g, Little Cligenes. 

Tag wgag t«? sTigag, The other seasons. 



{ 140.] ARTICLE. 183 

This arrangement is more emphatic than that exliibited 
above (§ 140. 1). 

Note 2. In some instances this order is inverted. E. g. T a A. ^ * Tay«S« 
for TayaB^a rcikka, the other good things. 

3. The participle preceded by the article is equivalent 
lo fxeu'og og, he who, and the finite verb. E. g. Toiig 
noksfi^aavTag rdlg ^uQ^aqoig, those who fought against the 
barbarians, where xovg nohf^rjauvxug is equivalent to inelfovg ol 
fTioXsfiTjoav. But TioXf-fi/juuvTag To7g ^a()^d^oig would mean hav- 
ing fought against the barbarians. 

Note 3. Hence, a participle preceded by the article is 
often equivalent to a substantive. E. g. Oi cpdoaocpovvTig, equiv- 
alent to Ol (fdoaocpoi, the philosophers. 

Note 4. When the adjective stands before or after the sub- 
stantive and its article, the substantive with the article involves 
the relative pronoun og. E. g. Ov ^dvavaov ttjv Tsxvrjv ixTrj- 
udfiTjv, equivalent to *// Tt^vr), ijv ixTi^adfxrjv, ov ^dvavaog ioTiv, 
the art which I possess is not loio, 

4. When a noun, which has just preceded, would naturally 
be repeated, the article belonging to it is alone expressed. E. g. 

Tov ^lov rwv IdicoTsvovTcov, rj tov twv rvgavfevovKov, The 
life of private persons, or that of those who are rulers. 

Note 5. In certain phrases a noun is understood after the 
article. The nouns which are to be understood are chiefly the 
'following : 

y rj, land, country, as JElg t rjv ravrwv, To their own country. 
p'MfiT], opinion, as Kara ys tt^v ifiijv, In my opinion at least, 
odog, way, as T?} v Taxtarrjv, The quickest way, 
ngviyfia, thing, as Toe xt]? nohcog, The affairs of the state. 
vlog, son, as 'O Kluvlov, The son of Clinias, 

5. The demonstrative pronoun, and the adjective ndg or 
a nag, are placed either before the substantive and its article, 
or after the substantive. E. g. 

OvTog 6 oQvig, or 'O ogvug ovTog, This bird. _ 
To §dQog TovTO, or Tovto to /Sdgog, This burden. 
^'Anavxag Tovg dQi& ^ovg, ox Tovg dgi&^iovg anav- 
tag, All the numbers. 

The article, however, in this case is often omitted. E. g. 
Oviog dvriQ, this man. Jldvieg av^Qojnoh all men. 



184 SYNTAX. [§§141,142, 

Note 6. Has in the singular without the article often means every, each, 
E. g. lias uvn^, every man. 

Note 7. "OXos and 'iKagTOi often imitate «r«f. E. g. Taw crKci(pous 
okeu, of the whole ship. Ta» oTrXti-Yiv ixeirTev, every heavy-armed sol- 
dier. 'Kx.a,<r 7t] ; ttjs otxias, of every house. 

Note 8. Toiouros is sometimes preceded by the article. E. g. 'Ev <ra7s 
T oiavTuii i'^rti^iXilaii, in such pursuits. 

Note 9. The article is sometimes placed before the interrogative pronoun 
'TIS and the pronominal adjective -Tflraj. E.g. To t/j what is it? Ta ^o7a 
recvrcc ; such as what ? 

Note 10. The indefinite pronoun h7vet is preceded by the article, E. g. 
'O ^tJvcc, such-a-one. 

§141. 1 . An adverb preceded by the article is equivalent 
to an adjective. E.g. Ol tots av&gamoi, the men of that 
tiine, the men who lived in those days. 

2. An adverb preceded by the article, without any substan- 
tive expressed, has the force of a substantive. E. g. V/ uv- 

gtov, sc. Tj^-iga, the morrow. 

Note 1. Sometimes the article does not perceptibly affect the adverb before 
which it is placed. E. g. To 5r«X«/ or TOTaXm, in olden timet anciently. 
Ta yZv or ravuv, now, at the present time. To avrixa, immediately. 

3. The neuter singular of the article often stands before an 
entire proposition. E. g. To o^olwg afj,(po7v axgoaa&ui, to hear 
both impartially. 

4. The neuter singular of the article is often placed before 
single vi^ords which are explained or quoted. E. g. To vfistg 
oxav sTub), T^v Tcohv Uyw, when I say you, / mean the state. 
Tm ilvat x^V^^^^p ^^^ ^^^ X^^^qI?) to use the words uvai, 
and x^gk- 

Note 2. Sometimes the article is of the gender of the substantive which refers 
to the quotation. E.g. KaXijy I'i^m Tra^aivtfiv uvki T«y x«B5wyajitii> 
so'hiiv, he said, " To sacrifice to the gods according to thy power," is very 
good advice, where the gender of the article before the expression xKhlvvufiit 
ep^iiv is determined by the substantive Tfu^ecmeiv, 

Note 3. In grammatical language, every word regarded as an independent 
object takes the gender of the name of the part of speech, to which it belongs. 
E. g. 'H lyeo sc. u,v76usu(jt.ia, the pronoun \yu, I. 'H y«ro sc. pr^o^tffis, the 
preposition vtto, under. 'O yxo sc. trvvhtrfAos, the conjunction yd^,for. 

§ 14S. 1. In the Epic, Ionic, and Doric dialects, the 
article is very often equivalent to the demonstrative pronoun^ 
or to avTog in the oblique cases. E. g. 



§ 143.] PRONOUN. 185 

Tov oreiQov, equivalent to Toviov ihv oviiqov, This dream. 
Trjg de oxidor i]lO^' 'i:yoalx&(at', And the Shaker of the earth 
• came near her. Here ttJ? is equivalent to nvTTJg. 
The Attic dialect also often uses the article in this sense, 

particularly in the formula 6 i^sv o ds, the one .... the other, 

one .... another. E. g. 

"Oiav 6 fiev XHVT] (Siuiwg, 6 d^ inavaaTQscpsiv dvvrjrai, When 
the one pulls violently one loay, and the other is able to 
pull back. 
Toig fiev ngooixoyrncg tov vow, xcav Os ovOs TtjV qxovrjv 
avf/ofievovc, Paying attention to some persons, but not 
tolerating even the voice of others. 

NoTK 1. The article is equivalent to the demonstrative pronoun, when it 
stands immediately before the relative oi, oro;, or oJas. E. g. Ou^tvo; ruv off a 
ultT^i^vvyiv t<rT< f£^ovT«, none of those things xvhich bring shame. yitinTv rout 
do; Tt^ oSrai, to hate those who are like this mail. 

Note 2. The proper name to which a jttev refers is sometimes joined with it. 
E. g. *0 ^£v ovTxa-' 'Ary^v/av c^'n' ^ov^), 'Av r/X o;^ «f, t/ie one, namelyf An- 
tUochus, pierced AtJ/mnius with the sharp spear. 

Note 3. 'O (Av and o Vi are not always opposed to each other, but, instead 
of one of them, another word is sometimes put. E. g. Vtu^yos fA%v Ui, a ^\ 
clxohofjt.'>i, the 07ie a husbandmait, the other a builder of houses. 

Note 4. The second part (o %i) of the formula o f^h o ^s generally 

refers to a person or thing different from that to which the first part (o (i.iv) 
refers. 

2. In the Epic, Ionic, and Doric dialects, the article is 
often equivalent to the relative pronoun. E. g. ^'Oqvig Igog, tw 
ovroiKt (folvil, a sncrcd bird, the name of which is Phenix, 
where lo) stands for w. 

Note 5. The tragedians (iEschylus, Sophocles, Euripides) sometimes use 
the article in this sense. 

PRONOUN. 

PERSONAL PRONOUN. 

§ 143. The personal pronoun of the third person may refer 
either to a person or thing different from the subject of the 
proposition, or to the subject of the proposition, in which it 
stands. E.g. (U. 4, 533-5) OQij'Cxsg, oi e uaav ano acpslwv, 
the Thracians who drove him away from their position, where 
I refers to the person driven away, and a<pda)v to Ogi^'ixEg, the 
antecedent of oX. 

16 • 



186 SYNTAX. [§ 144. 

It often refers to the subject of the preceding proposition, 
if the proposition, in which it stands, is closely connected with 
the preceding. E. g. "Aq qmdiojv fi^ xl ol ysvrjrai aa^oVf 
fearing lest any evil should befall him, where ol refers to the 
substantive with which uqQmdiwv agrees. 

Note 1. In Homer and Herodotus the pronoun of the third person generally 
refers to a person or thing different from the subject of the proposition, in which 
it stands. In the Attic writers, it is generally reflexive, that is, it refers to the 
subject of the proposition, in which it stands, or of the preceding, if the second 
be closely connected with it. 

Note 2. In some instances the personal pronoun of the third person stands 
for that of the second. E. g. (II. 10, 398 : Herod. 3, 71.) 

Note 3. The personal pronoun is sometimes repeated in the same proposition 
for the sake of perspicuity. E. g. 'E/^a) fiiv, il xa.) fjth xaB-' 'EXA^jviwy 
X^oiu, TiB-^d/it,fMB-\ akk' oZv le^vviTo. f/.oi loxils Xiyiiv, to us, although we 
have not been brought up in the land of the Greeks, nevertheless thou seemest to 
speak intelligible things. 

Note 4. The forms e^ov, ijioi, ifii, are more emphatic than 
the corresponding enclitics fiov, ^ol, y.L E. g. ^Jog i^oi, give 
to ME, but /log IX 1, give me. 

After a preposition only i^ov, efiol, f^i are used. Except ^i 
in the formula nqog fis, to me. 

§ 144. 1. Amog, in the genitive, dative, and accusative, 
without a substantive joined with it, signifies him, her, it, them. 
E.g. 

'O vofiog avTov ovk m, The law does not permit him. 

"'£xei mql avTov Ttva ^vM^riv ; What does she think of him 1 

Note 1. Autos in the abovementioned cases is sometimes used in this sense, 
when the noun, to which it refers, goes before in the same proposition. This 
happens when the noun is separated from the verb, upon which it depends, by 
intermediate clauses. E. g. 'Ey&z ^ev «y v fixirtXix, J -roXXa ovreug itrTi <ra 

now, for my part, I do not see why the king, whose resources are so great, should 
swear to us, if he really meant to destroy us. 

Remark 1. Avros in the oblique cases is sometimes joined to the relative 
pronoun for the sake of perspicuity. E, g. '^Hi' c fih clvtZd, one of whom. 
Examples of this kind often occur in the Septuagint and New Testament. 

2. AvTog, joined to a substantive, signifies self, very. In 
this case, it is placed either before the substantive and its 
article, or after the substantive. The article, however, is often 
omitted. E. g. 

'Tn avrbv rovqavov tov xvTtccgov, Under the very vault 
of heaven. 



§ 145.1 PRONOUN. 187 

Note 2. The personal pronouns iyw^ av, i]fiHg, v^ng, with 
which avTog is put in apposition, are very often omitted ; in 
which case aviog has the appearance of these pronouns. E. g. 
Avxol ivdeelg ia/JEv roov y.oixJ-^ r,fti^ar, tee are in want of our 
daily hfead. AvtoI (pulvta& t /.tukkov jovroig nioxEvovxigi 
you seem to place more conjideiice in these men. 

Note 3. Autos often signifies ftovos, alone. E. g. Avre} yd^ ifffnv, xaS*u 
|i»«/ ira^uciv^/or we are by ourselves, and strangers have not yet come. 

Remark 2. Autos is used when a person or thing is to be opposed to any 
thing connected with it. E. g. IlaXXaj V i(pB-i/u.ovs "^v^ds "A'i^t ^r^ota-^tv 
fi^uuv, U.VTOVS Ti iXcCoia Tiv^i xuviira-iv, and sent prematurely many brave 
souls nf heroes to Hades, and made their bodies the prey of dogs, where auroust 
them, that is, the heroes, or rather, their bodies, is opposed to -^u^ids. 

Remark 3. Autos denotes the principal person as distinguished from servants 
or disciples. E.g. ( Aristoph. Nub. 218-19) T/j oStos o dvn^ ; MA0. 
AuToS' 2TP. Tis auTosi MA0. lajic^drKs, Who is that man? 
Disc. It is HE. Stb. What be f Disc. Socrates. 

Note 4. Autos is often appended to the subject of a proposition containing 
the reflexive pronoun iacvTou, for the sake of emphasis. E. g. TJaXaitrTTiv vut 
ira^airxiud^iTeii It' uutos a u t m, he is preparing a combatant against himself. 

In such cases aur'os is placed as near ixutou as possible (§ 232). 

Note 5. Amog is often used with ordinal numbers, to show 
that one person with others, whose number is less by one than 
the number implied in the ordinal, is spoken of. E. g. '"Hiqs&ij 
TiQio^evTTig eg Aaxidtxlfiora avroxgaTcoQ, dixaxog avxog, Ac, 
with nine others, was appointed plenipotentiary to Ltacedcemon, 
where drxuTog amog is equivalent to ^jt' aUa^v ivvetx, with nine 
others. 

Note 6. In some instances, auTos is equivalent to the demonstrative pronoun. 
E. g. 'AiTt-rrt/a-* auTv*, I despise that (woman). 

3. AvTog, with the article before it, signifies the same. E. g. 

negl Ttov avrwv t^? avjrjg rjfisgag ov Tuvia ytyvuoxo^ 
(ufv, We do not have the same opinion concerning the 
sam,e things on the same day. 

REFLEXIVE PRONOUN. 

<5i 145. The reflexive pronoun refers to the subject of the 
proposition in which it stands, or to the subject of the preced- 
ing, if the second be closely connected with it. E. g. 
^avTTjv inid eIxvv, Slioio thyself. 

Zr]TtlTf avfi/SovXovg xovg afxeivov (pQovovvxag vfitav av- 
xMv, You wish to have those for your advisers, who reason 
better than you. 



% 

188 SYNTAX. [§§146-148. 

Note 1. Sometimes the reflexive pronoun of the third person stands for that of 
the first or second. E. g. AiT hy.ois avt^ia-B-ai \avTov;,we must ask ourselves, 
where Ixvrovs stands for hf^a; avTovi. Ma^av tov uvr'^s ottr^a, thou knowest 
thy iot, where avri^s stands for cavrl^s. 

Note 2. Sometimes this pronoun in the third person dual and plural stands 
for the reciprocal pronoun. E. g. KaS-' uvrolv, for Kar* aXXjjXaiv, against 
each other. ^^ovavvris tecuroTs, for ^B-ovouyTts akkn\ets, envying one 
another. 

POSSESSIVE PRONOUN. 

§ 146. It has already been remarked, that the possessive 
pronouns are, in signification, equivalent to the genitive of the 
personal pronouns (^ 67). E. g. 

Olxog aog, equivalent to "O olxog aov, Thy house. (§ 173.) 
Ihuq (3og^ equivalent to Haig oov, A son of thine, (ibid.) 

Note 1. The possessive pronoun is sometimes used o6;ec<iWy. E. g. Scf 
TfoBos, my regret for thee, not thy regret for others. (§ 173. N. 2.) 

Note 2. In some instances the possessive pronoun of the third person is put 
for that of the^^rsi or second. E. g. ^^'tir/v ^ffiv, for O^icrJv \fi.oc7s, in my soul. 

Note 3. Sometimes loj, his, stands for ff<piTt^es, their, and o'^irt^os for lof. 

INTERROGATIVE PRONOUN. 

§ 147. The interrogative pronoun rig is used either in 
direct or in indirect questions. E. g. 2'v rig el; who art 
thou 1 078s T I (jovX^xai, he knows what {it) wants. 

This head includes also the interrogative pronominal adjec- 
tives (§73). E. g. KttTu 71 o l u g nvXag sloi^X&sg ,- through what 
gates did you come in 1 

Note 1. It is to be observed that rig does not always stand 
at the beginning of the interrogative clause. 

Note 2. Tig is sometimes equivalent to notog. E. g. Tiva 
avibv qji]aofisv dvav ; what kind of person shall we call him ? 

INDEFINITE PRONOUN. 

§ 1 48. 1. The indefinite pronoun tig annexed to a substan- 
tive means a certain, some, or simply, a, an. E. g. *'OQvi&eg 
iLvig, some birds. 'j(xovi(xv xiva, a 2D ell-rope. 

2. Without a substantive it means some one, somebody, a 
certain one. E. g. ^Aviia&irtjv xtg xaXeaaTm, let some one 
call Antisthenes. 



§ 149.] PRONOUN. " i)6§ 

Note 1. TJj is sometimes equivalent to 'iax^ro;. E. g. E« r/j ^o^u d»^a- 
<rS«, fef every one sharpen his spear well. 

Note 2. Sometimes t/j refers to the person who speaks, and sometimes to 
the person addressed. E. g. n<j7 rt; (pvyoi -, ichere can one (that is, /) go? 
"Hxii TO) xccxov, misforlune is coming to some body ^that is, to thee). 

Note 3. TJf is often joined to adjectives of quftlity or quantity. E. g. Twii 
u^atordrv ns, a most blooming ivoman. ^iXotoXU ri? 'iirB-' o 'ha'tfjt.uvy the 
god is friendly to tiie city. Yi'otro; ns; how great F 'Hf*i^as ifsi^ofAnKoyroi 
TivKs, some seventy days, or, about seventy days. 

Note 4. Ti; sometimes means somebody, in the sense of a distinguished 
person, a man of consequence, and r) means something great. E. g. ^aivofiai 
Tii rifjiii, I seem to he some body, that is, a man of consequence. "ESol* 
rt I'lTTuv, he seemed to say something great. 

Note 5. Sometimes the poets double rU. E. g. "'Ktrrt ns oh ^^ofu 
Sflra^T^jf TaX/f t/j, there is a certain city not far from Sparta. 

DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUN. 

§14:0« 1. OvTog and ods regularly denote that which 
is present or near in place or time, or something just men- 
tioned. E. g. Ovtog 6 ur^Q, this man. "^Ilds 17 yvvi^, this 
woman, la via uxovuag, hearing these things. 

Note 1 . OSros and olt are sometimes equivalent to the adverbs hritZB^a, tSit, 
here. E. g. Avtyi Vi eroi yris -ffi^iotos ^uffvi- *0^a» » A/Js ^sv 'A^nvai, 
Here t/iou hast a map of the whole earth. Seest thou F Here is Athens, 

2. 'ExeHvog regularly refers to a remote person or thing. 
E. g. Tovtovl yovv oid^ iyco, xaxstvovl, I know this one 
and that one. 

Note 2. 'Exuvog often refers to that which immediately 
precedes, in which case it corresponds to the English he. E. g. 
'Exslvog fix^ tov Tga/Mdixov &q6vov, he had possession of the 
tragic throne. 

Note 3. Sometimes the demonstrative pronoun refers to a noun which goes 
before in the same proposition, if that noun has been separated from the govern- 
ing word by intervening clauses. E.g. Tov ftavriv, 0; tlriTa t» trr^arty 

Tai/TJj, ^liyiffTinv tov 'A«a^y?va, tovto* tov s'tTavTa Ix tZv i^2» 

Tu. /u,iXkovTa tript ixdaivnv, <poc,vt^os iffTi Aiuvt%*is a.'jroTttfi.'Ttuv, it is evident that 
Leonidas tried to send away the soothsayer Megistias the Acarnanian, who 

followed this army, I mean the one who prophesied what would happen to 

them. 

Note 4. The demonstrative pronoun sometimes follows the 
relative in the same proposition. E. g. "ivdov noranov, og xqo^ 
xoduXovg dfVTiQog ovTog ■Jiniajj.MV ncxvitop nc/.Qt^sTai, the river 
Indus, which is the only river in the world, except one, that 
produces crocodiles. 



100 SYNTAX. [§ 150. 

RELATIVE PRONOUN. 

§ 100. 1. The relative pronoun agrees with the 
noun, to which it ^refers, in gender and number. 
Its case depends on the construction of the clause 
in which it stands. E. g. 

NsoHX£ld7]g, og iaxi xvq)l6g, Neoclides, who is blind. 

Miom Tioklxrjv, oarig ucpslnv naxQav ^gadvg nicpvxSj 1 

hate that citizen luho is slow to aid his country. 
Twv S cod EX a fiv ojv, ag ila^eg, Of the twelve mincB, which 

thou rectivecht. 

The word, to which the relative refers, is called the ante- 
cedent. 

This head includes also the relative pronominal adjectives 
(§ 73). E. g. ^'aXXol oaoig fisreart xov jK^TjaTov xQonov, as 
many others as possess a good character. 

Note 1. In some instances a masculine relative pronoun in 
the dual refers to a feminine noun. E. g. '^Hfiojv iv exdaxca dvo 
TLvs iaiov idea aQXorxs xal ayovxs, olv enofis&a, in each one 
of us there are two ideas governing and leading us, which 

we follow. 

Note 2. Sometimes the gender of the relative is determined by the gender 
implied in the antecedent. E. g. Ta; 'A^ rivets, o" <yt tfti xai ^a.r%^«. ret 
if/^v vTfio^a.v ahiTtet Tonvyrti, Athens, which city began first to injure me and 
my father, where el refers to the inhabitants of Athens. 

Note 3. The relative often agrees in gender and number 
with the noun which is joined to it by a verb signifying to call 
or name, to be, to believe, (§ 166.) E. g. *'Axqi]v, al xalsvvxaL 
Kli]'i8tg, a promontory, which is called Cleides. "O q)6^og, 
71 V aldb) eI'tio^ev, that kind of fear, which we called respect. 

2. If the relati ^ refers to two or more nouns, it is 
generally put in the plural. If the nouns denote animate 
beings, the relative is masculine when one of the nouns is 
masculine. If the nouns denote inanimate objects, the relative 
is generally neuter. ISi. g. Al'ag xal Tevxgog, ot fj.syiaxov sksy- 
Xov s8oaav xijg avxwv avSglag, Ajax and Teucer, who gave the 
greatest proof of their valor. UeqI noXsfiov not siQ'^vrjg, a 
psylarrjv b^si dvva^iv, concerning war and peace, which have 
very great power. 

Note 4. The relative often agrees in gender with one 



§ 150. J PRONOUN. 191 

of the nouns to which it refers. E. g. "AnakXccyivieg noXefxcov 
yal xiiSviMv xul raQa/i]c, slg tJv, x. t. X., being delivered from 
ivarSy dangers, and troubUj to which, <^'c. 

3. The relative is often put in the plural, when it refers 
to a collective noun in the singular. E. g. Asins laov ovq 
xdcpQoq sQvyfv, he left the people, whom the ditch kept back, 
nag Tig o/ijffft, olg ocpsikw, evei^ one, to whom I happen to 
owe money, swears. 

Remark. The relative is put in the plural also when it 
refers to a whole class of persons or things implied in a singu- 
lar antecedent. E. g. "dvijo, avjov g yog, oXtteq obl^ovai yrjv, 
a man of the working class, which class are the safety of the 
land. 

Note 5. The relative in the singular often refers to an 
antecedent in the plural, when one of the persons or things 
contained in that antecedent is meant. E. g. Ohog os tqooh 
^tXirfStiQ, og TS x«t alkovg ^Xuttisi, og av fiiv ;(avd6v i'Xrj, siveet 
wine affects thee, which injures whoever else takes it freely, 
where og refers to any person contained in aXXovg. 

4. The proposition containing the relative is often placed 
before the proposition which contains the antecedent, when 
the leading idea of the whole period is contained in the former. 
This is called inversion. E. g. Ovg av Twr Xoycov aXyo) y.XvojVy 
rovo8e xul TiQaaosiv oTvyo), J do not dare to do those things, 
which it gives me pain to hear. MdC,ov^ oaxig avil lilg avrov 
naxQug (plXov vo/uI^ei, tovtov ovdafiov Xsyoo, whoever thinks 
that he has a dearer friend than his own country, him I call a 
contemptible man. 

This inversion often takes place also for the sake of emphasis. 

Note 6. This remark applies also to the relative adverbs. 
(§ 123.) E. g. Ot <5' 0T£ S'r/ q' Xxixrov, o&l axonov "Exrogog 
txTuv, ev& ^Odvaasvg fiiv sqv^s wxiag iTi^^vg, and when they 
came there where they had killed the spy of Hector, then 
Ulysses stopped the swift hoy^ses. 

5. The antecedent is often omitted, when it is either a gen- 
eral word {xi^ri^u. TiQuy^u, oiTog, ixslvog), or one which can be 
easily supplied from the context. E. g. '14 ^ovXsad-s Xiyovxsg, 
saying what you like, where a refers to nquy^ara governed by 
Xeyorreg. To fisys&og, vnaQ o) v ovviXi]Xvd(i^tv, the magnitude 
of the business, for which we are assembled. 

So in the formula Elah oX Xayovaiv, there are who say. 



192 SYNTAX. [§ 151. 

Note 7. In some instances the antecedent is implied in a 
possessive pronoun. E. g. ^AvavdQia rrj ri^ixsQa, oXtLvsg as 
ov disawoaixev, through the cowardice of us, who did not save 
thee, where rjfxsxsfjoc is equivalent to '^fiav, to which the relative 
olTiveg in reality refers. 

§ 151, 1. In general, when the relative would 
naturally be put in the accusative, it is put in the 
genitive or dative, according as the antecedent is in 
the genitive or dative. This is called attraction. 
E.g. _ _ 

V_i';< TovTOJv, wv Xiyn, From these things, ivhich he says. 

Here mv stands for the accusative « after Xsysv. (§ 163. 1.) 
"jjiv avTolg olg inayyeU.ovjai, In those things which they 

profess. Here olg stands for « after inayysXXovTai. (ibid.) 

Remark 1. If the antecedent be a demonstrative pronoun, 
this pronoun is generally omitted (§ 150. 5), and the relative 
takes its case. E. g. 2'rsQyovrag olg av l^co^sv, for ^jsgyovxag 
iy.elroig, a av I'^MfiEv, being satisfied with what we have. 
"j'j^ifxEv i^ w V xvyxoivo^i.v ixovj^g, for £1 exslvcov, a xvyxavofisv 
%Xovxtg, ive go away from those possessions ivhich we happen to 
have. 

Remark 2. In attraction the noun joined to the relative 
pronoun by a verb signifying to call, to be, to believe, (§ 166,) 
also takes the case of the relative. E. g. Tovxmv, mv ov 
8 sano iVMv ya).t7c, for Tovtojj', ag ov deonolvag ifaXslg, of these, 
whom thou callest mistresses. 

Note 1. In some instances the relative, even when it would be in the nomi- 
native, is attracted by the antecedent. E. g. (Herod. 1, 78) OhViv x,u tl^oTti 
rav 'h •^2^' 2a^^<j, for Oy^iv xm il^ors; ixuvuv a. yjv "Tti^t 2ag^/5, asyetJcnow~ 
ing ?i.uthing of lohat happened in Sardes. 

Remark 3. The nominative of the pronominal olos is often attracted by the 
antecedent. E. g. H^l? av'^^a,; rcXfM^^ov;, o'lovs xai 'AB->ivcttavs, to 
daring men, such as the Athenians are, where o'lov; xai 'ABijvxiovs stands for 
o7oi Kx) 'AS-yiiccToi uffi. 

Remark 4. In some instances the personal pronoun, connected with oiosy 
remains in the nominative, though olo; has been attracted by its antecedent. 
E. g. Nsav/a? Ts, o'lavs ffv, ^ta.^i'S^xxoTcts, but young men, like thee, 
decamjnng, where olov; trv stands for oios <rh tT. 

Remark 5. 'Hxixos sometimes imitates olo; (§ 151. R. 3). E. g. *^xi7va 
htve\> rcTo-tv fiXtxeifft vuv, that is a hard thing to men of our years, where 
tik'ixciiri vMv stands for h^ixoi vu la-fMv. 



^ 152.] PRONOUN. 193 

Note 2. Relative adverbs (§ 123) also are attracted by the 
word to which they refer. E. g. 'Ex yiji, oS-sv n§ov)csiTo, 
from the place where it lay, where o&tv stands for o&i or onov, 

2. On the other hand, the antecedent is sometimes put in 
the case of its relative. E. g. 

MhlmyqoQ rag ^h ri^ag ug lla^s cpavfQul, The honors which 
Meleager received are well known, where cag n^ag stands 
for (xi Tiiual. 

Ova oiadix ^oiQug tj g ji'x^lir ctvTi]v xQ^^v ; Know est thou not 
the fate lohich she must meet ? for fiolgav rjg. 

Note 3. The same is true of relative adverbs. E. g. *^A- 
Xoae oTxoi av acflxj] ayccnrjooval as, they will love thee in 
other places whither thou mayest go, where aXXooe stands for 
uXXo&i or uklaxov. 

3. Very frequently, in case of attraction, the antecedent is 
put after its relative. E. g. 

KaTaaxevd^ovTa rjg ugxoi /co^«j, for Karaantvu^ovTO, rrjv x(^- 
gav, '^g uqxoi, Improving the country, which he governed. 

Remark 6. Frequently the principal words are attracted by, 
and placed after, the relative. E. g. OI'x^tocl cpsvytov, ov riysg 
[lUQTV Qa, for 'O fidgrvg, ov rjyBg, ol'xncct^ g)svya)v, the wit- 
ness whom you brought has decamped. Ol nalaLol exuvoi, 
(OV ovofiara (.isydla Xsysxai inl aocploc, Umuyov rt xai Blav- 
tog, those ancient persons, Pitiacus and Bias, who are re- 
nowned for wisdom, where mv attracts only the proper names. 

Remark 7. The antecedent may be placed after its relative 
even when apparently no attraction takes place. E. g. "Aiiocpv- 
yoig av iJvtlv' txv 6ovh] dlxrjv, you can get clear in any 
lawsuit you please. 

Note 4. Sometimes only the adjective belonging to the antecedent is placed 
after the relative. E. g. Aoyov; uKovirav, oug ffoi ^vfTV^sTs n^cu tpi^av, for 
Aeyov; ccxoutrov ^vtrrv^iTs, evg ffoi ^ku tpi^&iv, hear the melancholi/ news which I 
have brought to thee. 

§ 1 5S. The relative pronoun often stands for the demonstra- 
tive pronoun, especially in the Epic language. E. g. JlocTgoxXov 
icXulcofiEy ' o yvcg yegag iarl &av6i'T(ov, let us mourn Patroclus^ 
for this (that is, to mourn) is honor to the dead. 

So in the formula og (xh.... og di, equivalent to 6 fiiv..., 
6 8i, (§ 142 1.^ 

17 » 



194 SYNTAX. [§§153-156. 

So in the formula Kal og, for Kal oltog. E. g. K(x\ og, ajx- 
^(loaag y,sy(x, avoc&QOjaxiL, and he, uttering a loud cry , jumps up. 
So in the formula 'h8' og, said he, used parenthetically. 

Note 1. Frequently the relative is apparently put for the 
demonstrative. E. g. (II. 10, 314, etseq.) V/>' 8& xig iv Tgcosaat 

JoXmv, Ev^uridsog vlog, 6'^ ^a tots Tgcoalv tb xal '^'Ektoql /iV- 

■d^ov ssmsv, there was among the Trojans a certain Dolon, son 

of Eumedes, that man, I say, spoke to the Trojans and 

to Hector. 

Note 2. This rule (§ 152) applies also to the relative ad- 
verb w?. (§ 123. N. 1.) 

§ 153. The relative often stands for the interrogative rig, 
but only in indirect interrogations. E. g. tpqa^u to* vuvyiXi^Qca 
otJTig toTt, he declares to the captain of the vessel who he is. 

" Note. "Oazig is particularly used when the person, who is 
asked, repeats the question before he answers it. E, g. (Aristoph, 
Nub. 1496) "AvOQiom, Ti TioLug ; 2TP. "O xi noiw ; Man, what 
are you doing ? Str. What am I doing ? 

§ 154. Frequently the relative has the force of the con- 
junction %va, in order that, that. E. g. Ugsa^elav nipnEiv, 
ijTig Tavi (Qsl, to send an embassy to say these things. 

RECIPROCAL PRONOUN. 

§ 155. The reciprocal pronoun regularly refers to the 
subject of the proposition in which it stands, which subject is 
either in the dual or plural. E.g. Totavra ngog ukX-^lovg 
a/oQsvov, such things were they saying to one another. 

Note. Sometimes a>.X«Xwv stands fpr layr^y. E. g. A/si^S-s/aav aXXjjXflWf, 
they destroyed themselves, that is, each destroyed himself. 

SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 

§ 15G. 1. The subject o^ a proposition is that of which 
any thing is affirmed. The predicate is that which is affirmed 
of the subject. E. g. ^AXiiL(SLd8r)g nusv, Alcibiades said, where 
^Alici^iddrjg is the subject of the proposition, and sIttev, the 
predicate. 'jEyco axolpog u^i, I am timid, where iyia is the sub- 
ject, and axoX^og tlpi,, the predicate. 

2. The subject is either grammatical or logical. 



^ 157.] SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 195 

The grammatical subject is either a substantive or some 
word standing for a substantive. 

The logical subject consists of the grammatical subject with 
the words connected with it. E. g. in the proposition ^Aiiovaaq 
tuvTa 6 KvQog fnd&no, Cyrus ^ hearing these things, was 
persuaded, KvQog is the grammatical, and anovaag twvtw o 
Kv^og, the logical subject. 

^ 157. 1. The SUBJECT of a finite verb 

is put in the nominative. 

A finite verb agrees with its subject-nominative 
in number and person. E. g. 

'jSy w Xiyoa, I say. 

2v Xb/sig, Thou say est. 

^ExBlvog Xiysi, He says. 

2. The nominative of the neuter plural very often takes the 
verb in the smgular. E. g. 

Ta ffTQUTsviiocTa ayatvl^ETai, The armies are fighting. 
Tavxa iyivno, These things happened. 

Note 1. Sometimes masculines and feminines dual or plural take the verb in 
the singular. E. g. HasvSa) xofjt.ai zecTtvvvoS-iv uf^au;, her auburn hair 
was Jlotving over her shoulders. 'II/u,7v oux ttrn ««^«' i» (po^fiiios ^ovXm 
Ta^uppi^ravyn roTg 3-(u/u,%voii, we do not exhibit two slaves throwing nuts 
out of a basket to the spectators. 

So in the phrase "Rffriv el, (§ 150. 5,) there are who. 

3. If the verb belongs to more than one subject, it is put 
in the plural and in the chief person. The chief person is 
the first with respect to the second or third, and the second 
with respect to the third. E. g. 

Tots firjr lomvto Hoasid dojv y.al AnoXXav TSi%og a^aX- 
dvrai. Then Neptune and Apollo resolved to demolish the 
wall. 

Note 2. Frequently the verb agrees in number with one of 
the substantives, and especially with that which stands nearest 
to it. E. g. 2vv d' EvQog zs NoTog x snsas, ZicpVQog te dvanrjg, 
xal BoQsrjg, Eurus and Notus rushed together, the blustering 
Zephyrus and Boreas. 

Remark 1. The verb is often put in the dual, if it belongs 
to two substantives in the singular. E. g. '// XvQonounri x«t ^ 
XLd^aQLOTLxr) noXv 8 LacpsQtTov aXXriXoiv, the art of making lyres y 
and the art of playing on the harp, differ much from each other. 



196 



SYNTAX. 



L§ 157. 



Note 3. When the substantives are connected by the con- 
junction ^, or, the verb is put either in the plural or in the 
singular. E. g. JEi dd x ^Agrjg aQ%(aat |U«/??^, r? (Poi^og ^AnoX- 
Xm-y hut if Mars commence the Jight, or Phoebus Apollo. ""Ov 
x£v iyia a/dyta, 'tj allog 'Aj^oclcjv, whom I or any other of the 
AchcDans may bring. 

4. A collective noun in the singular very often has the verb 
in the plural. E. g. 

To nXri&og ol'ovxai. The multitude think, 
fpaaav ^ nXtj&vc, The multitude spake. 

This rule applies also to the pronominal adjectives sxccotos 
and aXXog. E.g. ''E^^XXov kd^ea&ai ogxv^'ov ex aaxogs dixa 
dgaxiJ-dg, each person ivas to have for his share ten drachmm. 

Note 4. A noun in the dual often takes a plural verb. 
E. g. ^(jD w ff a w ff € T f , you two will save. 

On the other hand, a noun in the plural takes a verb in the 
dual, when only two persons or things are meant. E. g. 
(II. 3, 278-9) Ot Tvvva&ov, you tzco who punish, where at 
refers to Pluto and Proserpine. 

Note 5. The nominatives iyta, vm, ^fing, are of the first 
person ; av, acpco, vinf7g, are of the second person ; all other 
nominatives are of the third person. 

The nominatives of the first and second person are usually 
not expressed, except when emphasis is required. 

Note 6. The verb which agrees with the relative pronoun 
is in the first or second person, according as the antecedent is 
of the first or of the second person. E. g. ''llfilv ov S^vsts, 
aXrivsg tt] qov ^ev v/udg, you do not sacrifice to us, loho pre- 
serve you. ^A^hTQriT ^Ar]Q, og i%£ig TrjV yr/V periagov, O thou 
immeasurable Air! who holdest the earth suspended. 

So when the antecedent is implied in a possessive pronoun 
(^ 150. N. 7). E. g. 'Avavdgia rtj rj p STsgci, olitivig ae ov 
dieat6aap8v, through the coioardice of us, who did not save 
thee. 

Remark 2. Any noun which is in apposition with the omitted personal pro- 
noun (§§ 136 : 157. N. 5) of the first person, may have the verb in the first 
person. E. g. 0£(«/<rTflxX?j ii»u •^rtx.^a, ci, I, Themistocles, have co7ne to thee. 

Note 7. Sometimes the verb agrees in number with the nominative in the 
predicate (§ 160. 1). This takes place chiefly when the nominative in the pred- 
icate precedes the verb. E. g. *E<rTflv ^uo Xo(pea h 'Hof/ivn i-^pnXeu, equivalent, 
to h 'llof/Avfi iffr) 'Svo X'o<pu v-^t^ku, Idomene is tioo high hills. 



§ 158.] SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 197 

Note 8. The third person of a verb is often found without 
a subject, 

(1) When any thing general and indefinite is expressed. 
E. g. Ov8i xsv tvd^a TfoV ;'£ ^livoi; yal xn^ccg ovono, SC. Tig, 
even here no one would Jind fault with thy valor and strength 
yiiyovai or cpnal so. av&Qomoi, they say. 

Frequently the word nqay^a is to be supplied. E. g. JrjXa- 
&ri(jBTai, the thing tcill shoio itself. Ovrag sx^h i^ ^^ so. noX- 
Xov dsl,iticantsjnuch,farfj-07}iit. Jsi^st 871 idx«, the event 
will soon shoiv. 

(2) When the verb indicates the employment of any person, 
the word denoting that person is generally omitted. E. g. 
^ExriQV^E ToUg "/r/.Xijoi naQaaxivdaaad^ai, SC. o ariqv^, the herald 
proclaimed to the Greeks to prepare themselves. Tov v6[xo> 
v/nTv avTov uvayvoa a siai, SC. ygaj-ificcrevg, the secretary shali 
read to yon the laio itself 

(3) Frequently the verb is changed into the third person 
singtdar passive, and its subject-nominative into the dative 
(§ 206. 2). E. g. To7g noXffxloig EvtvxriTai, for Ol noXi(xiot 
ivii'xrjycaaiy the enemy have snccecdcd. Kcclbig aoi ansxixQLTO. 
for KaXwg unsyJy()iao, thou hadst answered ioell. 

(4) The subject of verbs denoting the state of the weathei 
or the operations of nature is not expressed. E. g. "r? t, it rains- 
Nicpsi, it snows. "j£a£iae, there loas an earthquake. HiioHOTa^u, 
it grows dark. 

Note 9. Frequently the subject of a proposition becomes 
the immediate object (§ 163. 1) of the verb of the preceding 
proposition. E. g. (InQi vvv ad^Qiqaw tiqwiov tovtovi, xt 
dr^n, for flisQs vvv a&Q^a(o, o ri dgix ovzoai, now let me see first 
what this fcUo20 here is doing. 

Note 10. The verb ufxl, am, is very often omitted, but 
chiefly when it is a copula (§ 160. 1). E. g. "Hqu anuvai, sc. 
iait, it is time to go. 

Remark 3. Other verbs also may be omitted, but only when 
they can be supplied from the context. 

Note 11. The nominative is often used for the vocative. 
E.g. (lilXog, for (hlXi., friend. 

^ 15 8. 1. The SUBJECT of the infinitive 
MOOD is put in the accusative. E. g. 

BovXiads avTov iX&eTv ; Do you wish hi7n to cornel Here 
the accusative avtov is the subject of the infinitive eX&eTv. 
eIvoll Steovg ivofii^sv, He believed that there are gods, 
fpaah avTov ^aaiXevsiv, They say that lie reigns. 
17* 



108 SYNTAX. [^ 158. 

2. The subject of the infinitive is not expressed 
when it is the same with the subject of the pre- 
ceding proposition. E. g. a 

OlfittL EVQTjxipai, I think I have found. Here the sub- 
ject (^s) of fVQTjKsvai is not expressed because it refers to 
the subject {f'yM) of o7//ai. 

TvcpVoc; yvMvaL doxil tovto^ A Mind man seems to knoto this. 

'j'^Tci &vfxa) dno^usQ fiTi QLuat, I toish to doze. 

Note T. Sometimes the accusative of the personal or reflexive jyronoun is 
expressed before the infinitive, contrary to the preceding rule (§ 158. 2). E. g. 
'E^ai (pnf^i ktXcc(r/u.iva)) 'i fit vat uXxyss, I say that I have forgotten my valor. 

Note 2. The subject of the infinitive is frequently put in 
the case of the subject of the preceding independent proposi- 
tion. This takes place chiefly when both subjects refer to the 
same person or thing. E. g. 

No^li^SLg rifiuq y.h avit^ad^al aov, avTog ds TvnT^asiv; 
Dost thou imagine that ice shall tolerate thee, and that 
thou canst strike ? Here aviog stands for aavTov, 
EfXE oXiad-' Vfuv ElaolasLV, vfislg Ss vsixsla&ai; Do you 
think that I shall contribute, but that you ivill enjoy the 
contribution? Here viiug stands for v^iag. ' 

So^'jEcprjaS^ a KqovIojvl ol'i] Xoiyov u fivv at, thou saidst that 
thou alone avertcdst destruction from the son of Saturn. Here 
©r?^ stands for oiav agreeing with oi understood. 

Note 3. Frequently the subject of the infinitive is wanting 
even when it is different from that of the preceding independ- 
ent proposition, E. g. Ur^ixovaiai na^mo^iai., ndoxsiv aXysi^ 
v.alaiv, I am affiictcd loith sujfcrings painfid to endure, where 
the subject of nanx^iv (rim understood) is different from that 
6£ xufiTiTOfiau (See also § 219. N. 3.) 

3. The subject of the infinitive is not expressed 
also when it is the same with the object of the pre- 
ceding proposition. E. g. 

"EdEiro avxMV /Sorjd-elv efxol, He prayed them to aid me. 
Here the subject (amovg) is not expressed, because it re- 
fers to the object {avrwv) of idslTo (§ 181). 

naQriyyHUv ri(xlv ya^svdstv, He commanded us to sleep. 
Here the subject {^juag) of xa&svdsiv is omitted because it 
is the same with the object {^]^lv) o^ naQi^yyedsv (§ 196. 2). 

^'Avd^s dv(o zehvo(j,ev aXXi^loji' nstg^d rjvai, TVe request 



§§ 159, 160.] SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 199 

two men to try each othcr^s skill. In such instances the 
accusative denoting the object of the verb (§ 163) must 
not be mistaken for the subject of the infinitive. 

Note 4. A participle agreeing with the omitted subject of 
the infinitive is very often put in the accusative. E. g. 'Eya 
Vfiwv diofini xuTaifjrjcploaa&ccL 0iOfxri]aTOV, ir&vixovfxi^ 
vovg, on, ovk uv yirouo toi'toi' fisi'^cov ayuv ^oi, I beseech you 
to condemn IVieomjicstus, when you consider that I could not 
have had a severer tin al than this, ^evla i^xsir naQrjyysds, 
Xa^ovxa tovc urdgag, he requested Xenias to take the men and 
come. (§158.3.)' 

Note 5. When the infinitive has the force of a neuter sub- 
stantive (§§ 159. 2 : 221), its subject is frequently omitted, in 
which case the accusative of rig or avrog is to be supplied. 
E. g. jQfxv xavxa xQ^y sc. rtva, one must do these things. 

§ 1^9. 1. In general, any word or clause may be the 
subject of a proposition. E. g. 

fl>lyt0 i-tiv ioTLV uqxv ^o^ yay.ov, The word ^lAO indeed is the 
beginning of the evil. 

2. Particularly, the subject of a proposition may be an 
hifinitive with the words connected with it. E. g. 

ITq6/siq6v eativ inaiviaai ttjv ageii^v, It is easy to praise 
virtue. Here Fuairioat rr^v aQ^rrjV is the subject of the 
proposition. 

Note 1. The subject o( del, doxel, irdi/srai, irqinu, ngoa^xH, 
ov^^^alvH, x^r\, and some others, is generally an infinitive. 
E.g. 

A hi l^e Xiye IV, I must say, or It is necessary that I should 
say. Here ifik XiyEiv is the subject of 8u. 

Note 2. Verbs, of which the subject is an infinitive are called impersonax. 
Such verbs must not be confounded with those, of \vhich the subject is not 
expressed (§ 157. N. 8}. 

3. The subject of an infinitive is frequently another infini- 
tive with the words connected with it. E. g. Ov cpr^oi XQV~ 
vat rovg viovg rr^v yXmaoav uaxelv, he says that young men 
ought not to exercise the tongue, where rovg viovg Tr}v ylojoar 
uay.Eiv is the subject of xgJjvuL (§ 159. N. 1, 2). 

§ 160. 1. The PREDICATE, like the subject (§ 156. 2), 
!« eitjier grammatical or logical. 



200 SYNTAX. [§161. 

The grammatical predicate is either a verb alone, or a verb 
(commonly a verb signifying to be, to be called), and a sub- 
stantive, adjective, pronoun, or participle. In the latter case, 
the verb is called the copula. 

The logical predicate consists of the grammatical predicate 
with the words connected with it. E. g. Y/y KavdavXrjg tv- 
Quvvog 2:<x^dl(av, Candaules was king of Sardes, where '^v 
TVQm'vog is the grammatical, and yv rvqawog 2aQ5l<av, the logical 
predicate. 

" 2. A substantive in the predicate is put in the same case as 
the subject when it refers to the same person or thing. (§ 136.) 

"Eyo) elfii nlovtog, I am Plutus, Here iZAovro? agrees in 

case with iyw. / 
^IIv KaydavXtjgTVQttvvog ^aQdl<ov, Candaules was king 

of Sardes. Here rvgawog in the predicate agrees with 

the subject Kav8avlrig in case. 

3. The gender, number, and case of an adjective, standing 
in the predicate, and referring to the subject, are determined 
by § 137. E. g. 

"Eyui a& avaxog el^i, I um immortal. 

Bovksa&e avxbv ytviis&ai G0(p6v; Do you wish him to be- 
cojne wise ? 

. Note 1. When the subject is any word but a nominative 
(§ 159), the adjective or pronoun in the predicate is neuter 
(commonly neuter singular), E. g. Ov dlxaiov ean xovg 
jcQsiTTovg TMv ^TTovMv KQx^'''^ i ^^ *^" ^^^ right, that the stronger 
should rule the weaker. 

Note 2. Frequently a neuter adjective in the predicate 
refers to a masculine or feminine noun. E. g. ^lXoLuxiotov 
yvvri iari, woman is a very tender-hearted thing. 

In such cases, the word ngay^u is sometimes expressed. 
E. g. rvvalxct d' nvav TXQoiyfi tcpri vov^vaxixov , but wO' 
man, he said, is a prudent thing. 

§ 101. 1. When the subject of the infinitive is not ex- 
pressed (§ 158. 2, 3), the substantive or adjective, standing in 
the predicate and referring to the omitted subject, is generally 
put in the case, in which the subject has already appeared. 
E. g. 

■ "SLXQCi sXvaL doxug, Thou seemest to be pale. Here the ad- 
jective is put in the nominative on account of av with 
which doxslg agrees (§ 157. N. 5). 



§ 162.] OBJECT. 201 

Kvgov idiovjo ngo&vfiOTaTOV yevi&ai, They besought 

Cyrus to he very eager. 
JiaxekevaofiaL Tolg iovaiv slrat n qo&v /xot(xto ig, J will 

comrnand those loho go to he very eager. 

Note. This construction (§ 161. l) may take place also when the infinitive 
has the article before it (§ 221). E. g. 'O A<V;^;t/ A aj ToiXiv cc'^ttiriv o7xaiSt, 
ha TO ffuvtrof tlyai, ^schylus returns home because he is wise. 

It takes place also when the infinitive comes after the particle uart (§ 220\ 

Also when the infinitive depends on a participle (§ 219). E. g. HoXKo) 

Tuv fe^ofvroi*i«ritfitivcov bTvoh ffetpKr-TcHv, for TLoXXa) ixtivuv o? ?r^a<rs- 

7roirt(ra.tro uvai ffo(pi<rriti, many of those who pretended to be sophists, (§ HO. 3.) 

2. When a proposition is made the subject of another propo- 
sition (§ 159. 2, 3), the substantive, adjective, or participle in 
the predicate or subject of the former proposition is often put 
in the case of the noun which is in the predicate of the latter. 
E. g. 'E(p' 71 ^Iv i'azat to initixia l koI qxxvXoig sir at, for 
To rjucig iniHHug nal qxxvXovg eIvul Uaxau ecp' ^^Iv, to he respecta- 
ble or worthless will depend upon us, where the proposition to 

enieixiai slvai is the subject, and cqp' ^ixlv saxat, the 

predicate. 

In such cases the predicate always precedes the subject. 
Further, this takes place only when the attracting word in the 
predicate is in the dative. 

OBJECT. 

§ 103. 1. That on which an action is exerted, or to 
which it refers, is called the object. 

The object is put in the accusative, genitive, or dative. 

2. Participles and verbal adjectives in rsoi/ 
(^ 132.2) are followed by the same case as the 
verb from which they are derived. . 

For examples, see below. .'^-^^^^^^^ 

Note 1. The verbal in tsov with sotI (expressed or under- 
stood) represents del (§ 159. N. 1) and the infinitive active or 
middle of the verb from which it is derived. E. g. 

axovco, hear, axovoTsov equivalent to dsT axovsiv, one must hear. 

fitfiiofiaL, imitate, ^i^tjtsov equivalent to del ^ifiEio&ai, one 
must imitate. 

In some instances it represents dn and the infinitive passive. 
E. g. riTxdo^ai, am surpassed, ^tti^tcW, one must be surpassed. 



203 SYNTAX. [§§ 163, 164. 

Note 2. The neuter plural of the verbal adjective in jsov 
is often used instead of the singular. E. g. axovarict for 
axovoTsov. 

3. Any word or clause may be the object of a verb. E. g. 
KvQog exslvco dwga edaxs, Xmiov XQy(Jox<ihvov, xal argsTiTov j^^v- 
aovv, Tcal xrjv x^Qo^^ (irjuiri agndC^a^at, Cyrus gave him 
presents, a horse with a golden bridle, a golden necklace, 
and that the country should no longer be plundered, where the 
proposition Ttjv x^jgav firjxiTv agndc^ea&ai is one of the objects 
of sdcQxs. 

ACCUSATIVE. 

^163. 1. The immediate object of a transitive 
VERB is put in the accusative. E. g. 

Tavra noiw, I do these things. 

HoiT^aag tavxa. Having done these things. (§ 162. 2.) 

no I TIT so V Tuvra, One must do these things, (ibid.) 

2. Many verbs, which are intransitive in English, are transi- 
tive in Greek. E. g. "'A^avaxovg aXitia&at, to sin against 
the immortals. 

Verbs of this class are ahtalvca, anodidgaaata, dogvcpoQEW, 
eTiiognio}, ofivvfiL, eTiiTgoTisvco, Xav&av(a, and many others. 

§ lG4t. The accusative of a substantive is often joined to 
a verb of which it denotes the abstract idea. (§ 129.) In 
this case the accusative is generally accompanied by an adjec- 
tive. E. g. 

neastv mwiiax ovx avaox^Ta, To fall an insupportable 

. M- 

'Hi^av dgo^rj^a dsivov, They rushed furious ly. 

So in English, To die the death of the righteous. To run 
a race . 

Note 1. A substantive is, in the poets, often joined to a verb signifying to 
see, to look, (liXi-Tta, Vi^KoftAi, Xivffffu, o^au,) to mark the expression of the look. 
E.g. ^'afiov {iXiveav, looking terrible. 'H IBovXh ^/SXt-v^s ycirv, the 
Senate looked mustard, that is, looked displeased. 

Sometimes the substantive Vi^y/jia is to be supplied after these verbs. E. g. 
Kxi^rrov fixi^ti, he looks thievish. 

Note 2. Verbs signifying to conquer (as vmaca) are often 
followed by the accusative of a noun denoting the place or 



§ 165.] ACCUSATIVE. 203 

nature of the conquest. E. g. Muxrjv vixiiv, to gain a battle. 
'OXvfinicc vsvixtjxwg, having conquered in the Oli/jnpic games. 
The nouns following verbs of this description are chiefly 
a/fov, yrw^ri, fia;(i], vav^uaxta, noXi^og. Also the names of the 
public games, 'OXv^nia, Ilvdia, JYefiea, ^'la&^ia. 

Sometimes an accusative denoting the name of the person 
conquered is added. E. g. MdrLadrjg 6 zrjr ev MaqnOwvi fia^ 
Xtjv Tovg (Saol^dgovg vixrioag, Miltiadts who conquered the 
barbarians at the battle of Marathon. 

^ 165. 1. Verbs signifying to ask, to teach, to take 
away, to clothe, to unclothe, to do, to say, and some 
others, are followed by two accusatives, the one of 
a person, and the other of a thing. E. g. 

TavTu fi£ sQ a lag, Thou askest me about these things. 

Alzitv xov drifxov cpvXaxdg, To ask guards of the people, 

Tov drj^ov ;^Xatv«v rj ixTtia/ov, I clothed the people with 
robes. 

Verbs of this class are aUioj, u^nixwy d^cpiivwfii, dvayxu^w, 
avadaw, anaiTSO), anoarfgio}, aqinigsopai, diddaxco, dgdo), sxXsyat, 
ix8vv(o, ivdvvb), i^aigiofiai, e^emnr, i^srdCa, sgda or qe^oj, egyd- 
^Ofiai, tgofiat, igwido), xgvnTb), Xeyco, naidivoi, nsi&oi, TtiTiloxa, 
nouo), ngdaaofiai, aTsq)av6co, ovldw, and a few others. 

Note 1. Sometimes the accusative of the thing denotes the abstract of the 
verb (§ 164), E. g. 'O ^uxntos vfoXtfio; ittfAvvfov Taioiiav auTous 
tTai^tuTty, the Phocian war taught them an ever memorable lesson. ''Eaiu- 
rov Xu^arai Xufitiv avinxiO'roVf he injures himself incurably. 

Note 2. Frequently verbs signifying to do, or to scit/, are 
followed by an accusative and the adverb sv, well, or y.axug, 
hadly. E. g. Toyg cpUovg ev noLovai, they do good to their 
friends, where iv noiovoL is equivalent to dya&d noiovai. Ka- 
xiag key ova IV ol dya&ol rovg xaxovg, the good speak 
ill of the bad, where xaxwg Xeyovat, is equivalent to x«xa 
Xsyovai. 

Note 3. Sometimes the word denoting the person is put in the dative (§ 196. 
4), E.g. TLokXa Kcix' ai^^uvotfftv iu^yii, he did much evil to men. 
M»Siv aya^iv ^oirirxs tJj vro'Xii, having done no good to the state. 

Remark. 'Aroo'Ti^ia, and, in the later writers, a<peii^%ofi,a,i, are often followed 
also by the accusative of the person and the genitive of the thing. (§ 181 . 2.) 

2. Verbs signifying to divide take two accusatives. E. g. 
To ajgdj sv fxa xaxiv el^e d(ad sxa [^igt], he divided the 
army into twelve parts. 



204 SYNTAX. [§§ 166, 167. 

The preposition sk: is often found before the accusative 
denoting the number of parts. E. g. ^Jcpiag avrovg eg t^ 
[^oigag d lelXov, tJiey divided themselves into six parts. 

Note 4. Sometimes the noun denoting the thing divided is put in the geni- 
tive (§ 173 , and depends on the accusative denoting ihe parts. E. g. AtuXe- 
fttS-oe, T?s il^euXo-roitx?,; tJ'5>j Ivo, equivalent to AiuXof^iB'a tjjv illaXa- 
^ouKYiv j/V «"2>J ^y«, we divided the art of making images into two parts. 

§ 16@. Verbs signifying, to name or call, to choose, to 
render or constitvte, to esteem or consider, are followed by two 
accusatives denoting the same person or thing. E. g. 

Zr QazTjy 6v avrov aned s i^sv, He appointed him general. 

Tov vlov Inns a ed l 8 d^aTo a/cc&ov, He caused his son 
to be brought uj) a good horseman. 

Note I. In the passive such verbs become copulas (§ 160. 1). E. g. 
^T^BCTftyi; a.-xchi;)(^B-ij, he was appointed general. 'O vlcg l^/^a^^^jj iTr-nvs 
ayoc^'oi, the son was brought up a good horseman. (§ 206. 1.) 

Note 2. Frequently the infinitive tJvai is expressed before the second accu- 
sative. E. g. ^otpia-riiv uvof^d^ova-i rov av^^ec, ilvai, they call him a 
sophist, or rather, thei/ say that he is a sophist. 

So in the passive, 'At£^s;i;S-;j rns 'Ir^ou iTvxt 'l^va^x'^i ^^ ^^ 'ap- 
pointed master of the horse. 

^167. The accusative is very often used to 
limit any word or expression. E. g. 

KgoToog rjv Av8og to yivog, Crozsus was a Lydian by birth. 

Here the accusative yhog limits or explains further the 

meaning of A\j86g. 
TavTu ijjEvdovTru, They lie in these things. 
"li S-aXaooa ovdsv ylyvsjai nXeioiv, The sea does not become 

larger, literally The sea becomes larger in nothing. 
The accusative thus used is called the synecdochical 

ACCUSATIVE. 

Remark. The neuter accusative t/ (from rig) often means 
for what ? why ? E. g. Tl xavxa juav&uvco, for tohat am I 
learning these things ? 

Note 1. Here belong most of the accusatives which commonly are said to 

be used adverbially (§ 124). 

Note 2. Hither we may refer parenthetical phrases like 
the following. To X^yoptvov, as the saying is. To rov '^Op^- 
gov, as Homer has it, or according to Homer. Ilav jovvaviiov, 
on the contrary. 



§ IGS.] ACCUSATIVE. 205 

Note 3. Sometimes the preposition xxra- or ils is used before this accusative. 
E. g. KaS«^fli' xa.) xara to a-uf/,cc xai xaru Tnv '*^w;^>9v, pure in body 
and in soul. AUZc a^itvuTy,<rt Si^j ilt utcl iotxtv, she astonishingly re- 
sembles the immortal goddesses in looks. 

Note 4. The accusative is sometimes subjoined to a clause 
in order further to qualify the contents of it. E. g. Kal fis 
■d'ljTEVSiv naiTjQ ^vriT(Jo naq^ ard^Ji, iwrd cctioiv , Tjvuyxixotv, and 
the father compelled me to serve ivith a mortal moji as a recom- 
pense for these. T(x) naide tw aw fxtXXsTov, ToA^Tj^uaz' al'axtoTa, 
fiovofiaxstv, thy ttco soils are about to fght a duel, a most dis- 
graceful act, where joXfuiJixara qualifies tw nalds tco o(o ^DIbtov 
(lovo^axiiv. JEyco d civ, amf] d^oif-idxiov dsixivg to8}, ngoqia- 
aiv, i(pttaxor, and I, showing to her this garment here, as a 
pretext said. 

§ 168. 1. A noun denoting duration of time 
is put in the accusative. E. g. 

J in a I'ttj y.oinmvxuL, They sleep ten years. 

TovTov fxsja ^traXy.ovg intvov rov XQOvov, During this 

time I was feasting with Sitalces. 
nolvv xQovov v^Qixs, He has insulted a long time. 

2, Frequently the accusative answers to the question when ? 
E. g. 'EvTfiluixivog rrjv ojqtjv enuyivesiv ocplot rag alytxg, com- 
manding (him) to bring the goats to them at the regular time. 

Note 1. When the substantive is accompanied by an ordinal 
number [^ 61), it denotes duration of time past. E. g. "Ewd- 
T7JV 7ifiEQav yfyaj^7]fi£V7]v, mari'ied nine days ago, or having 
been married nine days. 

Also when it is accompanied by cardinal numbers. E. g. 
"O? Tidvr^y.E -lavza. xqla I' x tj, who has been dead these three 
years. 

Note 2. Sometimes the accusative is equivalent to the 
genitive absolute (§ 192), particularly the following neuter 
accusatives : 8i8oy^iivov, dozovv, do^av, from doasa} ' ugrifxivov 
from 'PEJl ' e^ov from l^HfiL ' ov from d^l ' naqixov from na~ 
QiX^ ' TiQoaijxov from ngoaijxa} ' tv^ov from jvyxdiu ' and a few 
others. E. g. 

E^ov avxolg dnoSoiiaiv ^Elivriv nnriXux^ ai' Toav tiuqovtcov 
xocywv, Although it was in their power to give up Helen^ 
and be delivered from the impending danger. The con- 
struction of the clause ''e^ov avrolg xaxwv, in the 

indicative would be "E^eanv aviolg xaxuv, (§ 159. 

2, N. 1, 2.) 

18 



206 SYNTAX. [§§169-172. 

Note 3. Frequently, for the sake of emphasis, a preposition (chiefly i-rf) is 
placed before this accusative. E.g. 'E<t/ oxrai xa) s'/icotrt 'inu. ^^x^v rrts 
'AeriKi 01 Sxj/Sa/, the Scythians ruled Asia for eight and twenty years. 

^ 169. The accusative is used to denote ex- 
tent OF, SPACE. E.g. 

/JLsa/ov aXXrjXoiv TQidy-ovxa arddia, They Were thirty 

stadia from each other. 
2z ad lovg 8s tisvts y.al r eaa uq dxovT a diayofiloavTsg dnl- 

xovTo f? TO Iqov, And carrying (her) forty-five stadia they 

arrived at the temple. 

§ 1 TO, Sometimes the accusative answers to the question 

WHITHER? E. g. 

Al'/Xrj Tia^ipavobiaa 8i aidegog ovqavov ly.sv, The bright 

effulgence went to heaven through ether. 
"AyXadg i^ag 0^][3ag, Thou earnest to illustrious Thebes. 

§1^1. The accusative follows the particles of protesta- 
tion fid and v^. E. g. 

Ma ri]v 'Avanror^v, fid to Xdcg, fid xov ^Asga, By Breath, by 

Chaos, by Air. 
Nrj xov Iloaetdcj cfiXm as, By Neptune I love thee. 

NoTK 1. Ma is used only in negative, and vjj only in affirmative, propositions. 
But when val, yes, certainly, is placed before /««, the proposition is affirmative. 

NoTK 2. Sometimes ^« is omitted. E. g. Oh, t'ovV "OXy^?rav, no, by 
this Heaven. 

Note 3. Sometimes the name of the god sworn by is omitted after these 
particles, in which case the article of the omitted name is always expressed. 
E. g. Ma Tflv — lyu fih ev^' uv WiBofiriv, by — I should not believe it. 

^ 17S. The accusative is put after the following 

PREPOSITIONS. 

'Aficplf abouf, around. "Aficpl delXrjv, ah oid evening. ^Aficp* 
avxov, around him. So in connection with numerals. ^Aficpl 
id sxxaldEitn sxi] ysvofxfvog, being about sixteen years old. 

^Avd, on, in, through, throughout, during. ^Avd xov noXsfioVf 
during the war, throughout the war. 'Avd ax g a xov , in the 
army. ^Avd fivglxrjv, o?i a tamarisk. 

With numerals it means at the rate of, a-piece. ^Avd nsvxs 
nagaadyyag xrjg rjfisgag, at the rate of five parasangs a day. 

/jid, through, on account of, in. '''A vvv ocpslXoi did as, which 
I now owe on your account. /J id vvuxa, in the night. 

Elg, to, into. Elg KiXixlav , to Cilicia. 



§ 173.] GENITIVE. 207 

With numerals it generally means about. Elg xtrqa- 

xiaxi^iovg , about four thousand men. 

Frequently tig is found before a genitive, the noun, to 

which it properly belongs, being omitted. Eig naidorql- 

§ov, sc. oiy.or, to the teacher's house. 
*Enl, upon, against. ^Enl &q6vov, upon a throne. 'En 

avxdv, against him. 
Kara, according to, in relation to, in, on, near, during. Kara 

Tov "O fir] gov, according to Homer. Km a to aoo^a, in re- 
lation to the body. Kara tov noXsfxov, during the war. 
Merd, after. Msiu ds xavxa , and after these things. 
Hagd, to, besides, along, contra?^ to, on account of. Uagu 

KafijSvasa, to Cambyses. Hag a Tavra, besides these. 
After comparatives it means than, rsvolax av xal nag a 

TTiv h(avT(av cpvacv dfieivoveg, they might become superior to 

their nature, 
nigl, synonymous with d^cpL 
Hgog, to, in respect to, towards, llgog ndvxag , to all men. 

KaVog ngbg dgofiov, good in running, or a good racer. 
^Tnig, over, beyond, against. 'Tnsg xovg aXXovg, over the 

others. 
'Ttto, under, at. 'Tnb yr^Vy under the earth. 'Ttio ^IXlov, 

under Ilion. 
'Jlg, synonymous with elg. It is always placed before nouns 

denoting intelligent objects. 



GENITIVE. 

§ 173. A SUBSTANTIVE wMch limits the mean- 
ing of another substantive, denoting a different 
person or thing, is put in the genitive. E. g. 

To TSjxevog tov -d^Eov, The temple of the god. 

To V 'in ndgxov d^dvaxov , The death of Hipparchus. 

^Kv&av ^aaiXslg, Kings of the Scythians. 

This rule applies also to the personal, reflexive, and recipro- 
cal pronouns, and to the indefinite pronoun dslva. 

The genitive thus used has been called the adnominal 

GENBTIVE. 

Note 1. The adnominal genitive denotes various relations, 
the most common of which are those of possession, quality, 
subject, object, material, source, a whole, component parts. 



208 SYNTAX. [§§ 174, 175. 

Note 2. The adnominal genitive is called subjective when 
it is equivalent to the subject-nominative {'^ 157. 1). It is 
called objective when it denotes the object of an action (§ 162. 
1). E. g/'Egyov '^IIcfcclaTov , the loork of Vulcan, that tofiich 
Vulcan did, where the genitive is used subjectively, 'h axgo- 
ccaig TMv XsyovTMv, the act of hearing the speakers j where 
the genitive is used objectively. 

Note 3. A substantive is sometimes followed by two geni- 
tives denoting different relations. E. g. Tijv Us Ion eg and- 
aijg JjEXonovvrjaov xaTaXtjiipLv, the taking of the whole of 
Peloponnesus by Pelops. 

§ 174:. Possessive pronouns and adjectives implying 
possession, are frequently followed by a genitive, which is in 
apposition with the genitive implied in the possessive pronoun 
or adjective (§§ 67: 131. 1). E. g. 

Tov ifiov avTOV xov TaXainta gov ^lov, The life of me, 
a miserable man. Here avrov xov xalaintagov is in appo- 
sition with Enov implied in i^hv. 
rogytlriv xecpaXrjV, d sivolo nsXwgov, The head of Gorgo^ 
a terrible monster. Here rogyslTjv is equivalent to the 
genitive rogyovg with which nfXojgov is in apposition.. 

Note. Under this head belong the adjectives f^/aj, U^if, xoms, eixtTog- E. g. 
ToTs avTuv l^iois •Jt^oai^uv rh vovv, to attend to their private affairs, 'li^of 
yk^ ovTos ruv Kara ;^;3'avoj ^tuv, for he is consecrated to the infernal deities. 
"Efyov Koivov A.ax.i'ta.i^evtuv vi xa) 'AS- rivet i av, a work performed by 
the LacedcBinonians and Athenians in common. "A otKtTa rav xakSs /S«- 
fftXiuovTuv iff'Tiy which belong to those who rule well. 

^ 175. The genitive is put after verbs signify- 
ing to be, to belong, to denote the person or thing 
to which any thing in any w^ay belongs. E. g. 

'O Tialg viccxedaifiovlcav eoxl, The boy belongs to the 

LacedcBmonians. 
"Avoiag sgtI to S^rigaod-ai nevd, It is characteristic of folly 

to be in pursuit of vain things. 
Eivat ixwv rgioixovTa, To be thirty years old. 

Verbs of this class are yiyvo^at, Hy,i, xvgeo), nicpvxa and ecpvv 
from (pvM. 

Note 1. This genitive is often preceded by the preposition tr^af. E. g. 
At^iau 'pr^os a.'th^os itrrt, it is the characteristic of a man of parts* 

Note 2. Frequently the genitive after these verbs denotes 
the person or thing from which any thing proceeds. E. g. 
Jagslov xal IJagvaaTidog ylyvovtai naldsg dvo, of Da- 



§§ 176, 177.] GENITIVE. 209' 

rtus and Parysatis tioo children xocre horn, or Darius and 
Pary satis had two sons. OrrjTO v Ttecpvxag naxgog, thou 
art the offspring of a mortal father. 

Sometimes the genitive, in such instances, is preceded by tx. 
E. g. IUxxqh? iyt xavxov yr/oog, being born of the same father. 

Note 3. Frequently the adjective tTs or the pronoun t)s is to be supplied 
before this genitive (§ 175). E. g. Tovtuv ytvovy become one of these. 

§ 1 76. The neuter of the article followed by a substantive 
in the genitive denotes something to which that substantive is 
related. E. g. 

^/£fc (ft^eiv xa xb)v S^scjv, We must bear what comes from 
the gods. 

To Tov 'Ofi^Qov, That which Homer says. 

Note. This idiom gives rise to phrases like the following: 
T« xrjg oQ/iig, for *// oq/tJ, anger j wrath. To, xijg ifinuQlag, for 
"H ((xntiqla, experience. Ta xwv OextaXuv, for Ol Oexxaloi, the 
Thessalians. To x<av im&vfiic^v, for Al ini&vixiai, desires, 

^177. 1. Adjectives, pronouns, and ad- 
VER]^s, denoting a part, are followed by a genitive 
denoting the whole. E. g. 

'Eaaaxri xcov nolsfav, Each of the states. 

Ovdelg xav (isigaxlcav, No one of the young men. 

nov yrjg ; Wfiere on earth "? 

'O ri^iavg xov aqid^fiov, Half the number. 

Trjv nXslaxrjv rijg axQaxiag, The greatest part of the 
army. 

Trjg fiocQUijg av^vi^v, A good deal of coal-dust. 

This rule applies to the genitive after numerals (§§ 60 : 61 : 
62. 4), after interrogative, indefinite, demonstrative, ajid relative 
words (§§ 68-71 : 73 : 123), after superlatives, and m general, 
after any adjective or adverb designating a part. 

Note 1. A participle preceded by the article is often fol- 
lowed by the genitive. (§ 140. 3.) E. g. ol xaxaq>vy6vTsg 
avToiv, equivalent to ^Eauvoi avx^v ot yMxscpvyov, such of 
them as escaped. 

Sometimes ix is used in such cases. E. g. 'ex twv av&Qta^ 
71 Mv xdlg ti) Txgdxxovoi, to the prospering part of mankind. 

Note 2. The nature of the noun denoting the whole determines the numher, 
in which the genitive is put. 

18* 



210 SYNTAX. [§ 178. 

Note 3. The adjectives "haifAovios, "^Tos, rxKag, c^ivXtos, and a few others, are 
often followed by the genitive plural. E. g. AT* yvvaixav, divine ivoman. 
TaXa/ya 9 oc^^ivcav, unfortunate virgin. 'S^^^irkt' av^^uv, unfortunate 
man. 

It is supposed by many that the idea of superlativeness lies in these adjectives. 

2. Frequently the genitive denoting a whole depends on a 
neuter adjective, participle, or adjective pronoun. E. g. 
Msaov rjjiigocg, The middle part of the day. 
Tijg axQariTJg to noXXov, The greater part of the army. 
To TiTQttfi^Evov Twy ^ccQ^aQoov, Thc defeated part of 

the barbarians, 
Elg xovxo ttvd/xTjg, To this degree of necessity, 

KoTE 4. In some instances the neuter plural is used before this genitive 
(§ 177. 2), E. g."Afftif^u fioijsy for "Afft]f/,sv (io)is, indistinct noise. 

Note 5. The genitive of the reflexive pronoun often follows 
an adjective of the superlative degree ; in which case the 
highest degree, to which a person or thing attains, is expressed. 
E. g. ^Ots dsivoT at og a uvt ov rocvra tjad^a, when your skill in, 
these matters was highest. Trj bvqvtcItt] ioxl avirj stovTrjg, 
where it is widest. 

§ 178. 1. The genitive maybe put after* any 
VERB, when the action does not refer to the whole 
object, but to a part only. E. g. 

ni^insi TMv AvdMv, He sends some of the Lydians. But 

lltfiTTEi Tovg AvSovg, He sends the Lydians. 
Tcav xQSbJv sKksnrov, I stole some pieces of the meat. 
Aa ^ovx a r<av vatvicov, Taking some of the fillets. 

2. Particularly, the genitive is put after verbs 
signifying to partake, to enjoy, to obtain, to inherit. 

E.g. # 

MsTsxa d^Qaasog, I partake of courage. 

Trig 8vvd(j.eci)g xoivtavovai, They partake of the power. 

, Verbs of this class are avTidoi, dnoXavoi), div/ioj, Enavglaxo- 
paL, ulrjQOvofxio), xoivcavea), xvgeco, ^a/;farw, fiszakay/dvo}, ^ezaXafi^ 
^dvM, fisTEXoo, ovlvay^at, avvalgofiai, xvyxavM, and some others. 

Note 1. Sometimes ^f^oj, parf, is found after /«£TaXay;^«y«(» and ^tTi;j;». 
E.g. MsS-slf/v ri(peu fjci^o St about to partake of burial. 

'M.irix,u is also found with the accusative in which one participates. E. g. 
MsTsr;^g5 raff "aag -rXnya? ifcoi, thou didst receive the same number of 
stripes with me. 



^ 179.] GENITIVE. 2!^ 

' ATokeivai, A(«y,\;aviw, and TU'y;!(^a.vi» are often followed by the accusative. 
E.g. 'A-x-aXauiiv r t, to enjoi/ any thing, 'Ayxuva tv^uv, hitting the 
elbow. 

KXr^arofjLiu, inherit, In some instances takes the accusative of the thing in- 
herited. The name of the person of whom one inherits is put in the genitive, 
and depends on the thing inherited. E.g. KXr,^ovofjt,i7v ra x. t ri fjt. u. r a, 
Tives, to inherit the possessions of any one. Later authors put even the name 
of the person in the accusative. 

Note 2. The genitive in connection with ^heoTi and nqoa- 
ijxft depends on the subject (expressed or understood) of these 
verbs. E. g. Jlv jurjd ej' fiigog To7g novrjQoig fiSTEaTi,in ichich 
the wicked do not participate. Ovx ojno nQoai]y.(iv ovdsvl 
ocQ/TJg, he thought that no person ought to rule. 

Note 3. The preposition e| or tx is sometimes used before this genitive 
(§ 178. I). E.g. Attfiuv ix Tut artri^wv, taking some {or one) of the 
shields. 

^179, 1. Verbs signifying to take hold of, to 
touch, to feel, to hear, to taste, to smell, are followed 
by the genitive. E. g. 

yid^sa & s tovtov, Take hold of this man. 
"Atct ea&uL avTwr, To touch them. 

rivaai Trig ^vgag, Knock at the door, literally Taste of 
the door. 

Verbs of this class are alod-urofiat, a/oi, axovco, ay.Qodo^ai, 
amo^uai, ysvofiai, dgcxaaofxai, s/o/iiai, -d^iyyavw, xlvo), Xa{u^(xvofxai, 
o'^o), oacfQalvofiai, nsigdoi-iai, nvr&dro^cxt, xpavw, and some 
Others. 

2. Verbs signifying to take hold of are frequently followed 
by the accusative of the object taken hold of, and the genitive 
of the part by which it is taken. E. g. 'iiAa/SojTo t^? ^(avrig 
Tov 'OgovTTjv, they took Orontes hy the girdle. 

Note 1 . ^Kxovu and its synonymes, and B^tyyoi^u and y^aCu, are frequently 
followed b}' the accusative. E. g. 'A *«!;*•« j rauTa, hearing these things. 

Note 2. Frequently axovo) and its synonymes take that which is heard in the 
accusative, and that from which the thing heard proceeds, in the genitive. E. g. 
Tov ay^^a vuvB-ayev r<w» o'^ot^o^uv, inquire o^ the travellers about the 
man. 

Note 3. Ttvat, cau^e to taste, is followed by the accusative of the person, 
and the genitive of the thing. E. g. Tsunr avrev rtvos, to make him 
taste of any thing. 

Frequently this verb is followed by two accusatives. E. g. Ttvrtt ft 
tnl^v, I will give thee wine to taste. 



212 SYNTAX. [§§ ISO, 181. 

^ 180. 1. Verbs denoting to let go, to cease, 
to desist, to free, to miss, to separate, to escape, are 
followed by the genitive. E. g. 

TovTov fis&UaS^aL, To let this man go. 
^Aya^i^vbiv Iriy EQvdog, Agamemnon left off Ms wrath 
/Jisaxov aXXrilMv, They separated from each other. 

Verbs of this class are aXvaxw, ocfxaQxavta, afinXaxloyb), ans~ 
Xoixcci, anoXu-Jtoy,cii, uTioaTaTsot), acplefj,ai, 5t£^ft), slxto retreat, fx- 
(ptvyoj, eXXuTio), Xriyca, fx£&li]y,i commonly fxsdufiai, jus&tuTafiai, 
n(XQaxo)Qi(o, uvyxcoQeoo, cpsvyca, /(ogiMf and some others. 

2. Transitive verbs of this class are followed by the accusa- 
tive of the immediate, and the genitive of the remote, object. 
E.g. 

Jlavw ae tovtov, I make thee cease from this. 

Tfjv ^Aalr]v d lovgl^wv t^? Ai^vrjg, Separating Asia 
from Libya. 

Such verbs are a^vv(o, anaXXdoaco, anixM, a(plaTT}(ii, dioQt^ta, 
Bi'gyo), iXsv&sgob}, iQtjTva), xa&alQM, xcaXva, Xvoi, navo), and some 
Others. 

Note. The genitive in connection with verbs signifying to free, to cease, 
sometimes depends on the preposition Ik or uto. E. g. Uavirov l» xaxeHv 
i/At, deliver me from evil. 

§181. 1. Verbs, adjectives, and adverbs, 
implying fulness, emptiness, bereavement, are fol- 
lowed by the genitive. E. g. 

ntvlag rj noXig i'yefiEv, The city was full of poverty. 
Ksvojv do^aa fudtojv nX^QEig, Full of vain notions. 
Twv tB&v7}ic6T(av aXig, Enough of dead persons. 

Words of this class are adriv, aXig, afir^xarew, anogsoi, diog, 
dcpVELog, ^Qi&o), yifib), dso) and dsoiiiaL, sTndtrjg, tgrj^og, xa&agog, 
XEvog, fiEOTog, nivt]g, nivo^ai, nXimg, nXridto, nX'^grjg, nXovoiog, 
anavi'CM, XQV^^> ^"^ some others. 

2. Transitive verbs of this class are followed by the accusa- 
tive of the immediate, and the genitive of the remote, object. 
E.g. 

Jid Qiv voaq>it1g ^iov, Thou wilt deprive Paris of life. 

Such verbs are anoategm, igrj^om, ttsvow, xogsvvvfti, fiovoco, 
voacfi'Qw, ntfinXtj^L, nXTjgoio, and some others. 



§§ 182, 183.] GENITIVE. 213 

Note 1. Jn and ;{'yr/ are followed by the accusative of a 
person and the genitive of a thing. E. g. Avtov as S it 
JlQOfxrj&ECJc, thou thyself necdcst a Prometheus. Teo os 
XQV> ^ohat icantcst thou? 

Note 2. Jil sometimes takes the dative of the person and 
the genitive of the thing. E.g. Jeivwv aot ^ovXtvfiaxwv 
ioixB dslv TTQog avTovy it seems that thou must employ profound 
reasoning against him. 

^189. Verbs signifying to remember, to for- 
get, to admire, to contemn, to desire, to care for, 
to spare, to neglect, to consider, to understand, are 
followed by the genitive. E. g. 

Mi(ivr,a6 fiov, Remember me. 
"jyua&ai Ttjg a^EXTJg, To admire virtue. 
Mt/dXuv ini&vfie'ig, Thou desirest great things. 

Verbs of this class are ayutunct, a/.e/l^o), aPTinoiiofxai, /Xtxofiai, 
sidsrai, ffind^ofj.'xi, ivd^v^no^cti, iTii^v/uio}, inlara^ai, tgaiuai, e^dm, 
iq)l(fiai, ■&avua^to, ifxtlgo), y.aTayskuo), y.arcKfqovibi, y.ri8o^uiy Xav- 
S^dvofiai, XiXalouai, juiftrrjuxoiuni, firrjfiovsixo, oXLytaQtM, ogiyofxai, 
ovri'i]iAt, vnfQOQcco), q^eidouai, (fQovji^o), and some others. 

Note 1. Most verbs of this class often take the accusative instead of the 
genitive. E. g. ^BanTi^evrets ra, reiavTa, caring about such things. 

Note 2. M/^»J!irx« and Xr.B^dvio or X»jS«, and tiicir compounds, are followed 
by the accusnlive of the person, and the genitive of the thing. E- g. 'Tirl- 
ftvn^i¥ r't i T aT^'os , and he rerninded )iim ofhisjnther. 'Ex Vi fn -rdv- 
ruv kfiB^avti, and makes me forget all things. 

Sometimes f^if/vrtrxu is followed by tioo accusatives. E. g. 0< '^yi<rra7»i 
^vfift ec^ietv a, y it fAi fivn(T k o^ r t{ 'AB'tiva.iovSf the Egestians reminding 
the Athenians of iheir alliance. 

Note 3. MiXt/, it is a care, it is a concern, is generally followed by the 
dative of the person, and the genitive of the thing. E. g. M»Xii rot Tourav, 
thou carcsl for tills. (§ 157. N. 8.) 

Note 4. The genitive in connection with some of these verbs sometimes de- 
pends on a preposition. E. g. Ilft/Ssj ?rtj/ rou ifcev fih /jt. t n<T B- ^ t i 
iTi, as to vvj Son, make no mure mention of him. TLi^l ru* U AlyvTrru xai 
U "SiKikia 5yyae-S«/ ^ ^ a » T /^ I / * , to be able to take care of the affairs of Egypt 
and Sicily. 

^183. 1. Verbs signifying to accuse, to prose- 
cute, to convict, are followed by the accusative de- 
noting the person accused, and the genitive denot- 
ing the crime. E. g. 



214 SYNTAX. [<J 184. 

/J 100^0 {ii at o E d Eili a g, I ivill pi'osccutc ijou for cowardice. 
Kks(fivu d(x')(jb)v tkovieg, Convicting C Icon of bribery. 

Verbs of this class are Mi^tw, ahiuo^ai, diy.(/XM, diajxai, nauyia, 

Remark 1 . f^ivyu, om accused, and akuvai, to be convicted, are followed 
only by the genitive. E. g. 'Ainfiita; (pivyavra., accused of impieli/. 
'E«y T/j aXfo xXoTfis, if any one sliall be convicted of theft. 

Alrtoio(Jt.ai, accuse, is sometimes followed by two accusatives. 

2. Verbs of this class compounded with the 
preposition Tcaid are followed by the genitive of 
the person and the accusative denoting the crime 
or punishment. E. g. 

2!s ocvTov xar ad LKu^sig &dvuTov, Thou condemncst thy- 
self to death. 

Such verbs are ynrayiyrojaab}, xaradixu^M, jtaiaxglpM, K«r«^£t- 
QOTOveoj, xttTttipevdoixai, xuxaiprjcpii^o^ai, xaTi(Jslv, xaTrjyoQeM. 

Remark 2. The accusative is often wanting after these verbs (§ 183. 2). 
E.g. KciTnyo^tTv ahrov, to accuse lain. 

Note 1. 'Kwrytyo^'tu is sometimes followed by two genitives. E. g. Ha^o- 
T^icrliiias eivrov xarnye^tTy, to indict him for uiifuitltJuUy dischar^hig 
his duties as ambassador. 

Note 2. The noun denoting the punishment is sometimes put in the genitive. 
In classical Greek, however, only Savurov is found in connection with verbs of 
this sort. E. g. Qctvarou vTayctyav Mikirieihx tS/Wi, he accused Militia- 
des capitally. 

Note 3. *'£voxog, wider sentence, guilty, which generally is 
followed by the dative (§ 196. 1), sometimes takes the genitive. 

'TjiEv&vvog, guilty, is followed by the genitive denoting the 
crime. 

^184. 1. Verbs signifying to begin, to 7nde^ 
to surpassy are followed by the genitive. E. g. 

"Aqx^ t^oixV?f Begin the fight. 

2n (XQjrjg avdauojv, Ruling Sparta. 

nd vxMV dianQsneig, Thou surpasscst all men. 

Verbs of this class are dvdaoM, uQioTfvo}, uqx^> ^uadsvw, Ss- 
ano^ta, diun^inoi), diacpsQM excel, iniorariM, jtaXhoxEvopai, xgalvM, 
KOigaviio, tcgaTsco, mgiylyvofxm, nfglsL^i, ngoEXOi, nQo'iOTafiat, 
ar)(ialv(o, aTgaTtjyia), ivgavvEvw, vneg^dUta, vnfgix^, and some 
others. 



§§ 185, 18G.] GENITIVE. 215 

Note 1 . Those derived from substantives or adjectives may be said to take 
the genitive in consequence of the noun implied in them. E.g. TaJv KaB^* 
iavreh; ivB^^tuTuv a,^t tr r s 6a- a v t i ; is equivalent to 0? a^KTrei ruv xaS* 
iauToui KvB^^uTuv fiirav, hamng surpassed the men of tlieir times, (§ 177.) 

Note. 2. Some verbs of this class are sometimes followed by the dative or 
accusalioe, E. g. K/kixta-y oLv'^okt a-iv avaffffuvj ruling over the 
Cilidans. 

Note 3. ^ Kviaau is, in Homer, sometimes followed by the preposition ^era 
with the dative. E. g. (II. 1, 252.) 

2. Causative verbs of this class are followed by the accusa- 
tive and genitive. E. g. iv^tx« ^£17 aqf,xY\ Trjg Xx^Qoig, his 
valor ajfects me more than his enmity. [^ 205. 2.) 

Such verbs are vixaw, ngoxaTaxXlvat, nQoxgivb), and some 
others. 

§ 185. Many VERBAL adjectives which have 
an active signification are followed by the genitive. 

E. g. 

TqL^mv 1 71 71 IX 7] g , Skilled in horsemanship. 
'AQx^^og av&Q(t)7ia)v, Qualijied to ride men. 

Adjectives of this class are ayvMg, aidQig, al'iiog, analdsvxog, 
Idgig, Xvaavlug, tqIjjmv. Also many adjectives in rjQiag, ixog, as 
87]XT)]Qtog, agxixog, (§§ 131. 1 : 129. 2.) Also many adjectives 
in Tjg, og, fACOv, as avt]xoog, adai]g, dari^wv, (§ 132. 4, 5.) 

Note I. Sometimes adjectives of this class are followed by the accusative, 
provided the verbs, from which they are derived, take the accusative. E, g. 
T ^i(i cjv TO, r Oleics, skilled in suck thi}tgs. 

Note 2. Adjectives of this class, which are derived from verbs followed by 
the genitive, are often said to take the genitive in consequence of the verb im- 
plied in them. E. g. uv^kod; takes the genitive because kkoucj is followed by 
the genitive (§ 179). 

Note 3. Sometimes the genitive or accusative, in connection with adjectives 
of this class, depends on the preposition Tt^i. 

^180. 1. The genitive is put after adjectives 
and ABVERBS of the comparative degree to de- 
note that with which the comparison is made. E. g. 

KqsIttmv tovTov, Superior to this man. 

Note 1. When the substantive which is compared is the 
same as that with which it is compared, the latter is omit- 
ted, provided it be limited by a genitive (§ 173). The 



216 SYNTAX. [§ 187. 

ambiguity which may arise from this construction can be re- 
moved only by considering the nature of the statement. E. g. 
Xmquv f';^sTS ovdev rjjiov '^fiojv evTi^ov, for Xcagav l^fxe 
ovdsv riTTov Ttiq x^Qr^g 't]fx(ov evTiuov, you have a country not less 
valuable than ours. 

2. The genitive is put after some positive adjectives and 
adverbs implying a comparison. E. g. 'Exigovg tcov vvv 
ovtoiv, other than those who now are. 

Adjectives of this class are aXXdlog, alXog, dXXoTQiog, dfvxsQog, 
8ia(f)OQog different^ I'TfQog, -^ixioXiog, nsQiTTog. Also numeral ad- 
jectives in nXoog or nXaoLog [§ 62. 2). 

Remark. A/a^a^a; and aXker^tog are sometimes followed by the dative. 

Note 2. '^fxvrias, which commonly is followed by the dative, sometimes 
takes the genitive. The following example shows, that the idea of comparison 
lies in this adjective : Tevvuv riov ^^Zv, vt T^ao-^/t' avtu votiiv, doing contrary 
to what he ought to do, (Aristoph. Plut. 14.; 

Note 3. Aix(pi^u, differ, and its derivative '^ia.(pi^ovrui, differently, are fol- 
lowed by the genitive, because they imply a comparison. E.g. A;a^£^si 
ur/>^ Tuv ecXXuv Z,uuvy man dffers from the other animals. 

Note 4. Sometimes this genitive depends on civrl or r^e. E.g. Ms/^av* 
»vr) T>j; eevnrou Tar^asy qi'tXsv vofAi^u, he loves another more than his ovm 
country. Oliriv fi TV^cevvif t ^o ikivB^i^ins Hv a,a 9f u ffv o n ^ov, to whom 
tyranny was more welcome than liberty. 

Note 5. When the conjunction »/, than, is introduced, the 
word compared, and the noun with which it is compared, are 
put in the same case. E. g. MsXX^ig en avdgag oTQaTsvsaO^ai, 
a fielvov ag ij 2ii v&ag , thuu art about to march against men 
superior to the Scythians. Tolg ^aaildai tmv ytaxsdttijjo- 
vliov adixslv TjTTov t^soxiv }j jolg Id iwTnig, the kings of the 
Laced^Bmonians have less power to do harm than private indi- 
viduals. 

Note 6. Sometimes the nominative is used after yi, the context determining 
its verb. E. g. Ta?; viuri^ois Kit) fAoiXXev a/tfAci^ovinv »j iyei>, va^aivu, 
sc. a.Kfjt,iZ,u, I advise the yoxing who are more vigorous than I am. 'H/u,u» 
eifjtuvov, »j fxtivoi, TO (AiXXa-j •jr^oo^iofjLtvtdv, sc. ^^oo^uvrm, we foreseeing the 
future better than they. 

^187. 1. The genitive is often used to denote 
that on account of which any thing takes place. 

E.g. 

Zrilw as -irjg ev^ovllag, I admire you for your wisdom. 
Tfi Vfisiiga nolu xrjg yrjg Trjg vn ''jlgtomwv dsdojxsvrjg (p&o- 
' vovai, They are jealous of your city, on account of tht 
land given to you by the Oropiam 



§ 188.] GENITIVE. 217 

2. The genitive, with or without an interjection, is used in 
exclamations. E. g, 'J2 Uoasidov, xov fiux^ovg, Neptune^ ivhat 
<L length J Kul zlg dde nwnoTS /Joii^ ygi^uvhag ; tuv aXa^o- 
V s V /J, u T w V, and who ever saw whole oxen roasted in the oven 7 
wh(U tough stories ! 

3. The genitive after verbs signifying to entreat denotes 
the person or thing, fur the sake of which the person entreated 
is to grant the request. E. g. 71//J ^£ yovvoav yovru^soy 
^tSi toxriwv, do not entreat me by my knees, nor by my 
parents. Frequently the preposition vtisq^ avxh or ngogf is 
placed before this genitive. 

4. Sometimes the genitive, in connection with a passive 
form, denotes the subject of the action. E. g. IIXi}yelg 
S-vyaxQog rijg e/xriq vnfQ xdga, being struck in the head by 
my daughter. 

5. Sometimes the genitive denotes the instrument of an ac- 
tion. Ya. g. llQriaai nvgog d7]Loio dvq^Tqa, to bnrn the gatc$ 
with burning f re. 

^18 8. 1. The genitive is used to denote that 
in respect q/' which any thing is affirmed. E. g. 

^'Anmg tQusvog yorov, Childless in i^espcct to male of" 

spi'ing^ in other words, Having no so7is^ 
'Alia, rv Tov ys x}fol ^lanrovot y, slsv^ ov, But the gods now 

injure him in respect to his way, that is, hinder him. 
"Eovaciv ^,8rj ardgog (aqalrj^r. Being now of the right age to 

be married.. 

2. The genitive is used to limit the meaning of the following 
ADVERBS : ayxt' or (<y/ov, uvm, dl/a, fyyvg, exixg, id^v or i&vcy 
ixTag, xmoTTir, nuTb), xgvcpa, h'dfjn, nelag, 7ih]ul{iv, tioqoco, tiqoom,. 
xiilov, xi]l6div, and some others. E.g. "Eyyvg xivog,7icar 
any thing. 

Note. "E;^« and r,xM, limited by an adverb, are often followed by the 
genitive. E. g. 'Ilj ilix^ v cix^o v$ , ns fast as he could run. 'El nKtiv 
€iov, to be well off as to properly. 

3. The genitive is put after verbs denoting to take aim at, 
to rush against,, to throio at. E.g. 'Eot o;^ a^sr o xov psL- 
Qaxiov, he icas taking aim at the stripling. "O'i'ar sv a ov 
Me V iXdov, shoot an arroio at Meneldus.. Avxolo xixvaas^ 
TO, he took aim at him. 

19 



218 SYNTAX. [§^189-191. 

^ 189. The genitive is used after verbs and 
ADJECTIVES to denote the material of which any 
thing is made. E. g. 

Xakxov 7101 sovrui ayulfiaia, Statues are made of brass. 
'Fivov noirjTijv , Made of ox-hide. 

Note. The prepositions l|, aTe, are often used before the genitive. E. g. 
"ESjiXTcc u,«a ^vXav ^(9roit}fAiva, garments made of cotton cloth, 

^ 190. 1. The noun denoting the price of any 
thing is put in the genitive. E. g. 

SLviovT ai Tag yvvaHyiug naQU twv yoviojv XQV f^^^^ ^^ y.sya- 
Xbiv^ They buy their wives of their parents for much 
money. 

Tb)v novmv TtmXovoiv ri^lv navxn laydd' ol &sol, The 
gods sell to us every good thing for labor. 

Note 1. Sometimes the thing bought is in the genitive, in which case the 
verb of the proposition does not signify to buy or to sell. E. g. 'Arag r/ ;c^iat 
i(ia fit fAtTu. Tov Tluffixv ; Ti>i7siu.va,T^t(p^iffK0Vf Then what debt came upon 
me next to Pastas' s 9 Three inincB for a little carriage. 

NorE 2. The dative (§ 198) is sometimes used for this genitive. E.g. 
Oivi^ovro, eikXoi f/,iv ^akxco, aXXa/ 5' u'/Baivi ffi^'^^My they bought wine^ 
some for brass, otliers for bright iron. 

2. "AUo?., d^iiog, and covrjTog are followed by the genitive. E. g. 
^novdrjg u^La, deserving serious consideration. 

Note 3. "A^tas is sometimes followed by the dative (§ 196. 1), in which 
case it means ft, proper, becoming. 

Note 4. The verb M^ioo), think worthy, is followed by the 
accusative of a person, and the genitive of a thing. E. g. 
"A^ioiiaiv avTov ^tydlmv, they think him worthy of great 
things. 

^191. 1. The genitive often answers to the 
question when ? E. g. 

Trig vvxiog vi^ovxai, They feed in the night. 

2. Sometimes the genitive answers to the question how 
LONG SINCE? E. g. Uoiov %q6vov TunoQdr^Tai nolig ; how 
long since the city has been taken 1 IIoXImv ircov iv&dds 
ovx eTiidedi^fxrjitEv, he has not been at home for many years. 

3. Sometimes the genitive answers to the question how 
SOON 1 E. g. Tq idx ovt a r; fi s qcjv ano TaVTrjg Trjg rjfisgagf 
within thirty days from this day. 



§ 192.] GENITIVE. 219 

Somelimes the adverb iyroc accompanies this genitive. E g. 
'j^tTog ov noXXov x^orov, icithin a short time. 

^ 192. A substantive with a participle is very 
often put in the genitive, to denote the time or 
CAUSE of, or any circumstance connected with, 
an action. E. g. 

Tui'T^ inQiUxdr], Kovtorog aTgarriyovi'Tog, These things 
toire (lone when Conon 2cas general. Here the genitive 
denotes the time when tmit* iTiouyJh]. 

TsXsvrrioavTog AXvutt f m, nsdi'SctTo ttj v ^aaiXifi'rjv KqoX- 
aog, After the death of Alt/attcs, Croesus received the king- 
dom. 

The genitive thus used is called the genitive absolute. 

REaiARK 1. Strictly speaking the genitive absolute is a modification of the 
genitive of time (§ 191). 

Note 1. In some instances the genitive of the participle uv is wanting. E. g. 
Tl» v^tiynruv, who being leaders, where ovtuv must be supplied. 

Note 2. Frequently wc, wanfg, war?, uTf, oia, that, as if, in- 
asmuch as, 071 the supposition that, stand before this genitive. 

fig b)d fxorrav roird Inlojaa&cti ae xgr,, Thou must 
knoic that these things are so. 

Rejiark 2. Instead of the genitive, the accusative is often used in connection 
with the abovementioned particles. E. g. Ov;^ t/'/S^u kiyu txV, aXX' *«£?- 
10 f ui -TA^ovra yuiv, I do not say t/iese things out of wantonness, but because 
I believe that he is near us. Tly »|«* ^»! fro/iTy uiroTs, s rt av fiovXaivro, 
inasmuch as they had Jioiv the liberty to do what they pleased. (See § 168. N. 2.) 

Note 3. When the subject of a proposition is not eipressed 
(^ 157. N. 8), the participle alone is put in the genitive abso- 
lute. Yi. g^TovTog noUoj, it raining heavily, which in the 
indicative is "Tu tioX/.o), it rains heavily. 

Note 4. The genitive absolute is used also when the sub- 
ject is a proposition commencing with or/, that. (§ 159. 1.) E. g. 
2u(f(x)g drjXu&evTog on fV rulg ruvnl tojv 'EXXrjyojy, y. t. X., it 
being quite apparent, that in the ships of the Greeks, S^c, 
which in the indicative is Zucpoig idvfXu&Ji on iv joig, x. x. X., 
the subject of which is ort iv xulg, x. t. A. 

In such instances, the genitive plural is sometimes used. 
E.g. ElaayyiXd^ivTMv oxi (Potviaaat rrjeg ire' aviovg ini- 
nXiov, it being announced that Phoenician ships icere sailing 
against them, where, however, the plural y^cj may be said to 
affect the participle. 



220 SYNTAX. [§§ 193, 194. 

Note 5. But when the subject of the proposition is an in- 
Jinitive (§ 159. 2), the accusdtive is used instead of the geni- 
tive absolute. For examples, see above (§ 168. N. 2.) 

§ 103. Frequently the genitive answers to the question 

WHERE? E. g. Ova "Agysog '^sv ; was he not in Argns ? 

ytaing xnQog ohovai Xalv^iq, on the left hand dwell the 
Chalybes. 

^ 104. The genitive is put after the following 

PREPOSITIONS. 

"A^icpi, synonymous with ti?^/. 

*'Aviv, without. "Avsv si'f sv , ivithout him. 

^AptI, instead of, for. "Avd^" l^axlov s/slv QiUog, to have a 

rag instead of a garment. ^Avil no lag a It lag; for -what 

reason. 

It is often used in comparisons with respect to value. 

I'viaixog vc(j^ uvtI tsiv^o, you are now equivalent to a 

woman. (See also >5 186. N. 4.) 
'Atto, from, "a no "^IIl lovnoliog, from Heliopolis. In general 

this preposition denotes motion from one place to another. 
*'ATfQ, synonymous w^ith ursv. 

"AxQig or O./Qi, until. "Axqi y-vicpaog, till evening. 
Aia, through, by means of with the assistance of in. Alu xTJg 

nolscag, through the city. Aia rvxiog, in (or during) the 

night. 
"j^vExa, on account of, for the sake of in respect of, as to. T a v 

inaivilad^ai I'vsxa, for the sake of being praised. Iliudd 

T£ oov (xnrj^oroc rov (pvXaaaovrog elvsy.sv nQoadoya roi 

anot'oaTTiaeiv, so far as his guardian is concerned, expect 

thy son to return safe. 
"E^ or in, out of, from, of. "Ek rrig olxlag , from the house. 
In connection with passive forms it is equivalent to vno, 

by. Ta kex^ivxa el 'Als^civd qov, the words spoken by 

Alexander. 
^Enl, on, upon, to, during. ^Enl tmv xfrpaXMv, upon their 

heads. 'Enl 2'uq8s(x)v, to Sardes. ^J<:nl agxovTog Elv^ 

S^yxXeovg, during the archonship of Euthycles, or ivhen 

Eidhycles was archon. 
Kaxixy against, down from, on, upon. Kar' ifiov, against me. 
Mnri, with, together ivith. Msxa itav naldwv, with my 

children. 
Mi^Qig or fiixgh untilj as far as. MsxQi' tovtov, until this 

time. 



<5 195.] DATIVE. 221 

Jlttoa, ft'om^ of. X()V(noi' nuga aov Xa^car, receiving gold 

from thee. 
Jlesjl, concerningy about, in respect to. llegl \4d-'r]vuv, about 

Athens. 
nXr,r, except. 
Ilgo, before, in preference to. iIqo d^vQwv, before the doors. 

II go TOVTUv Tbjy y.axoov r^ulv ys y.giaaov xal oricav aXXo 

Tttx&ssiv iail, it is better for us to suffer any thing else than 

these evils. (§ 186. N. 4.) 
IJgog, of fur, on the side of. ITgog ncngog xv/jptogv/og, 

a tomb-breaker on his father* s side. Ilgog rav sxovtuv, 

in behalf (f the rich. 

So in protestations, ^E ngog xov oov xixvov Ixvnvixai, 

I beseech thee by thy child. 

In connection with passive forms it is equivalent to vno, by. 

Ed-ilwv fiadsHv TO noLEv y,ivor ngog yiay.edaifiovl(ov, 

wishing to knojc that which was done by the Laced mmonians, 
'Tnig, over, above, in behalf of , for the sake of. 'Tnsg ^fiav 

nogivo^ivog, passing over us. To. hga, t« &v6psva vnig 

trig n6Xi(ag, the victims offered in behalf of the city. Ma- 

aofj.' VTteg ipv^yjc, I beseech thee by thy life. 
'Tjio, under. ^ Tcp' ugfxuTog, under the car. In connection 

with passive verbs, by. ngoaavvovfisvog ijdi] cog ^aaiXsvg 

vnb j6)v aurp uvrov, being noio saluted as king by his at- 

tendants. 

DATIVE. 

^ 105. 1. The dative is used after adjectives, 
ADVERBS, and verbs, implying resemblance, union, 
approach. E. g. 

*'liifXog /I Li, Resembling Jupiter. 

Aay.fdai^ovloig d lapax^a &cii , To Jight with the Lace- 
dcsmonians. 

Words of this class are adsXcpog resembling ^ axoXov&m, axo^ 
Xovd-og, a/iu, ardXarrog, dLay(avi^Ojj.ttL, diadexopai, diaXsyopai, fixo- 
Twc, ny.o) look like, resemble, I'no^ai, igl^o), I'xsXog, I'aog, Vaag, 
pa/ofiai, ofiog and its compounds and derivatives, TtaXata, 
noiganXr]aiog, nXrialog, ttoXsixso), coaavTwg, and many others. Add 
to these the adverbs ayxov, iyyvg, neXac, which commonly take 
the genitive (§ 188. 2). 

2. Transitive verbs of this class are followed by the accu- 
sative of the immediate, and the dative of the remote, ob- 
19* 



222 SYNTAX. [§ 196. 

ject. E. g. K^wTSt n Qooiiii^s bsanoxriv, he led Jiis master 
to victory. 

Such verbs are utux'Cm, filywiAi, o^olow, and some others. 

Note 1. The adjectives o/niios and «5£X(po;, and those compounded with ervf 
and of/,ov, are sometimes followed by the genitive (§ 188). Kotv^f, common^ 
which usually talces the dative, is followed by the genitive, wlien it implies pos. 
session, (§ 174. N.) 

Note 2. When the substantive, which depends on laoq or 
0/j.oiogf is the same as that with which i'aog or 9^010^ agrees, 
the former is omitted, and the noun which limits it (^ 173) 
is put in the dative. E.g. Ko^ai Xafjljaooiv o^olat, for 
KojAca ojjioLUi ttxlg aonaiq joop Xu.QtiMr, hair resembling that of 
the Graces. Ov ^^Tst/jg lag taoig nlrjy ag i ^ 1 , thou didst not 
receive the same number of stripes toith me, 

■ Note 3. The pronoun avjog, the same, (§ 144. 3^) is 
often followed by the dative. In general, however, the dative, 
to which amog directly refers, is omitted, and the limiting 
noun {% 173) is put in the dative, (§ 195. N. 2.) E. g. Ov8ev 
T(ov avToiv fxelvoig nQurro/xfr, we do nothing like the things 
tvhirh they did, where tmv avrmr refers to the deeds ^ and sudvoiq 
to the doers. 

Note 4. ETj sometimes imitates avro;. E. g. "0; l^s) fA-ias lyinr* 
Ik fiari^of, who proceeded from the same mother as I. 

^ 196. 1. The dative is used to denote that to 
which the quality of an adjective or adverb 
is directed. E. g. 

JJox^sivog Tolg cplloig, Dear to his friends. 
^'Ex&iaxog &£o7g, Most hatfulto the gods. 

Adjectives of this class are dya&og, alo/rjog, ivavxlog ii'XQV^ 
GTog, f^d^Qog, rjdvg, xaXog, no&^ivog, gr^diog, if Hog, xaltnog, and 
many others. 

2. The dative is used after verbs, to denote the 
object to ovfor which any thing is done. E. g. 

Bor}&s7v xfi TitxTQcc, To aid the country. 

Tolg d-uvovai nloinog ovdiv McpsXsl, Wealth in no waif 

benefits the dead, 
yivixaivojusvrj tw vsxqm, Abusing the dead body. 
''SlXQ^ f'*'"*^' ,"ot Soaslg, Thou seemest to me to be pale. 
This rule applies also to the dative after impersonal verbs 
(<J 159. N, 1, 2). E. g. z/oxst (xoi, it seems tome 



§ 197.] DATIVE. 223 

Verbs of this class are dX^^a), ai'ddroi, ugiaya, aQ-qyta, ccq^ 
fioaob), (Sori&ib), doy.eoj, huoj yield, ivoxXiw, inaqy.iia, emxovgsio, 
eniTfXlofxai, xociaxuvb), largfVM, Ivfiairofxai, haiifXsw, Xw^do^av, 
fisficpo^ai, nuQiyyvaM, nel&ofiui, nQtuw, nQooTaaoM, ovficpsgco, 
TijAtogeio, vnay.ovoi, vmi/.w, vnom:i]aow, vnoTrd (fiat., cpdoviw, ;f«- 
giCof.iaiy and many others. 

Note 1. Many verbs of this class are sometimes followed by the accusative 
(§ 163. 1) instead of the dative. 

3. The dative is used after verbs signifying to be, to denote 
that to which any thing belongs. E. g. 

TiXko) naldsg riaav xaXol xs xdya&ol, Ttllus had good and 
noble children. 

Note 2. The substantive in the dative after tlrai, ylyveo^ai, 
is often accompanied by a participle signifying willing ^ being 
plcasedy expecting. E. g. Ol Kgotcaviarai dnov, ova av acpioL 
^uvXo^sroig elvai, the Crotonians said that they should not 
be willing. 

The participles, of which the dative accompanies the sub- 
stantive, are ^ovXo^usrog, eXTiofisrog, 'qdofisvog, d^iXcav, ngoads^ofisvog. 
Add to these the adjective axwv. 

Verbs signifying to come sometimes imitate dvat. E. g. 
T'lyramy.ot) d' wg acpoj'lv iiX8o(xivo la iv Ixdvcj, I know that 
you longed for my arrival. 

4. Many transitive verbs of this class (§ ]96. 2) are fol- 
lowed by the accusative of the immediate, and the dative of the 
remote, object. E. g. 

Jid wfii 001 Tovto, I give this to thee. 

Note 3. A few verbs denoting to give apart {^s fxeTadldcofii) 
are often followed by the dative of a person, and the genitive 
of the thing imparted (§ 178. 1). 

5. The dative is put after the interjections oV, w, loo, and 
ova/. E.g. Oi' fioi, woe is me. 

^197. 1. The dative is often used to denote 
that with regard to which any thing is affirmed. 
E.g. 

MaXiara anovd^g a^ta xfi noXeif Of the utmost considera- 
tion with regard to the state, or Deserving the most serious 
* attention of the state. 

2(pMv fxh evToXrj /jiog i'xH xiXog 8^, As to you two, the com- 
mand of Jupiter is now done. 



224 SYNTAX. [§198. 

So Ano ^EXsq)avxlpi]g noXiog avto Iovtl avaviig iau to j^co^tov, 
to a person going up from the city Elephantine the country ap^ 
pears steep. 

Note 1. This dative is often preceded by the particle w?. 
E. g. ^EnunzQ it ysvvalog (ag idovriy since thou art of noble 
descent to one who sees thee, or rather, as thy appearance in- 
dicates. 

Hence the phrase ''Slg ip.ol, or "Slg y i^ol, in my opinion, 
E. g. Kgiojv rjv Cv^mtoc, ug ifiol, tiote, Creon was once, in my 
opinion, in an enviable condition. 

Note 2. Frequently the dative of the personal pj-onoun is 
apparently superfluous. E. g. Elni^svui y.oi, Tgusg, ayavov 
^Ikiovrjog TiaTQi q)lXm ycal fifjTQl yornjin'm, O Trqfhns, do tell the 
beloved father and mother of illustrious llioneus to beivail, 
vv^here ^ol might have been omitted without any essential in- 
jury to the sense. ^Alla a eg ^Illvaiov ntdlov adavaxoi nempov- 
atv, ovvsx^ i'^sig 'EXsvtjv, y,al aq)iv yay^^Qog Jiog eaai, but the 
immortals will send thee to the Elysianflelds, because thou hast 
Helen for thy loife^ and art son-in-law to Jupiter, where the 
dative o(plv, referring to a&avaToi, implies that the person, to 
whom org refers, is a favorite of the gods. 

2. The dative is often used to limit any word or 
expression. E. g. 

^vvccTol ysvofisvoi aal ToTg ow^icari aal xaXg ipv^oc^?) -^c- 
coming strong both in body and soul. Here the dative 
denotes that in which they became strong. 

^Eyx^l]] ey.ixaaTO, He was eminent with the spear. 

Note 3. The dative is put after comparatives to denote the 
excess of one thing over another. E. g. iioXi Xoyl^w ^ 
'EXXag ysyovs aad-sveaTigrj, Greece has become weaker by one 
distinguished city. 

Note 4. Particularly, the dative is often used to limit the 
meaning of a substantive, in which case it is nearly equiva- 
lent to the adnominal genitive (§ 173). E. g. 

Orj^cciotv ava^, King of Thebes. 

Joaig av&mnoiaiv, A gift to men. Here the dative is 
used objectively, (§ 173. N. 2.) 

^198. The dative is used to denote the cause^ 
manner, means, and instrument, E. g. 



§§ 199, 200.] DATIVE. 225 

To7g nsngiiy i-iiv OLg alaxwoufvoi, Being ashamed of their 

past acts. 
Jgofioj i'svTO eg Tovg ^aQ^uqovg, They went running against 

the barbarians. 
Tm o 00 IX ax l egyix'^ofisrog, Working with his body . 

Note 1. The dative after the verb xQf^ofLai, avail myself, 
use, and its compounds, may be referred to this head. E. g. 
Xqu> ^ii\} a ccvToj , toe use it. 

Note 2. This dative sometimes depends on Iv, «ruv, vro. E. g. 'l^ova-' i » 
e fji. fi, a ff I V, seeing with my eyes, "Iv« p^i^ff)v v t^ Alvucco ^aftiin, that he might 
fall by the hands of j^nens. 

§ 190. The dative is used to denote that by which any 
thing is accompanied. E. g. ^E§ori&i]aav Tolg /JbOQUvaiv iaviwv 
IS 71 £PT ay. o a 10 1 g y.al ;^iA/oi? onXlxaig yea tmv ^v^uaxoiv 
fivgloig, they assisted the Dorians with one thousand Jive 
hundred heavy-armed soldiers of their own, and ten thousand 
of their allies. 

The nouns, of which the dative may thus be used, are chiefly 
the following : iTinsvg, vavg, onUTtjg, ns^og, nslraaT'^g, aioXogf 
axgajKOTTjc, orgaiog. 

Note 1. This dative is frequently accompanied by the da- 
tive of avTog. E. g. Tgt7]osig avToXg nXr] qw fxaa i di£q)&(x~ 
grjaav, galleys were destroyed with every thing on board. 

Note 2. Sometimes the preposition avv is found before this 
dative. E. g. ^'Ehyov uvrov vnonQr^aod naarxg avTji ovv noli, 
they said that he burned them all together with the city. 

§ 900, 1. Frequently the dative, in connection with a 
passive form, denotes the agent of the action. E. g. 

IIq oanoXoig (pvXda a STtxc, He is taken care of by the 

servants, the active construction of which is JlgoonoXoL 

qivXfmaovoiv avjov, The servants are taking care of him 

(§ 163. 1.) 

/foiolai KuotyvriTOLav da^-iivTs, Being slain by ttco 

brothers. 
Note 1. The preposition vto is often used before this dative. E. g. Tig 
vTo Tw^s/^sj TVJiiva,) xXoviovTo (piXayyis T^^ueov, thus were the close ranks 
of the Trojans routed by Tydides. 

2. The dative after verbal adjectives in rag and ttog (§ 132. 
1, 2) denotes the subject of the action. E. g. EXthq Tifxaa&ca, 
^ovXsi, ucpsXrjTs a aoi r} noXig sotIv, if thou wishest to he hon- 
ored, thou must benefit the state. 



226 SYNTAX. [§§201-203. 

So when the neuter of the verbal in j^og is equivalent to 8u 
with the infinitive (§ 162. N. 1), Ou ywmy.wv ovdenod-' ta&' 
i7TTr/T£« -^(xiv, we must never be conquered by women, where 
riTTTiim rnuv is equivalent to dst r}i.tag rjixaa&ai. 

Note 2. When the verbal in teov is equivalent to del with 
the infinitive, the accusative is often used instead of the dative. 
The accusative in this case denotes the subject of the infini- 
tive implied in the verbal adjective (§ 159. N. 1.) E. g. Ovte 
jxiaS^ q)og'i]T 60V aXXovg r;' rovg OTgaTSVOfiivovg, nor 
must others, than those who serve in the army, receive wages, 
where jxia&ocpoQrjTsov is equivalent to du laad^ocfOQuv. 

^ 901. The dative often answers to the ques- 
tion AT WHAT TIME ? WHEN ? E. g. 

TavTT) Tji i]fiiQa ova e^axioaxo ^aaiXsvg, The king did 
notjight on that day. 

Note 1. Sometimes this dative depends on jy. E. g. Ty V \v Hftxrif on 
this day, to-day. 

Note 2. Sometimes the dative is equivalent to the genitive 
absolute (§ 192). E.g. nomioavTi tliqvvlxM dgoifia Md^- 
Tov aXooaLv xal d i da^avzi eg ddxgva 'dneos to ■&S7jtqov, when 
Phrynichus wrote a play, entitled, The Capture of Miletus, 
and acted it, the spectators wept. 

§ 309. The dative often answers to the question in what 
PLACE? WHERE? E. g. Ma Q ad b) VI OX '^{Asv, idibJicofisv, when 
we were at Marathon, we pursued {the enemy). 

^ 903. The dative is put after the following 

PREPOSITIONS : 

'JlAqit, about, on, concerning. E. g. !^/^g)t nXsvQalg, about 
the sides. 'A/xcpl rQani^aig^onthe tables. 'Aficpl y v- 
vaiici, about (that is, for the sake of) a woman. 

^Avd, upon, only in the poets. 

^Ev, in, at. Yt. g.^Ev xovxto xm xonm, in this place. 

Sometimes ev is found before a genitive, the noun, to 
which it belongs, being understood. E. g. "Ev "Aidov, so. 
doixoig, in the palaces of Hades, simply in Hades. 

^Enl, upon, on account of, on condition that. 'EtxI xm yelag ; 
what dost thou laugh at 7 ^Enlxolads xovg ngsa^sig in , 
ccQiaxov xaXw, on this condition I invite the ambassadors 
to dinner. 



§§204*205.] VOICES. 227 

Mnd, among, with, only in the poets. *'0(pg' sii sldm, oaoov 

iyu jU«T« nauiv aiifiotuTr) i9fo'c fiiui, that I may joell 

know, how much I am the most unhonored goddess of 

all. 
Jlagd, at, hy the side of, with. JlaQoi act, with thee, at thy 

house. 
nsQi, about, on account of, fur. UsqI Hep si, about [on) 

the sword. IIsqI ydq die noi^ivt Xacav, for he feared 

for the shepherd of the people. 
IlQog, with, in addition to. Ilgog aol, with thee. Hgog 

T DVT Dig, in addition to these things. 
2vv, with, by means of. :Svp aol, with thee. 2vv f^dxcctg, 

by means of battles. 
'Tno, under. "Tno xolg d vva ^ivoiaiv uv, being under the 

poioerful. 

In connection with 'passive verbs, vno means by. 'Tito 

Tvdsldt] xXoviovTo cpdXayysg, the ranks were routed by 

TydideL 



VOCATIVE. 

^ 204. 1. The vocative forms no part of a 
proposition. It is used simply in addressing a per- 
son or thing. E. g. 

JEixs, Jibg d-vyaTSQ, noXifiov, Depart, daitghter of Jupiter, 
from war. 

2, The vocative is often put after the interjections w, Id. 
E. g. 'Jl 'AxiXsv, O Achilles. 

VOICES. 

ACTIVE. 

§ 205, 1. The active voice comprises the greater num- 
ber of transitive or active, and intransitive or neuter, verbs. 
E. g. xonito, cut ; TQix<o, run. 

Note 1. The accusative of the reflexive pronoun is fre- 
quently omitted ; in which case the verb has the appearance 
of an intransitive verb. E. g. ilavvw sc. i^avjov, impel myself, 
proceed, march. 



^^8 



SYNTAX. 



-[§205. 



Note % The petfed and pluperfect active of the following 
verbs borrow the signification of the passive or middle. 

^AAISKJl^ capture, allaxoi^ai, 
am captured, iaXwKa, have 
been captured. 



^QVX('^o^ai, roar, piiSQVxa, roar. 

riFNSLy produce, ylyvopaiy am 

/ produced, become, /e/oru, 
am. 

daiM (transitive), burn, balopav 
(intransitive), burn, 8i8i]n, 
burn. 

AASl, teach, dhdaa, have learn- 
ed. 

deQy.op(xi, see, d^dogaa, see. 

iydqM, raise, eyflgopat-, raise 
myself, rise, r/gi]/oQa, am 
awake. But the first per- 
fect fyriyegyoc means have 
raised. 

egslnca, demolish, i^riqina, am 
demolished. 

taTi]pi, cause to stand, XoTa^iai, 
cause myself to stand, stand, 
I'oTrjKix, t'oran, stand. But 
the later form eaiana means 
have placed. 

Kiv&M (transitive), hide, yjy.fv-^ 
■&a (intransitive), hide. 

v.i]8oi, afiict, y.r]doiica, care for ^ 
xixrjdn, care for. 

palrM, madden, pahoiuat^ am 
mad, ^sfj.r]V(/., am mad^ rav-e. 

prjxaopai, bleat, ^sfiriafx, bleat. 

pvynofini, bellotv, ^s^xvya,. bel- 
low. 



oi'ya, open, ol'yofiaL, am opened, 

tcoya, stand open. But the 

first perfect tw/a means have 

opened. 
oXXvfu, destroy, ollvptti, perish, 

olbAa, have perished. But 

the first perfect oAwAsxrt 

means have destroyed. 
oQvvpi, rouse, oqw^ixi, rise, 

o(jb)Qa, have arisen. 
tihOm, persuade, nu&opai, am 

persuaded, tis7iol&(x, confide 

in, trust. 
7T)]yr vff I , fix , nr\yv Vfj ai , am fix* 

ed, niniiya, stand fast. 
Q)]yrvj.ii, tear, egQojycx, am torn 

to pieces. 
(Sf^h'vvfit, extinguish^ a^ivvvfiai, 

am extinguished,, ea^riya, am 

extinguished. 
ar'jTto) (transitive), to rot, o^nor-^ 

pai ( intransitive \ to rot,, 

osarjna, to be rotten. 
ayJllM, cause to tvither, g^illor' 

fKxi (intransitive), ivither, 

i'ayX'^yot, am withered. 
T^/xfo) (transitive), melt, Tiqy.o^tti 

(intyansitive),, melt, T£T?jxa, 

am melted. 
(^{yiri»y make appear, (podropai. 



have 



ap" 



appear,^ 7is(prjra, 
peared. 

(pvM^ produce, cpvofiat, am pro- 
duced,^ Tiicpvya, ni(fva, am. 



Rema rk. So^jetiraes the perfects -rl-rXviyct, fiom •x'knoffu), and ? ^ 9^ a g a , 
from fBit^M, take the signification of the passive. 

Note 3. When the verb is both transitive and intransitive, 
the first perfect is transitive, and the second perfect (if there 
be any), intransitive. E. g. nqaoab), transitive, do, has 1 perf. 
nsTiQnxa, have done i but ngaaao), intransitive^ cm or do^ has 
2 perf, nengaya. 



§ 20G ] VOICES. 229 

Note 4. The second aorist active of the following verbs 
takes the signification of the passive or middle. 

'AAT2:KP~, aUaxo^ui, euXm',was ^vxuoficci, ffivxov, hcllowed. 

captured. o(iivvv^iy o§ivvv^ai, eoprjv, was 

degyoj^ini, idQaxov, sato. extinguished, 

egslxoi (transitive), break, ilqi- oxiXXu, axiXXo^ai, taxXriv, with' 

xov (intransitive), broke. ered. 

i(}(i7Tat, f(jH7iO(jui, I'lQinov, fell cpva, (pvofxai, i'(fvi', was produc- 

down. ed, am. But the first aorist 

laTtjfji, 'lairqtai, I'ottjv, stood. tcpvua means I produced, 
(irjxdo^iai,, k'yaxov, bleated. 

2. Causative verbs, that is, verbs signifying to cause (one) 
to do any thing, belong to the active voice. E. g. ytvw, cause 
to taste ; yi^rijoxo), cause to remember, remind. 

PASSIVE. 

§906. 1. The passive takes for its subject that which 
was the immediate object of the active (§ 163. 1). That, 
which was subject-nominative in the active {^ 157), becomes 
genitive in the passive, and depends on vno, nagd, ngog, or el. 

'llpiXg i^a7iaj(afj,i&a vno ruv ngia^stov, We are 
completely deceived by the ambassadors. The active con- 
struction of this example would be Ol ngio/jsig i^anarcoaiv 
■^fxccg, The ambassadors are completely deceiving us. 

2. The dative without a preposition is often used instead ot 
the genitive with vno, particularly in connection with the^er- 
fect and pluperfect passive. E. g. 

JEl'^TjTo TKvta TO) Evdvd-^po), These things had been 
said by Euthydemus, equivalent to eIq^xsl jama 6 Ev&v- 
8r,iiog, Euthydemus had said these things. 

Remark. The context will determine whether a dative in connection with a 
passive verb denotes tlie subject (§ 200) or the object (§ 196) of that verb. 

3. When the active is followed by two cases, the 
passive retains the latter. E. g. 

'^Tnb Jiog Innoavv ag fdiddx^n? i Thou wast taught 
horsemanship by Jove, the active construction of which 
would be 'O Ztvg Imioovvag os idlda^sv, Jove taught thee 
horsemanship, (§ 165.) 
20 



2li0 SYNTAX. [ § 207. 

EXq'/ EX ni Twv V }il ^wv vno iirog, He is deprived of 
m-ivileges by somebody, the active construction of which 
would be Ei'gyEi ng aviov tcIji' vofilf.i<i)v, Somebody deprives 
him of privileges, [^ 180. 2.) 

Note 1. The object, which was in the genitive or dative, is 
sometimes made the subject of the passive. E. g. ^Ey^slvog 
KUT sxpi]q)la d-rj, he was condemned, (§ 183. 2. ) Oi yi ax e- 
8uipovLOL an lar oil V T (x I vno ndvTOiv IliXo7Tovvr]oi(x}v, the 
LacedcEmunians are distrusted by all the Peloponnesians, the 
active construction of which would be ndrzeg neXonorvi^aioi 
anLOTOVOi rdlq yJaKsdai^uorloig, (^ 196. 2.) 

Note 2. The aorist passive frequently has the signification 
of the aorist middle. In such cases the aorist middle is either 
rare or obsolete. E. g. dnaXXdaaw, deliver, d7ir]lXdyv,v, delivered 
myself, not was delivered. 

MIDDLE. 

§90T. I. The middle is often equivalent to the active 
followed by the accusative of the reflexive pronoun. E. g. 
vlnTOfiai equivalent to vljnco epavTov, loash myself 

So ayciXXo^aL, avaQTUopai, andyxopai, uTifj^opai, evdvojuaty 
afLQOfuni, y.T^vi^o^ni, Xovofiai, ^vgaofjat, ns^aioopai, nagaay.iva'Qo- 
(.laL, and some others. 

When the active is followed by two cases, middle verbs of 
this class retain the latter. E. g. "Evdvetai. xov SojQaxa, 
he puts on the cuirass, of which the active construction would 
be 'Erdvfi kaVTov xov dawuy.a, ("^ 165,) 

Note 1 . The accusative after Kii^ofixi, ^rt^eetoo/^ai, (po^iouui, and some others, 
is properly speaking synecdochical (^ 167}. 

Note 2. Some middle verbs of this class (§ 207. l) have apparently be- 
come intransitive. E. g. 'iXTu, cause to hope, 'iXTofixi, cause myself to hope^ 
simply hope ; tXoc.'^m, cause to wander, ^XxXificci, cause myself to wander^ 
simply wander. 

2. Very frequently the middle is equivalent to the active 
followed by the dative of the reflexive pronoun. In this case 
the middle is used transitively. E. g. 

ITots'lo&aL X7]v Hgj]vr)V, To make a peace for one's self. 

But lloiuv xTjv nqrivriv. To make a peace for others. 
IlnQaoyEvd^opal xi, I prepare something for myself. 
But naQaay.evd'C(o xc, I prepare something for somebody. 



§ 207.] VOICES. 231 

3. The middle is sometimes used transitively to denote that 
the object of the action is a thing belonging to the subject of 
the verb. E. g. 

X{Jvar,g9i^iX(>t Xvoo^erog ^vyargu, Chryses came in order to 
ransom his oion daughter. 

Note 3. Sometimes, for the sake of emphrsis, the reflexive pronoun is an- 
nexed to a middle verb used transitively (§ 207. 2, 3). E. g. Tiy^afA- 
fteti IfAitur u TttVTtt, I have vrritten these things for myself. 

4. Sometimes the middle is equivalent to the corresponding 
active with the reciprocal pronoun. E. g. Xoidooovfiada equiva- 
lent to XoidoQovjjsv aXlriXoig, we are reviling one another ; but 
Xoido^ov^i&a, in the passive, would mean we are reviled by 
others. 

5. Sometimes the middle is used transitively to express an 
action which takes place at the command of the subject of the 
proposition. E. g. 

'£dLda^u{xT]v a s, I caused thee to be taught ^ I have given 
thee an education. But 'Edlda^d as, I taught thee. 

Note 4. Frequently the middle does not seem to differ from 
the active. E. g, tdio&ai, in Homer, is equivalent to iduv, 
to see. • 

Note 5. The future middle is often equivalent to the future 
active. In such cases the future active is either rare or obsolete. 
E. g. &avfiaC(a, admire, '&avi.idao^ai, shall admire, not shall 
admire myself 

Verbs, of which the future middle is equivalent to the future 
active : ayrotw, adb), axovw, d^agrnvb), ai:avjd(x), anoXavw, /?«- 
5/^0), (3vclibj, ^lob), jjXwoy.o}, (jodbi, yiXuM, yriQuoy.w, yiyrojo'/.a, 5«- 
xvb), dagddvb), JETSL, diSgdaxb), JPAMIl, fyy.oifiid^oj, ET/tSl, 
t\ul am, EyJETOH, imxivio^ eniOQy.ew, &avfj(x'C(o, d^ica run, ■d^j^Qcca, 
■d^r]Qfvot, d^iyyavb), ^vr,ay.M, x^qwoxco, y.d^voj, y.i/drw, y.Xixlo), yiXemw, 
HoXuC,(x3, Xuyxuvw, Xa^^uvo), ^lav&uvbi, vew sicim, olfxoj'^ia, ofivvfii, 
OIIJl. 0VQ8M, nal'^bj, 7Tuo/b}, ni]ddbi, nlnxw, nXiw, nrsb), nrlyb), 
qiwfloiv, aiyub), OLwnuw, axamrw, onovdd'^u), ovQi'i^bj, t^sj^m, rgu- 
ybi, Twdoc^b), cpevyb), x^'Cw, xoiQSb), and some others. 

Note 6. Sometimes the future middle is equivalent to the 
future passive. E. g. wcpeXeM, benefit, (aqjdr'jaojxat, shall be 
benefited, not shall benefit jnyself 

Verbs of w^hich the future middle is equivalent to the future 



232 SYNTAX. [§§208,209. 

passive : ddi)ii(a, ai<dldaaM, l3XanTbi, yvfivJ^M, ^rjf^ioo), ngoxifxata, 
jgeq^oj, cpvXdoow, and some others. 

^ Note 7. The aorist middle is in a few instances equivalent to the aorist pas- 
sive. E. g. ^it^iu, leave, iXtv'of^nv, was left^ not left myself, * 

DEPONENT VERBS. 

§ SO 8. Deponent verbs are those, which are used only in 
the passive or middle voice. They are called deponent passive 
or deponent middle, according as their aorist is taken from the 
passive or middle. In respect to signification, they are either 
transitive or intransitive. E. g. 

iTiifAsXto^ai, take care of, inE^ilri&r^v, is a deponent passive. 

fQyaC,o(,iai, work, slgyuadfitjv, is a deponent middle. 

Note 1 . Some deponents have both the aorist passive and the aorist middle. 
E. g. ^uvaf^.at, nm able, rt^wri^yiv, in Homer iSyvjjjra^jjv. 

Note 2. Some deponents have, in the perfect and pluperfect, also a passive 
significalian. E. g. \^y<iZ,o{j(.a.t, work, perf. ii^ya,(rfjLce.t, have worked, sometimes 
have been worked. 

Note 3. Sometimes the aorist passive of a deponent verb has a passive signi- 
fication ; in which case the aorist middle follows the present. E. g. Kara-^^n- 
(pi^ofAOii, condemn, KaTf<^n<p'Kr^Y^v, was condemned, xicn^'rKpiffeifAtjv, condemned, 

TENSES. 

PRESENT, PERFECT, PLUPERFECT, AND FUTURE. 

§ S®0. 1. The PRESENT INDICATIVE cxpresses an ac- 
tion or being which is going on now. E. g. ygdcpxa, I am 
writing. 

The present in the dependent moods {subjunctive, optative^ 
imperative, and infinitive) and in the participle expresses a 
continued action. Its time in this case is determined by the 
context. E. g. ^Hy.ovaa Zxi negmX^g noXXdg eTiaiddg inloTai- 
to, dg snadiav tij noXst, inoUi avTTjv cpiXslv amov, I heard 
that Pericles knew many enchantments, which singing to the 
city he made it love him. 

Note 1. The present is frequently used for the aorist in an 
animated narration, in which the past is represented as present. 
E. g. IIdcIsi Katix TO GTsgvov, vmI t ngdaasi did xov &(aga- 
xog, he strikes {him) in the breast, and wounds him through the 
cuirass^ where nahi, rngeauy.si, stand for tnniae, eTgojus. 



<J 209. 



TENsr,g. 



233 



NoTK 2. The present of ««« has the force of the perfect, have come. The 
imperfect of this verb has the force of the pluperfect, had come. 

Note 3. Sometimes the present has the force of the future. E. g. tTfAi 
regularly means shall go, and sometimes awi going. 

2. The PKRFECT in all the moods and in the participle ex- 
presses an action which is now completed. E. g. yr/^acfa, I 
have lorittcn. 

Note 4. The perfect of some verbs has the signification of 
the present. In this case the pluperfect has the signification 
of the imperfect. E. g. fl'xw, seem, I'oixa, seem. 

Verbs, of which the perfect has the signification of the 
present, are u/Wfji, avolyw, uiar/M, ^nvxaoi.iai, yr/rof-iui, rfLlSSl, 
daiw burn, JEUL, dsQy.ofiai, iyuQw (only the 2 perf.), t^^w, 
ElziSl, fi'xw, i'ATTw, iuTTj^i, xXciUM, XQa^M, y.ido^iai, Xdaxoy, fidca, 
fictlvw, |U£Ao), lATjy.dniAai, ,i/(//j'7J(jxw, fxvxdo^ai, ndd^M (only the 
2 perf.), ^riyvv^i, ^mvw^ii, tqI^m, cpvco. 

Note 5. The perfect is sometimes used for the presejit to express a cm5- 
tomary action. E. g. 'O K^a--uv ecfAx -z-eivra. avvn^VKKi, the conqueror 
takes possession of every thing. 

Note 6. The perfect is sometimes used for ihefuture to express the rapidity 
or certainty of an action. E. g. "0>.ea\as, i1 at rctZr' i^^iref/,ai -raXn, 
tfiou shalt certainly perish, if I ask thee again the same question. 

Note 7. The second person of the i)rrfcct imperative is 
rarely used, except in verbs of which the perfect has the 
signification of the present (§ 209. N. 4). E. g. Kgd'Cbh 
y.iy.Q(xya, xi/.QUx&i' cry out ; fiifxv^ayco, }ii(ivr,i.iai, ^.tfivrjuo re- 
member iliou. 

Note 8. The third person, of the perfect passive imperative 
of any verb may be used to denote the complete termination 
of an action. E. g. Tavra fiev ovv nsnalo&oi vf/iv, now you 
have had sport enough, or let there be no more joking about this. 

3. The PLUPERFECT expresses an action which was com- 
pleted in past time. E. g. fyr/Qacpsiv, I had icritten, implying 
that there teas a time when I could say " I have ivrittcn." 

Note 9. In the old writers (as Homer"*, the pluperfect sometimes has the 
force of the aorist, and sometimes of the imperfect. E. g. (II. 5, 66) /SsjSXjj- 
KU for £/3aX4, from fiaXku, strike; (II. 9, 671) hiVixaro, they welcomed, from 
Vi^ofjt.tt.1. See also above (§ 209. N. 4.) 

4. The FUTURE in all the moods and in the participle ex- 
presses an action or event which will take place. E. g. ygdipM, 
I shall or will write. 

20 * 



234 SYNTAX. [§§210^212. 

Note 10. The future is often used to denote a probable 
occurrence. E. g. (lirjasig vofxl'Citj&c.i ov naidog tovto Tov()yov 
eiiai, you will probably say, that this is considered as the busi- 
ness of a child. 

IMPERFECT. 

§ S 1 @. The imperfect expresses a continued past action. 
■^- S- t/f^aqjov, lions writing, not simply I wrote. 

Note 1. Sometimes the imperfect expresses an attempt not brought to a 
successful conclusion. E. g. (Herod. 1, 68) '^/Aiff^ovTo rhv aukrv, he 
tried to hire the court-yard. 

Note 2. The imperfect frequently denotes a customary ac- 
tion. E. g. Tovg noXitag fied-' onloiv s^snefiTiov, they 
were accustomed to send out the citizens armed. 

Note 3. The imperfect is frequently used for the aorist, 
especially in Homer and Herodotus. E. g. Tots di] Os^iaio- 
xXstjg xslvov T£ xul rovg KoQivdlovg nolla is yal xay.a eXsyE, 
then Themistocles said many and bad things both about him 
and about the Corinthians. 

Note 4. The imperfect ?y (from uftl) sometimes stands for IvtU E. g. 
Kv<rr^is ovK a,^ « V ^I'oii Cypris tlien is not a goddess fas we thought J, 

THIRD FUTURE PASSIVE. 

^311, The third future passive expresses a completed 
action, the consequences of which will be permanent in future 
time. In other words it transports that which is already com- 
pleted to a future time. E. g. fyyqacfiM, fy/f/QnipofxaL I shall 
remain enrolled, implying that I have already been enrolled. 

Note 1. The third future is the natural future of verbs whose perfect has the 
signification of the present (§ 209. N. 4). E. g. x.raoft.at.i, »ixTnfii»h »ix.t4- 
ffofiai shall possess. 

Note 2. In many instances the third future does not differ 
in signification from the common future passive. E. g. dico, 
bind, dsdrfoofiai, shall be bound. 

Note 3. The third future in some instances expresses the rapidity or cer- 
tainty of a future action. E. g. -Tf^affcu, vrtvr^a^trai it shall immediately be 
done, 

AORIST. 

§ S 1 S. 1 . The aorist in the indicative and participle 
expresses a transient past action, without any reference to 



'^ 5J13.] MOODS. 235 

another action. It simply narrates that which took place. 
E. g. t/Qaipcc, I wrote, not / was tcritiirg. 

2. The aorist in the dependent moods {siibjunctive, optative, 
imperative, and irifinitive) expresses a momtntary action, its 
time being determined by the context. E. g. iHqI nXdovo? 
inoiijaccTO H'oqxhp, ry ;f «^tcj«(;i9^ wt tw drjftta naga to dlxaiov, 
he thought mure of being just than of jjleasing the multitude at 
the expense of Justice. 

Remark. We see then that the present in the dependent moods (§ 209. 1) 
marks a continued action ; the aorist in these moods marlcs a momentary action ; 
and this is all the difference between these two tenses in the dependent moods. 

Note 1. The Greeks often use the aorist indicative and parti- 
ciple where, properly speaking, the pt if ect ov pluperfect should 
be used. It must not be inferred, however, from this that the 
aorist may express the time marked by the perfect or pluper- 
fect. E. g. (Aristoph. Nub. 238-9) Kara^rj^ wg f>£, Ira p' 
iy.didd^tjg, mv tuq ovmk iXrjXv&a. ^JIK. 'jlX&eg ds xaioc ri j 
Come down to me, to teach me those things for lohich I have 
come. Soc. What have you come fori where r{k&zg is parallel 
with (Irilvx^a. 

Note 2. The aorist indicative is often used for the present 
to express a customary action. E. g. ^AlX' an t^O^Qcov drira 
noXltt luav&drovaiv ol oocpoi. Jlaqa ph ovv cpiXov ov ^dd^oig 
av rovd^ , 6 d t^^Qo? svdvg i^rjvdyjcaasv, But the wise learn 
many things from their enemies. Now from a friend you 
might not learn this ; hut the enemy (as a common thing) com- 
pels you to learn it. 

Note 3. The aorist is used for the future to denote the 
rapidity or certainty of an action. E. g. 'AmaXo^iad^' «(>', 
it xanov nqoaoloo^iv viov naXaiM, then we are undone, if we 
add a new evil to an old one. 

Note 4. The aorist of the verbs aTo-ffrvM, despise, yiXoiu, iTumu, ^ofixi, 
and a few others, is, in conversation, often used for the present, in order to 
express a decided feeling of admiration, contempt, or pleasure. E. g. "Hs-S-jj* 
airnXuTs, it amuses me to hear (your J threats. 

MOODS. 

INDICATIVE. 

§S?13. 1. The indicative is used in independent propo- 
sitions. E. g. "O dQaxtov eait paxqov, the dragon is a long 
thing. 



$236 SYNTAX. . [§ fJl3» 

2. The indicative may be put after interrogative and relative 
words (§§68: 71: 73: 123). E. g. tI noa^g,- what art 
thou doing ? olds xl ^ ovist at,, he knows what (it) wants. 
^O avriQ, og rovi' iTioli^os, the man who made this. 

3. The indicative may be put after the following particles • 
el, if, whether ; snsl, sTiEidrj, after, lohen ; on, that, because ; 
wg, that ; wars, so that. 

Remark. In a sentence containing a condition and con- 
sequence or conclusion, the former is called protasis, and the 
latter apodosis. The protasis begins with the particle el, if. 

4. The indicative may be used in conditional propositions. 
E. g. /JELva neiaofisa&a, si aiyijuofisv, If we shall keep 
silence we shall suffer terrible things, where el aiyrjaofiev is tjje 
protasis and dsna neiaofiea&u the apodosis. (§ 213. R.) 

5. When the condition and the consequence are both past 
actions, the indicative is used both in the protasis and in the 
apodosis. In thrs case the apodosis contains the particle av. 

Ovroi el rioav uvdgeg ay(xd-o\, ovx av nors rama snaaxov, 

If they had been good men, they loould never have suffered 

these things. 
OvK av 71 QOsXe/sv , el fitj enlaxeva ev alr^&evaeiv, Had 

he believed that he should prove a false prophet, he would 

not have predicted. 

Note 1. Sometimes the optative is used in the apodosis, especially in the 
epic writers. E. g. Ka/ vv xtv VvS-' u'ToXoito a,vu,\ av^/tSv Aiviixg, il f^ii 
up' o^v v'oviffi Aih ^vya.T'n^ ' A<p^ollTyi, and noil) jEneas, king oj" men, had 
perished, had not Ve?ius, daughter of Jove, quickly perceived. 

Note 2. Sometimes av is omitted in the apodosis. E.g. E/ ^a^ ^v aVa« 
'PT^oOn't^a. ra, ftiXkovra yur^iri/rB-xi, oi/V ovrus oe,<X'o<rTa.riav tJj (TaXj* toutuv nv, 
for if those things, which were to happe?i, had been manifest to all, the city 
ought not even then to have given these things up. 

Note 3. The particle av may accompany all the tenses of 
the indicative, without any protasis expressed. E. g.'E(3ov^ 
lo^iriv (isv av ovx egiC^iv ev&dds, I could have loished not to 
he contending here. Ov /uq av Tj^ar^ avrar, he could not 
have touched them. "Jlars Trjg elgrivrig av dir] fiaQT^ its i, so 
that he would have missed the peace. 'Jlg axiji/jtv av aycav 
ovTog ovx sode^Tai, for this contest cannot possibly admit 
of any evasion. 

Note 4. The particles ontag, how, in order that, ocpQu, in 
order that, fitj, lest, and the double negative ov firj, not, are 



§ 214.J MOODS. 237 

frequently put before the future indicative. E. g. (Herod. 2, 
121, 2) 'Anoxaiivtiv aviov tj^i' x£(jc«/»}»', ox tag fitj nqoouno- 
XeasL xal ititlvov, to cut off his head, lest he might bring 
destruction upon him also. 

Note 5. Sometimes the future indicative with oncjg and 
ov jujj supplies the place of an emphatic imperative. E. g. 
"Ontog ds rovTo fir) didix^eig fir^dinx, hut see that you do not 
communicate this to anybody. Ov [itj Xtj g/ja si^g , you shall 
not talk nonsense. 

In such cases it is customary to supply the verb oga, see, or 
axonsi, consider. 

Note 6. The historical tenses of the indicative are some- 
times put after IW, wg, or ^tj lest, in which case the leading 
proposition also contains an historical tense. E. g. Tvqlov 
oidfia Xmova e'/Jav, IV vno deiQuoi HaQvaaov xaTsvda&rjV ^ 
leaving the Tyrian surge., I came in order to dioell under 
the summits of Parnassus. 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 

§914. 1. The subjunctive is put after the following 
particles : 

ecev, aV, ^V, if. firi, lest, 

snsiddv, indvf stitjv, when, after. oTicog, (ag, that, in order that. 

£(jT£, until. o(fQa, synonymous with IW or 

Eojg, oiXQig^ fii;(Qig, until. onag. 

IVa, that, in order that. nglv, before. 

2. The subjunctive is put also after interrogative and rela- 
tive words (§§ 68 : 71 : 73 : 123). 

3. The verb of the proposition upon which the subjunctive 
depends expresses time present or future. (§§ 209. 1, 2, 4.) 

E. g. 

*'AvoiyB Ttjv vXrjv l'/ s^X&cOf Open the forest, that I may 

come out. (§ 209. 1.) 
/Jidoixd OS fitj nXrjyMv dii], lam afraid thou wilt need 

stripes. (§ 209. N. 4.) 
ElaofiE^ a (xvilxa, av no I'^aojfisv ipocpov, We shall im- 

mediately know, if we make a noise. (§ 209. 4.) 
Ex^l^aoov avTTjv, Xva &saaMfiE&a Ttjv dr/dora, Bring 

her out, that we may see the nightingale. (§ 212. 2.) 



238 SYNTAX. [<J 215. 

„ ^' '^^^ interrogative and relative words, and the particles 
KXQig, laxs, fwc, tW, fie/Qig, oncog, ocpqa, uqIv, (§ 214. 1, 2,) in 
connection with the subjunctive, are generally accompanied 
by the particle «V. E. g. 

Zoou ov ravTu xaXslg, a av ipv^riv i'x^ ; Do you not call 
animals those which have life ? 

unoTBQ av unoy.QvvriTai to {ASigaxiov, e^^Xeyx&rja e- 
xai, Whatever answer the young man may give, he will 
he confuted. 

AsL noLovfxiv tav& kiidaxo& , oxuv Tti« yvia^iv novi^ocjv ovt' 
fQaorrjv TTgayfiaToyr, sag av avibv efi^aXoi^sv elg y.aaovy 
onoig av eldfj xovg Ssovg dsdoixsvaL, We always do these 
things, when we fold out that a person is a lover of evil 
deeds, until ive place him in a dreadful situation, that he 
may learn to fear the gods. 

Note 1. The subjunctive often depends on a verb express- 
ing time past, contrary to the rule (§ 214. 3) ; in other words, 
it stands for the optative (§ 216). 'Fhis substitution generally 
takes place when emphasis is required ; or when the verb after 
the particle denotes an action which is continued to the time 
of the speaker. E. g. (Eurip. Hec. 26-7) Krarwr ig old^* 
aXog [lEd^TjXi t»'' aviog xQ^oov iv 86y.oig s/jj, killing (me), he 
threw me into the surge, in order that he might keep the gold 
in his house. ^Enoles 8s afiCpoxiQa tuvtu, wg o xs noxafxog 
^^aSme^og sl'r], y.ai ol nlooL iooac OHoliol ig xijv Ba^vlonay 
she did both these things, in order that the river might be 
slower, and that the navigation up to Babylon might be 
crooked, "iyw q)0^r]&sig fXT) koidofjla ysvr]xai , naliv aaxs- 
TiQuvvov xov Kxr]uLnnov, I, fearing lest abusive loords should 
he used, again appeased Ctesi'ppus. 

Note 2. M^, lest, is sometimes accompanied by SV^wj. E. g. Aitai)(^' owus 
fjt.ot f/h Xidv (payns ao(pn, I fear lest you prove to be very artful. 

Note 3. Instead of ^>j, lest, with the subjunctive, ert, oreus, or ag, with 
the indicative, is sometimes used. 

Note 4. Sometimes the verb, upon which ^^ lest, depends, is omitted. 
E. g. (,11. 22, 123 : Plat. Crit. 9.) 

Note 5. Sometimes the subjunctive is put after the particles ti, l^ii, Wulv, 
otron, or£, unaccompanied by av, (§ 214. 1, 4.) 

§ S15. 1. The fr St person plural of the subjunctive is 
often used in exhortations. E.g. Tov MevHiojv ixiijw fis&Uf 
let us imitate Menelaus. 



§ 216.] MOODS. 239 

2. The first person singular also of the subjunctive, pre- 
ceded by the imperative uys or cfi'^jf, is often used in exhorta- 
tions. E.g. 0fc^« ax OVUM, let me hear. 

Note 1 . Homer uses the Jirst person singular of tlie subjunctive in exhorta- 
tions without uyi, (p'i^i, or any auxiliary word. E. g. (11. 22, 450) "l^u/x,' 
ortv' l^yx rirvKTxty let me see what deeds have been done. 

3. The first person of the subjunctive is used also in questions 
of doubt, when a person asks himself or another what he is to 
do. E. g. Ilwg (pu) inlaiaodtii ; how can I say that I know? 
E'Cnbi) XL ; may I say any thing ? 

Frequently the question begins with the second person of 
the present indicative of (Sovloixai or x)^i).M. E. g. IJovXsi 
d^Mj^isv,- loilt thou that ive place? In such cases ^ovXsl or 
■&s).Ei? usually precedes the subjunctive. 

Note 2. Sometimes the interrogation disappears after SiXu; or (iouXei 
(§ 215. 3). E. g. Efrf ri [iovXit <rg3<rSJ}j Jj a^eXjjj, whether t/iou 
wishest to add or take away any thing. 

4. The first person of the subjunctive is used also in 
questions expressing indignation. E. g. (Aristoph. Ran. 
3I32-4) Aia;(vl(, nuQaivM ool oioinav. AT2X. I^/m olmtko; 
JEschylus, I advise thee to he silent. iEscii. Ain I to be 
silent ? 

Note 3. The subjunctive is often used after ov f/,n for the Juture indicative. 
E. g. OuTt yiyvf-Tdt, oun yiyovtv, ov^i ovv fjt.7\ yivtjrat, it is not, it has not 
been, it will not he. 

In Homer, the subjunctive, with or without yAv, is sometimes equivalent to 
the future indicative. E. g. Avfoftcn tis 'Ai^eco, x»i iv vixvifftri (pxiivu, I will 
go into Hades, and shine among the dead. 

5. In prohibitions, the second person of the aorist subjunC' 
live is used after i.i^ and its compounds. E. g. 

3Irj <po ^rj^jjg, Fear not. 

Note 4. The third person of the aorist siibjunctive is rarely found after ^« 
in prohibitions. 

OPTATIVE. 

§ S16. 1. The optative is put after the following parti- 
cles : 

it, if oTiMg, wg, that, in order that. 

ItisI, enttdri, when, after. oti, that. 

I'avE, until. offga, synonymous with Xva or 

i(OQ, until. oTicjg. 

Xva, that, in order that. ngiv, before. 

(i^, lest. 



240 SYNTAX. [§216. 

2. The optative is put also after interrogative and relative 
words (§§68: 71 : 73: 123). 

3. The verb of the proposition, upon which the optative 
depends, expresses time past. (§§ 209. 3 : 210 : 212. 1.) E. g. 

*Hl(x^ovsv£&^ Xvoc cpol3r]& £l7}v iyo), He was telling great 
stories that I might fear, or in order to scare me. 

IIqmtcc dr] tTcma rig ei'i], x(xi tio&sv i'X^ot, Then he 
asked who he was, and whence he came. 

Note 1. The optative often depends on a proposition 
which contains a verb expressing present or future time. In 
this case it generally denotes uncertainty or probability. E. g. 
KaXeaov TQOcpov Ev^vuliiav, otpg^ ejiog iinoL^i, call nurse 
Euryclea, that I may say a word to her. 

Note 2. When the present is used for the aorist (§ 209. 
N. 1), it is regularly followed by the optative. This is no ex- 
ception to the rule (§216.3). E.g. Bovli)v eTTtTfj^j^arwi, 
onoig 'jur} aliod^aTtv Adr}vu7.oi, he contrives a plan which 
should prevent the Athenians from assembling. 

Note 3. Sometimes the particle av accompanies the words which precede the 
optative (§ 216, 1, 2). Thus the optative is sometimes found after lav, i^rti^xv, 
"vet eiv, fM\ civf o-zrus av, oTorecv, ctocv, o<p^x. tasv, u>s av. 

4. Particularly the optative is used when any thing that has 
been said or thought by another is quoted, but not in the 
words of the speaker. The action denoted by the optative 
may refer to present, past, or future time. E. g. 

^AnEnglvaTO on y,otv& dvoisv oi ftav&ocvovTsg, a ovx 

inlaxaivxo, He answered that those, who learn, learn 

what they do not know. 
ETtiov otl &av/Li(XGTwg onovda'Co if^sv , J said that we 

were wonderfully in earliest. 
^11 id 7] ycxQ, OTL i% avTwv aalov n avaHvifjoixo rwv egcart]- 

fxdrcov, For I knew that something good would come out 

of these questions. 

Note 4. Sometimes on or us is omitted before this optative (§ 216. 4). E. g. 

T««T* awayys/Aav 'ff'otnt yvDOUKO, ^trrhv o Iv oa/^ei; iu^ai, announce 

these things to my husband ; and that he will find his wife fait/iful in the 

house. 

"On may be omitted ^Iso when it has already been expressed. E. g. TI^mtov 
fiiv vrpo; tlocpixvovs tivxs 'iktytv, oti M-n^axo; fjuv cLvu lift tcahiKoc, ti/ui^uv 
uTo B-aXaffffn? oVov ' Ssv^jjj Is «^;c«v i(ro$To, and first lie said to some 
Parians, that Med^cus was up twelve days' journey from the sea ; and (that I 
Seuthes would be the leader. 



§217.] Mc.ons. 241 

Note 5. Instead of the optative after st, on, u;, tlie iiuhcalive is often used. 
E.g. TlpoH9rovTuv on t^v 'ExXa^a IXiv^i^ovirt, having proclaimed 
that they liberate Greece, where ikiv^i^oTiv might have been used. 

§ 2 1 y. 1. The optative is used in the expression of a 
wish» E. g. 

201 de \}iol roaa dolsr, oaa q-ofol aJ,oi ^ivona:, And may 
the gods give thee as many things as thou longest for. 

Note 1. Frequently the particles d, n ydq, il'df, wg, O thaty 
are placed before this optative. E. g. Li yuQ iy-Mv /lioc; mug^ 
niyiQxoio fi'r}Vj O that I were a son of a-gis-hearing Jove! 

Homer sometimes adds xiv to these particles 

Note 2. If the wish refers to past time, the aorist indicative is used after the 
abovementioned particles (§ 217. N. 1 . E.g. EJ'3' i^ix.ocT>}v, that 1 
had been cut off ! 

Note 3. Frequently the aorist cS(piX6v from l(pt'iXco) with the irijinitive follows 
the particles s'/B^i, tl yd^, us. E. g. EJ'S-' u(pi\iv (jloi xt}^iuuv i'tvui, 
that he were my guardian. 

Sometimes e!j(psXov with the infinitive is not accompanied by any particle. 
E. g."n<piXt f/,*i^i)s cixko; ' A^tffToyil'Tovi ^oii^nv, that no other man had 
delighted in Aristogiton ! 

2. The optative (generally with the particle «V) in an in- 
dependent proposition, very often implies uncertainly^ doult^ 
possihility, or inclination. E. g. 

OvKovv nv i'jdrj tmv S-taiMv jtg li/oi, ISow some one of 

the spectators might (perhaps) soy. 
*'lab)g ovv ii'noifi' uv, They might per liaps say. 
'^Ildicog av ovv (xvtmv nv&olurjv, Fain would 1 ask thetn. 
El Tig ego no fjs, tI vo^u'C,m /jeyiarov drai Tbiv Evayogn 
nenoay/usroir, fig nolXriV (xnoQlar av y.ai an t ulr^v , should 
any one ask me., which of the deeds of Evagoras I con- 
sider greatest^ I should find myself in great perplexity. 

Note 4. Frequently the indicative is used in the protasis, and the optative 
with av, in the a/)odosis. E. g. E/ yuo juy.ol tuZtos. ol^a, ko.) tuv a.vlpwTro- 
^eov (pa.vkori^'is av I'l'tiv, I should be more worthless than the slaves, if I did 
not tcnuiu these things. 

Also the oplative is used in the protasis ;ind the indicative in tlie npodosis. 
E. g. OS; i'^it 'rri; vuicto; Tx^ucyiviT-B-ui oracva-TptxTiZ, s'l rt upoc f^h Tpo^ea- 
^o'f/j To7; ia-iXtiTyvB-otri, ivho ifffre to come iii the uiglit with the entire army, in 
case success should not attend those who had entered. (^ 213. R.) 

Note 5. The subjunctive with lav, av, or r,v is sometimes used in the prO' 
tasis, and the optative in the apodosis. E. g. "Hv Trapi^^uirt toT? %inf/.'i]i9i; ot 
,l^Vf<P*li Xi^o^'vot-s, vXtv^Tris Yifiuv ev^iv' av kdfioi ^roTS, if the fullers furnish 
the needy with gowns, pleurisy will never afflict any of us. {^ 213. R.) 

21 



242 SYNTAX. [§§ 218, 219. 

3. The optative with wV, in an independent proposition, often 
supplies the place of the indicative. E. g. 

Ovit av fis&slf^rjv rov d^govov, I will not give up the throne, 

where ^sdu^rjv is equivalent to fisd^rjoofiai. 
Avxog ixsrxoL I'lpojAal tol, yal ovx av XsKp&siTjv , I will 

hoioever follow thee, and I loill not he left behind, where 

IsKp&tlip' follows siponai. 

4. Frequently the optative (with or without otV) has the force 
of the imperative. E. g. El ds //j}, Xuglaocpog (lav ^yolro, 
ruf 8s nXsvQoJv sxaTsfjctyv duo laiv nQia^vcdrbtv orqatriydi inv- 
fiElulad r^v, and if not, let Chirisophus take the lead, and let 
two of the oldest generals take charge of both wings, where 
Tiyeladbi, snif^shia&ojv, would be less polite. Aeyoig av, you 
may speak, softer than Xiye, speak thou. 

IMPERATIVE. 

§ 3 1 8. 1. The imperative is used to express a command, 
an exhortation, or an entreaty. E. g, 

cpivySy begone I (psvyira), let him depart, (pEvyus, depart ye, 
cpivyhbiaav, let them depart. 

2. In prohibitions the present imperative is used after ^tJ 
and its compounds. E. g. Mi] Xsys xavia, say not these things. 

Note 1 . Sometimes [tri is followed by the aorist imperative, particularly by 
the i/iiVcZ person. E. g. MjjSs aot /u, t \ yj <r a. r ea , and care not. 

iVoTE 2. The second person of the imperative is .sometimes used for the third 
person, when the speaker is in great haste. E. g. X(w^£/ ^eu^o itSj ycrjjgsTjjf * 
ro^iui ?raj t<;, let every servc.nt co}ne hither ; shoot, every one ! 

Note 3. The imperative in connection with a relative pro- 
noun or relative adverb, is sometimes found in a dependent 
proposition after ola&a (from ol8a, know). E. g. oJa&'' ovv o 
8(jaaov,- knoioest thou luhat thou must noiu do 7 01(t&' Mg 
noli] gov; dost thou know how thou must do? 07a&a vvv a 
fioi y ivio d b) ; do you kriow what I desire to be done to me ? 

INFINITIVE. 

^ SI 9. 1. The infinitive depends on a verb, 

PARTICIPLE, or ADJECTIVE. E. g. 

'Tfing ^ovlfG d^E y Evia {}txi nviov (jofpov / Do yoU wish 
him to become loise 7 



§219.] MOODS. 243 

^AOriialovg nurrng finu tov d^flov vofxiC^ig dvyi'^asa^ai 
Tiu itjovit ntid^m&al oov ; Do you think that you will 
he ahh to make all the Athenians^ together loith your uncle, 
folloiu your advice 7 Here nst&ea&at depends on noirjaai, 
noiijaaL on dvi-i]aiadui, and dvvijasa&ai on vofxl^stg. 

Jeivog vofii^o^si'og nrui Xiysiv, Being considered an 
eloquent speaker. 

The infinitive may depend on the verbs ayyiXloixai, ulgio^aif 
axovco, uvayy-d^b), avlrjixif arolyoj, a^i6(a, anayoqtvfa, umiXita 
threaten, unsinslv, uqx^ begin, (iovXouai, dio^ai, diavosofiai, 
diddaxoj, doy.ita, dvva/Liai, idw, e&eXca, s&ca, tido^ai, seem, llnlQo), 
ilnofxai, inayyiXXo^ai, endyo[xai, InixiXXo^ai, eniTQina), enixsiQsa, 
svxofivci, l^w can, Ixetsvw, xaTtgya^o^at, nsXivw, jtsXoixai, Xiym, 
XiXaiofiai, Xlaaoi-iai, fxav&dro), juiXXoi, vffdEol'Couai, ronl'Qw, oida, 
ol'ofxai, ofivvfui, oftoXoysot), oQfxda, ojgvvco, ocpElXoj, TtagayyeXXo), 
TtaQaiveco, nagnojcsvcx^ofiai, nctQd(f)7]i.n, nsld^o), nsLgdofxai, nifpVKa 
and iq)vv (from (fvoa), niOTevoi, noiiw, ngoaigeofiai, ngoadoxdw, 
ngoanoisofiai, ngoaxdoaw, aivyio), ovvlrffii, ToXfida), vmaxviofiai, 
qxAivofiai, (pr]fii, and some others. 

It may depend on the adjectives ddvvajog, ahog, dsivog, 81- 
xaiog, dvvaTog, eTnTr,8(iog, I'Toijuog, 'i]dvg, Ixapog, xccxog, o^vg, nid^a- 
vog, gndiog, xuXsnog, and some others. 

2. The infinitive is often used after verbs, participles, and 
phrases, to denote a cause or motive. E. g. 

Oviar^ 'Aya^ifivovi X s7n s ipo grjva i , Thyestes left it to 
Agamemnon to carry (it). 

Note 1. M'tWu, followed by the infinitive (present, aorist, or future) of a 
verb, forms a j)eriphrastic future. E. g. Ms XX si r/S-sya/, he is about to 
place. 

The infinitive is frequently omitted, when it can be supplied from the context. 
E. g. (Aristoph. Plut. 1100 — 2) Efsr' ifjio), erv rhv Sw^av tKocrrts evrutrt 
(T^o^oa, ; EPM. Ma A/', aXX' tfAiXXov, sc. kottuv, Tell me, loas it you 
that knocked at the door sofuiiousty ? MER. Not 7, by Jove, I was going (to 
knock). 

Note 2. The pronominal adjectives no7og, joioade, olog or 
olog xf, and xr/Xlxog, are sometimes followed by the infinitive, 
in which case they imply capahleness. E, g. Oi'x olog t' si'fi 
anooo^TJaai xov yiXwv, I cannot drive away my laughter. 

Note 3. It has already been remarked (§ 158. N. 3), that 
the omitted subject of the infinitive is frequently different from 
that of the proposition on which it depends. We remark now 
that this takes place chiefly after adjectives. E. g. llafi(f>ar,g 
daxrjg Idslv , a Star all bright to behold, where the subject of 
Ideiv would be xivu. 



244 



SYNTAX. 



[§ 220. 

Note 4. In narration the infinitive often seems to take the 
place of the indicative ; in which case some part of ^?;^/ or 
Uy(a may be supplied. E. g. (Herod. 1. 86) Tbv /usv drj 
noissiv ravTa, now he was doing these things, equivalent to 
O fiiv drj snoUs ravia. 

Note 5. The infinitive of verbs signifying to go is in some 
instances omitted. E. g. (Aristoph Ran. 1279) 'Eyw }isv ovv 
ig TO ^alarsiov ^ovlo^ai, sc. Uvai, for my part I wish to go to 
the lath. (Id. Av. 1) ' OqOi]v xshvsLg ; do you command us to 
go right on ? 

Note 6. The infinitive frequently stands for the second 
j)erson of the imperative ; in which case the imperative e&iXs 
or ^ils is usually supplied. E. g. Mriuots av ywai^l rjuiog 
sivai, you must never be indulgent to your wife. 

Note 7. The infinitive sometimes stands for the third person 
of the imperative, in which case, the subject, when expressed, 
is put in the accusative. It is thus used especially in com- 
mands and proclamations. E. g Tivx^a avX-^uag qjeQiro) aolXag 
inl v^ag, uwfLa ds ol'aad' f^ov dufismi, taking my arms, let 
him carry them to the hollow ships, and let him give my body 
to be carried home. ^Axovers, Xsw, Tovg oTcXixag anLsvaif 
hear, ye people, the heavy-armed soldiers must retire. 

Note 8. Sometimes the infinitive is put for the frst person 
plural of the subjunctive (§ 215. 1), in which case dsi may 
be supplied. E. g. Nvv ev rfj " Elladi xara(j.EuavTag rifxiwv av~ 
rewv iniixelrj&rjvai, for the present, remaining in Greece^ 
let us take care of ourselves. 

Note 9. Sometimes the infinitive expresses a wish, in which 
case 86g may be supplied. E. g. Ztv nureQ, r/ Al'avia Xaxslv, 
7] Tvdtog vlov, Father Jove, grant that the lot may fall upon 
Ajax, or upon the son of Tydeus. 

§ SSO. 1. The infinitive is frequently put after words and 
phrases signifying so that, so as; especially when its connec- 
tion with the preceding clause is not very obvious. E. g. 

AvTox^iQsg Mxo86i.ir]oav, ojotb -d avfzd'C^iV e^xi, They built 

it with their own hands, so that I wondered. 
Ov yag inuds rovg Xlovg, mots smvxm dovvai viag, For 

he could not persuade the Chians to give him vessels. 
The words and phrases, after which the infinitive is put, are 
icp' a, eqp' wis, on condition that, ooov, oaco, cog, wots, so thatj 



§ 221.] MOODS. 245 

2. The infinitive is put also after words signifying iefore, 
before that, (as nglv, ngip r/.) E. g. II^lv tov vo^ov Ttdi}- 
vai, before the taw was made. 

Note 1. The infinitive with wc, ooov^ oon, o xi (from oaxig), 
is often used in parenthetical phrases. E. g. "jlq enog scttsIv, 
so to speak, 'Jlg sin da at, as one might conjecture. '^Jlg iv 
nX&ovL X6/(a drjXbiaai, to explain more fully. \Q.g iwrsloyii, 
slnflv, sc. Ao'/wj to express it brief y, or to be brief. "Ooov 
y e(x' Bldevut, at least as far as my knowledge extends. "O 
T ( xa/u* udevai, for aught I knoic. 

Note 2. In parenthetical phrases (§ 220. N. 1) wg is often 
omitted, in which case the infinitive appears to stand abso- 
lutely. E. g. Ov tioXXm loyo) slnslv, not to use many loords. 
^Eg TO axQi^ig siTTslv, strictly speaking, to speak strictly. 
Jcxslv ejAoi, as it appears to me. "oUyov dslv, almost, nearly, 
IIoXXov 8slv, far from it. 

Note 3. In phrases like'OAt>oi/ deiv, (§ 220. N. 2,) dnv is 
sometimes omitted. E. g. "O d?] oXlyov ndoai al neQc to 
aoifict i)8oral i'xovai, which almost all the bodily pleasures have. 

3. The infinitive is frequently accompanied by the particle 
«V, in which case it has the force of the indicative, subjunctive^ 
or optative, with «V, (§§ 213. 5 : 214: 217.) E. g. "Enl noX- 
Xwv (XV Tig 18 sir dottel jxoi, it seems to me that one might see 
on many occasions. But ^En\ noXXwv Tig idslv doxel (loi, would 
mean it seems to me that one saio on many occasions. 

^ 2S1. Frequently the infinitive has the force 
of a neuter substantive ; in which case the neuter 
of the article (^ 141. 3) commonly precedes it. E.g. 

KqeXttov iaxL to acocpQovslv tov noXvngccy fiovslv , To 
act discreetly is better than to meddle with other men's 
business. 

2fpvvv6fiE&a inl tm ^sXtlov yeyovivai twv vcXXcov, We pride 
ourselves upon being of nobler descent than others. 

/JLot TO ^svog sivai ovtc av oXu adiTcrj&rjvuL ; Do you sup- 
pose that you will not be wronged, because you are a 
foreigner ? 

Note 1. Frequently the infinitive with the article tov is 

equivalent to the genitive denoting that on account of which 

any thing takes place (§ 187. 1). E. g. Mrj ps vnoXd^r^g ov 

TiQog TO nqdypa q)iXovEixovvTa Xiysiv, jov Tiaxaqiavbg yevioO^aif 

21* 



246 SYNTAX. [§ 222. 

lest you suppose that I do 7iut argue in order tJiat the thing 
may become evident. 

♦ 

Note 2. The infinitive with or without the article to is sometimes used in 
exclamations of surprise or indignation, in which case avdn-rov, h>-i^iov, tunS-ss, 
or fjcuoiv ia-ri, maybe supplied. E. g. (Aristoph. Nub, 268;: To ^e f^h xvv'inv 
o'/xeBiv ikB-^Tv ifAi rov >cce,7coha.'i/u(,ov^ 'i^ovrx, I, a wretch, have been foolish 
enough to come from home ivithout a helmet; literally, that I miserable should 
have come from home ivithout a lielmet. 

Note 3. The infinitive sTva; from s/^/, om" seems to be «M;?er^MO?w in some 
instances, particularly in connection with the adjective inuv, willing. E. g. 
(Herodot. 7, 104) 'Ex&Iy ti elvott alV av fjt,ouvo//,ct.^ioifji.i, I should not fght 
eve7i against a single mail, if I had my way about it. 

So in the phrases To ryifii^ov ilvxi, to-day. To vvv sTva/, now. Ta 
ffv/nTAv ill von, generally, on the whole. 

Note 4. The infinitive is often put after the substantives 
dvayxrj, {)-epLg, mqix, and a few others, in which case it has the 
force of the adnorainal genitive (§ 173). E. g. ^Avayyiri as 
navTa inlaiao&ai, sc. tart, thou of necessity must know all 
things. "SLqa ^adl^stv^ sc. iail, it is time to go. 



PARTICIPLE. 

§ SS^. 1. In general, the participle is equivalent to the 
indicative, subjunctive, or optative, preceded by a relative pro- 
noun, or by a particle signifying if, luhen, after, in order that, 
because, that, although. 

For the participle with the article, see above (§ 140. 3). 

2. The participle in connection with verbs signifying to 
knoiv, to hear, to see, to perceive, to show, to relate, to remem- 
ber, to forget, to be ashamed, to rejoice, and a few others, is 
equivalent to the indicative or optative preceded by the con- 
junction OTl. E. g. 

TovTo y.spvi](xaL aq)M ETia/ysXXopsv(a , I remember that 

you both profess this. 
Fvovg ^anxi^o^svov lo [xeiqckkiov, Perceiving that the 
stripling was overwhelmed. 

Verbs of this class are alad^avo^ai, alaxvvofiai, ay.ovco, yiyvta- 
axco, dsUvvfii, 8rjX6(a (also drjXog el^i), dLafivq^oveiKo, SiaawcpBO}, 
8La(peQco relate, BV&vfxiofxcci, e^std'Ca) prove, imlav&dvo^mi, inlara • 
^lui, svQlaytco, idslv, yMTrjyoQSM denote, ylvw, ^av^dvw, fisfivrjfiat, 
vosM, olda, oQocoj, nvvddvo^ai, cpalvoi, xcdgoi) and some others. 



§222.] PARTICIPLE. 247 

Note 1. The participle after omoida and oxjyiyiojayM, fol- 
lowed by tile dative*oi' tlie 7'eflexive pronoun, is put either in 
tiie dative, or in the case with wliich these verbs agree. E. g. 
IJfiavTO) ^vvj'jdsiv vdev eniaTa(.iivio, I was conscious to 
mi/self that I knew nothing, iitog om' f^ixviM tovt f/oV ^vvsl- 
aofiai, (fivyovT dnoXvaag ai d^a ,- now how shall I endure 
the thought that I have let a defendant escape? ^vyyivo)- 
axofisv avTolai t] fiXv ov Jioitjaaai 6^&wg, we are conscious 
of not having dune right. 

3. Verbs signifying to endure, not to endure, to overlook, 
to be contented with, to he satisfied, to cease, and some others, 
are connected with the participle. E. g. 

To dvvaa&ai dupcjvroc avixea&ac, To be able to endure 

thirst. 
Ilavaai cpXv uQwr, Stop talking nonsense. 

Verbs of this class are oyvinaM am contented, urixojxai, 
anitllaijaoixaiy aQ/ot begin, ixlslnw, eiA^nlnXtx^iai, tx^iv adtjVf 
xufjvo}, xacQiffjiw, h]y(x), nctiM, ntgio^dw, lii'kriY.a and TXrjvcaj 
vTiofiero), and some others, 

4. The participle is often put after the verbs diaylyro^nif 
duxyoy, diuTdsM, hxvdm'M, rvyxdvoi, cp&uro), and a few others, in 
which case the leading idea is contained in the participle. 
E. g. _ 

lIoLMv dtayfytvTjToii, He has been doing. 

/Jidyova L fiuvd^dvovTsg, They pass their time in learning. 

J laTfXo va L diy.n'CovTsg, They are continually deciding 

cases. 
JlsXrjd^a e^avTov aocpog o) v, I did not know that I was wise. 
TvyxdvofxBveTiL-d^vfioiivTEg, We happen to be desirous. 
<h& dvBi dva^dg, He went up before. 

Note 2. *'j^x^ is frequently followed by a participle ; in 
which case the verb, from which the participle comes, would 
have been sufficient. E. g. KQVipaa' e/eig, for i'nQvifKxg, thou 
didst conceal. Eixs xixiaoTQetijdfxsvog, for xajtoxQiipuTOf 
he subjugated. 

The same may be observed of ol'xopon and the Homeric /5^. 
E. g. *^i;if£To cpsvyuVf he escaped. JBrj (p^vyoiv dm noviov, 
he fled to the sea. 

5. The future participle is regularly put after verbs of 
motion, to express the /?Mrpo5e of the action of those verbs. E. g. 
'HX&s TiQog Tov "AyrioiXaov danaaofisv eg , he came to Age- 
sildus to bid him fareicell. Ji^d^wv aQprjpaiylam going 
to iliOW. 



248 SYNTAX. [ §§ 223, 224. 

Note 3. The present participle is used after verbs of ?7«o;?o/?, 
when the time of the action marked by it is the same as that 
of the verb. E. g. nefinst ^s aoi cps^ovxa xdod^ enunoXocg, 
he sends me in order to hrifig these directions to thee. 

Note 4. The adverbs aviUa, i^alqivris, svS^vg, ^sTa^v, lifuf/, 
are frequently followed by the participle. E. g. Msra^v 
-d-VMv, while he was sacrificing. "Afict naraXu^ovT tq , as 
soon as they had overtaken (them). 

6, The participle vi^ith the particle av has the force of the 
indicative, subjunctive., or optative, with «V, {§§ 213. 5 : 214 : 
217.) E. g. Ta dixalwg av grjd svtcc y.aivi t/]? tioAcgjc, those 
things which might justly be said against the state, where 
T« dixatMg av gr^devia is equivalent to iy.uva a drAaiwg aV ^i]i/elr}' 
but Tce dixaicog Qri&avia would mean those things which were 
justly said. 

ADVERB. 
^ 3^3. Adverbs limit the meaning of verbs, 

PARTICIPLES, ADJECTIVES, and Other ADVERBS. 

E. g. 

Ovxa noiw , I do so. 
Kalwg TTOiav, Doing well. 
^ETiiTijdscog navv, Very arnvenient. 
Ildvv y.al(ag, Very well. 

§ 934. 1. The Greek has two simple negative particlef?^ 
ov, no, not, and ^ri, not. (§ 15. 4.) 

2. Ov expresses a direct and independent negation. E. g, 
Ov as xQVipM, I will not conceal it from thee, v x oida, I da 
not know. Ov% olog t slfil, I am not able. 

So in direct interrogations, v nuQn^m'ug / I'Mt thou not 
wait 1 Ovv. riyoQsvov ,- did not I say ? 

3. Mri regularly expresses a dependent negation. Conse 
quently it is put after the particles Xva, onojg, uiaxs, tag, bcp^a, 
idv, si, sTidv, insi8dv. Also it is put after all relative words, 
when they do not refer to definite antecedents. E. g. Ot-x av 
TiQoslsys, si fir) snlazsvasv (xXrjx^sweiv, had he not believed that 
he should prove a true prophet, he loould not have predicted. 
Edv de Tig s^lavvrj Tovg aQxavrag, aal pri Ssxrjrat, and if any 
one shall drive away the magistrates, and shall not receive them. 



§ 2-24.] ADVKKD. 249 

4. ]\Tt'i is used also in propositions containing a icisJi, an 
entreaty, or Vi prohibition. E. g. Ilavoarl^Q Ki']Qvy^M noirjadns- 
roc, fiTjdevu uTixea&rn t/]c lifi'r,g, Pausaiiias proclaimijig that 
no one should touch the booty. 

In prohibitions, the present imperative or the aorist subjunc' 
live is used with pri. (§§ 215. 5 : 218. 2.) 

5. Mri, after verbs implying /car or anxiety, signifies lest ; in 
which case it is followed by the sybjunctive, optative, and some- 
times by the future indicative. (§§ 214 : 216 : 213. N. 4.) 

6. Mrj has also the force of an interrogative particle. E. g. 
JI/t; TiTj doy.ovusv aoi ; do we not seem to thee T where the per- 
son asked is commonly expected to say no. But Ou ni] doxoii- 
piv oat ; expects or presupposes the answer yes. 

Note 1. The negative particles very often correspond to 
each other. The following are the negative formulas : 

ovxt ov're neither ...... nor 

ovdk ovds neither nor 

ov 01T6 not nor 

ovtoL ovdi neither nor 

ovTOL ovTE neither ..... nor 

ov aids ovrs not nor nor 

ovTS ov neither w«r 

OVTE ovdi neither ..... nor even 

OVTS ov ovdi neither nor nor 

OVTS Ts ov neither nor 

p-^Ts p/]xs neither nor 

prjds jATidi neither nor 

pi]xs pi] neither nor 

^rixs ^ri8i neither nor 

Note 2. The formulas ov xi, ovts xi, (sometimes 

T£ ov xi, OVTS xai, OVTS ds,y are equivalent to 

ovxs oi'rf, when both clauses have the same verb. E. g. 

(II. 1,603 — 4)0 w /.iii> (fUQ^tyyog TtfQixt/.XXiog, tjv s/ ^AtioXImv, 
3Iov(jao)v x)-', HI usidov, niithcr of the harp of surpassing beauty, 
which Apollo had, nor of the Muses, loho were singing. 

But if the verb of the second clause is different from that of 
the first, the second member (ri) of the formula has an affii- 
mative meaning. E. g. Ovis nooxfQov rjjAilg rJQ^afisv noXi^ov 
■JiQog v^ug ' rvv t' ii}sXof.ifv unordag noifiad^uL, we never began 
the war against you ; and now we are willing to make a treaty, 
where the verb of the first clause is ij^^npsv, and that of the 
second i&elouev. 



250 SYNTAX. [§§225,226. 

Note 3. The first negative particle of a negative formula is sometimes 
omitted. E. g. T^uas ov^' *Ex.k*ivis, for Outs. T^ouccs «v3-' 'Ekkvv'ts, udl/ier 
a Trojan wojnan nor a Grecian woman. 

§225, 1. T?ao or more negatives, in Greek, strengthen 
the negation. E. g. 

"Oiav (.iTj cpiJTS y.alov uvai (j^Tjdiv, When you say that 
nothing is beautiful, or When you deny that there is any 
thing beautiful. 

2. The double negative ov (xri is put either with the future 
indicative or with the subjunctive. (§§ 213. N. 5 : 215. N. 3.) 

The double negative ^t] ov is commonly put with the infini- 
tive. E. g. Ova ivavTioj(so^c(L to /ztj ov yfywvBHv, I shall 
not object to saying. 

Note. Two negatives destroy each other in the formula 
Oldug oaxig ov, no one who (does) not. E. g. Ovd sr o tl ovx 
TiQooTa, nothing which he did not ask. Ovdilg ov twv nc/fjov- 
TMv vnsQSTtffVsas lov Xoyov, there was no one of those who were 
present who did not much praise the discourse. In this case 
both negatives belong to the same clause. 

3. Verbs and expressions, which contain a negation, are 
often followed by the particle ,u?j with the infinitive. E. g. 
Tov T£ vofiov idsixvvTTjv avto) xotl rolg vsoig ansinsTtjv fir] dia- 
Xsyeo&ai, they showed him the law, and told him not to hold 
any conversation with young men. "E^tQvaa^iriv ^qotovg too 
[17] diaQqaiad^ivrng itg^Aidov ^oluv, I delivered the mortal race 
from being utterly destroyed and sent to Hades. 

Verbs of this class are anav8ab3y ajiotyoQsvM, otnexofiai, txTit- 
Gii(o, agviofiai (also the expression t'^aQvog ni^t), tl'Qy(a, e/if/to, 
nav(o, Qvo^at, and a few others. 

PREPOSITION. 

§ 3 SO. 1. The following eighteen prepositions are called 
the primitive prepositions : 
"Aficply about, around, with Genitive, Dative, or Accusative. 
"^Ava, upon, on, in, through, with Dative or Accusative. 
^Avxl, instead of, with Genitive. 
""Anoyfrom, with Genitive. 

Aia, through, for, on account of, for the sake of, with Geni- 
tive or Accusative. 
Elg or ^Eg, to, into, with Accusative. 



§ 226.] PRi' POSITION. 251 

'Ev, in, at, with Dative. 

jfc'l or jEx, from, of, out of, with Genitive. 

*JEnl, on, upon, to, tuicards, with Genitive, Dative, or Accu- 
sative. 

K«Ttt, down from, against, according to, in, in respect to, with 
Genitive or Accusative. 

Mtxa, with, among, after, with Genitive, Dative, or Accu- 
sative. 

naQa,from, by, with, to, besides, along, with Genitive, Da- 
tive, or Accusative. 

niQh about, around, concerning, of, with Genitive, Dative, 
or Accusative. 

IIqo, before, in the •presence of, in behalf of, in preference to,, 
with Genitive. 

IlQog, to, towards, by, in addition to, with Genitive, Dative, 
or Accusative. 

2vv and Svv, with, together with, by means of, with Dative. 

'TnsQ, over, beyond, in behalf of , with Genitive or Accusative^ 

'r/ro, under, by, with Genitive, Dative, or Accusative. 

Note 1. Most of the dissyllabic prepositions throw the ac- 
cent back on the penult, when they are placed after the nouns 
to which they belong. This is called anastrophe. E. g. 
Nsbiv a TTO, for yiTTo v s wv , from the ships. ^Exd^Q(av vkbq,, 
for 'Tn SQ e/&Quv, for the enemies. 

Note 2. Some of the dissyllabic prepositions throw th© 
accent back on the penult also when they stand for h^iI, am, 
compounded with themselves. In this case, the Attics use 
the old tvi for ev (§ 226. N. 6). E. g. naga for naQEOTt, from 
nuQsiiut, i'vL for tvEOTi from I'viifn. 

Note 3. In the early writers (as Homer and Herodotus), the 
preposition is often separated from the verb, with which ife 
is compounded, by other words belonging to the same propo- 
sition. This is called tmesis. E. g. 'An 6 ^iv e&avE 6 arga^ 
rrj/og, for ^ATie&avs (iiv o OTQairiyog, on the one hand, the gen-^ 
eral died. 

Note 4. In case of tmesis (§ 226 N. 3), the preposition is 
sometimes put after the verb. E. g. 'Jlas ^' ano givov 
Ud-og, and the stone Jcnocked off the shield. 

Note 5. In case of tmesis, when the same compound word is to be repeated 
several times, after the first time the preposition alone is sometimes used. E. g. 
Kara (juv 'iXtuffav kItou t^v yvvauKcc, xttra, tX ra, fixva, for KccriXiv- 
ffay fjuv auTou t»)v yvvxTscx, x, ktIX lu ir oiv tl roc, rixvK, Oil the one hcmd, theij 
Stoned his loife, and, on the ot/ier, they stoned his children. (§ 226. N. 3.) 



252 SYNTAX. [§§227,228 

2. The following particles very often have the force of 
prepositions. 

*'Avsv or^'AtsQ, without, with Genitive. 

^'Axqig or^'AXQh until, as far as, with Genitive. 

"Evsna or "Evuibv, on account of, in respect to, so far as coU' 

cerns, with Genitive. 
MsxQig or M^xqi, until, as long as, with Genitive. 
nlriv, except, with Genitive. 
""Slg^ to^ with Accusative. 

Note 6. The old language lias «Ta/ for avo' ^tal for 'hia. ' hi, uv'i, slv, for 
iv' Kctra,! for xarci, only in composition ; vra^ai for -Ttu^a. ' t^oti, vrori, for 
«r^flf * vTii^ for vTi^ ' t-TTu'i for v<7r'o. The Ionic has i'iviKu, or iiviKiv for 'ivixa,. 

Note 7. A preposition without a case has the force of an 
adverb. E.g. Kaimino') ys n(j6g, in addition to this I ivill 
kill (thee). 

Note 8. In the old writers, a preposition is sometimes repeated, E. g. 
'Ev Ti xa.1 iv Mifjt,^!, and in Memphis. 

Note 9. Sometimes the preposition, with which a verb is compounded, is 
repeated. E. g. *Av V 'O'^va-trsvi ScvlffruTo, and Ulysses arose. 

4 9^T. A preposition in composition is often followed by 
the same case as when it stands by itself. E. g. 

'^TnsQsvEy xovT fg rag vavg \6v ^I a d^ ^lov , Carrying the 

ships across the Isthmus. 
^JSo^ld^s ps, It came into my mind. 

CONJUNCTION. 

^ 9S8. 1. Conjunctions signifying and, but, or, 
than, connect similar words. E. g. 

no Xt^ov Knl ixccxv?' ^f '^^("' ^^^ battle. 
/iLnalag aadUMg, Justly and unjustly. 
^AyaTiav ij piasXf, To love or to hate. 

Conjunctions of this class are mxl, and, re, and, aXXd, hut^ 
>/', or, ^', than. 

Note 1. The conjunction ?/, or, means also otherwise, else. 

The formula ^ ^', means either or. The formula 

TtoxfQov or noTsqa ..... ?J, means whether or. 

Note 2. The conjunction ^', than, is used after compara- 
tives (§ 186. N. 5, 6). 



§ 228] coxNJUNCTioN. 253 

A comparison between two qualities of the sanr^ object is 
expressed by means of two comparatives, expressive of those 
qualities, with rj, than, between them. E.g. Mav ixojtsqoc 
7] avd Q Eiorsgo I , more rash than brave, 'l^noliioa taxinsga 
ij uoq)bjTsga, I acted more quickly than luiscly. 

Note 3. The conjunction x«t, in the formula kvu >c«/, 

means both and, as well as. 

After adjectives and adverbs implying resemblance, union, 
approach, it may be rendered as. E. g. '^O^oimg nsnoi^xaoi 
X a I "OfiTjcnc, they have acted in the same manner as Homer, or 
they and Homer have acted in the same manner. 

Sometimes y.ui means even, also. E. g. Kal ^J/Ufig tovtm 
tQQi/ uvxi^ol-i^aai, even Achilles is afraid to meet him. 

Note 4. Ti is always enclitic (§ 22). The formula t« 

itat means both and. The formula ts yal (not separated) 

means both and. The formula y.ai n ts, or xal 

Tf , is a little stronger than xai. 

Note 5. Sometimes a possessive pronoun or a possessive 
adjective and a genitive are connected by unl' in which case 
the genitive is joined to the genitive implied in the pronoun or 
adjective. (§§ 67 : 131. 1.) E. g. HalStg ifiol :iccl Ttcngog 
araa&ukov, sons of me and an indiscreet father. 

2. The following list contains most other conjunctions. 

ttX, Doric, iz= si. It is used also by the epic poets, but only 
in the formulas av xev, al ydg, (xi'df, O that. 

al'xa («r, Kcc), Doric, rr: iuf. 

av, a particle implying uncertainty and indefniteness. It may 
accompany all the moods and the participle. (^§213- 
222.) 

Sometimes it is doubled. E. g. (Eupol. apud Athen.) 
Ovg ovH av £t).i:a&' ov8' av oh'ontag noorov, lohom for- 
merly you would not have appointed even inspectors of 
wine. 

av, see edv. It must not be confounded with the preceding. 

aga (paroxytone), therefore, consequently 

dga (properispomenon), an interrogative particle. 

«rf («, Ts), inasmuch as, because, 

avrdg or dtaQ {avTS, aga), but. 

yu, Doric, 1= ys. 

yiig, for, never stands at the beginning of a proposition. 

ye, a particle of limitation, at least. (See also § 64. N. 1.) 
22 



254 SYNTAX. [ § 228 

yovv (yi^ ovy) = yi and ovp united. 

dal, =z Oi]. 

di, and, but, for, never begins a proposition. (See also fiiv.) 

di], now, indeed, in truth, prithee. Its compounds are d)j7iov- 

d^EV, drjdsv, diJTa. 
idv or av or rjv {n, av), if, with the subjunctive. (^^ 214. 

1: 216. N. 3.) 
si, if, ivhether, followed by the itidicative or optative. (^§213. 

3: 216. 1: 214. N. 5.) 
u yccQ, for if It expresses also a wish, O that ! l^ 217. 

N. 1,2, 3.) 
snav or inriv {end, wV), when, after, as soon as, with the sub- 
junctive. (§§ 214. 1 : 216. N. 3.) 
ETcsdv, Ionic, =: indv. 
ind {ini), since, after, inasmuch as, with the indicative or 

optative. (§§ 213. 3 : 216. 1 : 214. N. 5.) 
imiddv {ensidrj, av), =z indv. 
BTtEiSri [tTiH, 8i])i :=■ insl. 
infiri, poetic, m ejisidij. 
inriv, see indv. 
71, truly, certainly. It is also an interrogative particle. It 

is often followed by ^r^v, nov, toi, ydg, or dri. 
ri8e, and. See also inxiv. 
7]s, Epic and Ionic, zr: tJ, or, than. 

'^psv ^ds, both ..... and, as well as. 

7]v, see adv. 

i]TOi (ij, jol), used commonly in the formula ^Vot ^, or 

»/ r/rot, either or. 

In Homer ^Vot is equivalent to piv. 
■&1JV, a particle of confrmation. 
ids, =: Tjdi. 
iva, that, in order that, with the subjunctive, optative, or with 

the historical tenses of the indicative. (§§ 214. 1 : 216. 

1 : 213. N. 60 

As an adverb it is equivalent to noii or onov, where, 
xa, Doric, = yj. 

yj or Ttsv, Epic, =z uv (different from av, if). 
piv, commonly used in the formula ph di, indeed 

but, on the one hand on the other. 

fi^v, a particle of confrmation, really, indeed, certainly. It 

is often preceded by ys, ^, yal, firj, ov, and by interroga- 
tive words (§§ 68 : 73 : 123). 
pav {iJLiq, ovv), an interrogative particle. (§ 224. 6.) Some- 
times it is followed by fj.^ or ovv. 



<5 229.] INTERJECTION. 255 

TV or vvv (short v) is a weak vvr, now. The form rv is found 

only in the Epic language. 
o,uft)c, yet, still. 

0710)?, that^ in order that, with the subjunctive, optative, or 
future indicative. (§§ 214 1 : 216. 1 : 213. N, 4, 5.) It 

must not be confounded with the adverb onrng, as. 
orav (oTf, civ), when, with the subjunctive. (§§ 214. 4: 216. 

N. 3.) 
oxv (o'yrtc), that, because, with the indicative or optative. 

(§§213. 3:216. 1.) 

It strengthens the meaning of superlative adjectives or 

adverbs. E. g. "Otl nXslaiov Xi^orov, as much time 

as possible. 

Also, it stands before words quoted without change. 

E. g. Eliifv OTL Elq xaiQov ijy.tcg, he said, " You have 

come at the right timeJ^ 
ovv, now, therefore. (See also §§ 71. N. 3 : 73. N. 3 : 123. 

N. 4.) 
ovvixa (ov, svsy.a), on account of which. As a conjunction it 

means since, because. 
ocpQa, poetic, = iVa or ontog. (See also § 123.) 
nio, very, quite, although. (See also §§71. N. 3 : 124. 

N. 4.) 

Q(x, Epic, :=. agn. 

Tol (for aol, § 64. N. 2), certainly, indeed^ It often corre- 
sponds to the English parenthetical phrases you know, 
you see. 

wg, that, in order that, with the indicative, subjunctive, opta- 
tive, or infinitive. (§§ 213. 3 : 214. 1 : 216. 1 : 220. 1.) 
It strengthens the mG?imugo^ superlative adjectives and 
adverbs. E. g. "jlg rdxioTa, as quickly as possible. 

bJOTs {wc, ts), so that, with the indicative or infinitive. 
(§§213.3:220. 1.) 

INTERJECTION. 

§ S^SO. Interjections are particles used in exclamations, 
and expressing some emotion of the mind. 

The following list contains most interjections. 
«, ah ! of sorrow and compassion. 
«, a, ha! ha! of laughter. 
«t, of wonder. 
al^ot, of wonder. 



256 SYNTAX. [ § 229. 

annanal or anancd, of approbation. 

aTTocXaTTccTa, of joy. 

aTTanTiaTjard, of sorrow. 

arxaral, aiaxcd, or airazaia^, of sorrow and disgust. 

^a^al or ^a^aia^, of astonishment. Followed by the geni- 
tive (§ 187. 2). 

I or I', ah ! of grief 

eta (sometimes tia), on ! courage I 

uiVy icell, he it so. 

fXjXiv, of grief or joy. 

svys (si), ys), ivell done! bravo! 

svot, the cry of the bacchanals. 

tJv, rivi, '^vldt, = idov, which see. 

iaxTaxal or iaxxaxaid^, of sorrow. Followed by the genitive 
(§ 187. 2). 

lav, lavoi, ho ! in answer to a call. Sometimes it is equiva- 
lent to lov, Im. 

Idov (oxytone), lo ! behold! (See also EIJIl in the cata- 
logue of Anomalous Verbs.) 

4?J, of exultation. 

lov, alas ! of sorrow. Followed by the genitive (§ 187. 2). 

tw, of joy or grief. Followed by the dative or vocative 
(§§ 196. 5 : 204. 2). 

fiVy fiv, of pain. It is made by breathing strongly through 
the nostrils. 

o«, woe ! alas. 

at, woe. Followed by the dative (§ 196. 5). 

oi'^oL or ol fiot {oi', fiol), woe is me! Followed by the geni- 
tive (§ 187. 2). 

oxxoxol, 0X0X0%, oxxoxoxol, or oxoxoxoxol, of sorrow. 

oval, woe ! used only by the later writers. Followed by the 
dative (^ 196, 5). 

nanal, nanaLa^, of pain, sorrow, joy, wonder. 

nona^, iionoi, or d) nonoi, O gods! of complaint. 

7ii»7T«| or nvTina^, of wonder or admiration. 

Qvnanal, a cry used by rowers. 

V V, expresses the sound made by a person smelling of any 
thing, 

cpwy alas ! Followed by the genitive (§ 187. 2). 

(pV, ■==■ (piV. 

w (with the acute accent), oh ! of wonder or grief. Fol- 
lowed by the nominative, genitive, or dative, (§§ 187. 2 : 
196. 5.) 

m (circumflexed), O! Followed by the vocative (^ 204. 2) 

won, used in encouraging rowers. 



§§ 230, 231.] IRREGULAR CONSTRUCTION. 257 

IRREGULAR CONSTRUCTION. 

§^30. 1. Frequently a nominative stands without a 
verb. E. g. (Xen. Hier. 6, 6) "jlaneQ ol a&XrjTul ol'x, oiav 
tdi(ojb)}> yivwvTUL nQUixovg, tovto uvrovg tvcpgalvsi, akX , orav 
taiv avra/ojyiaroji' iJTTovg, Tour' avrovg avia, literally, as the 
athletes, when they become superior to inexperienced men, — 
this does not gladden them ; but when they prove inferior to 
their opponents, — this grieves them, where one might expect 
01 a&lr/Tul TOi/Tw (vcfQuu'oviaL toitw ariuriai. 

2. If in the formula 6 p.h> o 8b a whole is expressed, this 

is put either in the genitive (§ 177), or in the same case as 

o fiiv h8L E. g. (II. 16, 317-22) TsayxoQidai 8\ 

fisv oviaa^ ^Arv{iriov oli'i 8ovqI, \4vxlloxog xov d^ olv- 

xi&tog OQccaviii^dTjg tip&r] oQe^dfierog, nglv ovjuaai, the sons 
of Nestor, one, that is, Antilochus, pierced Atymnius with the 

sharp spear but godlike Thrasymedes directed his spear 

against him before he struck. (Soph. Antig. 21, 22) Ov /ccq 
xdcpov VMV X (o xaai/VT^xco Ktjiwv, xov per nqoxlaag, rov d* 
axipitaag s'/fL ; has not Crcon given one of our brothers an 
honorable burial, and Ift the other unburied ? 

3. Instead of the nominative, the accusative is sometimes 
found. E. g. (Odys. 1, 275) Mrix^Qa 8\ sV oi &vp6g etfOQ- 
piixai yauiead^ai, aip Vxco eg piyaqov nuxQog, as to thy mother, 
if she very much desires to be married, let her go back to her 
father's house. 

4. Instead of the infinitive, sometimes the indicative with 
H, OK, or oxL is used ; in which case the subject-accusative 
stands alone. E. g. (Aristoph. Av. 1268-9) zluvov ys tov 
x-^QVxn, xov Txaga tovg ^qoxovg olx6fi(vov , il pri8inoxB vo- 
axijaet ndUv, it is a terrible thing, that the herald who was 
despatched to the mortals should not return. (Ibid. 650-2) 
'fig iv AlawTxov Xoyoig iaxl keyopsvov di] xt, xrjv ocltaTxsx', (»g 
(pXavQcog ixoirwvrjasv afTw noxs, that in the fables of ^ sop 
something is said about the fox, that she was once scurvily 
treated by her partner the eagle. 

^ 331. Sometimes with two or more substantives only one 
verb is put, which can belong only to one of them. This irregu- 
larity of construction is called zeugma. E. g. (iEschyl. Prom. 
Vine. 21, 22) "iv^ ovxb qxavrjv, ovxt xov poQCptjv (Sgoxav 

22* 



Ol/JSl 

of a 



SYNTAX. [§ 232. 

, where thou wilt neither (hear) the voice, nor see the form y 
any mortal, where cpwvrjv, properly speaking, depends on 



§ 333. The Greeks were fond of connecting kindred 
words as closely as possible. This often occasions a confused 
arrangement. E. g. (iEschyl. Ag. 836) Tdlg avrog avjov 
nriiiaai ^ugvvsiai, he is oppressed by his oion misfortunes. 
(Id. Choeph. 87) Uaga (flktjg cplXfo yvvaixbg avdgl, from 
a dear wife to a dear husband. 



I 



PART IV. 

VERSIFICATION. 



FEET. 

§333. 1. Every GreeK verse is divided into portions 
called feet. 

Feet are either simple or compound. A simple foot con- 
sists of two or three syllables ; a compound foot, of four. 

SIMPLE FEET OF TWO SYLLABLES. 

Spondee, tvi^o long ; as /SmXov. 

Pyrrhic, two short ; as {novog. 

Trochee or Choree, a long and a short ; as firjxog. 

Iambus, a short and a long ; as jueVw. 

SIMPLE FEET OF THREE SYLLABLES. 

Dactyle, a long and two short ; as mvofisv, 

Anapest, two short and a long ; as vosqcov. 

Tribrach, three short ; as &sXofxEv. 

Molossus, three long ; as av^Qtanoi. 

Amphibrach, a short, a long, and a short ; as roijTog. 

Amphimdcer or Cretic, a long, a short, and a long ; as 

Bacchius, a short and two long : as idslnvsig. 

Antibacchius, two long and a short ; as av&gans. 

COMPOUND FEET. 

Dispondee, a double spondee ; as a^maxvovvTai, 

Proceleusmatic, ... a double pyrrhic ; as Xsyofievog. 

Ditrochee, a double trochee ; as avlXa^ovxBg. 

Diiambus, a double iambus ; as aocpwraToi. 

Greater Ionic, .... a spondee and a pyrrhic ; as noirjTsov. 

Smaller lonicy a pyrrhic and spondee ; as anoXaiXmg, 

Choriambus, a choree and an iambus ; as olofiivmv. 



260 



VERSIFICATION. [§ 234. 



Antispast, an iambus and a trochee ; as duoTrifu. 

Epitritus /, an iambus and a spondee ; as naQd&ovTcav, 

Epitritus 11^ a trochee and a spondee ; as evkoyTJaai,. 

Epitritus III, ... a spondee and an iambus; as ^yovfiivcov. 
Epitritus IV,.... a spondee and a trochee ; as av^gunoiaX. 

PcBon I, a trochee and a pyrrhic ; as Avtofxsveg. 

PcBon II, an iambic and a pyrrhic ; as axovopsv. 

Pceon III, a pyrrhic and a trochee ; as jETvcpaaX. 

PcBon IV, a pyrrhic and an iambus; as 8ta).6/(ov. 

2. Arsis is that part of a foot on which the stress (ictus, 
beat) of the voice falls. The rest of the foot is called thesis. 
The arsis is on the long syllable of a foot. For example, the 
arsis of an iambus or anapest is on the last syllable ; the arsis 
of a trochee or dactyle, on the first. 

Note. The arsis of a spondee is determined by the nature 
of the verse in vi^hich this foot is found. E. g. in trochaic or 
dactylic verse the arsis is on the first syllable, thus (-' -) ; in 
iambic or anapestic, on the last, thus ( '). 

The tribrach has the arsis on the first syllable, when it is 
found in trochaic verse, thus (-' - ^) ; on the second syllable, 
when it stands in an iambic verse, thus (-- ^' ^), 

The dactyle in anapestic or iambic verse has the arsis on the 
second syllable, thus (- -' ^). 

The anapest in trochaic verse has the arsis on the first 
syllable, thus (-' - -). 

§ S34. 1. Verses are very often denominated from the foot 
which predominates in them. For example, the verse is called 
dactylic, when the dactyle predominates in it. 

2. A complete verse is called acatalectic. A verse, of which 
the last foot is deficient, is called catalectic. 

Particularly, a trochaic, iambic, or anapestic verse is called 
catalectic, when it has an odd number of feet and a syllable : 
hyper catalectic, when it has an even number of feet and a 
syllable : br achy catalectic, when it has only an odd number of 
feet. For examples see below. 

3. The trochaic, iambic, and anapestic verses are measured 
by dipodies ; (a dipody is a pair of feet.) Thus, an iambic verse 
of four feet is called iambic dimeter ; of six, iambic trimeter ; 
of eight, iambic tetrameter. 



§§235-237.] TROCHAIC VERSE, 261 

§ 2S5» CiESURA is the separation, by the ending of a 
word, of syllables rhythmically or metrically connected. There 
are three kinds of caesura : 

1 . C(Bsura of the foot ; 

2. CcBsura of the rhythm ; 

3. CcBsura of the verse. 

1. The C(Bsura of the foot occurs when a word ends before 
a foot is completed. E. g. "iXiov \ i^aXa- \ na^s no- \ hv, x^- \ 
Q(oa6 5' «- I yviag, where i^aXana^s, /T^^was terminate in the 
middle of the foot. 

2. The c(Bsura of the rhythm occurs when the arsis falls 
upon the last syllable of a word ; by which means the arsis 
is separated from the thesis. This can take place only in feet 
which have the arsis on the first syllable. E. g. '^^fc, ^A~ \ Qsg 
Pqoxo- I Xoiys, fit- I (iLcpovs, \ Tsi%£ai- \ nXtjta, where the arsis 
(gsg) of the second foot falls upon the last syllable of 'Agtg. 

This caesura allows a short syllable to stand instead of a 
long one (§ 18. 2). E. g. Tgtosg \ ^sv xXviy- \ yi] t' ivo- \ nj] 
t' iaav \ oqvi- \ S^sg w?, where the last syllable {-^sg) of oqvi- 
•d^eg is made long by arsis. 

3. The ccDsura of the verse is a pause in verse, so intro- 
duced as to aid the recital, and render the verse more melo- 
dious. It divides the verse into two parts. 

In the trochaic, iambic, and anapestic, tetrameter, and in 
the elegiac pentameter, its place is fixed. (§§ 240 : 245 : 250. 
4: 255.) 

Other kinds of verse have more than one place for this 
caesura. 

§ 330. The last syllable of most kinds of verse is common, 
that is, it can be long or short without regard to the nature of 
the foot. 

TROCHAIC VERSE. 

§ 33T. The fundamental foot of the trochaic verse is the 
trochee. The tribrach can stand in every place instead of the 
trochee. The spondee or the anapest can stand only in the 
even places (2d, 4th, 6th, 8th). 

In proper names the dactyle can stand in all the places, 
except the 4th and the 7th. 



262 VERSIFICATION. [§§238-243. 

§^S8. The TROCHAIC MONOMETER CODsistS of tWO fcCt. 

It is generally found among trochaic dimeters. E. g. 
T/jvde I vvi'I. 

§ ^30. 1. The TROCHAIC dimeter acutalectic consists of 
four feet, or two dipodies. E. g. 

AkX a- I vufivf]- I a&svTsg, \ w ^dgeg. 
T(av ts I nakam- j av i- j kslvwv. 

First with trembling hollow motion, 
Like a scarce awakened ocean. 

2. The TROCHAIC dimeter catalectic consists of three feet 
and a syllable. It is found among trochaic dimeters acatalec- 
tic. E. g. 

TovTO fiiv ys '^Qog ctUl 
BXaatavfL vmI avjtofpavTsl. 

Tov ds j ;|f€t/iw- j vog na \ }Xv. 

Could the stoutest overcome 
Death's assault and baffle doom, 
Hercules had both withstood. 

§ 34LO. The trochaic tetrameter catalectic consists of 
seven feet and a syllable. Its verse-caesura occurs at the end 
©f the fourth foot. This caesura is often neglected by the 
comedians, but very seldom by the tragedians. E. g. 

Eia I 8ri cpX- \ Xoi Xo- \ X^^<xh II Tovqyov \ ovx «- | ^(xg to- j ds. 

Judges, jurymen, and pleaders, || ye whose soul is in your fee. 

iambic verse. 

§ 941. The fundamental foot of the iambic verse is the 
iambus. The tribrach can stand in every place instead of the 
iambus. The spondee or the dactyle can stand in the odd 
places (1st, 3d, 5th, 7th). 

The anapest can stand in all the places except the last. 
The tragedians admit an anapest in an even place only when 
it is contained in di proper name. 

§ 2^2» The IAMBIC monometer consists of two feet. It 
is found chiefly in systems of iambic dimeters, E. g. 

Kai Toig j xoloig. 

§ 24:H, 1. The IAMBIC DIMETER acat akctic coTiSists of four 
feel. E. g. 



^ 244.] IAMBIC VERSE. , 263 

ViXTw j tf' cTft j ngooH- \ nor, ig 

Tov dr]- I fiov eX- \ &(av a- \ a^tvog, 

Unovdag j noiri- \ aa^trog \ eftav- 

Tca, TiQU- 1 y^aTiiiv \ ts, xai \ ^ax(av. 

Trust not for freedom to the Franks, 
They have a king who buys and sells. 

2. The IAMBIC DIMETER catalectic consists of three feet 
and a syllable. It is found among iambic dimeters acatalec- 
tic. E. g. 

^AvriQ ursvQijxtv TL Tuig 
Snovdaiuiv rjdv ' y.ovy. ioL— 

Kev ov- I dsvL fxs- \ judta- \ anv. 

That Sylvia is excelling, 
Upon this dull earth dwelling. 

§ ^4:4. I. The IAMBIC TRIMETER acntuhctic consists of 
six feet. It never has a tribrach in the last place. 

Its verse-cajsura occurs after the second foot ; sometimes 
after the third foot. Sometimes the verse-caesura is entirely 
nefflected. E. sf. 

' Oaa dr] | dsdrj- j -/ij.ai \\ Ttjv funv- J tov nag- \ diiiv, 
'Ha&fjv I 8s (juL- j «, Ij nai'v | df (iai- | «, tst- | xaqa' 
'a 5* (a- I dvyrj- [ &rjV, [| ^oifi- | f^axoai- j oyaq- | ynga. 

Note. The tragedians admit a dactyle only in the^rs^ and 
tliird places. E. g. 

Kif-ifXiQi- I nov Tj^sig, ov ■&QaavaTilny)^v(x)g as XQV' 
T)]g 6(jdo3ov- I Xov Oe^i- | dog ulnv^rjia mxi. 

They admit an anapest only in the first place. E. g. 
(tSa^iav- I Tiv(x)v dsofJODv iv agq^nToig nsdaig. 

But in proper names they admit an anapest in any place 
except the last ; in which case the anapest is contained in the 
proper name. E. g. 

'Jl navra rw/^twv, Tti- \ gHn(Z, didayra ts. 
£(xoi ^sv ovdsig fxv&og, ^Ar- \ Tiyovt}, cpilwv. 

2. The scazon or choliambus is the iambic trimeter acatalectic 
with a spondee or trochee in the last place. E. g. 

EyM f7'?fi)iirh, \\ r, ^nl.3(uTog (tv&Qomoig, 
Eviav&a yrjQa {[ tm iiax'io v.^Y.otpr]^iai. 



264 . VERSIFICATION. [§§245-249. 

^ 94:«5. The IAMBIC TETRAMETER cataUctic consists of 
seven feet and a syllable. Its verse-caesura is at the end of 
the fourth foot ; but this caesura is often neglected by the 
comedians. E. g. 

OvKovv I naluL \ drjTiov \ Xeya ; \\ ov d' av- \ Tog ovx \ otxov- \ sig, 
*0 Se- I OTiOTrjg \ yaQ cprj- | aiv v- \ fiag r^- | 8s(ag \ omav- \ Tag. 

A captain bold of Halifax, \\ who lived in country quarters. 



DACTYLIC VERSE, 



§ 340. The fundamental foot of the dactylic verse is the 
dactyle. The spondee may stand for the dactyle. 

§ S^T. 1. The DACTYLIC DIMETER acatolectic consists 
of two dactyles. It is found among dactylic tetrameters. 

E.g. 

MvjTodo- j j<og dofAog, 

2. The DACTYLIC DIMETER catalcctic on tivo syllables con- 
sists of a dactyle and a spondee or trochee. E. g. 

MijuvoixEv I taxvv. 

§ 948. 1. The DACTYLIC TRIMETER cataUctic on one syl- 
lable consists of two feet and a syllable. E. g. 
'AI^t]- j nxa no- | gov. 

2. The DACTYLIC TRIMETER cataltctic on two syllables 
consists of three feet and two syllables forming a spondee or 
trochee. E. g. 

^Al^av I av^cpVToq \ alow. 
JlafiriQE- I TiToig ev a- \ dqaiOL. 

§S4:0. 1. The DACTYLIC TETRAMETER acatalcctic con- 
sists of four feet, the last of which is a dactyle or a cretic. 
E.g. 

!/2 ^sya I XQ^^^^^v 1 o^otsoo- \ nrjg cpaog, 
'J2 zJiog I a^^QOTOv \ eyxog \ nvQcpogov. 

2. The TETRAMETER catnlectic on one syllable con^sts of 
three feet and a syllable. E. g. 

JlolXa ^go- \ Tojy dia- \ fxEi^ofiS- j va. 



5<5 250, 251.] DACTYLIC VERSE. 2<55 

3. The TETRAMETER cataUctic on iico syllables consists of 
three feet and two syllables forming a spondee or trochee. 
E. g. 

OovQiog \ ouvig | Tevxgid' ffi j niav. 

Ov&' VTco- I y.laLWv, | ovd^' vno- j Xti^Soyv, 

§ 3^0. 1. The DACTYLIC PENTAMETER acatolectic con- 
sists of five feet, the last of which is a dactyle. E. g. 

^Sl x^ovL- j UL [3aQV- I d;(esg j 6y.^(JO(f>o- j qol &' Wfia. 

2. The DACTYLIC PENTAMETER cataUctic on one syllable 
consists of four feet and a syllable. E. g. 

T(av fisya- | kcov ztava- \ (ov vno- j aXi^i^o^s- | vav. 

3. The DACTYLIC PENTAMETER catalectic on tioo syllables 
consists of four feet and two syllables. E. g. 

'Atqfl- I dag ^w/i- | fiovg, eda- j r] layo- \ dvcirag. 

4. The ELEGIAC PENTAMETER consists of two trimcters cata- 
lectic on one syllable (§ 248. 1). The first hemistich almost 
always ends in a long syllable. The verse-caesura occurs after 
the second foot. This kind of verse is customarily subjoined 
to the heroic hexameter. E. g. 

JBovlso d' tvae^soov ollyoig avv xqij^aaiv oly.nv, 

"H nXov- I Ttiv, u5l- j ;{W? 1| /QTjfxaTa j naaa^s- \ vog. 

§ ^5\» 1. The DACTYLIC HEXAMETER acataUctic consists 
of six feet, the last of which is a dactyle. It is used by the 
tragedians in systems of tetrameters. E. g. 

AXX^ (o I nuAXQi- I ag cpiXo- \ rr^Tog u- j ^iL^oy.B- j vai xaqiv. 

2. The DACTYLIC HEXAMETER (or Jicroic hexameter) cata- 
lectic on two syllables, consists of six feet, the last of which is 
a spondee or trochee. The Jifth fopt is commonly a dactyle 

The predominant verse-c(Bsura is that in the middle of the 
third foot ; either directly after the arsis, or in the middle of 
the thesis of a dactyle. E. g. 

AvSqu fxoi I svvsns, \ ^ovoa, |i no- \ Xvrgonoi', \ og ^aXa \ no'kXa 
UXayx^V' *" 1 ^^'' Tqol- \ rig \\ ts- | gov moXi- \ s&qov e- \ nsgosv. 

Sometimes the verse-ccssura occurs immediately after the 
arsis of the fourth foot. E. g. 

AgvvfjEvog 7]v re ipv^riv, \\ nal voaxov STalgaJV. 
23 



266 VERSIFICATION. [§§252-255. 

ANAPESTIC VERSE. 

§ 252, The fundamental foot of the anapestic verse is the 
anapest. The spondee, the dactyle, or the proceleusmatic, may 
stand for the anapest. 

A dactyle very seldom precedes an anapest in the same 
dipody. 

§ 253* The ANAPESTIC MONOMETER consists of two feet. 
E.g. 

Foov o- j ^v^oav. 

§ 2541. 1. The ANAPESTIC DIMETER acatolectic consists 
of four feet, the last of which is either an anapest, a spondee, 
or a trochee. 

The legitimate verse-cresura is in the second arsis. It is 
often made, however, in the short syllable immediately after 
the second arsis. E. g. 

Ti av TiQog \ fida&Qoic ; \\ tl av Tt]- \ 8s noXsig, 
fpoi^^ ; adi- I xeig av, \\ Tt/uag | ersQcou 
^AcpoQL- I ^Ofzsvog \\ xai xaioi- | nuvcuv. 

Tabourgi, tabourgi, || thy larum afar 

Gives hope to the valiant || and promise of war. 

2. The ANAPESTIC DIMETER cataUctic consists of three feet 
and a syllable. It has no csesura. E. g. 

JloXsfiov j GTicpog \ naQ^x^v- | ng. * 

Note. Anapestic dimeters consisting wholly of spondees 
are not uncommon. E. g. 

^eiXnia dsiXcxlov yi]QMc, 
^jovlsiag rag ov rh'txag. 

§S5»5. The ANAPESTIC tetrameter catalectic (called 
also Aristophanean) consists of seven feet and a syllable. 

The verse-caesura comes after the fourth foot ; in some in- 
stances, after the short syllable immediately following the 
fourth foot. E. g. 

Ovum j nuoe^rj | ngog ro S^a- \ kt^oj' || Xe^mv, | (og ds- \ ^log i- | 

axL. 
/Jia^aX' { Xofzsvog \ 8' vno tear \ Ix^Q^^ W ^^ '-^i^V- I '^''^t'Ocg \ 

raxv^ov- j Xoig, 
'flc yta- I ^mSei \ ttjv noXiv \ rjixwv, \\ aai xov \ drj^ov | na&v^Qi- \ 



GREEK INDEX. 



In the following indexes, the figures designate the sections (§) and their 
divisions : N. stands for Note, and R. for Remark. 



A. 
a, 1. 2. — changes of, 2. N. 3. 

— quantity of, 2.: 17. N. 3: 
31. N. 1 : 33. N. 2 : 35. 
N. 1:36. N. 5:49. N. 3.— 
privative, 135. 4. 

-a pure, nouns in, 31. 3. — 2 
aor. act. in, 85. N. 2. 

-a, voc. sing, in, 31.4. — nom. 
sing. masc. in, 31. N. 3. 

-a, gen. sing, in, 31. N. 3. — 
voc. sing, of the third declen- 
sion in, 38. N. 1. 

ayt or cpiqs followed by the subj., 
215. 2. 

adilffoq, with dat., 195. 1. — 
with gen., 195. N. 1. 

-ddriv, see -8t)v. 

-ddtjg, patronymics in, 127. 1. 

at contracted into tj, 23. N. 1. 

-d&(o, -i&o), -v&w, verbs in, 96. 
12. 

a. for a, 2. N. 3. 

-at permits the accent to be 
on the antepenult, 20. N. 1 . 

— elided, 25. N. 1. 
aivoiQSTrjg, voc. sing, of, 31. R. 1. 
-a/yco, «Vw, verbs in, 96. 7. 
-aiog, adjectives in, 62. 3 : 131. 

1: 138. N. 1. 
-ate, -ttiaa, aor. part, in, 90. N. 
Hxiai, dat. plur. in, 31. N. 3. 



alxLao^uL with ace. and gen., 
183. 1. — with two accusa- 
tives, 183. R. 1. 

-«xi?, adverbs in, 120. 

dxovw with gen., 179. 1. — with 
ace, 179. N. 1. — with ace. 
and gen., 179. N. 2. 

-aXeog, adjectives in, 131. 3. 

ullodanog, 73. 2. 

dXXolog, with gen , 186. 2. 

aUog, 73. 2. — neuter of, 33. 
N. 1. — with a plural verb, 
157. 4. __ with gen., 186. 2. 

dXloTQioc with gen., 186. 2. — 
with dat., 186. R. 

aXg, 36. N. 1. 

aXmai with gen., 183. R. 1. 

nXanri^, inflection of, 36. 2. 
' afiCfOTfQog, 73. 2. 
I a^uqfw, 73. 2. — agrees with a 
plural substantive, 137. N. 8. 

-av, gen. plur. in, 31. N. 3. 

-av, perf act. 3d pers. plur. in, 
85. N. 1. 

drd/xr], ■d-s/.iic, won, followed by 
the inf , 221. N. 4. 

oLvat 36. N. 1. — voc. sing. of. 

^ 38. N. 4. 

dvriQ, inflection of, 40. 2. — ac- 
cent of, 40. N. 3. — sub- 
joined to certain nouns, 136. 
R. 



268 



GREEK INDEX. 



-ttj'o'c, national appellatives in, 
127. 3. 

ccvTiOTfjocpog, see eravnog. 

a'^iog, txUojg, with gen., 190. 2. 
— with dat., 190. N. 3. 

a^ioM with ace. and gen., 190. 
N.4. 

ao and aa changed into eai, 2. 
N. 3. 

-do, -aav, gen. in, 31. N. 3 

unolavM with gen., 178. 2. — 
with ace, 178. N. 1. 

^AtioXXmv, ace. sing, of, 37. N. 
2. _voc. sing, of, 38. N. 2. 

anooTegeco, with two accusa- 
tives, 165. 1. — with ace. 
and gen., 165. R. 

-UQ, accent of the contracted 
forms of some nouns in, 36. 
N. 3. 

APHN, inflection of, 40. 3. 

-(XQiov, diminutives in, 127. 2. 

~ag, neuters in, 42. — adjec- 
tives in, 53. 1, R. 1. —nu- 
merals in, 62. 1. — fem. pa- 
tronymics in, 127. 1. 

-aoaov, -affy.cf-iijv, see -sayov, 
-soxofir]V. 

aaTtJQ, dat. plur. of, 40. N. 2. 

UTS with gen. absolute, 192. 
N. 2. 

-drrig, national appellatives in, 
127.3. 

~(xvc, inflection of nouns in, 
43. 2. ! 

avTog, inflection of, 65. 1. — ' 
Ionic forms of, 65. N. — 
neuter of, 33. N. I. — com-! 
parison of, 57. N. 5. — how 
used, 144. — superfluous, 
144. N. 1. — subjoined to 
the relative pronoun, 144. 
R. 1. — signifies self, very, 
144. 2. — has the appearance 
of iyw, av, Ti^ug, Vfjslg, 144. 



N. 2. — signifies f^oi'og, 144. 
N. 3. — used in cases of 
contrast, 144. R. 2. — de- 
notes the principal person, 
144. R. 3. — in connection 
with mvrov, 144. N. 4. — 
with ordinal numbers, 144. 
N. 5. — equivalent to the 
demonstrative pronoun, 144. 
N. 6. — with the article be- 
^ fore it, 65. 2: 144. 3. 

ucfutqio^ai, with two accusa- 
tives, 165. 1 . — with ace. 
and gen., 165. R. 

dqvri, accent of the gen. plur. 
of, 31. Nr2 

-c-X^y see -iq. 

-axav, see ov. 

axQiQ or axQh 35- 3' with gen., 
194. 

do3, see do. 

B. 

f^jav, I. N. 3. 

(^^1 with a part., 222. N. 2. 

/?A, a short vowel before, 17. 4. 
— augment of verbs begin- 
ning with, 76. N. 2. 

§0Qiag, contraction of, 32. N. 
2. 

§ovIh or d-ehig with subj , 215. 
3, N. 2. 

^ovg, nom. sing, of, 36. 2. — 
ace. sing, of, 37. N. 1. — 
inflection of, 43. 2. 
j: 

ydla, inflection of, 36. N. 2. 

yaaTy'iQ, inflection of, 40. 1. — 
accent of, 30. N. 3. 

yslMg, compounds of, 55. N. 3. 

yEvm with ace. and gen., 179. 
N. 3. — with two accusa- 
tives, ibid. 

yri omitted after the article, 
140. N. 5. 

/A, yv, a short vowel before, 17. 



GREEK INDEX. 



4. — augment of verbs be- 
ginning with, 76. N. 2, 

yfi, a short vowel before, 17. 4. 

yvufit] omitted after the article, 
140. N. 5. 

ygavg, nominative of, 36. 2. — 
inflection of, 43. 2. 
A. 

ddfiag, inflection of, 36. N. 2. 

'dSf -OB, -^e, adverbs in, 121. 3. 

— -ds appended to what, 
121. N. 2. 

dst, subject of, 159. N. 1. — 
with gen. and ace, or with 
gen. and dat., 181. N. 1, 2. 

— dsiv omitted in certain 
phrases, 220. N. 3. 

dsira, 69. 2. — with the article, 
140. N. 10. 

dsoTiojrjgy accent of the voc. 
sing, of, 31. R. 2. 

dfVKQog, 61. — with gen., 186. 
2. 

JrjfiiJTTjQ, inflection of, 40. 1. — 
accent of, 40. N. 3, 

-drjv, -dSrjv, adverbs in, 119. 2. 

dtcxcpiQCO, diacptgovxiog, with gen., 
186. N. 3. 

didcpoQog with gen., 186. 2. — 
with dat., 186. R. 

dlyujufitt, 1. N. 3. 

5fi, dv, a short vowel before, 
17.4. 

-5oV, -rjdov, adverbs in, 119. 3. 

dovQs and oaos take plural ad- 
jectives, 137. N. 7. 

dvo, 60. 1. — agrees with a plu- 
ral substantive, 137. N. 8. 

dva-, see ev. 

E. 

s, why called xjjlXov, 1. N. I. — 
changes of, 2. N. 3. 

-m, ace. sing, in, 46. N. 3. — 
pluperf. act. in, 85. N. 4. 
23* 



-itiv, 2 aor. act. infin. in, 89. 

N. 3. 
-tL>w, see -li&io. 
u for t, 2. N. 3. — augment of 

verbs beginning with, 80. 

N. 4. 
-£fc, see -/. 

-fta, aor. act. opt. in, 87. N. 3. 
dfxi, am, omitted, 157. N. 10. 

— with gen., 175. — with 
dat., 196. 3, N. 2. —infin. 
of, 221, N. 3. 

Hvai, apparently superfluous, 
221. N. 3. 

-Hvog, adjectives in, 131. 2. 

-Eig, adjectives in, 53. 2. — 
dat. plur. of adjectives in, 
53. R. 2. — participles in, 
53. 3. 

dg, 60. 1 . — omitted before the 
gen., 175. N. 3. — with dat., 
195. N. 4. 

£3t in composition, 5. N. 1 : 7. 
N. : 9. N. — before a con- 
sonant, 15. 4. 

v/,aaxog, 73. 2. — with the ar- 
ticle, 140. N, 7. — with a 
plural verb, 157. 4. 

BKar^Qog, 73. 2. 

iy.tivog, inflection of, 70. — dia- 
lects of, 70. N. 1. — neuter 
of, 33. N. 1. — how used, 
149. 2. — corresponds to the 
English he, 149. N. 2. 

g^ou, f^oi, ifii, more emphatic 
than ^ov, fiol, (as, 143. N. 4. 

— after prepositions, ibid. 
-if, infin. in, 89. N. 2. 

iv before g, a, ^, 12. N. 3. 
Evavtlog and avrlajgocpog with 

gen., 186. N. 2. 
ivo%og with gen., 183. N. 3. 
€| becomes iy,, when, 15. 4. 
\to contracted into ev, 23. N. 1. 



270 



GREEK INDEX. 



aogrd^w, augment of, 80. R. 2. 
~sog, adjectives in, 49. 3 : 131. 2. 
inlarjfia, I N. 3. 
-iQog, adjectives in, 131. 3. 
-sg, neuters in, 42. — 2d pers. 

sing, in, 85. N. 3. 
-EOHOv, -saxofitjv, -aaxov, -aaxo- 

^rjv, see -(jxov, -axofii]v. 
-SOL or -saoi, dat. plur. in, 35. 

N. 3. 
ersoog, 73. 2. — with gen., 186. 

2. 
sTTjalai, accent of the gen. plur. 
^of, 31. N.2. 
IV and dva-, augment of verbs 

beginning with, 82. 3. 
sv and kwxwc with certain verbs, 

165. N, 2. 
-svg inflection of nouns in, 44. 

— ace. sing, of nouns in, 
44. N. 1. — nom. plur. of 
nouns in, 44. N. 3. — Ionic 
inflection of nouns in, 44. 
N. 4. — appellatives in, 127. 
3, 6. 

eq>' M, f>' oTts, with infin., 220. 1. 

txoo with gen., 188. N, 1. — 
with part., 222. N. 2. 

-SCO, ewv, gen. in, 31. N. 3. 

-£00, contraction of dissyllabic 
verbs in, 116. N. 1, R. 
z. 

^, power of, 5. 2, N, 2.— at 
the beginning of a word 
does not always make posi- 
tion, 17. N. 2. 

-^£, see -Ss. 

^^(o, verbs in, 96. 4, N. 5, 6, 7. 
H. 

rj, original power of, 1. N. 1. — 
changes of, 2. N, 3. 

-7] or -axrj, adverbs in, 121.4. 

— becomes -?;, 121. N. 4. 

^, tJian, 228. 1. — after com- 
paratives, 186. N. 5, 6. — 



between two comparatives^, 
228. N, 2. 

/; for ai, 3. N. 3. 

-Tjdor, see -5oV. 

-^ (5' og, 152. 

-T^fic, adjectives in, 131.5. — 
contraction of adjectives in, 
53. N. I. 

f for a, 3. N. 3. 

ijy.oj with gen., 188. N. — pres- 
ent of, 209. N. 2. 

VjlUog, 73. 1. — attracted by 
the antecedent, 151. R. 5. 

-i]X6g, adjectives in, 131. 3. 

ijHtdanog, 73. 2. 

Tiniohog with gen., 186. 2. 

-?^)', adjectives in, 53. 4. — in- 
fin. in, 89. N. 2. — optat. in, 

87. N. 2. 

-riroQ, national appellatives in, 
127. 3. 

-riQ, syncopated nouns in, 40. 
1,2. 

-575 gen. Eog, inflection of nouns 
in, 42. — ace. sing, of proper 
names in, 46. N. 1. — ad- 
jectives in, 52. 1. 

-i]Q, nom. plur. in, 44. N. 3. 

-rjc or -iiai, dat. plur. in, 31. 
' N. 3. \ 

-tiTTic, national appellatives in, 
127. 3. 

-ricpL, gen. and dat. in, 31. N. 3. 

-riwg, perf. act. part, in, 99. N. 
O. 

aarsgov, 14. N. 1. 

&sXi[g, see ^ovXet. 

dsfiig, see dvdyxrj. 

-d^iv, adverbs in, 121. 2. 

-&i, 2d pers. sing, imperat. in, 

88. N. l.~ becomes n, 14. 
N. 4. ■ 

-^L, -fft, adverbs in, 121. 1. 
&i/yiiv(o with gen., 179. 1. — 
with ace, 179. N. 1. 



CREEK INDEX. 



271 



x>oi[xariov, 14. N. 1. 

^v/aT7]o, iHfiection of, 40. 1. — 
accent of, 40. N. 3. 
7. 

-I, inflection of neuters in, 43. 

~l annexed to the demonstra- 
tive pronouns, 70. N. 2. — 
annexed to the demonstrative 
pronominal adjectives, 73. 
N. 2. — tinnexed to demon- 
strative adverbs, 123. N. 2, 3. 

-t, -fl, adverbs in, 119. 4. 

-la, nouns in, 128. 1. 

-iudr;g, see -Idr^g. 

-IdrjC, -iddr^Qy patronymics in, 
127. 1. 

-Idior, diminutives in, 127. 2. 

Idioc, 73. 2. — with gen., 174. 
N. 

-hic, adjectives in, 131. 5, 

IsQog with gen., 174. N. 

-ixog, adjectives in, 131. 2. 

-ifii, verbs in, 117. N. 14. 

-i/^oc, adjectives in, 131. 4. 

-irdfji', adverbs in, 119. 6. 

-h'}], -ib')nj, patronymics in, 
127. 1. 

-irog, adjectives in, 131. 2. — 
national appellatives in, 127. 
3. 

^lov, diminutives in, 127. 2. 

-tog, adjectives in, 131. 1. — 
national appellatives in, 127. 
3. 

-ig gen. log, tcog, inflections of 
nouns in, 43. 1, 3. 

-ig, gen. idog or log, 46. N. 2. 

-fc, adjectives in, 52. 2. — pa- 
tronymics in, 127. 1. — di- 
minutives in, 127. 2. — na- 
tional appellatives in, 127. 3. 

-lay.oc, -iay.T], diminutives in, 
127. 2. 

-iay.ta, verbs in, 96. S. 

I'ijog with dat., 195. I. — with 



gen., 195. N. 1. — refers to 
the limiting noun, 195. N. 2. 

-laiog, see -luv. 

-hr,c, -loJTTii;, nouns in, 127, 3, 
5. 

-^o^ fut. in, 102. N. 1. 

-io)v, -lOTog, comparison by, 58. 

-loir, patronymics in, 127. 1. 

-ibnvj, see -err}. 

-iMTTig, see -hi]g. 
K. 

xai og, 152. 

xttxwcj see (v. 

y.uTa, chancres of, in composi- 
tion, 10. "N. 2. 

xtxrrjooicx) with gen. and ace, 
183. 2. — with two geni- 
tives, 183. N. 1. — with 
' part., 222. 2.. 

yJ^ag, inflection of, 42. N. 3. — 
compounds of, 55. N. 3. 

-y.Uic, contraction of nouns in, 
42. N. K 

y.h]^oroiaio) with gen., 178. 2. — 
with ace. of the thing, 178. 
N. 1. — with ace. of the 
person, ibid. 

y.onoQ with -£ren., 174. N. — 
with dat., 195. N. 1. 

Konna, 1. N. 3. 

yoeuQ, Ttoac, inflection of, 42. 
' N. 3. * 

y.vy.fMv, acc. sing, of, 37. N. 2. 

y.vbn, inflection of, 40. 3. 
J. 

luyxdvM with gen,, 178. 2. — 
with acc, 17^8. N. 1. 

Xr,doj, Xrj&dib}, with acc. and 
gen., 182. N. 2. 

-XXta, verbs in, 96. 6. 
71/. 

-jua, nouns in, 129. 4. 

fxd, IT], with acc, 171 diflfer- 

ence between, 171. N. 1. •> — 
uM omitted, 171. N. 2.— thei 



272 



GREEK INDEX. 



name of the god omitted 

after, 171. N. 3. 
fiikag and jaXa?, inflection of, 

53. R. 1. — comparison of, 

57.3. 
uiXn with gen. and dat., 182, 

N. 3. 
fish, inflection of, 36. N. 2. 
fimco with infin., 219. N. I. 
-fisvaiy -fiBv, infin. in, 89. N. 1. 
lisralayxdvm with gen., 178. 2. 

— with ace, 178. N. 1. 
(isTsaxL and nooai^xei with gen , 

178. N. 2. 
fisTsxca with gen., 178. 2. — 

with ace, 178. N. 1. 
{liXQt^? or fis^Qh 1^- 3' — ^vith 

gen., 194. 
-firj, nouns in, 129. 5. 
fx-^, 224. 3, 4, 5, 6. — after 

negative expressions, 225. 

3. 
fitldilg, plural of, 60. N. 1. 
pn^rjQ, inflection of, 40. I. — 

accent of, 40. N. 3. — com- 
pounds of, 55. N. 2. 
-jttt, 1st pers. ind. act, in, 84. 

1, N. 1. — subj. in, 86. N. 2. 

— verbs in, 117. 
fnifivrjaxco, with acc. and gen., 
182. N. 2. — with two accu- 
satives, ibid. 

fiv, augment of verbs beginning 
with, 76. N. 2. 

-fiog, nouns in, 129 3. 

fiov, fiol, fis, see ifiov, f^iol, f/*s. 

-fi(av, adjectives in, 132. 5. 
N. 

V before a labial, 12. 1. — before 
a palatal, 12. 2. — before a 
liquid, 12. 3. — before a or ^, 
12. 4, 5, N. 2, 4. — in the 
preposition iv. — movable, 
15. 1,2. 



»'avg, nora. sing, of, 36. 2. — in- 
flection of, 43. 2. 
v^, see fxd. 
nx«w with acc, 164. N. 2. — 

with acc. and gen., 184. 2. 
-vvvw^ see -vvw. 
vv^, inflection of, 36. N. 1. 
-vv(o, verbs in, 96. 9. 

S- 
-I, adverbs in, 119. 5. 

O. 
o, why called fiixgov, 1. N. 1. 
-o, neuters in, 33. N. 1. 
o for oc, 19. R. 3. 
ods, inflection of, 70. — dialects 

of, 70. N. 1. — how used, 

149. 1. — as an adverb, 149. 

N. 1. 
6 <5£, see fitv. 
o(5oV omitted after the article, 

140. N. 5. 
-ofic, adjectives in, 131. 5. 
ot for o, 2. N. 3. — for ov, 3. 

N. 3. 
-ot. permits the accent to be on 

the antepenult, 20. N. 1. 
-o7, adverbs in, 121. 1. 
olix with gen, absolute, 192. 

N. 2. 
-otTjy, opt. in, 87. N. 2. 
-ouv, gen. and dat dual in, 33. 

N. 4 : 35. N. 3. 
oi'xaSe, qjV'/ade, 121. N. 3. 
oly.eTog with gen., 174. N. 
ol'/.oL, accent of, 121. N. 1: 

20. N. 1. 
-oto, gen. in, 33. N. 4. 
-oLog, adjectives in, 131. 1. 
oJog, 73. 1. — attracted by its 

antecedent, 151. R. 3, 4. — 

with infin., 219. N. 2. 
oYg, inflection of, 43. 2. 
oia&^^ o 8q(xooi>, 218. N. 3. 
-oiai, dat. plur. in, 33. N. 4. 



GREEK INDEX. 



279 



ofxofiai with part., 222. N. 2. 

oAoc with the article, 140. N. 7. 

|uej' 6 (5f, 142. 1. — the 

proper name subjoined to 
6 fiiv, 142. N. 2. — are not 
always opposed to each 
other, 142. N. 3.-6 de re 
fers to something different 
from tiiat to which o fnr re- 
fers, 142. N. 4. 

o(Aoiog with dat., 195. I. — with 
gen., 195. N. 1. — reefers to 
the limiting noun, 195. N. 2 

ouov, compounds of, with gen , 
195. N. 1. 

~oog, inflection of nouns in, 34 : 
49. 3. — accent of the con- 
tracted gen. and dat. of 
polysyllabic nouns in, 34. 
N. 2. — comparison of ad- 
jective^in, 57. R. 2. 

~og, acc. pi. in, 33. N. 4. 

-og, inflection of neuters in, 42. 
— adjectives in, 49. — ab- 
stract nouns in, 128. N. 4. 

og i^sv og de, 152. 

oifov, ooo}, with inf., 220. 1. 

oaas, see dovos. 

ouTig, inflection of, 71. 2. — 
has the force of the inter- 
rogative pronoun, 153. N. 

000} , see oaor. 

oi/for o, 2. N. 3. 

-ov, or -a/ov, adverbs in, 121. 
1. 

ov, ovx, ov/, 15 4. — how used, 
224. 1. ' 

ov, augment of verbs beginning 
with, 80. N. 4. 

ovdeig, nom. plur. of, 69. N. 1. 

ovdtlg ooTig ov, 225. N. 

-otg, participles in, 53. 5. 

ot'Toc, inflection of, 70. — Ionic 
forms of, 70. N. 1. — how 
used. 149. I 



jni'rcoc, or'rfi), 15. 3. 

\-o(f(, gen. and dat. in, 33. N. 4. 

I , . ^^•. 

\nahr in composition, 12. N. 4. 

Tii(VTod((7ing, 73. 2. 
[nag with the article, 140. 5. — 
I withor.t the article, 140. N. 
i 6. 

nuTi'o, inflection of, 40. 1, — 
accent of, 40. N 3. — com- 
pounds of, 55. N. 2. 

-TtXoog, -nhxaiog, numeral ad- 
jectives in, 62. 3. — with 
gQn., 1S6. 2. 

7io?oc, 73. 1. — with the article. 
140. N.9. — withinfin.,219. 
N. 2. 

nohg. Epic inflection of, 43. 
N. 4. — compounds of, 55. 
N. 1. 

II02:, derivatives of, 73. 1 : 
123. 

lloaeidwr, acc sing, of, 37. 
N. 2. — voc. sing, of, 38, 
N. 2. 

novg, nom. sing, of, 36. 2. 

nqay^ia, omitted after the arti- 
cle, 140. N. 5. — omitted 
before the relative, 150. 5. 

— omitted before a verb, 
157. N. 8. — omitted in the 
predicate, 160. N. 2. 

nolv with subj., 214. 1. — with 
opt., 216. 1. — with infin., 
220. 2. 

7iQoa)',y.si, see ^.tiTfiTTi.. 

-jiTw, verbs in, 96. 2, 
p. 

g at the beginning of a word, 
4. 2. — doubled, 4. 3: 13. 

— augment of verbs begin- 
ning with, 79. 

-^a, gen. sing, of feminines in, 

I 31. 3. 

[oo for ^a, 6. N. 



274 



GREEK INDEX. 



-Q^ca, verbs in, 96. 6. 

^vjiow, reduplication of, 79. N. 2. 

^. 
ffinal, I.N.4.— movable, 15.3. 
-c, imperat. in, 117. N. 11. 
a between two consonants, 11. 
ad for ^, 6. N. 
adv or oafj.nl, 1. N. 3. 
-as, see -ds. 
-a&a, 2d pers. sing. act. in, 84. 

N. 6 : 86. N. 2 : 87. N. 5. 
-OL, 2d pers. sing, in, 84. N. 6. 

— 3d pers. sing, in, 84. N. 

1 : 86. N. 2. 
-ai, adverbs in, see -d^i. 
-aig, -ala, nouns in, 129. 3. 
ax does not always make posi- 
tion, 17. N. 2. 
-axov, -oxofirjv, imperf. and aor. 

in, 85. N. 5. 
-axM, verbs in, 96. 8, 14. 
aa changed into tt, see tt. 
-aaa, feminines in, 127. 7. 
-affw, -TIM, verbs in, 96. 3, N. 7. 
-aaiov, -xTMv, comparatives in, 

58. N. 1. 
g for (jT, 1. R. 
avyyiyroooitM, see ovroiSa. 
-avvri, nouns in, 128. N. 3. 
avvoidu and ovyyiyvway.(a with 

part., 222. N. 1. 
-acpi, gen. and dat. in, 35. N. 3. 
acor^Q, voc. sing, of, 38. N. 2. — 

accent of the voc sing, of, 

38. N. 3. 

T. 

tal for at, 63. N. 1. 
TuXaq, see fxeXccg. 
ri&QlTlTlOV, 14. N. 1. 

-TiiQoi, -TQioc, -xQig, feminines in, 
129. 2. 

-TEog, verbal adjectives in, 132. 
2. — neuter of verbal adjec- 
tives in, 162. 2, N. 1, 2 : 
200. N. 2. —with dat., 200.2. 



leQitg, see y.^iag. 

-T£^ot',-Taioc, comparison by, 57. 

TrjXixovioc, 73. 1. — inflection 
of, 73." N. 1. 

-Tr}Q, -Tfjg, -TWO, verbal nouns 
in, 129. 2. 

-Trjg, VOC. sing, of nouns in, 31. 
4. — abstract nouns in, 128. 
N. 2. 

Jig, inflection of, 68. — dialects 
of, 68. N. — wdth the article. 
140. N. 9. — how used, 147! 
— does not always stand at 
the beginning of a proposi- 
tion, 147. N. 1. — for 7io7og, 
Ul. N. 2. 

ug, inflection of, 69. 1. — dia- 
lects of, 69. N. l._how 
used, 148. — fori'xaarog, 148. 
N. 1. — refers to the speak- 
er, or to the person addressed, 
148. N. 2. — with adjectives 
of quality or quantity, 148. 
N. 3. — denotes importance, 
148. N. 4. — doubled, 148. 
N. 4. 

to/ for ol, 63. N. 1. 

ToioaSs, 73. 1. — with inf. 219. 
N. 2. 

Toiovrog, 73. 1. — inflection of, 
73. N. 1. — with the article, 
140. N. 8. 

-TO?, verbal adjectives in, 132. 
1. — with dat., 200. 2. 

TO^", 63. N. 2. — derivatives 
of, 73. 1 : 123. 

Toooi^Toc, 73. 1. — inflection of, 
73. N. 1. 

-jQtfx, -T(jcg, see -jeiga, 

7T for aa, 6. N. 

nvyxarb), with gen., 178. 2. — • 
j with ace, 178. N. 1. 

-rwQ, see -t?;^. 

I ^- '. 

^v, why called ipdov, 1. N. 1.— 



GREEK INDEX. 



276 



breathing of, 4. N. 1. — 

quantity of, 17. N. 3: 36. 

N. 5. 
~v, contracts in, 43. 3. 
-vd^iov, diminutives in, 127. 2. 
-v&(jOy see -udb). 
VI, improper diphthong, 3. 1, 

N. 1. 
vlog, omitted after the article, 

140. N. 5. 
-vXkiov, -vXXog, diminutives in, 

127. 2. 
vueduTiog, 73. 2. 
-vjji, subj. of verbs in, 117. 4, N. 

4. — optat, of verbs in, 117. 

5, 6, N. 7. — 2 aor. of verbs 
in. 117. N. 16. 

vnsv&vi'og, with gen,, 183. N. 3. 

-vg, contracts in, 43. 1,3.- 
adjectives in, 51. — parti- 
ciples in, 53. 6. 

vq)iov, diminutives in, 127. 2. 

0. 

(psQS, see aye. 

qxvya) with gen., 183. R. 1. 

-cpi, gen. and dat. in, 31. N. 3: 

33. N. 4 : 35. N. 3. 
q)Qip', compounds of, 55. N. 2. 
cpQovdog, 14. N. 1. 
qjvyads, see ol'xadE. 

X. 
Xovg, nom. sing, of, 36. 2. 
XQHo^ai with dat., 198. N. 1. 
Xori, with gen. and ace. 181. 

^ N. 1. — subject of, 159. 2. 
Xor,Gxrig, accent of the gen. 
" plur. of, 31. N. 2. 
X^oa omitted after the' article, 

140. N. 5. 

^)avM with gen., 179. 1. — with 
ace, 179. N. 1. 

cu, why called ^iya, 1. N. 1. — 



changes of, 2. N. 3. — for 
ov, 3. N. 3. 
-w, ace. sing, in, 33. R. 1. — 
gen. sinor. in, 33. N. 4. — 
inflection of nouns in, 42. 

— dual and plural of nouns 
in, 42. N. 4. — Ionic ace. 
sing, of nouns in, 42. N. 6. 

— accent of the contracted 
ace. sing, of nouns in, 42 
N. 7. 

-oi8rig, adjectives in, 131. 6. 

-oi'/ji', opt. act. in, 117. N. 6. 

-(alog, adjectives in, 131. 3. 

-on; gen. and dat. dual in, 43. 
*N. 3. 

-wv, -copux, nouns in, 127. 4. 

-cov, adjectives in, 53. 7, 8. — 
inflection of comparatives in, 
58.2. 

avTjTog with gen., 190. 2. 

-(opid, see -(6v. 

-0)0, gen, in, 33. N. 4. 

MQu, see uvdyKT}. 

-wc, ace. pi. in, 33. N. 4. — 
fem. in, 42 — gen. sing, in, 
43. 3 : 44. — adjectives in, 
50. — participles in, 53. 9. 

— adverbs in, 119. 1. 

wg with dat., 197. JN. 1. — 

with gen. absolute, 192, N. 

2. _ with ace, 192. R. 2.— 

with inf., 220. 1. 
wg for Tw'c. 19. R. 3 : 123. N. 

1 : 152. N. 2. 
waneQ with gen. absolute, 192. 

N. 2. — with ace, 192. R,. 2. 
oiaxs with gen. absolute, 192. 

N. 2. — with ace, 192. R, 2. 

— with indie, 213. 3. — 
with inf., 220. 1. 

lav, diphthong, 3. 1, N. 1.-^ 
for av, 3. N. 3. 



276 



ENGLISH INDEX 



A. 

Abstract Nouns, 128 : 129. 1, 
N. 1,2. — for concrete, 136. 
N. 4. — ace. of, after kin- 
dred verbs, 164. 

Acatalectic Verse, 234. 2. 

Accent, 19-22. — kinds of, 
19. 1, — place of, 19. 1,2, 
3, 4, R. 1. — words without, 
19. N. 1, R. 2. 3. — grave, 
19. N. 2. — place of, in| 
diphthongs, !9. 5. — on the 
antepenult, 20. 1,2, N. 1,2,! 
3. — on the penult, 20. 3. — ' 
acute becomes grave, 20. 4 
— circumflex, 21. — circum 
flex on the penult, 21. 2. — 
of contracted syllables, 23 
N, 3. — of words whose last 
syllable has been elided, 25.! 
N. 3. — of the first declen.| 
sion, 31. N. 2. — of the sec-' 
ond declension, 33. N. 3: 
34. N. 2. — of the third de-| 
clension, 35. N.2:38. N. 3:: 
42. N. 7: 43. N. 5. — of| 
verbs, 93. — of verbs in ^t,' 
117. N. 18. 

Accusative, 30. 4. — sing, of 
the third declension, 37. — 
how used, 163.-172. — de- 
notes the subject of the in- 
finitive, 158. — after transi- 
tive verbs, 163. — denoting! 
the abstract of a transitive! 
verb, 164. — after verbs sig- 
nifying to look, ^c. 164. N. 
1. — after verbs signifying 
to conquer, 164. N. 2. — two 



accusatives after verbs sig- 
nifying to ask, S^c. 165. 1, 
N. \. — to do, to say, 165. 
N. % — to divide, 165.2.— 
to name, Sfc. 166. — synec- 
dochical, 167. — in paren- 
thetical phrases, 167. N 2. 
— subjoined to a clause, 167. 
N. 4. — denotes duration of 
time, 168. 1, N. 1. —of time 
when, 168. 2. — for the gen. 
absolute, 163. N. 2. —de- 
notes extent of space, 169. 
of place whither, 170. — 



ifter 



^n, I'll. 



17!, 



omitted 



after ^ui, rjj, 171. N, 3. — 
with prepositions, 72. — af- 
ter adjectives, 185. N. 1. 

Active Voice, 74. 1. — forma- 
tion of the tenses of, 94 - 
105. — how used, 205. — as 
passive, 205. N. 2, 3, R. 

Acute Accent, !9. 1,2. — on 
the antepenult, 20. 2, 3, N. 
1 , 2, 3. — becomes grave, 
20. 4. 

Adjective, 30. 1. — inflection 
of, 48-59. — of three end- 
ings, 48. i. — of two endings, 
48. 2. — of one ending, 48. 
3:54. — in oc, 49. — in o? 
gen. w, 50. — in vg gen. foc, 
51. — in i-jQ, t.g,52. — in uq, f/c, 
ovg, vg, 0}}', wc gen. oiog, 53. — 
coinpound, 55. — anomalous 
and defective, 56. — com- 
parison of, 57-59. — deriva- 
tion of, 130-133.— derived 
from other adjectives, 130. — 



ENGLISH INDr.X. 



2rt 



from subst., 131. — from 
verbs, 132. — from adverbs, 
133. — agreement of, 137. — 
mas. adj. with fern, subst,, 

137. N. 1. — referring to two 
or more substantives, 137. 2, 
N. 5. — agrees with one of 
the substantives to which it 
refers, 137. N 4. — referring 
to a collective noun, 137. 3. 

— plural agrees with a dual 
subst,, and vice versa, 137. 
N. 6. — used substantively, 

138. 1. —neuter, 138. 2. — 
used adverbially, 138. N, 1. 

Admiration, Mark of, 27. N. 2. 

Adverb, 29. 2. — of manner, 
119. — of quantity, 120.— 
of place, 121.— of time, 122. 

— derived from no:i, 123. 

— comparison of, 125. — an- 
omalous comparison of, 125. 
N.3. — with the article, 141. 
1,2, N.I.— with gen., 177: 
181 : 186: 188.2, N. 1. — 
with dat., 195. 1. — limits 
what, 223.— negative, 224 : 
225. 

Alphabet, 1. 1. — division of 

the letters of, 1. 2. 
Alpha Privative, 135. 4. 
Anapestic Verse, 252 - 255. 
Anastrophe, 226. N. 1. 
Antecedent, 150. 1. 
Antepenult, 16. 3. 
Aorist, 74. 3. — augment of 78. 

— reduplication of, 78. N. 2. 

— 1st pers. sing, of 1 aor, 
act., 84. N. 2. — in oy,ov, aao- 
fxrjv, 85. N. 5. — inflection 
of aor. pass., 92. — 2 aor. 
mid. syncopated, 92. N. 4. 

— formation of, 104 : 105 : 
109: 110: 115. —2 aor. act. 
of verbs in ^ut, 117. 12. — 

24 



how used, 212. — for the 
perfect or pluperfect, 212. N, 
l._for the present, 212. N. 
2, 4. — for the future, 212. 
N. 3. _ 

Aphreresis, 26. 3. 

Apodosis, 213. R. 

Apostrophe, 27. 

Arsis, 233. 2. 

Article, 29. 1. — inflection of, 
G:J. — quantity, accent, and 
dialects of, (53. N. 1. — old 
form of, 63. N. 2. — how 
used, 139 - 142. — with 
proper names, 139. 3. — ac- 
companies the leading char- 
acter of a story, 139. N. 1 . — 
with the second accusative 
after verbs signifying to call, 

139. N. 2. — separated from 
its noun, 140. 1 , N. 1, R. 2. 

— two or three articles stand- 
ing together, 140. R. 1. — re- 
peated, 140. 2. — with the 
part., 140. 3, N. 3. — adjec- 
tive standing before or after 
the substantive and its article, 

140. N. 4. — alone, 140.5.— 
without a noun, 140. N.5. — 
with pronouns, 1 40. 5. — with 
oXo? and f/.uajog, 140. N. 7. — 
with TotovTog, 140, N. 8. — 
with t/c and noloc, 140. N. 
9. — with dura, 140. N. 10. 

— before adverbs, 141. 1, 
2, N. 1. — before a proposi- 
tion, 141. 3. — before any 
word, 141. 4, N. 2, 3. — as 
demonstrative, 142. 1. — be- 
fore 0?, ooog, olog, 142. N. 1. 

— as relative, 142. 2. — neu- 
ter with gen., 176. 

Atona, 19. N. 1. 
Attraction with the Relative, 
151. 



278 



ENGLISH INDEX. 



Augment, 75. — kinds of, 75, 
2. — syllabic, 75. 2: 76-79 

— of the perf , 76. — of the 
pluperf., 77. — of the imperf 
and aor., 78. — of verbs be- 
ginning with Q, 79. — tem- 
poral, SO : 8 1 . — of compound 
verbs, 82. — omitted, 78. N. 
3 : 80. N. 4, 5. 

B. 
Barytone, 19, 4. 
Breathings, 4. — of v, 4. N. 1. 

— of ^, 4. 2, 3. — place of, 4. 
4. — power of, 4. 5, N. 2. — 
rough changed into smooth, 
14. N. 5. 

C. 
Csesura, 235. 
Cases, 30. 4. — how used, 162 

-204. 
Catalectic verse, 234. 2. 
Causative, see Verbs. 
Circumflex, 19. 1, 3:21. —on 

the penult, 21. 2. 
Collective-Nouns, 137.3: 157. 

4. 
Colon, 27. 
Comma, 27. 
Comparison by rsQog, xarog, 57 

— of substantives, 57. N. 4. 

— of pronouns, 57. N. 5. — 
by l(av, larog, 58. — anoma- 
lous and defective, 59. — of 
adverbs, 125. 

Composition of Words, 135. 

Concrete, see Abstract. 

Conjunction, 29. 2. — how 
used, 228. 

Connecting Vowel, 85, 1. 

Consonants, 1.2. — division of, 
5: 6. — final, 5. N. 3. — eu- 
phonic changes of, 7 - 14. 

— movable, 15. 
Contraction, 23. — accent in, 

23. N. 3. 



Copula, 160. 1. 

Coronis, 27. 

Crasis, 24. — left to pronun- 
ciation, 24. N. 2. 
D. 

Dactylic Verse, 246-251. 

Dative, 30. 4. — plural of the 
third declension, 39. — how 
used, 195-203. — after 
words implying resemblance^ 
S^c. 195. — after adjectives, 

196. 1. — after verbs, 196.2. 

— after impersonal verbs, 
ibid. — after verbs signify- 
ing to he, 196. 3, N. 2.— 
with interjections, 196. 5. 

— denotes loith regard tOy 

197. 1. — preceded by co?, 
197. N. J. — apparently su- 
perfluous, 197. N.2. — limits 
words, 197.2. — with com- 
paratives, 197. N. 3. — with 
substantives, 197. N. 4. — of 
cause, S^c. 198. — with ;if^«o- 
/ioft, 198. N. 1. — of accom- 
paniment, 199. — of alxoqy 
1 99. N. 1 . — denotes the sub- 
ject, 200 : 206. 2. — with 
verbal adjectives in joq and 
Tfoc, 200. 2. — of time, 201. 

— for the gen. absolute, 201. 
N.2. — of place, 202. — with 
prepositions, 203. 

Declensions, 30. 3. 

Defective, see Noun, Adjective, 
Comparison. 

Demonstrative Pronoun, 70. — 
dialects of, 70. N. 1.— with 
/, 70. N. 2. — pronominal ad- 
jectives, 73. 1. — how used, 
149. — as adverb, 149. N.l. 

— subjoined to a noun in the 
same proposition, 149. N. 3. 

— subjoined to a relative, 
149. N. 4. 



EiNGLISII INDEX. 



2(79- 



Deponent Verbs, 208. — perf. 
and pluperf. of, 208. N. 2. — 
aor. pass, of, 208. N. 3. 

Derivation of Words, 126-134. 

Desideratives, 134. N. 2. 

Diaeresis, 27. N. 1. 

Digamma, 1. N. 3. 

Diminutives, 127. 2. 

Diphthongs, 3. — improper, 3. 
N. 2. — commutation of, 3. 
N. 3. — improper, in capitals, 
4.4. 

Dipody, 234. 3. 

Dissyllables, 16.2. 

Dual, 29. 3 : 30. N.2: 137. N. 
1,5,6,7,8: 150. N. 1: 157. 
N. 1,4, R. 1. 
E. 

Elision, 25. — before a conso- 
nant, 25. N. 2. 

Enclitics, 22. — retain their ac- 
cent, 22. 4, N. 1. — suc- 
ceeding each other, 22. N. 2. 

Euphonic Changes, see Conso- 
nants. 

F. 

Feet, 233. 1. 

Final, see Consonants, Syllable. 

First Declension, endings of, 
31. 1. — gender of, 31.2.— 
voc. sing, of, 31. 4. — quan- 
tity of, 31. N. 1. — accent 
of, 31. N. 2. — dialects of, 
31. N. 3. — contracts of, 32. 

Future, 74. 3. — augment of 
the third, 75. 1. — formation 
of, 102:103:111:112: 114. 
— how used, 209. 4, N. 10: 
211. — periphrastic, 209. N. 
1. 

G. 

Gender, 30. 2. — how distin- 
guished in grammar, ibid. — 
masc. for fem., 137. N. 1. 



— implied, 137. N. 2, 3 : 
150. N.2. 

Genitive, 30. 4. — of the third 
declension, 36. 1. — how 
used, 173-194. — adnomin- 
al, 173. — relations denoted 
by the adnominal, 173. N. 1. 

— subjective and objective, 
173. N. 2. — two adnominal 
genitives, 173. N. 3. — sub- 
joined to possessive words, 
174. — with r(5toc, &c. 178. 
N. — with verbs signifying 
to he, Sfc. 175. — after the 
neuter article, 176. — denot- 
ing a whole, 177. — after a 
participle with the article, 
177. N. I. — after daifxoviog, 
&c. 177. N. 3. — after neu- 
ter adjectives, 177. 2, N. 4. 

— of the reflexive pronoun, 
177. N. 5. — after verbs re- 
ferring to a part., 178. 1. — 
after verbs signifying to par- 
take, S^c. 178. 2. — to take 
hold of, S^c. 179. — to let 
go, Sfc. 180. — after words 
denoting fulness, Sfc. 181. 

— after verbs signifying to 
remember,, ^-'c. 182. — to 
accuse, 4^c. 183. — to 6e- 
gi?t Sfc. 184. — after verbal 
adjectives, 185. — after com- 
paratives, 186. — denoting 
on account of, 187. 1. — 
after exclamations, 187. 2. 

— after verbs signifying to 
entreat, 187. 3. — denoting 
the subject, 187. 4. — of in- 
strument, 187. 5. — denot- 
ing in respect of, 188. — af- 
ter adverbs, 188. 2. — after 
verbs signifying to take aim 
at, Sfc. 188. 3. ~ of mate- 



280 



ENGLISH INDEX. 



rial, 189. — of price, 190. 

— of time, 191. — absolute, 
192. — of place, 1953. — with 
prepositions, 194. 

Grave Accent, 19. 1, N. 2. — 
for the acute, 20. 4. 
H. 

Historical, see Secondary Tens- 
es. 

I. 

Iambic Verse, 241 - 245. 

Imperative, 74. 2. — termina- 
tions and connecting vowels, 
88. —how used, 2l8. — in 
prohibitions, 218. 2. — se- 
cond person of, for the third, 
218. N. 2. — in connection 
with the relative, 218. N. 3 

— perf. of, 209. N. 7, 8. 
Imperfect, 74. 3. — augment 

of, 78. — in oTtov, axo^rjv, 85. 
N. 5. — formation of, 97 : 
106. 2: 113. — how used, 
210. — denotes an attempt, 
210. N. 1. — denotes a cus- 
tomary action, 210, N. 2. — 
for aor., 210. N. 3.— for 
pres.,210. N. 4. 

Impersonal Verbs, 159. N. 1, 
2. — with dat., 192. 2. 

Indefinite, Pronoun, 69. — pro- 
nominal adjectives, 73. 1. — 

— adverbs, 123. — how used, 
148. 

Indicative, 74. 2. — termina- 
tions and connecting vowels 
of, 84 : 85. — of verbs in (ii, 
117. 2, 3.— how used, 213 

— in independent proposi- 
tions, 213. 1. — after inter- 
roojative and relative words 
213. 2. — after particles 
213. 3, N. 4,5, 6. — in con 
ditional propositions, 213. 4, 
5. — with ^V, 213. N. 3. 



Infinitive, 74. 2. — termina- 
tions and connecting vowels 
of, 69. — of verbs in ^h, 1 17. 
8, 9. — subject of, 158.— 
after verbs, participles, and 
adjectives, 1 19, 1 . — denotes 
a cause, 119. 2. — for the 
indie, 1 19. N. 4. — omitted, 
119. N. 5.— for the im- 
perat., 119. N. 6, 7, — for 
the subj., 119. N. 8. — ex- 
presses a wish, 119. N. 9. — 
with WOTS, &c. 220. 1. — 
with TiQiv, &LC. 220. 1. — in 
parenthetical phrases, 220. 
N. 1 , 2, 3. — with ^v, 220. 
3. — as a neuter substantive, 
22 1 . — for the gen. of cause, 
221. N. 1. — in exclama- 
tions of surprise, 221. N. 2. 
— superfluous, 221. N. 3. — 
after ardyn-q, &C. 221. N. 4. 

Inflection of words, 29- 135. 

Interjection, 29 2. — how used, 
229. 

Interrogation, 27. 

Interrogative, Pronoun, 68. — 
dialects of, 68. N. — pro- 
nominal adjectives, 73. 1. — 
adverbs, 123, — how used, 
147. 

Intransitive, see Verbs. 

Iota Subscript, 3. I. 

Irregular Construction, 230. 
K. 

Koppa, l.N. 3. 
L. 

Labials, 6. — before linguals, 
7. — before ^u and a, 8. 

Leading, see Primary Tenses. 

Letters'^and Syllables, 1-23. 

Linguals, 6. — before fj, a, and 
before palatals and other 
linguals, 10. 

Liquids, 5. 1. 



ENGLISH INDEX. 



281 



M. 

Metathesis, 2G. 2. 

Middle Mutes, 5. 3. 

Middle Voice, 74. 1. — tenses 
of, 113-115. — how used, 
207. — as active, 207. N. 4, 
5. — as passive, 207. N. 6, 7. 

Moods, 74. 2. — terminations 
and connecting vowels of, 
84 - 90. — how used, 
213-221. 

Movable, see Consonants. 

Monosyllables, 16. 2. 
N. 

National Appellatives, 127. 3. 

Negative, Particles, 224. — 
. formulas, 224. N. 1,2, 3. — 
two negatives, 225. 

Neuter, 30. 2. — has three 
cases alike, 30. N. 1. — ad- 
jectives with the article, 13S. 
2. — plural with a sing, verb, 
157. 2. — adjective in the 
predicate, 160. N. 1, 2. 

Nominative, 30. 4. — sing, of 
the third declension, 36. — 
how used, 157. — for the 
voc, 157. N. 11. — without 
a verb, 230. I. 

Noun, 30. — indeclinable, 45. — 
anomalous, 46.-defective, 47. 

Numbers, 29. 3. — commuta- 
tion of, 137. N. 6, 7, 8: 
157. N. 4. 

Numerals, Marks of, 1. N. 3, 
5, 6. — cardinal, 60. — or- 
dinal, 61. — substantives, 
adjectives, and adverbs, 02. 
O. 

Object, 162. — immediate, 163. 

Optative, 74. 2. — terminations 
and connecting vowels of, 
87. — periphrastic perf., 87. 
N. 1.— perf pass., 91. 3, 5. 
— of verbs in p, 117. 5, 6. 



— of verbs in vfn, 11 7. N. 7. 

— how used, 216: 217.— 
after particles, 216. 1. — 
after interrogative and rela- 
tive words, 216. 2. — after 
the past tenses, 216. 3, 4. — 
after the present or future, 
216. N. 1,2 — expresses a 
wish, 217. 1, N. 1. — in in- 
dependent propositions, 217. 
2. — for the ind., 217. 3.— 
for the imperat., 217. 4. 

Oxytone, 19. 2. 

P. 
Palatals, 6. — before linguals, 

7. — before ^ and o, 9. 
Parenthesis, Marks of, 27. 
Participle, formation of, 90. — ■ 

of verbs in jui, 117. 10, 11. 

— with the article, 140. 3, 
N. 3. — followed by the case 
of its verb, 162. 2. — how 
used, 222. — with verbs sig- 
nifying to know, S^c. 222. 2, 
N. \. — to endure, ^-c. 222. 
3. — with 8u/.yiy>oy.(xL, x. t. h 
222. 4. — with f^o», a. t. A. 
222. N. 2. — fut., 222. 5. — 
pres., 222. N. 3. — with ad- 
verb?, 222. N. 4. — with «V, 
222. 6. 

Parts of Speech, declinable, 
29. 1. —indeclinable, 29. 2. 

Passive Voice, 74. 1. — tenses 
of, 106- 1 12. — how used, 
206. — subject of, 206. 1, 2. 
N. 1. — retains the latter 
case, 206. 3. — as middle, 
206. N. 2. 

Patronymics, 127. 1. 

Penult, 16. 3. 

Perfect, 74. 3. — augment of, 
76. — syncopated, 91. N. 6, 
7,8, 9.— formation of, 98: 
99: 107: 113. — how used. 



282 



ENGLISH INDEX. 



209. 2. — as pres., 209. N. 
4. — expresses a customary 
action, 209. N. 5. — for the 
fut., 209. N. 6. — imperat., 
209. N. 7, 8. 

Period, 27. 

Perispomenon, 19. 3. 

Person, 74. 4. 

Personal Pronoun, 64. — dia- 
lects of, 64. N. 2 . — how 
used, 143: 144. — of the 
third person, 143. N. 1, 2 

— repeated, 143. N. 3. — 
ifiov and fzov, 143. N. 4. 

Pluperfect, 74. 3. — augment 
of, 77. — in sa, 85. N. 4. — 
passive, 91. 1. — syncopated, 
91. N. 6, 7, 8. — formation 
of, 100: 101: 108: 113.— 
how used, 209. 4. — as im- 
perf 209. N. 4, 9. — asaor., 
209, N 9. 

Polysyllables, 16. 2. 

Possessive Pronoun, 67. — dia- 
lects of, 67. N. 1. — how 
used, 146. — used objective- 
ly, 146. N. 1. — third pers. 
of, 146. N. 2, 3. 

Predicate, 156: 160. — noun 
in, 160.2, 3. 

Preposition, 29. 2. — how used, 
226 : 227. — primitive, 226. 
1. — after the noun, 226. N. 
1.— for Hfxl, 226. N. 2. 

— separated by tmesis, 226. 
N. 3, 4, 5. — in composition, 
135. 3, N. 6, 7, 8. — with 
ace, 172. — with gen., 194. 

— with dat., 203. 
Present, 74. 3. — formation of, 

94 - 96. — simple or original, 
96. — how used, 209. 1.— 
for the aor., 209. N. I. — for 
the perf, 209. N. 2. — for 
the fut., 209. N. 3. 



[Primary or Leading Tenses, 
I 74. 3 — terminations of, 

84. 1. 
Privative a, 135. 4. 
Pronominal Adjectives, 73. 
Pronoun, 64 - 72. — how used, 

143-155. 
Pronunciation, 28. — Modern 

Greek, 28. 2. 
Proparoxytone, 19. 2. 
Protasis, 213. R. 
Punctuation Marks, 27. 
Pure Syllable, 16. 4. 

a. 

Quantity, 17 : 18. — of «, i, v, 
17. N. 3. — Marks of, 2:27: 

— of the first declension, 31. 
N. I. — of the second de- 
clension, 33. N. 2. — of the 
third declension, 35. N. 1 : 
36. N. 5. 

R. 

Reciprocal Pronoun, 72. — 
how used, 155. — for the re- 
flexive, 155. N. 

Reduplication, 76. 1. — of the 
2 aor., 78. N. 2. — Attic,81. 

Reflexive Pronoun, 66. — dia- 
lects of, 66. N. 4, 5. — how 
used, 145. — of the third 
person, 145. N. 1. — for the 
reciprocal, 145. N. 2. 

Relative Pronoun, 71. — dia- 
lects of, 71. N. 1. — how 
used, 150 - 154. — referring 
to two or more nouns, 150. 
2. — referring to a collective 
noun, 150. 3. — before its 
antecedent, 150.4: 151.3. 

— refers to an omitted ante- 
cedent, 150. 5. — refers to a 
possessive pronoun, 150. N. 
7. — attracted, 151. 1. — 
attracts its antecedent, 151. 
2. — as demonstrative, 152. 



ENGLISH INDEX. 



283 



— as interrogative, 153. ~ 
for tVa, 154. — verb of, 157. 
N. 6. 

Relative Adverb, 123. — be- 
fore its antecedent, 150. N. 
6. — attracted, 1 5 1 . N. 2. — 
attracts its antecedent, 151. 
N. 3. — as demonstrative, 
152. N. 2. 

Root, of nouns of the third 
declension, 36. R. 1. — of 
verbs and tenses, 83. 



tive words, 214. 2, 4. — after 
pres. or fut., 214. 3. — after 
past tenses, 214. N. 1. — in 
exhortations, 215. — for the 
fut. ind.,215. N. 3. — in pro- 
hibitions, 215. 5. 

Substantive, 30. 1. — deriva- 
tion of, 127- 129. — in ap- 
position, 136. — as an adjec- 
tive, 136. N. 3. 

Syllables, 16. 

Syncope, 26. 1. 



Rough Consonants, 5. 3. — in Synecdochical, see Accusative. 

two successive syllables, 14. Synecphonesis or Synizesis, 

3, N. 2, 3, 4. — not doubled, 23. N. 2. 

14. 4. Syntax, 136-232. 

S. T. 

San or Sampi, 1. N. 3. Tenses, 74. 3. — root of, 83. 2. 

Secondary or Historical Tens- — terminations of, 84. — 

es, 74. 3. — terminations of, how used, 209- 212. 

84.2. i Thesis, 233.2. "^ - 

Second Declension, endings of. Third Declension, endings of, 

33. 1. — gender of, 33. 2. — | 35. 1. — gender of, 35.2.— 

quantity of, 33. N. 2 ac- quantity of, 35. N. 1. — ac- 



cent of, 35. N. 2. — dialects 
of, 35. N. 3. — formation of 
the cases of, 36 -39. — syn- 
copated nouns of, 40. — con- 
tracts of. 42-44. 



cent of, 33. N. 3. — dialects 

of, 33. N. 4. — contracts of,! 

34. '[ 

Smooth Breathing, see Breath-' 

ings. j 

SmoothConsonants,5. 3. — be- Tmesis, 226. N. 3, 4, 5. 

fore the rough breathing, 14. Trochaic Verse, 237 - 239. 

1,2. I V. 

Subject, 156-159. — of a fi- Vau, 1. N. 3. 

nite verb, 157. — omitted, Verbal Roots and Termina- 

157. N.8.— of the inf., 158. 1 tions, 83-92 

— of impersonal verbs, 159. Verb, 74- 118. — accent of, 



N. 1,2 

Subjunctive, 74. 2. — termina- 
tions and connecting vowels 
of, 86. — periphrastic perf , 
86. N. 1.— perf pass., 91. 
3, 4. — of verbs in fn, 1 17: 4, 
N. 4. — how used, 214 : 215. 
— after particles, 214. 2. — 
after interrosrative and rela- 



93. — division of, 94. 2. -^ 
penult of pure, 95. — con- 
tract, 116. — in lAi, 117. — 
anomalous, 118. — subject 
of a finite, 157. — transitive 
and intransitive, 205. 1. — 
causative, 205. 2. — passive, 
206. — middle, 207. — de- 
ponent, 208. 



2S4 



ENGLISH INDEX. 



Verse, final syllable of, 236. 
Versification, 233-255. 
Vocative, 30. 4. — of the first 

declension, 31. 4. — of the 

third declension, 38. — how 

used, 204. 
Voices, 74. 1. — how used, 

205-208. 



Vowels, 1. 2:2 — doubtful,2. 
N. I, R. — commutation of, 
2. N. 3. — short, before a 
mute and liquid, 17. 3. — 
long made short and vice ver- 
sa, 18. — connecting, 85. 1. 
Z. 

Zeugma, 231. 



ABBREVIATIONS, 



ou 


at 


a 


Ini 


<3- 


(7^ 


^Jtz) 


duo 


<^ 


*i 


^ 


ad^ai 


cw 


av 


jj 


tv 


or 


aa 


•p 


ydg 


luj 


rjv 


? 


dT 


oT 


77 


'^' 


y,OLi 


% 


^X 


# 


y^v 


t \ 




3 


JUL 


oi 


79 


rK 


XI 


&" 


TUV 





Si 


/* 


usv 


r 


T7/V 


Ji 


8i 


©^ 


OS 


^ 


T^g 


24* 


dia 


» 


ov 


IP 


TO 


;i 




^ 


t nsgi 


^ 


rod 


SL 


^ 


ga 


r 


zav 


> 


7 

fX 


e/ 


gt 


tw 


vv 


(*» 


iv 


& 


go 


15SJZ) 


VTtO 



SOPHOCLES' AND FELTON'S 

SERIES OF GREEK TEXT BOOKS 

H. HUNTINGTON, 
ISOiHain street, fjartforlr, 

Has recently published tlie following -worlcs, introductory to the 

STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 



I. A GREEK GRAMMAR FOR THE USE OF 
LEARNERS. By E. A. Sophocles, a. m., author 
of ^^ Greek Lessons.''^ Seventh edition, pp. 284. 12mo. 

* * * The parts seem well suited, in respect to length, to each 
other, and there is a decided spirit of unity pervading the work. 
In the first place, I was struck with the happy manner in which 
the laws of euphony are laid down, by which so many seeming 
anomalies are explained. In the second part, the tables of 
anomalies are excellent; and those of second aorists and second 
perfects, appear in a Grammar, I believe, for the first time. 

The Syntax, too, is equally happy, and the author's transla- 
tions of the examples under the rules, are as good as any I have 
ever seen. On the whole, I know of no elementary Grammar 
which fulfils the demands which are made by the present state 
of this science, more completely than that of Mr. Sophocles. — 
T. D. WooLSEY, Professor of Greek in Yale College. 

The merits of Mr. Sophocles' Greek Grammar have come to 
be well understood ; and it is gradually passing into general 
use in our schools and academies. The clearness and condens- 
ation, which are its marked characteristics, will strongly recom- 
mend it to instructers. Mr. Sophocles is well known as a gen- 
tleman of extraordinary attainments in Greek literature, and of 
a clear and logical mind. The fact of his being a native Greek, 
added to his familiar acquaintance, from long and laborious 
I 



2 Sophocles' and felton's 

study, with the ancient classics, gives him a great advantage 
over the authors of most of our grammars; an advantage that 
will be more highly appreciated, the more the modern Greek is 
studied in connection with its ancient mother. To such a man, 
the Greek is far from being a dead language. In his mind, its 
words excite the Kving images of country and of home, the sen- 
timents belonging to his nationality, the feelings native to his 
heart. Many a delicacy of expression, many a refinement of 
construction, must be perceptible to him, that escapes the notice 
of the learned Hellenists of other nations. And when he com- 
poses a grammar of the ancient language of his country, he 
does it not from books alone ; but he writes with the conscious- 
ness of "inward Hellenism," and with a confidence and clear- 
ness that no other can. 

The first edition of this Grammar was noticed in a former 
number of this Journal. The second edition contains many im- 
provements upon that; some important additions; some in- 
stances of filling out the forms more completely than before. 
The rules of the Syntax are worded with admirable precision ; 
and the examples to illustrate them are taken from the best 
authors. We have no hesitation in saying, that, for thorough- 
ness and completeness, for lucid order and terseness of expres- 
sion, this Grammar is unsurpassed by any in the English lan- 
guage ; and we hope, for the sake of classical learning in the 
country, that it will come into extensive use. — Second notice by 
North American Review, July, 1840. 

It is a work of great original research, eminently fraught with 
learning, and generally arranged with skill. I shall not fail to 
commend it to the use of my pupils ; and I do not hesitate to 
recommend it for general use. I am particularly pleased with 
the copiousness and pertinence of its exam.ples, and its very 
full enumeration of exceptions. Mr. Sophocles' manner of pre- 
senting the second aorist and the second future, is far more sat- 
isfactory to me than the usual way. The Syntax is at once 
simple and philosophical ; and the whole work is constructed on 
that happy medium which makes it an invaluable book of refer- 
ence for the advanced scholar, and, at the same time, a simple 
and easy introduction for the beginner. — W. S. Tyler, Pro- 
fessor of Greek in Amherst College. 



GREEK TEXT BOOKS. d 

I have examined, with some attention, the grammar prepared 
by Mr. Sophocles. It appears to be a work of great care and 
research. The author has spared no pains to make the work 
perfect, and if he has not reached entirely the point at which he 
aimed, he has succeeded in supplying us with a work better 
adapted to the wants of the community than any of its predeces- 
sors. With the laws of euphony, and the tables of anomalies, 
and of the second perfect and second aorist, I am well pleased. 
The Syntax is full, simple, and well arranged. I consider the 
chapter on versification, though brief, valuable. I have no hesi- 
tation in recommending it to general use. — Asa Drury, Pro- 
fessor of Gresk in Waterville College. 

The editor has generally referred, in his notes, to the Greek 
Grammar of Mr. Sophocles, because he is satisfied that it is the 
Grammar best adapted to the wants of American classical 
schools. The clearness and precision of the rules, the excel- 
lence of the arrangement, and the felicitous selection of exam- 
ples, place that work at the head of the numerous elementary 
Grammars of the Greek language, that are at present used in 
the United States. Mr. Sophocles has that accurate knowledge 
of all the niceties of the Greek language, which can hardly be 
expected of any other than a native Greek ; and without dispar- 
agement 10 the valuable labors of other able scholars in this de- 
partment, the preference is justly to be awarded to him. — Ex- 
tract from Professor Felton's preface to the Greek Reader. 

Sophocles' Greek Grammar. — A second edition of this 
Grammar, in a beautiful style of typography, has appeared from 
the University Press at Cambridge, Mass. We have already 
called the attention of teachers and students to the work. Its 
value has become widely known, and it has been adopted as a 
text book at Yale and Harvard, and in many of our best classi- 
cal schools. — Philadelphia North American. 

I have no hesitation in recommending Sophocles' Greek 
Grammar to the notice of classical teachers. Indeed, the fact 
of its having reached its third edition in so short a time from its 
first publication, is a proof that its merits are already apprecia- 
ted, — S. ToTTEN, D. D., President of Washington College. 



SOPHOCLES' 



II. GREEK LESSONS, adapted to the author's Greek 
Grammar. For the use of beginners. By E. A. 
Sophocles, a. m., author of a " Greek Grammar ^'^ 
'^ Greek Exercises, with a Ke7/.'^ ]8mo. pp. 116. This 
work is designed by the author to take tlie place of 
the First Lessons in Greek, by the same author. 

This is a useful work for beginners in the Greek Grammar, 
It contains a series of well selected sentences to illustrate the 
grammatical forms, followed by brief notes, and a vocabulary 
of the words used. The arrangement is judicious, and the book 
is marked by the author's usual precision, terseness and skilL 
— North American Review., April, 1843. 



III. A GREEK READER FOR THE USE OF 
SCHOOLS : containing selections in Prose and Po- 
etry, with English notes and a Lexicon: adapted par- 
ticularly to the Greek Grammar of E. A. Sophocles, 
A. M., by C. C. Felton, a. m., Eliot Professor of Greek 
Literature in Harvard University. pp. 422. 12mo. 
2d edition. Stereotyped. 
The text of the second edition of the Greek Reader has 
been revised, and broken into shorter paragraphs. No al- 
teration has been made, except to change the arrangement 
so far as to bring the extract from Herodotus directly be- 
fore that from Homer ; and nothing has been added except 
a selection of one page from the Greek epigrams. The 
notes have been corrected and enlarged, and the deficien- 
cies of the Lexicon have been carefully supplied, so far as 
known, both with regard to the words and definitions. 

This work, from the hands of one of the most distinguished 
Greek scholars in the United States, has just issued from the 
press. The publisher had already, within a year or two, offered 
to the public two of the very best elementary books on the Greek 



GREEK TEXT BOOKS. D 

language which have ever appeared, either in this or in any- 
other country. We allude to the Greek Grammar, and First 
Lessons in Greek, by E. A. Sophocles. In publishing the pres- 
ent work, he has rendered the cause of Greek learning another 
very essential service. It is such a work as might have been 
expected from a gentleman of the taste and scholarship which 
distinguish Professor Felton ; containing some of the choicest 
selections I'rom the choicest portions of Greek literature. The 
fables of ^sop will interest the young learner by their pointed 
wit ; the dialogues of Lucian, by their satire and humor ; the se- 
lections from Xenophon will engage his attention by the simpli- 
city and elegance of their style; Herodotus and Thucydides 
will afford him a refreshing draught at the very fountain of 
historical knowledge ; the odes of Anacreon will amuse him by 
their light and playful fancy ; while the extracts from Euripides 
and Aristophanes will serve to give him a taste of the Grecian 
drama, and awaken a desire for a more perfect acquaintance 
with its peculiar character. 

The extracts from the different authors are neither so long, on 
the one hand, as to weary the learner with too much of the same 
thing, nor, on the other, so short as to fail of interesting, by hur- 
rying from author to author, without giving him more than a 
glimpse of any one in particular. Professor Felton has not 
hashed up ^sop, and Lucian, and Herodotus, and Xenophon, 
and Anacreon, and presented them to the student in the form of 
viiiice raeat, but he has given enough of each author to initiate 
the learner into his peculiar manner and style. Not only so, 
but he presents him with something from each of the different 
departments of Greek literature— fable, history, dialogue, ora- 
tory, and poetry in its different forms of the ode, the epic, and 
the drama. 

The notes to each author are prefaced with a brief account of 
his life, so much of it as it becomes the student to be acquainted 
with before commencing the study of his works ; and instead of 
being written in the Latin tongue, as such notes used to be, 
they are, together with the Lexicon, written in good plain 
English. 

On the whole, the work cannot fail of being pronounced, by 
good judges, an admirable introduction to the study of the Greek 
writers, adapted to an admirable Greek Grammar, and in the 

1* 



6 SOPHOCLEs' AND FELTOn's 

hands of apt teachers and learners, it cannot fail to contribute 
to the formation of admirable scholars in that most perfect of all 
the infinitely diversified modes of human speech — the Ancient 
Greek. — Congregationalist. 

The work which lies before us, and which has called forth 
these remarks, is a new selection of extracts from the most cele- 
brated Greek writers, by Professor Felton, entirely different, as 
regards the passages selected, from any heretofore known on 
this side the Atlantic, and varying somewhat, although slightly, 
in its plan, from those in general use. 

We will premise that the Greek type is excellent, and al- 
though of rather a small face, singularly distinct, clear, and 
legible. The fables selected from j:Esop are the best and most 
elegant of his beautiful collection ; nor do we at all think the 
editor has inserted too many. With regard to his next author, 
Lucian, we cannot go quite so far; notwithstanding his popu- 
larity with the young, and the general accuracy of his style, 
yet he is not a favorite of ours, nor ever has been. 

With Professor Felton's extracts from Xenophon, that purest 
and most entertaining of all ancient writers, we are dehghted. 
He has done well in not limiting his selections to the Cyropee- 
dia, the least able and least interesting of all his works ; and he 
has done well in giving place to the beautiful episode of Abra- 
dates and Panthea, instead of the usually extracted puerihties 
about the wondrously loquacious childhood of the Persian prince. 
From the Anabasis, also, the very best of the whole, in our esti- 
mation, has been culled out, the spirited and graphic second, 
which, with all the authenticity of the gravest history, blends all 
the interest of the wildest fiction, commencing with the desper- 
ate situation of the Greeks after the battle of Cynaxa, and the 
death of Cyrus, and ending with the characters of the five 
Greek commanders taken off by the base treachery of Tissa- 
phernes, the portraits of Clearchus, of Menon, being the master- 
pieces of that age, the models of all later eras, as specimens of 
historical portrait painting. From the Hellenics, we have the 
stirring tale of Thrasybulus when he sat " sublime on Phyle's 
brow," and how he conquered the oppressive thirty. These 
three selections give a very complete specimen of all the vari- 



GREEK TEXT BOOKS. 7 

ous powers and various beauties of this accomplished general 
and statesman, and philosopher, and author. A portion of the 
Sicihan expedition has been chosen, and that we think with 
judgment, from Thucydides. A single long extract from Herod- 
otus, and a part of the superb funeral oration of Lysias, com- 
plete the prose selections, which we have no hesitation in pro- 
nouncing, as vastly superior to the collection in Jacob's, or any 
other Greek reader we have seen. In the omission of Plutarch, 
we agree generally with Mr. Felton. In his preference of the 
Anabasis and Hellenica to the mere Cyropeedia, we are quite 
with him. We prefer his passage of Thucydides to those in 
common use, the Plague and the Speech of Pericles, which are 
too difficalt for any youthful readers ; and we greatly applaud 
his admission of a specimen of Greek oratory to this goodly array 
of sages and historians. 

It is, however, in his poetical selections, that Professor Felton 
has differed the most widely from former selectors, and done 
himself most honor in the difference. He has here shown that 
he is not a mere book-worm, a decliner of nouns and conjuga- 
tor of verbs, but a man of taste and fancy, of a spirit thoroughly 
imbued with the spirit of old classic poetry — who, if he has 
neither " steeped his lips in the fountain of the horse, nor slum- 
bered on the twain-topped Parnassus," has, at least, bathed his 
soul in the rich streams that have flowed thence, and risen from 
his bath full of high tastes and glorious sentiments, and keen 
appreciations of all beauty caught from the godlike contact. 

He commences with a selection from the Odyssey — Ulysses 
and Polyphemus— a beautiful one, it is true ; but why from the 
Odyssey, Professor Felton ? Why not from the great glowing 
Ilhad, so singularly set aside by all compilers of Greek Read- 
ers ? Then w^e have some sweet odes of Anacreon and Sap- 
pho's Venus ; then that most lovely lyric of all ages, the Danae 
and Perseus of Simonides, the untranslated, untranslatable, 
though hundreds have tried their hands at it ; and then the 
magnificent war-song of Callistratus, " In a myrtle branch my 
sword will I bear." After these, we have a long extract from 
the Hecuba of Euripides, the noblest, in our estimation, of all 
his lyrics, with the one exception of that in the Iphigenia at 
Aulis, which we wish he could have found room to insert; 
another from the Orestes of the same author, highly character- 



8 



AND FELTON S 



istic of the poet, and of considerable intrinsic value. A portion 
of the Piutus of Aristophanes follows. 

The notes which follow are chieflj^ distinguished by a brief 
preamble to each extract, giving a slight notice of the writer's 
life, character, and style ; and discussing shortly, but with a 
master's hand, the characteristic beauties or peculiarities of his 
composition and manner. Several of these preambles possess 
a very high degree of excellence in a literary point of view; 
are themselves not only very instructive, but full of feeling and 
poetry, and evince clearly how much the mind of the editor was 
with his subject. — New York Qucu-te.rly Review. 

One little volume which finds its way into the list at the head 
of this article, may perhaps be specially singled out, as it does 
not fall into the same class with the rest. This is Felton's Greek 
Reader, which is one of the best and completest school books 
we have ever seen, containing in one short volume a course of 
reading, in prose and verse, from yEsop and Anacreon, to Thu- 
cydides and Aristophanes. Like the editions we have just de- 
scribed, it is illustrated by notes and historical explanations, 
and concludes with a Lexicon of all the words, so that the stu- 
dent may use it with no other book but liis grammar. It resem- 
bles the collection of Professor Dalzell, being at the same time 
more condensed in form. We recommend it to the considera- 
tion of our own school authorities, only counselling them to take 
advice with Prof Felton himself, and re-print it honestly, if they 
re-print it at all. — Lojidon Examiner. 



IV. GREEK EXERCISES AND KEY, with an Eng- 
lish and Greek Vocabulary, adapted to Sophocles' Greek 
Grammar, pp. 195, 12mo. By E. A. Sophocles, A. M. 
author of " Greek Grammar" and " Greek Lessons. ^^ 
Second edition. Stereotyped. 

The design of the present work is to furnish the learner with 
a series of exercises adapted to the rules of the Author's Greek 
Grammar. Grammatical rules can be perfectly understood and 
fixed in the memory only by means of such exercises. Mere 



GREEK TEXT BOOKS. » 

translation will never form accomplished scholars in any lan- 
guage. In order to become well acquainted with the structure 
of a language, we must practice writing it. This work affords 
the learner important facilities in his first attempts to write the 
Greek. It presents him with a series of exercises grammatically 
arranged, and a vocabulary, in which he can readily find the 
words to be employed. A Vocabulary like this, in English and 
Greek, we do not recollect to have seen annexed to any similar 
work. A part of the edition, we observe, contains a Key for the 
use of instructors, which will doubtless serve greatly to facilitate 
and lighten their labor. —Connecticut Courant. 

New School Book. — In another column will be found an 
advertisement of the excellent school-books introductory to the 
study of the Greek language by Messrs. Sophocles and Felton. 
Of these works we have already spoken, excepting the " Greek 
Exercises" by Mr. Sophocles, which has just been issued from 
the press. This appears to us to form a very valuable addition 
to the list. It differs from other books of Latin and Greek Ex- 
ercises, in at least one important respect, viz., that after a suffi- 
cient series of exercises in which the wards are given, the pupil 
is left to select the words, as well as to inflect and arrange them 
properly. To furnish the means of doing this, an English-Greek 
vocabulary is subjoined to the exercises ; and this part of the 
volume will be highly valued, as it supplies a want which has 
long been felt, and as it has been prepared by a scholar who, in 
fitness for such a task, has no superior in our country. We 
commend the " Greek Exercises" to the notice of instructors. — 
Philadelphia North American. 

Extracts from Letters written to the Publisher by Professors Sturges and Butler. 

Hanover College, Hanover Indiana, August 9th. 
Mr. H. Huntington, 

Dear Sir : — Subsequent and more thorough examination of 
Felton and Sophocles' series of Greek books has only confirmed 
my opinion of their very great merit. I hope Mr. S. will fulfil 
his design of enlarging his First Lessons, at least by adding 
more reading matter, so as to make a more complete introduc- 
tion to the Reader; in other respects, it seems excellent. I am 
not sure but the Exercises, (which has lately fallen into my 
hands,) is the best of the set, however; it is certainly an im- 
mense improvement on all preceding works. The rules and 



10 SOPJIOCLES' AND FELTOn's 

examples in the first part are far superior to any to be met with 
elsewhere, and the admirable praxis in Greek composition and 
vocabulary are novelties in a work of this kind. Certainly no 
reason can be assigned why composi/ion should not be tried in 
the Greek language as well as in the Latin, in which its utility 
is acknowledged by all. In short, these works must be ranked 
with the Latin series of Prof Andrews, (no mean praise) and 
will certainly mark an era in Greek study in this country, as 
those have done in Latin. Yours truly, 

M. STURGES, 



Louisville, July 10th. 
Mr. Huntington : 

Prof Sturges has requested me to give my opinion of the 
series of Greek books which you have published. I do this with 
the greatest pleasure, as I consider these books as forming the 
best introduction I have ever seen, to that noble language. I 
think improvements maybe made in the " First Lessons" and 
the Lexicon is defective. The best evidence of my good opin- 
ion is, that I intend to introduce them among my students. 

NOBLE BUTLER, 
Prof of Languages, Louisville College, Kentucky. 

IN PRESS, 

And will be published about the 1st of October, in one volume, 8vo. 

A COMPLETE 

GREEK AND ENGLISH LEXICON, 

OF THE POEMS OF 

HOMER AND THE HOMERID.^.. 

Composed with constant reference to the illustration of the 
domestic, religious, political and military condition of 
the Heroic age, and containing an explanation of the 
difficult passages, and of all mythological and geographi- 
cal proper names. 

From the German of 

G. C H. CRU SIU S. 

TRANSLATED AND REVISED 

BY HENRY SMITH, 
Professor of Greek in Marietta College. 



f,REEK TEXT BOOKS. 



11 



The following extracts from Letters to Prof. Smith show the estimation in which 
the Lexicon of Crusius is held by Prof. VVoolsey of Yale College, Prof, Felton of 
Harvard, and Mr. Sophocles. 

New Haven, April 7th, 1841. 
Prof. Henry Smith, 

Dear Sir:— You did me yesterday the favor to leave with me, for exami- 
nation, the Homeric Lexicon of Crusius, and your translation of the 
same, which you stated to be only the first copy and to need revision 
before it should be put to the press. As far as time allowed me, I exam- 
ined Crusius, selecting such words, as, owing to their importance ortheir 
difiiculty, would test the manner in which he has executed his task. So 
far as I am able to judge, he has made a good school Lexicon, fitted for 
practical purposes ; — on the one hand, possessing that brevity which a 
school Lexicon needs; and on the other, entering into the interpretation 
of all the dilficult places in the Homeric poems, and when the best schol- 
ars differ in theirexplanationsof a passage, not omitting any explanation 
which is at all tenable. I think, therefore, that it will be useful and 
desirable to bring this Lexicon before the American public, and that the 
bookseller who should undertake it, would probably meet with encoura- 
ging sales in many of our Colleges and higher schools. 

I have examined your translation of the preface and of parts of the 
Lexicon in the letters A and E, and think it fortunate that this task is 
undertaken by one who seems to have so good a knowledge of German, 
and to have the power of putting the German into appropriate English, 

In conclusion, I express the hope that you will go forward and print 
this work. If any should object to a Lexicon for a particular author, 
they should recollect that there is no accessible Lexicon from which our 
young students can draw sure and full information about the words in 
Homer ; and the Epic style being as distinct from that of Attic prose, 
or even of Attic poetry, as the style of Chaucer from that of our time, 
certainly has some good claim to be treated as a separate dialect. With 
this Lexicon and the simple text, the student may supersede the use of 
commentaries. In the Odyssey, which we now study in this College, 
such a Lexicon would be particularly valuable, because there is no com- 
mentary with which the student can provide himself, 

I am. Dear Sir, truly Yours, 

THEODORE D. WOOLSEY. 



12 GREEK TEXT BOOKS. 



Prof. Smith, Cambridge, April 10th, 1841. 

Dear Sir: — I have examined your manuscript translation of the Ho- 
meric Lexicon by Crusius, wiih as much attention as the short time I 
have had it in my hands allowed. The original work was an invaluable 
contribution to the resources of classical students who were acquainted 
with the German language. Mr, Crusius is distinguished for his philo- 
logical attainments, and particularly for his profound knowledge of the 
Homeric poetry, as his elaborate edition of the Odyssey, published in 
1837-39, abundantly manifests. 

Your translation of the Homeric Lexicon, I am confident, will be a 
most acceptable work to the classical scholars of the "United StateS: It 
will render very important aid, both to teachers and pupils, in the study 
of these great poems which have exercised so wonderful an influence upon 
the minds and hearts of men, and which continue to form the tastes and 
warm the imaginations of the young in the present age as they did in 
Athens twenty-five centuries ago. 

I have compared as many articles as the time permitted, with the 
original, and I do not hesitate to say, that in my opinion you have been 
singularly successful in translating the German into felicitous English. 
You will certainly be entitled to the thanks of the literary public for hav- 
ing accomplished so well a most difficult and laborious as well as impor- 
tant undertaking. ^* 

I hope your work will be pubhshed in such a form as its high characVer 
deserves. There is no doubt in my mind that ii will at once take its 
place among the most useful and distinguished classical works that have 
appeared in the United States. With great respect, Yours, 

C. C. FELTON. 

I fully agree with Prof Felton's opinion of the merits of the Homeric 
Lexicon of Crusius, and of the importance of the publication of Prof. 
Smith's translation to the American student of Homer. 

E. A. SOPHOCLES. 



H. HUNTINGTON, 

No. 180 Main Street, Hartford, \ ,"* 

Has a general assortment of the most approved editionss^ 
of Classical and School Books. 



